Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Mind
Parenting and Theory
of Mind
SCOTT A . M I LLER
University of Florida
1
1
Oxford University Press is a department of the University of Oxford. It furthers
the University’s objective of excellence in research, scholarship, and education
by publishing worldwide.Oxford is a registered trade mark of Oxford University
Press in the UK and certain other countries.
1 3 5 7 9 8 6 4 2
Printed by Sheridan, USA
To Sylvia, Brielle, Tavio, and Ronan
CONTENTS
Acknowledgments xiii
1. Introduction 1
2. Theory of Mind 7
A LITTLE HISTORY 7
FALSE BELIEF 9
Task Modifications 10
Research with Infants 13
OTHER EPISTEMIC MEASURES 16
Origins of Knowledge 16
Appearance–Reality and Level 2 Perspective Taking 17
OTHER MENTAL STATES 18
Desire 19
Emotion 21
RELATIONS AMONG DEVELOPMENTS 23
LATER DEVELOPMENTS 25
Second-Order False Belief 25
Interpretive Diversity 26
Understanding of Nonliteral Utterances 29
AUTISM 31
ANTECEDENTS AND CONSEQUENCES 32
Some Preliminary Points 32
Antecedents of Theory of Mind 33
Consequences of Theory of Mind 35
vii
viii Contents
3. Parenting 41
METHODOLOGICAL CHALLENGES 42
Measuring What Parents Do 42
Measuring Child Outcomes 49
Determining Causality 49
HISTORICAL CHANGES IN RESEARCH ON PARENTING 53
Guiding Theories 53
Increased Cognitive Emphasis 54
Increased Emphasis on Socialization Agents Other
Than the Mother 56
Increased Emphasis on Children’s Effects on Parents 57
Increased Emphasis on Genetics 57
Increased Emphasis on Context 58
CONCLUSIONS ABOUT PARENTING 58
Parenting Styles 58
Variations Across Groups 61
Mothers and Fathers 63
Boys and Girls 65
Parents and Peers 67
Children’s Effects on Parents 69
Domains of Socialization 71
Return to Practices 73
5. Attachment 109
References 279
Author Index 325
Subject Index 337
ACK NOW L EDG M EN TS
I am grateful to many people for various kinds of help during the writing of this
book. General support was provided by the Department of Psychology, University
of Florida. Several colleagues to whom I wrote were kind enough to share unpub-
lished materials or to clarify aspects of their work: Nancy Eisenberg, Elizabeth
Meins, Veronica Ornaghi, and Manuel Sprung. The book benefitted greatly
from the advice offered by reviewers of the prepublication version: Janet Wilde
Astington (University of Toronto), Eric Charles (American University), Martin
Doherty (University of East Anglia), Derek Montgomery (Bradley University),
and one reviewer who wished to remain anonymous. Finally, I am grateful
for the excellent help and support provided by the editorial team at Oxford
University Press: Andrea Zekus (quite possibly the best of the many good editors
with whom I have been lucky enough to work), Emily Perry, Andrea Guinn, and
Susan E. Hannan.
xiii
Parenting and Theory of Mind
1
Introduction
This book represents the conjunction of two of the major research literatures in
developmental psychology. One is longstanding. The question of how best to rear
children has been a central topic for psychology ever since psychology began to
develop as a science in the last half of the nineteenth century. It was, of course, a
central topic for every parent and every society for centuries before the birth of
psychology.
The other research literature is a good deal younger. Theory of mind has to do
with understanding of the mental world—what people (children in particular)
know or believe about mental phenomena such as beliefs, desires, and emotions.
Although there were some precursors in the first century or so of psychology as
a science—most notably, some of Piaget’s early studies (Piaget, 1926, 1928)—it
is only in the last 30 years that theory of mind has emerged as a distinct area of
study. Not only has it emerged; for some time now it has arguably been the most
popular topic in the study of cognitive development.
As I discuss more fully in Chapter 2, research on theory of mind addresses three
general questions. The first and most basic question is the descriptive one: What
develops with respect to understanding of the mental world and when do the vari-
ous forms of understanding emerge? The first wave of theory-of-m ind studies,
stemming from the seminal work by Premack and Woodruff (1978) and Wimmer
and Perner (1983), were directed primarily to such descriptive questions. Thirty
years of subsequent research have not resolved all of the descriptive issues, espe-
cially the question of when certain key abilities emerge; thus such research is still
very much an ongoing enterprise. We will see some examples in Chapter 2.
The descriptive picture is one basic question in the study of any aspect of cog-
nitive development. A second question concerns the consequences of children’s
newfound cognitive achievements—what can they now do that they could not do
before? The initial theory-of-m ind studies were soon joined, therefore, by research
on a second question: How does theory-of-m ind understanding relate to other
aspects of children’s development? As we will see, it turns out that theory of mind
relates to a wide variety of other important developments in both the social and
cognitive domains. Furthermore, in at least some instances theory of mind plays
1
2 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
a causal role with respect to these other achievements—t hat is, theory of mind
underlies and makes possible other developmental advances. There are, then,
two reasons for an interest in theory of mind: as an important aspect of cognitive
development in itself and as a contributor to other important developments.
The third general question is the topic of this book. It concerns theory of mind
not as a cause but as an outcome. Where do children’s theory-of-m ind abilities
come from? The general answer, of course, is the same answer that holds for every
aspect of development: They come from the interplay of the genes that children
are born with and the environments that they grow up in. Such a general answer
does not take us very far, however. A more specific answer requires delineat-
ing how these general contributors work—in particular (given our still limited
knowledge of genetics), how children’s experiences shape their development. This
is a question of theoretical importance; as we will see, a major contrast among
theories of theory of mind is in how they conceptualize the role of experience. It
is also a question of pragmatic importance; if we know the formative experiences
that underlie theory of mind, then we may be able to optimize this important
aspect of development for all children.
It is to the question of determinants of theory of mind that this book is directed.
As the title indicates, my focus is on one particular determinant: the contribution
of parents. It is, I will argue, a good time for a consideration of how parenting
relates to theory of mind. The last 15 or so years have seen a rapid expansion of
the literature on the social contributors to theory of mind, including hundreds
of studies directed to various aspects of parenting. On the one hand, these stud-
ies have made clear that parents can be important (although not, as we will see,
all-important) contributors to what their children understand about the mental
world, and one goal of this book is to summarize what we now know about parents’
contribution. On the other hand, few issues in psychology are ever completely
resolved, and this point applies with special force to questions of child rearing,
one of the most methodologically challenging topics in the field. A further goal,
therefore, is to identify areas in need of further study.
Although I hope to provide a fuller and more up-to-date treatment than previ-
ous attempts, I should note that this is not the first review of the parenting and
theory of mind literature. Among the helpful prior sources are Hughes (2011);
Hughes and Leekam (2004); Pavarini, de Holland Souza, and Hawk (2013);
Pillow (2012; and Symons (2004).
Organization of the Book
A consideration of how parenting relates to theory of mind requires some
prior consideration of the two components of this topic considered separately.
Chapter 2 therefore provides an overview of research on theory of mind. The
Introduction 3
Chapter 8 has to do with parents’ beliefs about their children. As we will see,
the main line of research under this heading overlaps with some of the work con-
sidered in earlier chapters—in particular, the topics of attachment and mental
state talk. It is, however, an important enough form of research to merit consider-
ation in its own right. Mind-mindedness refers to parents’ tendency to think about
and treat their children as psychological agents whose mental contents (beliefs,
desires, etc.) are important determinants of what they understand and what they
do. As we will see, relatively high levels of mind-m indedness relate positively to a
number of outcomes under the theory-of-m ind heading. Also considered are vari-
ous other approaches to parents’ beliefs and their effects.
All of the work considered in Chapters 4 through 8 is correlational; that is, it
measures and relates aspects of parenting and aspects of children’s development
but does not experimentally manipulate either component of the relation. Because
such research is correlational, it cannot establish cause-and-effect relations with
certainty. Experimental studies do not share this limitation, and such studies
therefore provide a valuable complement to the correlational approach. Such a
convergence of methods is a theme in the general parenting literature, in which
many topics (e.g., punishment, reasoning, modeling) have been examined both
correlationally and experimentally. To date, there have been only a handful of
studies that have experimentally manipulated parenting and examined children’s
theory of mind as the outcome. There are also, however, several indirect forms of
experimental evidence, and Chapter 9 reviews three such lines of research: train-
ing studies of theory of mind, microgenetic studies of theory of mind, and experi-
mental studies of children’s learning from adult conversational input.
The final chapter of the book is titled Conclusions. It has two general goals.
One is to bring together the major conclusions that emerge from the varied lines of
research reviewed in Chapters 4 through 9. The other is to identify gaps or uncer-
tainties in what this research shows and to suggest directions for future study.
As this overview indicates, my organization is in terms of approaches to par-
enting rather than individual studies. A complication that stems from this type of
organization is that many studies take more than one approach. A study might, for
example, examine both general parenting style and mental state talk, or it might
include measures of both attachment and mind-m indedness. For the most part,
I will discuss the components of such studies as they become relevant, which
means that some reports will make multiple appearances across different chap-
ters. An important question, however, will be how the different components fit
together and where the locus of causality lies when several aspects of parents’
behavior appear to affect children’s development. I will address this question in
various places as we go.
Introduction 5
Theory of Mind
I begin with a point about terminology. The term “theory of mind” is used in two
ways in the literature that I am about to discuss. One way is in reference to one of
the major theories of theory of mind: the so-called theory theory view. As I dis-
cuss more fully later in this chapter, the central premise of the theory theory view
is that understanding of the mind takes the form of an informal theory—a set of
interrelated constructs that possesses some although not all of the characteristics
of a formal scientific theory. Developmental change then consists of the progres-
sive modification of early, immature theories into more complex and more adap-
tive later ones. In this perspective, then, “theory of mind” is a substantive claim, a
claim about the nature of the underlying cognitive system.
Not all researchers of the topic subscribe to the theory theory view. Many,
however, do nevertheless use the term “theory of mind.” The second way in which
the term is used is simply as a general, theoretically neutral label for the content
area in question: that is, beliefs about the mental world. It is not the only such
label; among other terms that appear in the literature are “social understanding,”
“folk psychology,” “commonsense psychology,” and “mind reading.” “Theory of
mind,” however, is the most often used and familiar such label, and therefore the
one I use here. I use it in the second, purely descriptive sense.
A Little History
The study of theory of mind began with a chimpanzee. The chimpanzee was
named Sarah, a highly enculturated chimp who, at the time of the research, had
already been the subject of a number of language learning experiments. The tasks
that Premack and Woodruff (1978) set for Sarah were not language learning but
rather problem solving. She received a series of problems, conveyed via video-
tape, in which a human actor was struggling to solve a dilemma. In one case, for
example, he was shivering with cold; in another he was hungry, but the bananas he
desired were out of reach. The final step in the presentation was two photographs,
one of which showed a solution to the problem (for example, lighting a heater to
7
8 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
combat the cold, using a stick to reach the bananas) and the other of which pre-
sented the relevant objects but no solution. The question was whether Sarah could
select the tool that would solve the problem. The answer was yes; in fact, Sarah
was close to perfect across a range of different problems.
In interpreting their results, Premack and Woodruff argued that Sarah’s per-
formance was possible only if she took into account the relevant mental states
of the actor. To solve the bananas problem, for example, she would have to real-
ize that the actor desired the bananas and believed that the stick would allow him
to obtain them. She would have to possess what Premack and Woodruff called a
“theory of mind.” In their words,
False Belief
The study of false belief initiated the theory-of-m ind era, and false belief has been
by far the most popular topic under the theory-of-m ind heading. It is popular in
part because the findings are surprising. Just as it was surprising in the heyday of
Piagetian research that a young child could lack the basic knowledge assessed by
the conservation test, so it is surprising that a 4-year-old could fail to realize that a
belief can be false. Beyond simply its surprise value, however, the false belief task
is of interest because it tells us something basic about children’s understanding—
or, for a while, lack of understanding—of belief. Success on the task provides the
first clear evidence that children realize that beliefs are mental representations
and not direct reflections of reality.
False belief tasks come in two general forms. One is the unexpected location
or unexpected transfer procedure developed by Wimmer and Perner (1983). As
the label suggests, with this task the belief in question concerns the location of
an object, something that is known to the child participant but not to the story
character whose belief the child must judge.
The other commonly used procedure is labeled unexpected contents, a pro-
cedure introduced by Hogrefe, Wimmer, and Perner (1986). Again, the label
denotes the target for the belief in question, which in this case concerns the
contents of a container. A container that typically holds one sort of content
(e.g., a crayon box, a candy box) is revealed to contain something quite dif-
ferent (candles, ribbons, coins—a nything familiar will work). The child is
shown the unexpected contents, and the test question is then what someone
else, someone who has not seen inside the box, will think is in the box. So just
as on the location task, children must set aside their own knowledge of reality
to attribute a false belief to someone else who lacks their knowledge. And just
as on the location task, this is something that children younger than 4 typi-
cally cannot do.
The contents task lends itself to a second measure as well, a measure first
explored by Gopnik and Astington (1988). In addition to asking about someone
else’s belief, we can pose the question in terms of the child’s own initial belief—
thus “what did you think was in the box before we opened it?” The question now
is whether children can recapture their initial false belief—can realize that they
themselves can hold beliefs that are false. The answer, at least for most 3-year-olds
and many 4-year-olds, is that they cannot—t he question about their own belief is
just as difficult for children as the question about someone else’s belief (Wellman,
Cross, & Watson, 2001). Furthermore, just as there are no self–other differences
on the contents task, so also are there no general differences in difficulty between
the contents procedure and the location procedure (Wellman et al.). In both
instances most 3-year-olds fail, 4-year-olds show a mixture of successes and fail-
ures, and most 5-year-olds succeed.
10 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Task Modifications
Like much of Piaget’s work, the studies of false belief reveal a surprising deficit
in children’s understanding of how the world works. A natural reaction to such
unexpected results is to wonder whether children’s understanding is really as lim-
ited as the research suggests. Perhaps if the assessment could somehow be made
simpler, more natural, more child-f riendly, children would do better. Dozens of
studies addressed this possibility with respect to object permanence, conserva-
tion, and other Piagetian concepts in the last half of the last century. The last 20 or
so years have seen the development of a comparable research literature directed
to false belief.
Much of the relevant research through the late 1990s was summarized in
an influential meta-analysis by Wellman et al. (2001). Box 2.1 lists and briefly
describes the factors addressed in their review. As can be seen, these included
a number of would-be facilitators, including the method of wording the test
question, the salience of the reality information, and the presence of a deceptive
context.
Many of these variations turned out to have no effect. A few of the would-
be facilitators, however, did result in better on-the-average performance. For
Note. From Children Talk About the Mind (pp. 46, 52, 53, 115), by K. Bartsch and H. M. Wellman,
1995, New York, NY: Oxford University Press. Copyright 1995 by Oxford University Press. Reprinted
with permission of Oxford University Press, USA.
Although not frequent, such utterances did occur. Table 2.1 presents some
examples of utterances that were coded as expressions of false belief. It can be
seen that none were produced by children younger than 3, a finding in keeping
with conclusions from experimental studies of false belief. But it can be also seen
that many were produced by 3-year-olds, an age group that typically shows little
success on standard false belief tasks. These findings thus suggest that young chil-
dren may have some knowledge of false belief that does not come through in their
response to the typical experimental assessments. And this, of course, was also
the conclusion that emerged from the studies reviewed earlier in this section.
Research with Infants
That at least some 3-year-olds show an appreciation of false belief under some
circumstances is an interesting conclusion, one that forces some revision of
what had been the accepted descriptive picture of false belief development
(“3s can’t, 4s can”). The revision, however, is not a major one, and it does not pose
14 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
a serious challenge to any of the theories that have been proposed to account for
false belief and other early theory-of-mind developments.
A finding that understanding of false belief is present in infancy would be
another matter. It is perhaps an indication of how unlikely such an outcome seems
that no one even attempted to study infants in the first 20-plus years of false belief
research. The situation changed dramatically, however, with the publication in
2005 of a study by Onishi and Baillargeon, a study that reported that 15-month-
olds have some understanding of false belief.
Clearly, a first question for such research is that of measurement: How can we
measure understanding of false belief in the nonverbal infant? Like Clements and
Perner (1994), Onishi and Baillargeon (2005) made use of looking behavior, a
response that is available to infants from birth. More specifically, they made use
of looking time—t he tendency of infants to look longer at some events than at
others. In so doing, they grounded their research in a large literature, much of it by
Baillargeon and colleagues (e.g., Baillargeon, 2004), that had used looking-time
measures to draw conclusions about infants’ understanding of the physical world,
especially (although not only) Piagetian concepts such as object permanence.
How can measures of looking time be informative? One of the determinants
of looking time is surprise: Infants—and indeed any of us—tend to look longer
at events that surprise us. An event is surprising if it violates an expectation—if
it is different from what we thought was going to occur. By seeing what surprises
babies, we can therefore gain evidence about what they expect, which in turn
gives us evidence about what they believe.
It was the violation-of-expectation approach that Onishi and Baillargeon
(2005) used in the initial study of false belief in infancy. The infants in the study
saw scenarios in which an actor placed a toy in a green box and the toy subse-
quently moved to a yellow box, in some cases in the actor’s presence and in some
cases when she was absent. Thus in some cases the actor formed a true belief about
the toy’s location and in some cases she formed a false belief. In the final phase
the actor was shown searching for the toy, either in the location that was com-
patible with her belief or in the alternative location. Infants looked significantly
longer when the search did not match what would be expected from the belief,
suggesting that they were surprised by the discrepancy between belief and action.
This could occur, however, only if they had accurately judged what the belief was,
including the instances in which the actor’s belief was false.
Not surprisingly, the Onishi and Baillargeon (2005) study led to a flurry of
follow-up research and critical commentary. Among the sources for reviews of
this work are Caron (2009), Carruthers (2013), Wellman (2014), and a special
issue of the British Journal of Developmental Psychology (Low & Perner, 2012a). The
articles in the last of these sources make clear that there is no consensus with
respect to exactly what infants know and exactly how this early knowledge relates
to the knowledge measured by the standard false belief tasks. It does seem fair
T h e o r y o f M i n d 15
to conclude, however, that the validity of the empirical findings is now generally
accepted, something that was not the case when the Onishi and Baillargeon (2005)
article first appeared (though see Heyes, 2014, for a cautionary view). Research on
infant cognition is difficult to do and difficult to interpret, and it was therefore
important, especially with such an unexpected result, to ensure that there was no
artifactual basis for infants’ apparent success. By now, however, the basic finding
has been confirmed in close to two dozen studies, studies, moreover, that come
from different laboratories and that have used other dependent variables in addi-
tion to looking time (e.g., Buttelmann, Carpenter, & Tomasello, 2009; Southgate;
Chevallier, & Csibra, 2010). The emphasis, therefore, has shifted from whether
infants are successful to why they are successful. Two general positions exist.
One is that success reflects a genuine understanding of false belief that is
equivalent to the understanding that is measured by the standard location and
contents tasks. This is Baillargeon’s view (e.g., Baillargeon, Scott, & He, 2010),
and it is also the view of those who subscribe to an innate, modular account of
theory-of-m ind development (e.g., Leslie, 2005). Adherents of this position do
not deny that further developments occur beyond infancy; it is not until about
age 4, after all, that children typically succeed on the standard false belief tasks.
These further developments, however, do not involve the concept of belief, which
is in place from early on; rather they concern peripheral factors that make success
on the standard tasks possible—in particular, advances in executive function and
language. And indeed, as I will discuss shortly, it has long been clear that both
executive function and language relate to success on the false belief task.
The alternative position, which is held in varied form by a number of research-
ers of theory of mind (e.g., Apperly & Butterfill, 2009; Perner & Roessler, 2012;
San Juan & Astington, 2012; Wellman 2014), is that infants’ knowledge is in
some respect different from and less than that of 4-year-olds. According to this
view, development involves “the operation of two distinct systems of under-
standing: an early-developing implicit system that is piecemeal and uncon-
scious and a later-developing explicit system that is abstract and conscious”
(Low & Perner, 2012b, p. 2). The early system, although certainly intelligent
and adaptive, does not depend on a concept of belief; rather, infants are seen as
relying on learned associations or behavioral rules or desire-awareness under-
standing or belief-l ike states (the exact conception varies across theorists) that
allow them to track and predict others’ behavior. The emergence of success
on the standard measures at age 4 is then not simply a result of quantitative
improvement in ancillary factors; rather, it reflects a qualitative change in the
cognitive system, a change that for the first time makes possible an explicit
understanding of belief and of differences in belief among different people.
At present, the attempt to identify forms of evidence that might distinguish
among these various positions is very much an ongoing research enterprise.
Potentially, studies of parenting might contribute to this effort, assuming that the
16 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
different positions led to different predictions about how parents might contribute.
As we will see in subsequent chapters, however, the parenting literature to date
provides at best only suggestive evidence. False belief is a frequently studied out-
come in that literature (indeed, easily the most frequently studied outcome); no
researcher to date, however, has spoken explicitly to the question of when aware-
ness of false belief occurs: infancy versus preschool.
Origins of Knowledge
The false belief task taps the understanding of how misleading or incomplete evi-
dence can lead to a false belief. Children also must develop the complementary
form of knowledge: how adequate evidence can lead to a true belief or knowl-
edge. In simple situations, children can make such judgments by about age 4, and
thus at about the same time that false belief is typically mastered. By this age, for
example, they realize that if A looks in a box and B does not look, then A will know
what is in the box and B will not know (Pratt & Bryant, 1990).
In the look- in-
t he-
box example perception is the source of knowledge.
Perception, however, is not the only way in which we acquire knowledge. Children
must also come to understand that we can learn things by being told them—t hus
communication as a source of knowledge—or by figuring them out—t hus infer-
ence as a source of knowledge. These sources typically pose a greater challenge
than does perception. Preschoolers understand simple forms of communication
or inference; full mastery of these forms, however, extends through the grade-
school years (Miller, Hardin, & Montgomery, 2003).
In addition to judging whether something is known, children must come to
understand how it is known. Here, young children show some striking deficits
in understanding prior to eventual mastery. Four-year-olds may claim that they
have always known a fact that the experimenter taught them just moments before
(Taylor, Esbensen, & Bennett, 1994). Three-year-olds may be unable, seconds
after learning something, to say whether sight, touch, or hearing was the source
of the information (O’Neill & Chong, 2001). Even 5-year-olds may be uncertain
whether to use sight or touch to discover specific properties of a hidden object
(Waters & Beck, 2012). We can see here a point to which I will return: Theory-of-
mind development is by no means complete by age 5.
T h e o r y o f M i n d 17
Before leaving this section, I will make one more point about communication
as a source of knowledge. Recent years have seen the rapid growth of a research
literature directed to children’s ability to weigh different communication sources
when deciding what to believe in what they hear (e.g., P. L. Harris, 2012; Koenig
& Sabbagh, 2013). Two aspects of these studies make them relevant to the current
effort. First, the ability to choose sensibly among informants requires knowledge
of the informants’ mental states (what they know, believe, intend, etc.) and thus
is itself a form of theory of mind. Second, such studies identify conditions under
which others can be effective in instilling beliefs in children, which makes them
relevant to the question of how parents might nurture the development of theory
of mind in their children. I discuss the learning-f rom-others studies in Chapter 9.
Other Mental States
With the exception of the research on infant false belief, the work discussed to
this point epitomizes the first decade or so of research on theory of mind: a focus
on belief as the mental state of greatest interest and on the preschool years as the
developmental time period of greatest interest. Given this initial concentration,
a reasonable question—one that many researchers in the 1990s faced—is where
do we go next?
Figure 2.1, taken from Flavell (2000), shows one way to think about the
where-to-go-next question. One direction for expansion is chronological: start
earlier, go later. Doing so will allow us to identify additional developmental
achievements beyond those that emerge in the preschool years—simpler,
more basic developments in the case of younger children, more advanced
developments in the case of older children. The chronological expansion is
also necessary to address two of the basic questions in theory of mind: what
T h e o r y o f M i n d 19
Consequents
Tasks: FB, AR, PT
Antecedents Ages: 3–5 years
Intracultural
Differences Intercultural
Interspecies
Figure 2.1 Research directions in the study of theory of mind. Note. From “Development
of Children’s Knowledge about the Mental World,” by J. H. Flavell, 2000, International Journal of
Behavioral Development, 24, p. 18. Copyright 2000 by Sage Publications. Reprinted by permission
of Sage.
are the antecedents that make possible developments such as false belief and
appearance–reality, and what in turn do these developments make possible in
later childhood?
A second direction for expansion is topical. Important though beliefs and other
epistemic states may be, they are not the only mental states that humans experi-
ence, and thus are not the only mental states that children must come to under-
stand. Figure 2.1 lists some of the other targets for developmental acquisition
(desires, intentions . . . ), and as the “etc.” indicates, the list is not complete. In what
follows I discuss two states that have been frequent targets for research: desire and
emotion.
Desire
Like beliefs, desires are “intentional” in the philosopher’s sense, in that they are
about something in the world. Just as we can form a belief about an apple, a book,
or a friend, so may we desire an apple, a book, or a friend. The mind–world rela-
tion differs in the two cases, however. A belief is meant to reflect the world accu-
rately and therefore is either true or false. A desire, however, does not have a truth
status—it makes no sense to talk of true or false desires. Rather a desire is either
fulfilled or not.
We saw that one way to figure out what young children understand about belief
is to listen to their spontaneous speech. The same approach can be applied to
understanding of desire. Table 2.2 shows some of the utterances that Bartsch and
20 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Note. From Children Talk About the Mind (pp. 70, 71, 78), by K. Bartsch and H. M. Wellman, 1995,
New York, NY: Oxford University Press. Copyright 1995 by Oxford University Press. Reprinted with
permission of Oxford University Press, USA.
inferences in the physical realm—to parse the speech stream, for example, or
to segment visual shapes (e.g., Saffran, Aslin, & Newport, 1996). Ma and Xu
(2011) showed that young 2-year-olds (mean age 2 years 2 months) demon-
strate a similar competence with respect to people’s desires. Having watched
an experimenter consistently pick Object X from a container holding a few Xs
and many Ys, they conclude that she prefers X, and they do so even though
their own preference is for Y. On the other hand, inferences about a preference
for X are much less likely when the container holds mostly Xs and selections of
X are therefore less informative.
Impressive as the performance of Ma and Xu’s (2011) participants seems,
age 2 is not the youngest age at which appreciation of diverse desires has been
demonstrated. When the cues are sufficiently clear, even 18-month-olds under-
stand that other people may have desires different from their own. Repacholi and
Gopnik (1997) first gave their 14-and 18-month-old participants a choice of two
snacks: Goldfish crackers or broccoli. Not surprisingly, almost all preferred the
crackers. Next, the children watched an adult experimenter sample both snacks
and express a clear preference for the broccoli. The two snacks were then placed in
front of the child, and the experimenter stretched out her hand, asking the child to
give her one. Most of the 14-month-olds gave her the crackers, the snack that they
themselves preferred. Most of the 18-month-olds, however, gave her the broccoli,
thus demonstrating an understanding that her desire, strange as it seemed, was
different from their own.
Emotion
As with desires, children begin to talk about emotions from quite early in life.
Here are several examples, all taken from children who were just 2 years 4 months
of age (Bretherton & Beeghly, 1982). “Santa will be happy if I pee in the potty.”
“Don’t feel bad, Bob.” “Bees everywhere. Scared me!” “Don’t be mad, Mommy!”
Not only do children talk about emotions from early in life; they hear much
talk about emotions from those around them. Work by Judy Dunn and colleagues
(e.g., Dunn, Bretherton, & Munn, 1987; Dunn, Brown, & Beardsall, 1991) sug-
gests that such “family talk” about emotions contributes to children’s under-
standing of emotion. This is work that I will return to at various points throughout
the book.
Although some understanding of emotion is evident quite early in life, experi-
mental studies make clear that full mastery of emotion is spread across several
years. Particularly challenging are instances in which the relation between avail-
able cues (such as facial expression) and underlying emotion is not straightfor-
ward. Such is the case with so-called display rules, in which a person may attempt
to hide how he or she actually feels (e.g., smile after receiving a disappointing
gift). Such is also often the case with mixed emotions, in which a person may
22 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
experience both positive and negative emotions about the same event. Although
preschoolers show some success at judging simple versions of such scenarios, full
understanding of concealed and mixed emotions develops gradually across child-
hood (Flavell et al., 2002).
Like desires, emotions cannot be true or false. They can, however, be at least
temporarily inappropriate, in that we may sometimes feel one way because we are
unaware of something that will soon make us feel very different. Such is the case
with certain kinds of surprise. A child may go happily to the cupboard to retrieve
his favorite treat, only to learn that someone else has eaten the last one. In such
situations there is a contrast between the immediate emotion (happy) and the
eventual emotion (sad).
A number of studies (e.g., de Rosnay, Pons, Harris, & Morrell, 2004; P. L.
Harris, Johnson, Hutton, Andrews, & Cooke, 1989) have explored children’s abil-
ity to reason about such situations. The procedure is similar to the unexpected
contents task: a container that apparently holds one sort of content (e.g., some
desired candies) turns out to hold something quite different (e.g., a collection of
pebbles). The question is how the protagonist feels before opening the container.
This question turns out to be difficult for preschoolers. Although exceptions exist,
in most studies judging the temporarily “false” emotion has proved more diffi-
cult than judging the protagonist’s false belief. Logically, this discrepancy makes
sense, given that an accurate attribution of emotion would seem to depend on an
at least implicit understanding of the protagonist’s belief—in this case, a belief
that he or she is about to get something good. What more is needed to make accu-
rate attributions of emotion is not yet resolved (Bradmetz & Schneider, 2004;
P. L. Harris, 2009).
A study by Dunn and Hughes (1998) adds an interesting further point about
understanding of emotions. In most such studies—not just of emotion but of
belief and other mental states—t he target is a generic one, such as Maxi in the
chocolate story presented earlier in this chapter. Dunn and Hughes probed 4-
year-olds’ understanding of emotion with respect to three familiar targets: their
mother, a friend, and themselves. When anger was the emotion of interest, chil-
dren showed more awareness of the causes of anger when thinking about the
mother than when thinking about a friend; when sadness was the emotion, the
pattern reversed and understanding was greater for the friend than for the mother.
What these findings suggest is that understanding of emotions may be in part
relationship-specific, that is, more advanced for some familiar targets than for
others. Some support for this notion of relationship-specific reasoning—based
on a different age group and different outcome measure—comes in a study by
O’Connor and Hirsch (1999). They reported that 13-year-olds’ reasoning about
the causes of their teacher’s behavior was more advanced when they were think-
ing about their favorite teacher than when they were thinking about their least
favorite one.
T h e o r y o f M i n d 23
Task Description
Diverse desires (95%) Child judges that two persons (the child vs.
someone else) have different desires about the
same objects.
Diverse beliefs (84%) Child judges that two persons (the child vs.
someone else) have different beliefs about the
same object, when the child does not know
which belief is true or false.
Knowledge access (73%) Child sees what is in a box and judges (yes–no)
the knowledge of another person who does not
see what is in a box.
Contents false belief (59%) Child judges another person’s false belief about
what is in a distinctive container when child
knows what is in the container.
Explicit false belief (57%) Child judges how someone will search, given
that person’s mistaken belief.
Belief emotion (52%) Child judges how a person will feel, given a
belief that is mistaken.
Real-apparent emotion (32%) Child judges that a person can feel one thing
but display a different emotion
Note. From “Scaling of Theory-of-M ind Tasks,” by H. M. Wellman and D. Liu, 2004, Child
Development, 75, p. 531. Copyright 2004 by John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Reprinted with permission.
Later Developments
As Figure 2.1 shows, an expansion of research beyond the preschool period
reveals theory-of-m ind developments in both directions: earlier, simpler forms
that emerge in infancy, more advanced forms that are the province of later child-
hood. In this chapter I limit the coverage to the more advanced forms, reserv-
ing the discussion of infancy for Chapter 6. As we will see there, theory-of-m ind
developments in infancy, more so than during any other age period, are inher-
ently social in nature—developed, expressed, and measured only in observations
of or interactions with others. Moreover, for most babies most of the time, the oth-
ers are their parents. It makes sense, therefore, to consider infant developments
in conjunction with the parents’ contribution to these developments, and this is
what I do in Chapter 6.
What, then, about later childhood? Despite the heavy concentration of
research on infancy and early childhood, no researcher of theory of mind
believes that the development of mentalistic understanding is complete
by age 5. Here I consider some of the developments in theory of mind that
become evident once we move beyond the early childhood years. As we will
see in subsequent chapters, few of these developments have served as targets
for parenting research; rather, the parenting literature has focused almost
exclusively on the developments discussed to this point in this chapter, that
is, what happens in the first five years of life. My coverage of the later years
will therefore be brief. Miller (2012b) provides a more extended treatment of
post-preschool advances in theory of mind.
Second-Order False Belief
The unexpected location and unexpected transfer tasks measure understand-
ing of first-order false belief: the realization that it is possible—either for oth-
ers or for oneself—to be mistaken about something in the world. The tasks are
first order because there is just a single, mind-to-world mental state at issue: X
believes that A is true. A second-order false belief task measures the under-
standing that it is possible to be mistaken about someone else’s belief about
something in the world: thus X believes that Y believes that A is true. The task
is second-order because two mental states are in play, not just that of X but also
that of Y.
26 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Interpretive Diversity
Of the major theorists of theory of mind, Michael Chandler is probably the
one who has devoted the most attention to developments beyond the preschool
period. One such development that is especially stressed in Chandler’s writings
is understanding of interpretive diversity. Interpretive diversity refers to “the appre-
ciation that one and the same thing can be assigned different meanings by differ-
ent persons” (Carpendale & Chandler, 1996, p. 1703). This appreciation is seen
as part of a more general understanding that the mind is active and constructive
in its encounters with the world and not merely a passive recipient of whatever
information comes along.
That the mind actively construes reality must be a central component in any-
body’s theory of theory of mind. But does such a realization really emerge only
sometime after the preschool period? Understanding of false belief could be
T h e o r y o f M i n d 27
Box 2.2 One of the Perner and Wimmer (1985) Scenarios Used
to Assess Children’s Understanding of Second-Order False Belief
This is a story about John and Mary who live in this village. This morning
John and Mary are together in the park. In the park there is also an ice-cream
man in his van.
Mary would like to buy an ice cream but she has left her money at home.
So she is very sad. “Don’t be sad,” says the ice-cream man, “you can fetch
your money and buy some ice cream later. I’ll be here in the park all after-
noon.” “Oh good,” says Mary, “I’ll be back in the afternoon to buy some ice
cream. I’ll make sure I won’t forget my money then.”
So Mary goes home.… She lives in this house. She goes inside the house.
Now John is on his own in the park. To his surprise he sees the ice-cream
man leaving the park in his van. “Where are you going?” asks John. The ice-
cream man says “I’m going to drive my van to the church. There is no one in
the park to buy ice cream; so perhaps I can sell some outside the church.”
The ice-cream man drives over to the church. On his way he passes Mary’s
house. Mary is looking out of the window and spots the van. “Where are you
going?” she asks. “I’m going to the church. I’ll be able to sell more ice cream
there,” answers the man. “It’s a good thing I saw you,” says Mary. Now John
doesn’t know that Mary talked to the ice-cream man. He doesn’t know that!
Now John has to go home. After lunch he is doing his homework. He can’t
do one of the tasks. So he goes over to Mary’s house to ask for help. Mary’s
mother answers the door. “Is Mary in?” asks John. “Oh,” says Mary’s mother.
“She’s just left. She said she was going to get an ice cream.”
Test question: So John runs to look for Mary. Where does he think she
has gone?
Justification question: Why does he think she has gone to the ____?
Note. From “‘John Thinks That Mary Thinks That…’ Attribution of Second-Order Beliefs
by 5-to 10-Year-Old Children,” by J. Perner and H. Wimmer, 1985, Journal of Experimental
Child Psychology, 39, p. 441. Copyright 1985 by Elsevier. Reprinted with permission.
argued to demonstrate a form of interpretive diversity. The child who can solve
the Maxi task, for example, realizes that Maxi believes one thing about the loca-
tion of his chocolate while the mother believes something different—t hus differ-
ent meanings for the same aspect of reality. In the false belief case, however, the
two thinkers are not dealing with “one and the same thing”; rather the mother
has information that Maxi does not have. False belief, therefore, demonstrates
only a limited, albeit important, appreciation of diversity: the understanding that
28 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
different information can lead to different beliefs. It does not demonstrate the
understanding that the same information can lead to different beliefs.
What is needed, then, is a situation in which different perceivers respond dif-
ferently to the same stimulus or event and the child’s task is either to predict or
to explain these different responses. Figure 2.2 shows two of the stimuli used
in one of the Chandler group studies to address this question (Carpendale &
Chandler, 1996). The stimuli in the figure are what are known as reversible figures,
in that each lends itself to two interpretations: a rabbit and a duck in the first
case and a rat and an old man in the second. The experimenters first determined
that the participants (5-to 8-year-olds) could themselves perceive both versions
of the figures (something which, it turns out, is a developmental achievement,
for most preschoolers show little success at the task—Gopnik & Rosati, 2001).
Two character puppets were then presented, one of which provided one of the
possible interpretations of each picture while the other provided the alternate
interpretation. The task for the children was to explain why these responses were
different, as well as to predict what a future perceiver would say. The interest was
in whether the children could recognize the legitimacy of different interpreta-
tions of the same stimulus, and the finding was that few of the youngest children
could. It was only at about age 7 or 8 that children demonstrated a realization
that different people could legitimately believe different things even when they
had the same information to work with.
Story Type: Joke
Today, James is going to Claire’s house for the first time. He is going over for tea,
and he is looking forward to seeing Claire’s dog, which she talks about all
the time. James likes dogs very much. When James arrives at Claire’s house
Claire runs to open the door, and her dog jumps up to greet James. Claire’s
dog is huge, it’s almost as big as James! When James sees Claire’s huge dog he
says, “Claire you haven’t got a dog at all. You’ve got an elephant!”
Is it true what James says?
Why does James say that?
Story Type: Lie
One day, while she is playing in the house, Anna accidentally knocks over and
breaks her mother’s favorite crystal vase. Oh dear, when mother finds out
she will be very cross! So when Anna’s mother comes home and sees the
broken vase and asks Anna what happened, Anna says, “The dog knocked
it over, it wasn’t my fault!”
Was it true what Anna told her mother?
Why did Anna say that?
Story Type: Irony
Ann’s mother has spent a long time cooking Ann’s favorite meal: fish and
chips. But when she brings it to Ann, she is watching TV, and she doesn’t
even look up, or say thank you. Ann’s mother is cross and says, “Well that’s
very nice, isn’t it? That’s what I call politeness!”
Is it true, what Ann’s mother says?
Why does Ann’s mother say this?
Although it may be the most often used of such tests, Strange Stories is just one
of a number of measures designed to study higher-order theory of mind. Other
examples include the Eyes Test (Baron-Cohen, Wheelright, Hill, Raste, & Plumb,
2001), Faux Pas (Baron-Cohen, O’Riordan, Stone, Jones, & Plaisted, 1999),
Preadolescent Theory of Mind (Bosacki & Astington, 1999), and Silent Films
(Devine & Hughes, 2013). The general conclusion from such measures is the same
as that for Strange Stories: little or no success prior to age 5 or 6, gradual improve-
ment across middle childhood and the adolescent years, and good although not
always perfect performance in adulthood (Miller, 2012b).
Autism
Although the Happe (1994) Strange Stories study included a group of typically
developing children, that group was not the primary focus of the study. The main
focus, rather, was on the performance of children with autism. The study was an
early entry in what has now become a large and still rapidly growing literature on
autism and theory of mind.
The conjunction of the two topics stems from what is arguably the defining
characteristic of autism: namely, problems in social understanding and social
interaction. An approach known as the cognitive theory of autism posits that deficits
in theory of mind account for some of the features of autism. The claim is not that
such deficits account for all of the features of autism; nor is the claim that theory-
of-m ind deficits are limited to the syndrome of autism. The claim is simply that
theory of mind contributes to what we see in autism.
The first test of this hypothesis was reported by Baron-Cohen, Leslie, and
Frith (1985). They compared the performance of three groups of participants
on the unexpected location false belief task: children with autism (mean
age = 11 years 11 months), children with Down syndrome (mean age = 10 years,
11 months), and typically developing children (mean age = 4 years 5 months).
The typically developing and Down syndrome children did well (85% and 86%
correct, respectively); the children with autism, however, were correct only 20%
of the time.
Research since the Baron-Cohen et al. (1985) study has provided clear support
for their general conclusion (for reviews, see Rajendran & Mitchell, 2007, and
Yirmaya, Erel, Shaked, & Solomonica, 1998). Many children with autism never
master first-order false belief. When mastery does occur it typically comes sev-
eral years later than the norm for typical development, and also later than what
is found for groups (e.g., developmentally delayed individuals) who have been
matched with the autism sample for chronological or mental age. Furthermore,
the difficulties shown by people with autism are not limited to the false belief
task but apply to theory-of-m ind abilities more generally. They are evident, for
32 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Some Preliminary Points
Theory of mind has both a normative aspect—developments that are universal
across all typically developing children—and an idiographic aspect—ways in
which children differ in their development. False belief, for example, is eventually
T h e o r y o f M i n d 33
mastered by all typically developing children; the speed with which it is mastered,
however, varies across children.
Conceptually, the normative aspect of development is an important question
with respect to both antecedents and consequences. We want to know, for exam-
ple, why all typically developing children master false belief, and we also want to
know how this mastery subsequently affects other aspects of their behavior and
development. Empirically, however, we are dependent on individual differences
among children to explore both antecedents and consequences. If a sample shows
no variation in false belief success, then there is no way to determine where suc-
cess comes from or what effects success has. This, of course, is just a general point
about research: Both independent variables and dependent variables must show
some variation (hence the term “variable”).
The research to be considered now, therefore, is individual-d ifferences
research, the question being where variations in theory of mind come from and
what effects these variations have on other aspects of development. Conceivably,
individual differences of a variety of sorts could be explored (e.g., the certainty
with which the knowledge is held, the ease with which it can be applied, the
breadth of application). In fact, in the great majority of studies the only indi-
vidual differences that appear are differences in rate of development: Some chil-
dren master the knowledge in question more quickly than do others. There are
occasional exceptions; we saw one example earlier in this chapter in the work
on sequences of development, and I will note others as we go along. The excep-
tions, however, are rare. In the concluding chapter I return to the issue of indi-
vidual differences in theory of mind and possible alternatives to an exclusive
focus on rate of development.
benefit. A reasonable conclusion is that siblings are neither necessary nor always
helpful for theory-of-m ind development; in some cases, however, experience
with siblings may accelerate the developmental process. Presumably, such
experience does so because growing up with siblings provides experiences (e.g.,
pretend play, being teased, being tricked) that help children learn about the
thoughts and feelings of others. Studies that have looked directly at how sib-
lings interact (e.g., Dunn, 1999; Randell & Peterson, 2009) provide support for
this conjecture. It has also been suggested that the effects of siblings may be in
part indirect, in that the presence of multiple children in the family may affect
both parenting and children’s experiences of parenting. This is a possibility that
I return to in Chapter 7.
Siblings and parents are not the only possible sources for development-
enhancing experiences. Family size in general has been shown to relate to
theory-of-m ind development (Lewis, Freeman, Kriakidou, Maridaki-K assotaki,
& Berridge, 1996). Experience with peers can also contribute (e.g., Jenkins
& Astington, 1996; Wang & Sue, 2009), as can experience in school (Pillow,
2012) and exposure to storybooks and children’s movies (Mar, Tackett, &
Moore, 2010).
The discussion thus far has concerned various social agents and social experi-
ences that can affect theory-of-m ind development. Another approach to the ante-
cedents question attempts to identify prerequisite abilities—that is, skills that
must be in place for theory-of-m ind understanding to emerge or to be expressed.
Two presumed prerequisites have proved to be important.
One is language. A large research literature is quite consistent in demon-
strating positive relations between language and theory of mind: On the aver-
age, children with advanced language skills are also more advanced in theory
of mind (Milligan, Astington, & Dack, 2007). Although most of the evidence
concerns first-order abilities, similar relations have been shown for higher-
order developments, such as second-order false belief (e.g., Hasselhorn,
Mahler, & Grube, 2005). No single aspect of language has emerged as criti-
cal; rather a variety of measures have proved predictive. The Milligan et al.
(2007) meta-a nalysis surveyed five general categories of measures, all of
which related significantly to theory of mind: syntax, semantics, recep-
tive vocabulary, memory for sentential complements, and overall language
ability.
The second presumed prerequisite is executive function. Executive function is
an umbrella term for general problem-solving resources (e.g., inhibition, plan-
ning, working memory) that contribute to performance in a variety of cognitive
domains. Among the cognitive domains for which executive function has been
shown to be predictive is theory of mind, especially performance on false belief
tasks: Children who are relatively advanced in executive function tend to do bet-
ter on false belief (Devine & Hughes, 2014). The ability to inhibit a dominant
T h e o r y o f M i n d 35
Research since Astington’s review has added other outcomes to her list.
Links have been shown, for example, between theory of mind and moral rea-
soning (e.g., Smetana, Jambon, Conry-Murray, & Sturge-A pple, 2012) and
between theory of mind and success in school (e.g., Astington & Pelletier,
2005). Relations have also been shown not only for first-order theory-of-m ind
abilities (the main subject of Astington’s 2003 review) but also for the vari-
ous measures of higher-order theory of mind discussed earlier in this chapter
(Miller, 2012b). It is true that all of the available data are correlational in nature
and hence do not directly establish a causal role for theory of mind. Various
kinds of evidence, however, add credence to a causal interpretation. Thus, rela-
tions typically remain significant when possible third-factor contributors (e.g.,
age, language) are statistically controlled. In addition, longitudinal studies
often show the pattern that would be expected if theory of mind is playing a
causal role; that is, theory-of-m ind performance early in development relates to
predicted outcomes later in development. In no case, as the title of Astington’s
review (“Sometimes Necessary, Never Sufficient”) indicates, is theory of mind
the sole contributor to outcomes of interest. But research suggests that it is one
contributor.
Simulation Theory
Of the various theories of theory of mind, simulation theory is in a sense the
oldest, because it has roots in philosophy that date back several centuries. The
basic idea in the simulation approach is that we have privileged access to our
own mental contents—t hus our own immediate thoughts, feelings, percepts,
and so forth. Our ability to make sense of others then depends on our ability
to place ourselves, via an imaginative simulation process, in their position. For
example, we may predict how someone else will respond to an emotion-a rousing
stimulus by imagining how we ourselves would respond. Or we may make sense
of someone else’s behavior by imagining what would lead us to behave in such
a way. An often used example in the latter case is a hiker who sees a companion
running toward him with a look of terror on her face. Conceivably, the hiker
might interpret this behavior by activating a theoretical system that identifies
the necessary links between experience, emotion, and behavior. More plausibly,
however (at least according to the simulation theorist), the hiker could simply
imagine what would make him behave like that—for example, a grizzly bear in
hot pursuit.
Clearly, the ability to carry out simulations depends on a capacity for imag-
inative pretense. Fortunately for simulation theory, such a capacity is evident
from early in development—even 2-and 3-year-olds are remarkably skilled at
pretense (P. L. Harris, 1992). These abilities do improve with development, how-
ever, and such improvements are one basis for developmental changes in theory
of mind. In addition, the difficulty of carrying out simulations varies across dif-
ferent mental states and as a function of how many “default settings” must be
38 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
adjusted. It is for this reason that development takes time and that some devel-
opments (e.g., reasoning about beliefs) are slower to emerge in childhood than
others (e.g., reasoning about desires). Paul Harris is the psychologist who has
developed the simulation approach to theory of mind most fully (P. L. Harris,
1992, 2009).
Modularity
The modularity approach does not deny some role for simulation. Nor, for
that matter, do the theory theory or sociocultural approaches. More gener-
ally, each of the four general approaches to theory of mind accepts elements of
the other approaches. Each, for example, agrees that there must be a biologi-
cal underpinning to development (the emphasis in the modularity approach).
Each also agrees that there must be a contribution of social experience to
development (the emphasis in the sociocultural approach). The differences
come not in the elements of a full theory but in the importance ascribed to
each element.
In the modularity approach the emphasis is on the biological bases for
theory of mind. In this view theory-of mind reasoning is made possible by
an innately specified portion of the brain dedicated solely to the task of
theory of mind and thus “encapsulated,” that is, separate from other brain
regions and cognitive functions. The theory-of-m ind module is seen as hav-
ing been selected for in evolution, just as other modules that underlie essen-
tial human characteristics (e.g., aspects of perception and language) were
selected for. Developmental change in this perspective results primarily from
biological maturation that brings more advanced modules online, although
certain peripheral abilities, in particular a capacity for inhibition, may
be necessary as well. Development, to be sure, is not wholly maturational.
Certain environmental “triggers” may be necessary for particular changes to
occur. Environmental factors can also contribute to individual differences
in the speed of development or in how theory-of-m ind skills are deployed.
Underlying such differences, however, is a common theory-of-m ind architec-
ture that is largely biological in origin.
As with the theory theory position, somewhat different versions of modular-
ity theory have been proposed. The most influential models are those developed
by Alan Leslie (e.g., Leslie, 1994; Scholl & Leslie, 1999) and Simon Baron-
Cohen (e.g., 1994, 1995). As we saw earlier in this chapter, Leslie and Baron-
Cohen were coauthors of the first study of autism and theory of mind. This is not
a coincidence. The autism literature has long been a major source of support for
two claims that are central to theorizing about modularity: that theory of mind
has a strong biological basis and that theory of mind is largely independent of
other cognitive abilities.
T h e o r y o f M i n d 39
Sociocultural Approaches
Although the sociocultural approach is a relative latecomer to theoretical debates
about theory of mind, it certainly does not lack for advocates. Among the theorists
who have proposed some version of a sociocultural approach to theory of mind
are Astington (1999), Bruner (1990), Carpendale and Lewis (2004), Fernyhough
(2008), Hutto (2008), Lucariello (2004), Nelson (Nelson et al., 2003), and
Tomasello (1999). The general theoretical position under which such efforts fall
is that of Vygotsky (e.g., Vygotsky, 1978).
As the label for the approach indicates, the central claim of the sociocultural
approach is that the development of theory of mind—and indeed, of any aspect
of children’s cognitive functioning—is always embedded within and made pos-
sible by the social-cultural environment that surrounds the child. In itself, this
claim may not sound novel; any theory, as I have noted, must acknowledge a role
for social experience. In other, so-called individualistic approaches, however, the
emphasis is on the individual child and on developments occurring within the
child (the theories the child forms, the simulations the child creates, or what-
ever). Social experience contributes to these developments, but there remains a
clear divide between child and social world. In contrast, within the sociocultural
approach there is no such divide; development is inherently social from the start.
In the words of two proponents of the approach, the question is “whether the
true starting point is to be located in the single, isolated, free mind of the indi-
vidual or in a social, communal world of shared experience or language” (Raver
& Leadbeater, 1993, p. 355). For sociocultural theorists, the answer is the latter.
Other, related emphases characterize most versions of a sociocultural approach.
One is an emphasis on language. It is, after all, mainly through language that parents
and others socialize children and that a culture’s accumulated knowledge is passed
from one generation to the next. A related, and distinctly Vygotskian, concept is that
of internalization: the idea that forms of knowledge and modes of adaptation exist
first in the culture around the child and that development occurs as the child inter-
nalizes these cultural tools to make them his or her own. An often quoted passage
from Vygotsky (1978) expresses this idea: “Every function in the child’s cultural
development appears twice: first, on the social level, and later, on the individual
level” (p. 57). As some theorists (e.g., Carpendale & Lewis, 2004) emphasize, this
notion of internalization does not negate the possibility of an active, constructivist
child; what the child primarily acts on, however, is input from the social world.
A final emphasis is not found in all versions of a sociocultural approach, but it
is a central element in some conceptions (e.g., Carpendale & Lewis, 2004). It is an
emphasis not just on social experience but on social relationships—t he idea that
learning about the minds of others occurs best in the context of long-term, affec-
tively charged social relationships. And, of course, for most children the most
important such relationships are those with the parents.
40 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Parenting
What are the implications of the different theories for research on parenting? In
particular, can results from parenting research provide a basis for deciding among
theories?
One of the sociocultural sources drawn from earlier was an article by
Carpendale and Lewis (2004) that appeared in the journal Behavioral and Brain
Sciences. In addition to proposing a version of sociocultural theory, Carpendale
and Lewis marshaled a considerable amount of evidence in support of their
position, evidence indicating that social experience, including experience
with parents, makes an important contribution to the development of theory
of mind.
As is often the case with Behavioral and Brain Sciences, the Carpendale and
Lewis article was followed by a number of commentaries by interested research-
ers, including representatives of each of the other theories of theory of mind: the-
ory theory, simulation, and modularity. Basically, none of these theorists was at
all discomfited by the evidence amassed in support of the importance of social
factors; rather each argued that the evidence could easily be assimilated by his or
her favorite position.
The mere fact that parents are important, therefore, is not enough to distin-
guish among theories of theory of mind. In their present form the various formu-
lations are not sufficiently specific about how parents are important to provide
a clear test among theories or a clear disconfirmation of any specific theory.
Nevertheless, if not predictions that can be disconfirmed, the theories do at least
generate expectations with respect to the “how much” and “how” questions,
expectations that may fit more or less easily with the available evidence about par-
enting. Once we have seen what this evidence shows, I return to the question of
theories in Chapter 10.
3
Parenting
In 1998 Judith Harris published a book called The Nurture Assumption. The book
was an elaboration of an article that Harris had published earlier in Psychological
Review (J. R. Harris, 1995). The opening paragraph of the journal article set forth
the main theme of both the article and the book: “Do parents have any impor-
tant long-term effects on the development of their child’s personality? This article
examines the relevant evidence and concludes that the answer is no” (J. R. Harris,
1995, p. 458).
Most child psychologists disagreed with Harris’s conclusion then, and most
disagree with it now. In the course of this chapter I draw from several of the
responses elicited by her writings. My point in quoting Harris now is to empha-
size the difficulty of doing childrearing research. At the time of her writing we had
had close to a century of childrearing studies and hundreds of reported effects of
parental practices on children’s development. Yet it was still possible to argue that
no clear effects of parenting had been demonstrated—and to have this argument
published in a leading psychology journal.
In this chapter I divide the coverage into three general sections. I begin with the
methodological challenges that made the central claim of The Nurture Assumption
possible: the difficulties of doing and interpreting research on parenting. Many of
the points discussed are ones that I will return to in Chapter 4. The second section
discusses historical changes in how parenting and its effects have been studied
across the span of psychology as a science. There have been major changes, and
a consideration of the changes is a good way to appreciate the contemporary sta-
tus of the field. Finally, the third section offers the general conclusions that have
emerged from the study of parenting to date. These points, too, are ones that we
will return to in subsequent chapters.
As I noted in Chapter 1, my coverage of parenting is even more selective than
my coverage of theory of mind. Among the helpful further sources are Bugental
and Grusec (2006); Grusec (2011); Holden (2010); Morris, Cui, and Steinberg
(2013); and Parke and Buriel (2006). The points about methodology in the next
section of this chapter are discussed somewhat more fully in Miller (2012a).
41
42 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Methodological Challenges
Most parenting studies face three challenges. The first is accurately measuring
what parents do with their children. The second is accurately measuring the child
outcomes that are hypothesized to follow from the parental practices. The third is
determining the cause-and-effect relation between what the parent does and how
the child develops.
Not all studies of parenting include the second and third steps. In some studies
parental behavior is a dependent variable rather than an independent variable, in
that the interest is in the causes rather than the effects of the behavior. We might
look, for example, for variations in parenting across groups of different socioeco-
nomic status (SES) (Hoff, Laursen, & Tardif, 2002), or for possible effects of par-
ents’ personalities on how they treat their children (Belsky & Barends, 2002), or
for evidence that genes contribute to how parents behave (Klahr & Burt, 2014).
To point ahead a bit, we might also compare mental state talk (the subject of
Chapter 7) across different eliciting conditions (Ziv, Smadja, & Aram, 2013),
or explore whether mind-m indedness (one subject of Chapter 8) is impaired in
mothers with mental illness (Pawlby et al., 2010).
Despite the exceptions just noted, most studies of parenting have the goal of
determining not just what parents do but also the results of what they do—t hat is,
effects on child outcomes. And, of course, this is the case for the work on parent-
ing and theory of mind that is the subject of this book.
In what follows I do not attempt to discuss, except briefly, the child-outcome
component of the three-step process. In Chapter 2 I talked about how various
aspects of theory of mind are measured, and in later chapters I will often do so for
specific studies. I concentrate on the other two steps: measuring parental behav-
ior and determining the cause-and-effect nature of any parent–child relations
that are found.
further combination and reduction, to the general styles of parenting that I dis-
cuss shortly.
For a second example of the naturalistic approach I turn to the topic of
Chapter 5: attachment. One of the central issues in the study of attachment con-
cerns the origins of individual differences—why are some infants more securely
attached than others? The most common approach to this issue, dating from the
original research by Mary Ainsworth and colleagues (Ainsworth, Blehar, Waters,
& Wall, 1978), has been to attempt to identify the childrearing antecedents of
attachment. In many studies, including the Ainsworth et al. research, this attempt
has taken the form of observation of mother–infant interactions in the home. The
observations by Ainsworth and colleagues were unusually extensive in terms of
both the time allotted (4-hour visits every 3 weeks throughout the baby’s first
year) and the breadth of the information recorded. Among the contexts that pro-
vided detailed records of maternal behavior were feeding, responsiveness to cry-
ing, face-to-face interaction, separation and reunion episodes, and close bodily
contact. In addition to the behavioral specifics, Ainsworth and colleagues devised
overall ratings of general maternal characteristics, and it was one of these gen-
eral characteristics that proved most predictive of security of attachment. In the
words of Ainsworth and colleagues, “The most important aspect of maternal
behavior … is manifested in different specific ways in different situations, but in
each it emerges as sensitive responsiveness to infant signals and communications”
(p. 152). The importance of sensitive responsiveness has been confirmed by sub-
sequent studies of the origins of attachment (De Wolff & van IJzendoorn, 1997).
I turn now to strengths and limitations of the naturalistic observation
approach. The summary in Table 3.1 lists several limitations and only one
strength. The strength, however, is a fundamental one. This approach is the only
one that measures exactly what we are interested in: namely, the parent’s natu-
rally occurring behavior in the natural setting. Laboratory studies (to which we
turn next) do not tell us what happens in the natural setting, and verbal reports
(the third category) measure what people say about their behavior rather than
the behavior itself. Naturalistic observation is thus always the measurement of
choice—assuming that we can obtain a sampling of parental behavior that is both
accurate and representative.
It is, of course, the “accurate” and “representative” criteria that reflect the possi-
ble limitations of the approach. There are various reasons that observations might
yield a nonrepresentative sampling of parental behavior. To begin with, the sam-
ple of parents may be nonrepresentative, in that only some parents are likely to let
observers into the home to record their childrearing behaviors. For those who do
allow such access, the sampling of behavior may be nonrepresentative—at least
some parents may alter their behavior when they know that a researcher is record-
ing what they do. The sampling is, in any case, a limited one—only a few settings
and a few hours out of the multitude of interchanges between parent and child.
Pa r e n t i n g 45
Because all homes are somewhat different, issues of comparability may arise; dif-
ferent parents may face different challenges during the periods of observation.
Finally, there is the question of the accuracy of the observations. Recording and
interpreting ongoing behavior is always a challenge, and such difficulties may be
especially marked in the uncontrolled setting of the home.
Laboratory study. The points just made about naturalistic observation can
serve as transition to a second general approach: laboratory study. A laboratory
study brings parent and child together in some specially designed setting where
the parenting behaviors of interest can be observed. Such studies share some
of the limitations of naturalistic study. Once again, the range of situations and
behaviors that can be sampled is limited, and once again the awareness of being
studied may alter how the parent behaves. Furthermore, the laboratory is not the
natural environment, and the behaviors that are elicited in such a setting, on both
the parent’s and the child’s part, may differ from those in the more familiar home
environment.
On the positive side, laboratory studies also have some strengths relative to in-
the-home efforts. Comparability across parents should not be an issue, since we
can set up the identical situation for all parents. Such experimental control makes
the laboratory approach a very efficient way to elicit the behaviors of interest. If we
are interested in maternal teaching, for example, we need not wait for a teaching
opportunity to arise; we can present a task in which the mother’s goal is to teach
something to her child. The controlled environment of the laboratory also allows
for systematic manipulation of potentially important factors. In a study of teach-
ing, for example, we might vary the nature or the difficulty of the task, or we might
compare the parent’s approach with that of another adult, such as a teacher or
experimenter. Finally, measurement is generally easiest in the controlled setting
of the laboratory; participants can more easily be kept within range, and various
technological devices can aid the human eye.
The studies of maternal teaching can serve as one example of the laboratory
approach. There is, in fact, a substantial literature directed to how mothers (and
in some studies fathers) teach various tasks to their children. An early and typi-
cal example is provided by a study by Pratt and colleagues (Pratt, Kerig, Cowan,
& Cowan, 1988). The 3-year-old child participants in the study visited the labo-
ratory on two occasions, once with their mother and once with their father. On
both occasions the child attempted to complete three tasks with the parent’s
help: creating a structure with blocks that matched a model, placement of pieces
in a matrix to produce a particular array, and telling a story that the experimenter
had told to the child in the parent’s absence. As in most such studies, both paren-
tal teaching and child success showed marked individual differences. The most
adaptive form of teaching was one that was adjusted to the child’s level of suc-
cess, providing additional help when the child was struggling but pulling back
and encouraging independent performance when the child was doing well. The
46 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
measure style, they presented the five common disciplinary situations shown in
Box 3.1. The response format was open-ended; the parent indicated how she either
had responded or would respond to the misbehavior, and these responses were
later coded into various categories (e.g., discussion of how the child would feel,
reprimand, or punishment). As we will see in Chapter 4, it was the focus on feel-
ings that appeared most conducive to the development of belief understanding.
As noted, the open-ended response format is not the only measurement
option. In some studies various possible response alternatives are presented, and
subjects then choose among those possibilities. Our second example of a verbal-
report study will illustrate this approach, as well as provide an example in which
children rather than parents serve as the informants.
The example is drawn from a study by Lamborn and colleagues (Lamborn,
Mounts, Steinberg, & Dornbusch, 1991). The starting point for the research was
the Baumrind work on child rearing discussed earlier. As we saw, Baumrind used
Note. From “How Parenting Style Affects False Belief Understanding,” by T. Ruffman,
J. Perner, and L. Parkin, 1999, Social Development, 8, pp. 410–411. Copyright 1999 by John
Wiley & Sons, Inc. Reprinted with permission.
48 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
in ways different from the way that the researcher uses the terms. Or parents
may simply forget what it is that they do or used to do with their child. As we
would expect, memory problems are especially likely when the measures are
retrospective—t hat is, when they concern socialization practices from some ear-
lier period in the child’s life (Yarrow, Campbell, & Burton, 1970). Reports that
date back several years may tell us something of interest about parents’ mem-
ory of their parenting; they are dubious sources, however, for actual parental
practices.
Determining Causality
Correlation and causality. One of the truisms that psychology students learn early
in their studies—and then often relearn and relearn—is that correlation does not
imply causality. There is probably no topic for which it is more important to keep this
principle in mind than the topic of parenting. The great majority of parenting studies
are correlational. They are correlational because the independent variable of interest,
namely parental behavior, is not experimentally manipulated or controlled; rather it
is simply measured. The outcome of interest, child behavior, is also measured, and
50 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
the analyses then look for a correlation between the two sets of scores. A positive cor-
relation is compatible with the hypothesis that the parental behavior contributes to
the child outcome. The problem, however—and the reason that such a causal conclu-
sion cannot be drawn with certainty—is that a positive correlation is also compatible
with three other explanations.
One is that the causal direction is the reverse—t hus not from parent to child
but from child to parent. Suppose we find, for example (as research in fact does
find), that relatively high use of physical punishment by parents correlates with
relatively high levels of aggression in children. It may be that physical punishment
promotes aggression (perhaps, for example, by providing a model of aggressive
behavior). But it may also be that aggressive children elicit physical punishment
from their parents. Such children may in general be difficult to control, and the
parent may have tried and abandoned milder disciplinary strategies before resort-
ing to the use of physical punishment.
The parent-to-child and child-to-parent models each posit a single causal
direction. A third possibility is that the causality runs in both directions—t hat
over time the parent’s behavior affects the child and the child’s behavior affects
the parent in a back-and-forth, reciprocal fashion. Thus physical punishment may
indeed promote aggression; the high level of aggression, however, then provokes
still more punishment, which in turn leads to still more aggression, and so on.
Many researchers believe that such a “transactional” model (Sameroff, 2009) may
apply to the majority of parent–child correlations.
The three possibilities considered to this point address what is known as the
“directionality issue”: We assume that there is a causal relation between parent
and child; the question is in what direction the causality runs. A final possibil-
ity, generally labeled the “third factor issue,” is that there is no causal relation
at all between parental practice and child outcome; both are caused by some
third factor or set of factors. In the case of physical punishment and aggression,
for example, it may be that parents who are high in the use of punishment are
also high in whatever the genes are that underlie aggression; they pass these
genes on to their children, and this is the reason that the children are high in
aggression.
Although shared genes are not the only possible third-factor explanation
for parent–child correlations, they may be the most generally applicable one.
Parents contribute only some of the child’s environment, but they contribute all
of the child’s genes. A major argument in J. R. Harris’s book (1998) The Nurture
Assumption is that most parent–child correlations from childrearing research are
better interpreted as genetic than as environmental in origin.
Ways to make causal inferences more certain. Researchers have, of course,
always been aware of the provisional nature of any causal conclusions from child-
rearing correlations. It seems to fair to say, however, that recent years have seen
an increased sensitivity to the issue, spurred not only by The Nurture Assumption
Pa r e n t i n g 51
but also by the strong claims of genetic effects that have emerged from some
work in behavior genetics (e.g., Rowe, 1994). In themselves, correlational data
cannot establish causality; the challenge, therefore, is to identify related forms
of research that can make the causal inferences from such data more certain.
Table 3.2 summarizes the main possibilities. The table is adapted from a similar
table in Miller (2012a), which in turn was based in large part on an article by
Collins et al. (2000).
The approaches in Table 3.2 fall into three categories. The first two entries
are directed to the issue of third-factor explanations. The adoption design rules
out one major third factor: the genes that parents and children typically share.
Statistical controls (which in modern research extend to elaborate, conceptually
based models) can rule out a variety of third-factor possibilities more generally.
The next two entries speak to the directionality issue. Both make use of the fact
that causes must precede their effects; thus if we can trace the relations between
A and B over time, we can derive evidence as to which is acting as the cause and
which is the effect. Sequential analysis looks at immediate, moment-by-moment
contingencies, whereas longitudinal study traces more macro, across- time
relations.
The possibilities discussed so far represent various ways to overcome the lack
of experimental control that defines correlational research. The three remaining
entries in Table 3.2 go further, in that they replace the correlational approach with
an experimental one—and thus manipulate rather than simply measure parental
behavior. Doing so is not easy (if it were easy, we would know much more about
parenting than we do), and each of the approaches suffers from various limita-
tions. Thus animal research offers the broadest possibilities with respect to experi-
mental control, but with the risk that findings may be species-specific and may not
generalize to humans. In addition, there are many outcomes of interest in human
development for which there is simply no analog in animal behavior (including
most aspects of theory of mind). Interventions with human parents address the
target group of interest; such interventions, however, are limited in scope and also
are necessarily in one direction only (no researcher deliberately makes parenting
worse). Finally, analog studies can demonstrate that some socialization practices
(modeling, reasoning, punishment, etc.) can have particular effects; the lab dem-
onstration, however, does not tell us whether the practice does have the effect in
the natural environment of the home.
The points just made provide a context for one of the basic principles in
research methodology: the principle of converging operations. The term converg-
ing operations refers to the use, either within or across studies, of a variety of dif-
ferent methods of studying a particular topic. The basic idea is that the strengths
of one method can, to at least some extent, compensate for the weaknesses of
another method, and that conclusions based on a convergence of evidence from
different methods can be held with greater certainty than can conclusions based
on one method alone. In the present case, both correlational and experimental
approaches to the study of parenting have their limitations. To the extent that
conclusions from the two approaches converge, however—and, as we will see, in
many instances they do converge—we can be more certain that parenting really
does have an effect.
Pa r e n t i n g 53
Guiding Theories
A first change concerns dominant theories. Through at least the midpoint of the
twentieth century, two theories directed most research on childrearing: Freudian
theory and various versions of learning theory. The result was a concentration
on a fairly narrow range of parental practices—method of feeding in infancy, for
Change Description
In dominant theories The initial preeminence of psychoanalytic and
learning theory has given way to an eclectic mixture
of more domain-specific approaches.
Increased cognitive In contrast to earlier work, both parental and child
emphasis cognitions are seen as important contributors to
parental practices and their effects.
Wider range of social An initial emphasis on the mother has been
agents broadened by a fuller consideration of other social
agents, including fathers and peers.
Increased emphasis on An initial unidirectional model of parent-to-child
child-to-parent effects effects has been replaced by a more reciprocal
conception that acknowledges two-way causal
influences.
Increased emphasis on The strongly environmentalist approach that
genes directed earlier research has been replaced by a
more balanced model of the interplay of genes and
environment.
Increased emphasis on Contemporary work recognizes that any given
context parental practice cannot be studied in isolation
but rather must be placed in the context of other
practices, other agents, the specific situation, and the
general ecological setting.
54 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
example, or method of toilet training in toddlerhood. The result was also a con-
centration on the first 4 or 5 years of life as the most important time for parental
influence and the child’s eventual developmental course.
Freudian and learning theory positions retain some influence today, per-
haps especially in work with clinical populations. For general research on
child rearing, however, they have long since receded in importance. In their
place have come more domain-specific approaches, that is, models that are
less sweeping in scope but rather concentrate on particular aspects of develop-
ment. For work on attachment, for example, Bowlby’s ethological theory (e.g.,
Bowlby, 1969) is easily the most influential position. For work with a cogni-
tive focus, such as the studies of parental teaching discussed earlier, Vygotsky’s
sociocultural theory (e.g., Vygotsky, 1978) is the most likely theoretical basis.
Work that examines the family as a system is often grounded, not surprisingly,
in developmental systems theory (Lerner, Rothbaum, Boulos, & Castellino,
2002). The general result of this change in theoretical grounding has been
an expansion of parenting research along several dimensions: in the range of
parental practices that are considered to affect development, in the range of
child outcomes that are addressed, and in the settings and time periods that
are seen as being important.
that we would expect with both parental behavior and child outcome—t hat is,
relatively advanced cognitions are associated with more effective parental prac-
tices and better developmental outcomes.
Just as conceptions of the parent have grown more cognitive, so have concep-
tions of the child. Early work on parenting was remarkably nondevelopmental,
in that there was little concern with how parenting an adolescent might differ
from parenting a preschooler. This, too, is no longer the case. Contemporary
approaches recognize that the effects of any given parental behavior depend on
how the child interprets the behavior and that older children will bring different
cognitive resources to this task than will younger children (Grusec & Goodnow,
1994). Just as there are developmental differences in response to parental prac-
tices so are there individual differences, and the same practice may be interpreted
in different ways and have different effects for different children. This point speaks
to one of the surprising findings from work in behavior genetics, the phenomenon
known as nonshared environment. Nonshared environment refers to the fact that
experiences within the family seem to operate primarily to make siblings differ-
ent rather than similar. Part of the explanation for this finding is that siblings in
fact experience different environments, including different parental practices.
Part of the explanation, however, is that siblings may interpret the same parental
practice differently.
A final sense in which contemporary research on parenting has grown more
cognitive concerns the child outcomes of interest. Earlier work on parenting was
skewed heavily toward social outcomes—aggression, moral behavior, sex typing,
and so forth. Two factors probably account for this emphasis. First, these were the
outcomes that were stressed in the dominant theories of the time that inspired
most studies of parenting. Neither Freudian theory nor learning theory had much
to say about children’s cognitive development, and the research they inspired also
had little to say.
The second reason that social outcomes outstripped cognitive ones stemmed
from the focus of childrearing research on individual differences. Such a focus is
inherent in the correlational approach: If we wish to determine whether differ-
ences in parental practices are important, we must have differences in children’s
development to which we can relate the differences among parents. The literatures
on children’s social development (attachment, aggression, sex differences, etc.)
are natural objects for such study, for these literatures are awash in individual dif-
ferences. In contrast, the dominant cognitive approach for much of the twentieth
century, that of Piaget, stressed commonalities among children rather than differ-
ences. To a significant extent, the information-processing approach that eventu-
ally challenged Piaget also concentrated on basic developments that are common
to all children. Furthermore, neither approach had much to say about how parents
might contribute to the relatively minor differences (mainly in rate of develop-
ment) that research revealed.
56 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
are a good deal more important than parents with respect to children’s long-term
development. This is a point to which we will return.
Conclusions About Parenting
I opened this chapter by citing Judith Harris’s (1998) claim that parenting has
not been shown to have any long-term effects on children’s development. The first
conclusion I offer is that contemporary research makes clear that this claim is not
correct. It is true that effects of parenting are often weaker or less certain or more
qualified than had long been assumed. But a convergence of evidence, including
all the forms discussed in Table 3.3, tells us that parenting does make a difference.
The rest of this chapter addresses exactly how it does.
Parenting Styles
The previous section ended with a discussion of the importance of context. Such
a discussion provides a good lead-in to the topic of parenting styles. The central
notion of the concept of style is that any particular parental practice or charac-
teristic can be interpreted only in the context of all the ways in which that parent
interacts with the child. It is the overall patterning of parenting, and not just the
Pa r e n t i n g 59
individual elements, that is important. In the words of Morris et al. (2013, p. 49),
“the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.”
It was the research by Diana Baumrind (1967, 1971) discussed earlier that
introduced the concept of parenting styles. Four general styles emerged from the
original Baumrind studies and subsequent follow-ups and analyses (e.g., Maccoby
& Martin, 1983). The styles vary along the dimensions of warmth/responsiveness
and control/involvement. The authoritative style is relatively high on both dimen-
sions, and the uninvolved style is relatively low on both. The remaining two styles
present an opposite pattern of highs and lows. The authoritarian style is high on
control but low on warmth. The permissive style is high on warmth but low on
control. Figure 3.1 provides a pictorial summary of the four styles.
This summary does not capture all of the aspects of the different styles. Both
authoritative and authoritarian are high in control; the method of exerting
control, however, shows important differences between the two styles. In the
authoritative style the firm control occurs in the context of a generally warm and
supportive relationship, with an emphasis on reasoning and discussion rather
than rigid imposition of parental power. In the authoritarian style, discussion and
negotiation are less likely; rather, the strong control is exerted primarily through
the greater power of the parent.
The goal of the Baumrind research was not simply to identify differences
among parents but also to relate the differences to variations in children’s devel-
opment. There turned out to be clear relations. In general, the authoritative style
was associated with the most positive outcomes on a number of measures of
social and cognitive competence; each of the other styles worked out less suc-
cessfully, although the specific ways in which they did so varied across the styles.
Table 3.4, which is adapted from Parke and Clarke-Stewart (2011), summarizes
some of the differences that research has shown (which, of course, should be
Warmth/Responsiveness
High Low
High
Authoritative Authoritarian
Control
Low
Permissive Uninvolved
Note. Adapted from Social Development (pp. 217–218), by R. D. Parke and A. Clarke-Stewart, 2011,
New York, NY: Wiley. Copyright 2011 by John Wiley & Sons. Adapted with permission.
recognized as on-t he-average effects that do not apply in every case). These find-
ings have emerged across a range of samples, a range of ages, and a variety of ways
of measuring parenting style.
As Table 3.4 suggests, research on parenting styles, like most parenting
research, has been skewed toward aspects of children’s social development. Effects
are not limited to the social domain, however. The original Baumrind research
Pa r e n t i n g 61
Variations Across Groups
The sample for the original Baumrind research was upper-m iddle-class White
families. Middle-class Whites have constituted the samples for a substantial pro-
portion of childrearing studies. An important question, therefore, is whether the
same conclusions emerge when other demographic groups are the focus of study.
The answer turns out to be mostly but not totally (Sorkhabi & Mandara, 2013).
A variety of different groups have now been studied, including those from
other cultures (especially Asian cultures) and those from subgroups within the
United States (e.g., African Americans, Asian Americans, Hispanic Americans).
In general, the authoritative style has been shown to be beneficial across all of
these various populations, again with respect to a variety of developmental out-
comes. On the other hand, the benefits of authoritative rearing, as well as the
superiority of this style to other forms of parenting, are less consistently found
and are sometimes less marked in populations other than the middle-income
Whites with whom this research began. In addition, conclusions about another
of the styles, authoritarian rearing, change in two ways when a broader range of
populations is taken into account.
A first change concerns frequency. The authoritarian pattern is more com-
mon in many groups than is the case for White samples. This is true for African
American and Asian American samples in the United States, as well as for samples
of Chinese parents (Parke & Buriel, 2006). Two factors, either alone or in combi-
nation, appear to account for this difference. One is cultural beliefs and values. In
China, for example, family unity and respect for older adults are central goals of
socialization, and parental concern for children may be expressed more through
close supervision and frequent teaching than through displays of overt affection.
Many African American families in the United States place a similar emphasis on
communal values, respect for parents, and close control of children’s activities.
The second factor is economic and personal necessity. For families living in
dangerous neighborhoods and under conditions of poverty, reasoning with the
62 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
child and encouraging independence may be risky luxuries. Firm and immediate
control may be a higher priority and may in fact make more sense for the welfare
of the child (Furstenberg, 1993).
This last point suggests that in some circumstances the authoritarian style might
actually be beneficial for children’s development. And this leads to the second way
in which conclusions about authoritarian rearing have been found to vary across
groups. Although an extreme standing on this dimension is probably not optimal
in any context, the authoritarian style has been shown to be beneficial—or at least
not detrimental—in several contexts: for African American and Asian American
samples in the United States (Chao & Tseng, 2002; Lamborn, Dornbusch, &
Steinberg, 1996), for Chinese families in Hong Kong (Chao & Tseng, 2002), and
for families living in poverty (Baldwin, Baldwin, & Cole, 1990).
The work just discussed illustrates the importance of context in another
sense: namely, the ecological context within which the family is nested. The
leading theory in this regard has long been Bronfenbrenner’s (1979) ecologi-
cal systems theory. As Figure 3.2 shows, Bronfenbrenner’s model envisions a
MACROSYSTEM
Attitudes and ideologies of the culture
EXOSYSTEM
Extended family
MESOSYSTEM
MICROSYSTEM
Friends of
Neighbors
family Family School
CHILD
Sex
Health
Age Peers
services
Health
etc.
Church Neighborhood
Mass group play area Legal
media services
Social welfare
services
Figure 3.2 Bronfenbrenner’s ecological systems theory. Note. From: Kopp, Claire B. and
Krakow, Joanne B., The Child: Development in Social Context, 1st Ed. Copyright 1982. Printed and
electronically reproduced by permission of Pearson Education, Inc., New York, New York.
Pa r e n t i n g 63
There are also on-t he-average differences between spouses in how the time
with children is used, with fathers spending proportionally more of their time
in play, especially physical forms of play, than do mothers. Although this pat-
tern has been found across a number of different cultures, it is important to note
that it is not universal, for there are some settings in which no such differences
are evident. It is also important to note that fathers’ relatively low engagement
in traditional caregiving activities (feeding, changing, dressing) does not imply
an inability to perform these functions; the evidence indicates that in most
instances fathers are just as skilled as mothers (Parke, 2002). Thus fathers can be
all-purpose caregivers for their children; most, however, perform this role less
often than do mothers.
Most of the work on parenting styles has focused on mothers. Baumrind’s
studies, however, included fathers, and she reported that mothers and fathers
matched in style in 76% of the cases (Baumrind, 1991). More generally, research
with fathers reveals that the same contrasts among parenting styles and the
same effects of the different styles are evident as is true for mothers (Marsiglio,
Amato, Day, & Lamb, 2000). In particular, authoritative parenting by fathers has
been shown to be beneficial for a range of developmental outcomes, again both
social (e.g., fewer behavioral problems, increased self-esteem) and cognitive (e.g.,
enhanced performance in school). More generally, involvement of the father in
the child’s development is clearly beneficial; children with resident fathers fare
better on the average than those without a father in the home, and within the for-
mer group those whose fathers are actively engaged in the child’s socialization
fare better than those who lack such active involvement.
The contemporary interest in the family as a system suggests that mothers and
fathers need to be studied not just separately but also in combination. One finding
that emerges from a joint consideration of both parents was touched on earlier.
The quality of the relationship between the parents relates to the quality of chil-
dren’s development: the more positive the relationship, the better the develop-
ment (Cummings & Merrilees, 2010). Various factors probably contribute to this
finding, including the fact that parents in a conflicted relationship are less likely
to adopt an optimal childrearing style.
The quality of the parental relationship overlaps with another construct: that
of coparenting. As the term suggests, coparenting refers to how parents work
together—or perhaps fail to work together—as they rear their children. Three
general patterns have been identified (McHale, 2010). The cooperative pattern
is characterized by a cohesive, harmonious, child-centered approach to parent-
ing; the hostile pattern reflects a more competitive, adult-centered approach in
which the parents compete for the child’s loyalty; and the unbalanced pattern is
characterized by an imbalance in the division of labor, with one parent devoting
considerably more time and energy to the task of parenting than the other. Not
surprisingly, it is the cooperative pattern that is associated with the most positive
Pa r e n t i n g 65
Boys and Girls
In what ways does parenting of boys differ from parenting of girls? In fewer
ways than many people believe, at least according to some early reviews of the
topic. One conclusion from Maccoby and Jacklin’s (1974) The Psychology of Sex
Differences was of a “surprising degree of similarity in the rearing of boys and girls”
(p. 362). A subsequent meta-analysis by Lytton and Romney (1991) reached a
similar conclusion. Of the eight domains of socialization addressed in the review
(e.g., amount of interaction, encouragement of dependency, disciplinary strict-
ness), only one showed a significant difference in how the sexes were treated: the
category of encouragement of sex-t yped activities. It is important also to remem-
ber that differential treatment of boys and girls does not in itself establish the
causal direction for the relation. It may be that parents are responding to rather
than creating differences in their children.
Contemporary views of gender socialization attribute a stronger role to par-
ents than these earlier summaries, while acknowledging that parental behavior
is hardly the only explanation for gender differences in development. A variety
of kinds of evidence, however, indicate that parental behavior is almost certainly
one of the explanations (Eagly & Wood, 2013; Leaper, 2002). Here I single
out three of the most general ways in which parents can contribute to gender
differences.
One is the form of differential treatment identified by Lytton and Romney
(1991): encouragement of sex-typed activities. Included in this category was
encouragement of different kinds of toys and play (e.g., dolls vs. blocks), as well
as allocation of different chores or responsibilities around the house. As numer-
ous commentators have pointed out, seemingly trivial distinctions between the
sexes in such matters may have a much broader impact on children’s development.
It is possible, for example, that boys’ average superiority in spatial skills has its
origin in their extensive experience playing with blocks and other construction
materials.
A second area in which parents may contribute to gender differences is aca-
demic expectations and aspirations. Lytton and Romney (1991) concluded
that parents did not socialize boys and girls differently either for achievement
in general or for mathematics achievement in particular. More recent research
has reached a different conclusion. In particular, research by Jacquelynne
Eccles and colleagues (Eccles, Freedman-Doan, Frome, Jacobs, & Yoon,
2000) has shown that parents tend to hold lower expectations for girls’ ability
in math than for boys’ ability, even though there are no gender differences in
66 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
math performance in the early school years. Over time, these expectations
are transmitted to their daughters, the girls’ own expectations for and inter-
est in math decline, and their performance in math begins to lag behind that
of boys. Evidence exists for a similar phenomenon in the domain of science
(Tenenbaum & Leaper, 2003).
A third way in which parents may promote differences between the sexes is
through the way they talk to children. A meta-a nalysis by Leaper, Anderson,
and Sanders (1998) identified a number of on-the-average differences in
mothers’ speech with daughters compared to their speech with sons (studies
with fathers were too infrequent to include in the analysis). The differences,
I should note, varied some across age levels and across settings. In general,
however, mothers talked more to daughters than to sons, they used more sup-
portive statements with daughters than with sons, and they were more direc-
tive (more imperatives, more direct suggestions) with daughters than with
sons. These differences, the researchers suggested, seemed to have the goal—
and might well have the effect—of socializing different outcomes in the two
sexes: interpersonal closeness for daughters, autonomy and independence
for sons.
One specific finding under the parental-talk heading is worth singling out.
Parents tend to talk more about emotions to daughters than to sons, especially the
negative emotion of sadness (Fivush & Buckner, 2000). Girls’ greater willingness
to talk about and share emotions may stem at least in part from these early conver-
sational experiences. In any case, the emotion-talk findings make the point that
some ways in which parents treat boys and girls differently may be both subtle and
quite unconscious on the parents’ part.
I conclude this discussion of differential socialization with two general points.
The first is that this literature sometimes, although by no means always, shows
gender differences at both the adult and the child level. When gender differences
occur at the adult level, it is usually fathers who are more likely to treat boys and
girls differently. When differences occur at the child level, it is usually boys who
receive more pressure to adhere to the gender-t ypical role.
The second point is that boys and girls may differ in two ways in their
socialization experiences. One way—which has been the focus of the present
section—is that they may receive different socialization experiences. The other
way is that they may be affected differently by the same experience. Work on
parenting styles provides an example of this latter point. Although authoritar-
ian rearing is clearly not optimal for either boys or girls, the negative effects
of such rearing are in general greater for boys than they are for girls (Parke &
Buriel, 2006). This finding is one of a number of instances in which boys seem
to be more vulnerable to adverse experiences than are girls. Boys, for exam-
ple, are more affected by single parenthood, poverty, and divorce than are girls
(Bugental & Grusec, 2006).
Pa r e n t i n g 67
Parents and Peers
That peers can be important socialization agents is, as I said, not in dispute. Here
I concentrate on what we know about the interplay of the peer and parent social
worlds.
One issue under this heading concerns the relative importance of peers and
parents. As we saw, this is an issue on which J. R. Harris (1995, 1998) made a
strong claim. In her words, “the home environment has no lasting effects on
psychological characteristics. The shared environment that leaves permanent
marks on children’s personalities is the environment they share with their
peers” (J. R. Harris, 1995, p. 483).
While admitting the importance of peers, most developmental psychologists
would offer several amendments to this conclusion. One is that the importance
of peers—as well as the relative importance of peers and parents—varies across
different aspects of development. There is no doubt that that peers can be impor-
tant for immediate life-style choices (e.g., what clothes to wear, what music to
listen to). There is also no doubt that in some instances peers can influence more
important decisions, including decisions in a negative direction. Indeed, all
of the potential behavioral problems of adolescence (smoking, drinking, drug
use, violence, premarital sex) have been shown to be subject to peer influence
(Dishion & Tipsord, 2011). Nevertheless, for the broadest and most important
developmental outcomes (educational orientation, occupational aspirations,
religious commitment) research supports two general conclusions (Berndt,
Miller, & Park, 1989; Sebald, 1989; Steinberg & Morris, 2001). First, for most
children the views of peers and the views of parents are more in accord than they
are in conflict. Second, when conflicts do occur, it is usually the views of the
parents that win out.
A second amendment to Harris’s conclusion is related. It is that effects of peers
cannot be evaluated without also taking into account the parents, for the two
social worlds are far from independent. It is not a coincidence, for example, that
the values of peers and the values of parents tend to be in accord; parents are one
determinant of the peers with whom the child associates. Children vary in how
susceptible they are to peer influence, and parents are one determinant of how
susceptible the child is. Finally and more generally, parents are one determinant
of the child’s success in the peer group—how popular the child is, the number and
quality of the child’s friendships.
Parents can affect their children’s peer relationships in various ways. One
way begins very early in development, before most children have even begun
to interact with peers. The quality of attachment to the parents in infancy is
a predictor of later peer relations (Booth-L aForce & Kerns, 2009; Schneider,
Atkinson, & Tardif, 2001). Children with a secure attachment show more
social competence in their interactions with peers, they are more likely to form
68 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
E1 E2 E3 E4
C1 C2 C3 C4
Domains of Socialization
The term domain refers to distinct areas of development or (in adulthood) distinct
areas of psychological functioning. Depending on the theorist’s interests, there
are various ways to divide the psychological realm into domains, and a number of
different domain models have been proposed. In this section I consider the most
general domain model in the parenting literature, a conceptualization first offered
by Bugental and Goodnow (1998) and subsequently elaborated in a number of
publications (Bugental, 2000; Bugental & Grusec, 2006; Grusec, 2011; Grusec &
Davidov, 2010, 2015). For another interesting, although more narrowly focused,
approach to domains of parenting, see Smetana (1997).
The particular domains that are discussed vary somewhat across the sources
listed in the preceding paragraph, in part simply with respect to terminology but
also in part substantively. My discussion is based on the classification of domains
in Grusec (2011) and Grusec and Davidov (2010, 2015). Table 3.5 provides an
overview of the five domains that these articles discuss. The following passage
from Grusec summarizes some of the essential elements of the domain approach:
As this passage indicates, the domain approach identifies yet another way in
which context is important in the study of parenting. The particular parental prac-
tices that are optimal vary across domains, and a practice that works well in one
context (e.g., soothing distress in the protection domain) may be less effective
in another context (e.g., eliciting compliance in the control domain). Similarly,
a parent who is relatively successful at the tasks of one domain (e.g., achieving
disciplinary goals in the control domain) may be less successful at other aspects of
parenting (e.g., teaching effectively in the guided learning domain). Researchers,
therefore, should not expect to find across-the-board relations that identify
“good” parents or “good” practices, for what is good may vary from one context
to another.
The preceding does not mean that parenting consists solely of a number of iso-
lated areas with no interconnections. Many socialization encounters may involve
more than one domain. A mother, for example, might both comfort her upset child
Pa r e n t i n g 73
(an aspect of the protection domain) and simultaneously teach the child how to
self-regulate her emotions (an aspect of the guided learning domain). A parent
might prohibit some behavior that a child wishes to engage in (thus operating
in the control domain) and at the same time shield the child from harm if the
behavior is a potentially dangerous one (thus activating the protection domain).
In some instances interaction in one domain may lead immediately to a need
to deal with another domain. For example, an episode of mutually agreed upon
mother–child play (the reciprocity domain) might lead to a temper tantrum when
the mother says that the play must end, thus requiring both behaviors to termi-
nate the tantrum (the control domain) and behaviors to comfort the upset child
(the protection domain).
A further qualifier is that the notion of domains does not mean that everything
is context-specific and therefore that there are no overall differences in quality
either among parents or among parental practices. We have already seen that
research confirms what everyday observation suggests: that some parents are in
general more skilled at the task of parenting than are others. One contributor to
such variations in parenting success is that some parents are better at reading their
children’s needs and at matching their behaviors to the domain in question than
are others, and it is those parents whose children generally have the most satisfac-
tory developmental outcomes. Similarly, while some parental practices may be
domain-specific, others, if appropriately applied, can be valuable techniques of
socialization across a number of different domains. We consider one such prac-
tice, the use of reasoning, in the next section.
Return to Practices
In a recent review, Morris et al. (2013) identify three trends in parenting research.
Two of the trends I have already discussed: understanding child effects on parent-
ing and placing parenting in a broader social context. The third trend they refer to
as the “unpacking of parenting styles.” As we saw, the core notion of the construct
of parenting style is that parental practices need to be considered in context and
not simply in isolation. Nevertheless, many researchers believe that some prac-
tices are important enough and pervasive enough to deserve attention in their
own right—hence the “unpacking.” Here I consider three practices that have been
the focus of a good deal of study.
Reasoning. One is reasoning. The general conclusion here is clear: Reasoning
is an effective technique of discipline. As with any general statement about
parenting, however, this conclusion comes with a number of “it-depends”
qualifiers.
A first qualifier is that the child must be able to understand the reasoning. There
are, then, clear developmental constraints—no one reasons with a 6-month-old.
In general, the effectiveness of reasoning increases with age, and the complexity
of the reasoning to which the child can respond increases with age. Nevertheless,
74 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
As its title indicates, this chapter discusses the relation between broad, general
approaches to parenting and children’s theory of mind. It is therefore the chapter
that maps most closely onto the material considered in Chapter 3. The remaining
chapters focus on more specific aspects of the parenting–t heory of mind relation.
This chapter is divided into four sections. It begins with one of the major top-
ics of Chapter 3, parenting styles. Because a full assessment of styles is rare in the
literature, this section also considers studies that have examined at least one of
the dimensions that define styles—for example, warmth or control.
Not all general approaches to parenting fall under the styles/d imensions head-
ing. The second section of the chapter considers a variety of other approaches that
fit the general but not the styles classification. A major topic under this heading is
parents’ socialization of emotion understanding.
The third section of the chapter addresses one of the topics considered in
Chapter 3: socioeconomic status (SES). We saw there that SES is associated
with on-t he-average effects in the general parenting literature; the question now
is whether similar effects emerge when theory of mind is the child outcome of
interest.
With SES, the variations across families are relatively minor. The final section
of the chapter discusses three more serious departures from the typical family
situation: the effects of forms of parenting that fall outside the scope of normal
and expectable variations in the parent–child relationship (e.g., physical abuse);
the effects of parental mental illness (e.g., depression, schizophrenia) on parent-
ing and on children’s development; and the effects on development when parents
are absent from the child’s early life, that is, the development of children in insti-
tutional settings.
77
78 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
A Few Preliminary Points
A first point is that all of the studies reviewed are correlational—that is, they
measure but do not experimentally manipulate parenting practices and child
outcomes. Because they are correlational, they cannot establish cause-and-effect
relations with certainty. The usual assumption—which is the usual assump-
tion in parenting research in general—is that significant correlations reflect the
effects of parental practices on children’s development. It is possible, however,
that the causal direction is the reverse—t hat it is children who are affecting their
parents. Perhaps, for example, children with relatively advanced theory-of-m ind
skills elicit particular kinds of treatment from their parents. This is a possibility
that is explicitly considered by several of the researchers whose work is reviewed
here (Guajardo, Snyder, & Petersen, 2009; Pears & Moses, 2003; Ruffman et al.,
1999). It is also possible that some third factor accounts for the parent–child
correlations. One possibility under this heading is shared genes: Perhaps rela-
tively intelligent parents favor particular parenting practices; these parents pass
intelligence-enhancing genes on to their children, and these children therefore
perform relatively well on cognitive measures, including theory of mind. If so, we
would have an effect of parents—not, however, of parenting.
Table 3.2 summarized various ways to address the directionality and third-
factor issues. The main possibilities in the former case are longitudinal and
experimental studies. This literature contains three longitudinal studies (Rohrer,
Cicchetti, Rogosch, Toth, & Maughan, 2011; Ruffman, Slade, Devitt, & Crowe,
2006; Symons & Clark, 2000); experimental studies have yet to appear. Statistical
controls for third-factor alternatives (e.g., parent education level) do appear in a
number of studies. The adoption design has not yet been used, however, and thus
shared genes remain a possible explanation for parent–child relations.
A second issue concerns measurement of parental practices. All three of the
general approaches to the measurement of parenting appear in the studies con-
sidered in this section: home observation, lab observation, and verbal report.
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 79
Table 4.1 Continued
Table 4.1 Continued
Study Child Child measures Parenting measures
participants
Ruffman 3- to 5-year-olds False belief SES, response to
et al. (1999) disciplinary situations
(self-report), scored as how
feel, general discussion,
reprimand, ambiguous
Ruffman 3- year-olds, False belief, Mental state talk, aspects
et al. (2006) followed desire and of parenting style: positive
longitudinally emotion affect, negative affect,
to age 5 understanding responsiveness, social skill,
teaching, control (scored
from lab observations)
Shahaeian Iranian 4-and Wellman and Liu Modified version of the
et al. (2014) 5-year-olds scale, additional Ruffman et al. (1999)
diverse desire questionnaire
and diverse belief
tasks
Symons 2-year-olds, False belief, Maternal emotional stress
& Clark followed including a (self-report), maternal
(2000) longitudinally caregiver- sensitivity when the child
to age 5 location form was 2 (scored from home
observations)
Vinden Korean- False belief, PAI—maternal
(2001) American affective attitudes re three
and Anglo- false belief, dimensions: autonomy-
American 3-, 4-, appearance- granting, strictness, attitude
and 5-year-olds reality toward learning (self-report)
The majority of studies, however, have used verbal report, and in this respect
they mirror the general parenting literature. The majority have also used a single
approach to measurement, although a few reports do provide a convergence of
methods within the same study (Guajardo et al. 2009; Hughes, Deater-Deckard,
& Cutting, 1999; Hughes & Ensor, 2006; Murray, Woolgar, Briers, & Hipwell,
1999). Finally, it is rare, even in reports that talk about parenting styles, to find a
full assessment and discussion of all four of the Baumrind styles. It is interesting,
in this respect, to note that a recent article by Baumrind (2013, p. 12) refers to
“definitional drift” in the conception and measurement of parenting styles. There
is certainly some drift in the studies considered here.
82 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
As Table 4.1 shows, the preschool period has been by far the most common
focus for research, and the false belief task has been by far the most common
developmental outcome. As other chapters will show, the literature as a whole
does include other age periods (although almost always younger rather than
older) and a wider range of theory-of mind outcomes; the present studies, how-
ever, are limited on both dimensions. A further point is that in all instances
the variations in false belief that are examined are variations in rate of devel-
opment, which, as noted in Chapter 2, is the usual approach to individual dif-
ferences in the theory-of-m ind literature. Thus in most of the studies to be
reviewed, relatively good theory of mind means relatively fast mastery of false
belief.
Concurrent Relations
The expectation underlying the work on parenting styles has been that the
authoritative style will be beneficial for theory-of-m ind development and that the
authoritarian style will be detrimental. This pattern is, of course, what has been
found across a range of outcomes in the general parenting literature. Most of this
research, it should be noted, has examined children’s compliance with parental
directives and thus falls under the control domain of socialization (Table 3.5). It
is not immediately clear that the same parental practices that result in compliance
will also nurture understanding of mental states. The domain-specificity of paren-
tal practices is, as we have seen, a general theme in writings about domains of
socialization (e.g., Grusec & Davidov, 2010). As noted in Chapter 3, however, the
subset of parenting style studies with cognitive outcomes have generally reported
authoritative-authoritarian differences that parallel those in the literature as a
whole (Gauvain et al., 2013).
Why might authoritative parenting nurture theory of mind whereas authoritar-
ian parenting fails do so? The most obvious explanation concerns the emphasis on
reasoning and discussion that characterizes the former but not the latter approach.
Ruffman et al. (1999) summarize the argument as follows: “Authoritarian parent-
ing is characterized by strict punishment and poor communication, but discus-
sion and communication must be the means by which mothers teach children
about others’ mental states if mothers are to play any role in this regard” (p. 396).
Vinden (2001) offers a similar argument while adding a point about the impor-
tance of the control dimension: “Authoritative parenting, by both providing
structure yet also encouraging the child’s autonomy, simultaneously offers the
child the parent’s perspective while acknowledging the child’s perspective. In
this way, the authoritative parent is constantly providing the child with oppor-
tunity to reflect on dual, and possibly conflicting, perspectives on the world”
(pp. 796–797). I will add that the warmth and responsiveness that characterize
the authoritative approach may also be important, for these qualities may increase
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 83
the probability that the child will attend to and be responsive to parental messages
(Darling & Steinberg, 1993).
Research provides some support for the expected benefits of the authoritative
approach (or at least aspects thereof) in comparison to an authoritarian style;
this conclusion comes, however, with a number of qualifications and exceptions.
Among the generally supportive sources are two of the reports cited in the preced-
ing paragraph: Ruffman et al. (1999) and Vinden (2001). The main finding of the
Ruffman et al. study (whose measurement of parental practices was summarized
in Box 3.1) was that maternal disciplinary responses that stressed the effects of
the child’s actions on the feelings of others (the How Feel category of discipline)
related positively to children’s understanding of false belief. The efficacy of such
responses fits with what we saw in Chapter 3 are general conclusions about the
value of other-oriented reasoning. In contrast, the General Discussion category
showed no relation to false belief success, and a relatively high use of Reprimand
related negatively to false belief understanding (although not significantly so
when other factors were controlled). In general, then, discussion and involvement
(two characteristics of the authoritative approach) appeared beneficial, but only
particular forms of discussion.
One further finding from the study is worth noting. Ruffman and colleagues
reported that How Feel responses were directed most frequently to the young-
est children within the study’s 3-to 5-year-old age span. Because the youngest
children were least likely to have mastered false belief, this finding suggests that
the How Feel responses were not elicited by the children’s relatively advanced
theory of mind; rather the causal direction for the correlation was from parent
to child.
Whereas the Ruffman et al. (1999) study reported positive effects of an aspect
of authoritative parenting, the Vinden (2001) study reported negative effects of
an aspect of the authoritarian style. Vinden’s measurement of parenting came
from an instrument constructed for the study: the Parenting Attitudes Inventory,
or PAI. The PAI assesses attitudes with respect to three dimensions relevant to
the authoritative–authoritarian distinction: encouragement of autonomy (e.g., “I
like to see a child have opinions and express them, even to an adult”), behavioral
control (e.g., “Children should do as they are told without questioning their par-
ents”), and freedom in learning (e.g., “It’s OK if my child tries to do things on his
own”). For the Anglo American families in the study there was a negative relation
between mothers’ endorsement of behavioral control and children’s theory-of-
mind understanding. As expected, therefore, an authoritarian approach to parent-
ing appeared to have a negative impact on theory-of-m ind development. Results
for the Korean American families, however, differed in two ways from those for
the Anglo families. First, the Korean American mothers ranked higher in authori-
tarianism than did the Anglo mothers. And second, there was no relation between
authoritarian parenting and theory of mind for the Korean American families.
84 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Both findings, it should be clear, mirror conclusions from the general parenting
literature: Asian parents often score higher on measures of authoritarianism than
do Western parents, and authoritarianism is less likely to have detrimental effects
in Asian samples than in Western samples.
Follow-ups of the Ruffman et al. (1999) and Vinden (2001) studies provide
both some support for their general conclusions and some amendments. Using a
modified version of Vinden’s PAI, O’Reilly and Peterson (2014) reported effects
of parenting in both directions: a positive relation between authoritative parent-
ing and theory of mind, and a negative relation between authoritarian parenting
and theory of mind. Using a modified version of the Ruffman et al. questionnaire
and coding system, Shahaeian, Nielsen, Peterson, & Slaughter (2014) reported
that the Discuss category related positively to theory of mind and that a category
labeled Silence related negatively. They also found that the How Feel category,
although not often used by their Iranian sample, related positively to children’s
understanding of false belief. Finally, Lewis and colleagues (Lewis, Huang, &
Rooksby, 2006), working with a Chinese sample, reported no relation between
response to a slightly modified version of the Ruffman et al. (1999) questionnaire
and children’s false belief performance (performance that lagged behind that typ-
ical in Western samples). This, then, may be another case in which a pattern found
in Western samples does not generalize to Asian cultures. On the other hand, the
variability in both the parents’ responses and the children’s false belief perfor-
mance was low, and restriction of range is therefore another possible explanation
for the negative results.
The restriction-of-range argument may apply more generally to the studies
reviewed in this section. Ruffman et al. (2006) offer restriction of range as a pos-
sible explanation for their failure to find any relation between their measure of
parenting practices (with a special emphasis on warmth) and theory-of-m ind
development. As they note, their sample consisted primarily of middle-and
upper-income families, and parental practices were skewed toward the optimal
end of the dimensions measured. A somewhat different restriction-of-range
problem may account for the absence of significant results in Holmes-Lonergan
(2003), another study to report no relations between parental practices and child
performance. In Holmes-Lonergan’s sample of Head Start children and mothers,
approximately 75% of the maternal disciplinary responses (as reported by the
children) fell into the Power Assertion category.
That a relatively high use of power assertion can often be detrimental is clear
from other studies. We saw in Chapter 3 that this is a general conclusion from
the parenting literature, a conclusion that comes primarily from studies of behav-
ioral compliance but that also extends to work with cognitive outcomes (Pears
& Moses, 2003). In research with theory of mind as the outcome a number of
studies have reported negative effects of a relatively high use of power assertive
or harsh forms of discipline (Hughes et al., 1999; Hughes & Ensor, 2006; Olson,
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 85
Lopez-Duran, Lunkenheimer, Chang, & Sameroff, 2011; Pears & Moses, 2003;
Rohrer et al., 2011). This finding holds across several different outcome measures
and several different ways of measuring parental behavior. Conversely, relatively
high levels of parental warmth or parental empathy have emerged as a facilita-
tive factor in a number of reports (Cahill, Deater-Deckard, Pike, & Hughes, 2007;
Farrant, Devine, Maybery, & Fletcher, 2012; Olson et al., 2011). The Farrant
et al. (2012) study also found that mothers’ encouragement of perspective taking
related positively to children’s theory-of-m ind understanding, a finding compat-
ible with the value of How Feel responses reported by Ruffman et al. (1999).
On the other hand, and as is often true in parenting research, these conclu-
sions are accompanied by various exceptions and complications. In the Hughes
et al. (1999) study, the effects of parental practices varied with the sex of the
child. For girls, relatively high parental warmth was associated with good per-
formance on a battery of theory-of-m ind tasks. For boys, there was no effect of
parental warmth; rather, severity of discipline (high use of physical control and
criticism) related positively to theory-of-m ind performance. The finding for girls
is, of course, expectable, but that for boys is not. The authors make the intriguing,
although admittedly speculative, suggestion that the sex difference may be in part
child-d riven: that girls may use their budding theory-of-m ind skills to build affec-
tionate relationships with their parents, whereas boys use their skills in a testing-
the-l imits fashion that often results in parental discipline. This suggestion clearly
requires further testing.
The Hughes et al. (1999) study is not the only report of an unexpectedly ben-
eficial effect of power-assertive discipline. Pears and Moses (2003) examined
relations between power assertion (as determined from mothers’ reports of their
typical methods of discipline) and various measures of their children’s theory-
of-m ind understanding. When false belief was the outcome, power assertion
related negatively to children’s understanding, a conclusion that emerged from
both correlational and regression analyses. When understanding of emotions was
the outcome, however, the direction of the relation reversed, and power asser-
tion related positively to children’s understanding. Why might this be? Pears and
Moses suggest that a clear expression of emotions, especially anger, is likely to be
a frequent accompaniment of power-assertive discipline, and that children may
learn from their parents’ emotional displays. They also suggest that the parent’s
feelings about the disciplinary situation in question are likely to differ from the
child’s feelings, and that such differences in perspective may also help children to
learn about emotions. They also add, however, that the negative effects of power
assertion are likely to outweigh any limited and possibly transitory benefits of the
approach.
In some studies the interest has been not simply in the effects of parenting
on theory of mind but also in the interplay of parenting and theory of mind
with respect to some other developmental outcome. In a study by Hughes and
86 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
to determine the basis), being reared by a stressed single parent provides oppor-
tunities to experience and practice deception beyond those available in a typical
home situation.
The Cole and Mitchell (1998) study is not the only demonstration that parental
stress can affect theory-of-m ind development, although the direction of effect is
not consistent across studies. Guajardo et al. (2009) included a broad-based mea-
sure of stress: the Parenting Stress Index (Abidin, 1995). Relatively high scores
on the index related negatively to performance on the Wellman and Liu theory-
of-m ind battery. Symons and Clark (2000) also administered the Parent Stress
Index; in their analyses, however, responses to the index were combined with
responses to several other measures (e.g., the State-Trait Anxiety Inventory, the
Centre for Epidemiological Studies Depression Scale) to form a composite mea-
sure of maternal distress. Distress assessed when the child was 2 years old related
positively to false belief performance when the child was 5 years old. Interestingly,
however, the relation held only for a specially developed form of the unexpected
location task in which a mother was the object that changed position. The authors
suggest that distressed mothers might talk more than most mothers about both
their own and their child’s mental states, thus providing clues that aid the child’s
understanding, especially when a mother was the target of the child’s theory-of-
mind efforts. As with other post hoc explanations for unexpected results that we
have seen, this suggestion clearly requires further study.
The variations in stress or distress examined in the studies just discussed fall,
at least for the most part, into the typical, nonclinical range of individual differ-
ences. We will see in the concluding section of this chapter that more severe forms
of emotional distress in a parent can have a definite effect on the development of
theory of mind.
Longitudinal Relations
As the description of the across-time relation in the Symons and Clark (2000)
research indicates, their study was longitudinal—one of three studies listed in
Table 4.1 that provide a longitudinal examination of the parenting-t heory of mind
relation. In each case the longitudinal component of the study is limited to two
time periods, with a separation of 1 year (age 3 to 4) in Ruffman et al. (2006),
2 years (age 3 to 5) in Rohrer et al. (2011), and 3 years (age 2 to 5) in Symons
and Clark.
Longitudinal studies have a number of strengths. The particular strength
for present purposes is that the across-time nature of the longitudinal approach
makes possible causal inferences that are more certain than those that can be
made from one-point-in-time correlations. Specifically, if variations in parent-
ing play a causal role with respect to the development of theory of mind, then we
would expect variations in parenting at time 1 to relate to variations in theory of
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 89
mind at time 2; theory of mind at time 1, however, should not predict parenting at
time 2. Such a pattern does not prove causality, for the evidence remains correla-
tional. But it does heighten the plausibility of the causal inference.
I have already mentioned one across-time relation in the Symons and Clark
(2000) study: that between maternal distress when the child was 2 and false belief
performance when the child was 5. Because attachment was a main focus of their
study, Symons and Clark’s measures of parenting were directed to the aspect of
maternal behavior that has proved most predictive of secure attachment: namely,
the sensitivity and responsiveness of the mother’s caregiving interactions with the
child. Maternal sensitivity when the child was 2 also predicted false belief perfor-
mance when the child was 5—again, however, only performance on the mother-
displacement form of the unexpected location task.
The main focus of the Rohrer et al. (2011) study was on effects of maternal
depression, and I defer discussion of this aspect of the study until the conclud-
ing section of the chapter. The study also included a parenting measure: mothers’
positivity (e.g., smiles, praise) or negativity (e.g., frowns, criticism) as assessed in
joint problem solving tasks when the child was 3 years old. Maternal negativity
when the child was 3 was associated with poorer false belief performance when
the child was 5.
Finally, I have already noted the absence of any effects of the parenting style
measures in the Ruffman et al. (2006) study. I will add now that this conclu-
sion applied to both within-time and across-time analyses. In contrast, one
aspect of the mother’s behavior did prove predictive of children’s performance,
and that was mental state talk. The relation, moreover, held over time: A rela-
tively high use of mental state talk when the child was 3 predicted relatively
good theory-of-m ind performance when the child was 4. I return to this find-
ing in Chapter 7.
are possible. The most immediate form is the dyad’s success on the task being
taught—do child and parent complete the model, successfully follow the map, or
whatever? A further and more challenging form is the child’s subsequent indepen-
dent performance—can the child now carry out the task or similar tasks on his or
her own? Finally, a third possibility is to look for relations between forms of teach-
ing and general indices of the child’s cognitive development. The connection in
this case is less direct and the causal basis less certain; still, if some parents are
better teachers than others, we would expect to see effects on the child’s overall
development.
It was the third approach that was taken in a study by Galende, de Miguel, and
Arranz (2012). The 5-year-old participants in the study responded to a battery
of theory-of-m ind measures and also attempted to complete two tasks with the
help of either the mother or father (whichever parent was more likely to engage
in such tasks—sex of parent was not a variable in the study): putting together
a puzzle and saying a tongue twister. The emphasis in scoring the interactions
was on behaviors indicative of scaffolding; among the behaviors or dimensions
recorded were promoting independence, explanations, questions, and encour-
agement. Scaffolding so defined turned out to relate positively to the children’s
theory-of-m ind performance; indeed, in regression analyses an initial SES effect
disappeared and only the parenting measures were significant.
As noted, the link between scaffolding and theory of mind in a study like that
of Galende et al. (2012) is quite indirect. The results are compatible with the idea
that this parenting practice promotes theory of mind, but other explanations for
the relation are certainly possible. To date, no parent teaching study has made
theory-of-m ind content the object of the teaching; rather, the focus has been on
execution of physical tasks (building a model, completing a puzzle, etc.). Some
training studies of theory of mind, however, do include manipulations that have
some resemblance to the notion of scaffolding, and I therefore will return to the
concept in Chapter 9. Some instances of parents’ mental state talk also include
aspects of scaffolding, and I will consider these forms of talk in Chapter 7. Finally,
I will note that parental scaffolding has been shown to relate to children’s execu-
tive function skills (Bernier, Carlson, & Whipple, 2010; Hammond, Muller,
Carpendale, Bibok, & Liebermann-Finestone, 2012), and executive function, as
we have seen, is one contributor to theory of mind.
is, of course, the focus on the cognitive aspect of emotions that makes the topic
a theory-of-m ind topic. Second, much of the work on parents’ socialization of
emotion has been directed to how they talk about emotions, and coverage of this
work is deferred until Chapter 7. Although the dividing line is admittedly often
thin, the present focus is on other ways, beyond emotion talk, in which parents
can affect their children’s understanding. Finally, even with these restrictions,
the relevant literature is too large to permit an exhaustive listing of studies, and
the coverage is therefore of the “for-example” sort. Fuller reviews can be found in
Eisenberg, Cumberland, and Spinrad (1998); Halberstadt and Eaton (2002); and
Saarni, Campos, Camras, and Witherington (2006).
What, exactly, is meant by emotion understanding? In Chapter 2 I discussed
some of the most often studied forms. Table 4.2, which is based on Pons, Harris,
and de Rosnay (2004), provides a more exhaustive listing (Denham’s Emotional
Development in Young Children, 1998, is also a good source). The tabulation by Pons
et al., I should note, primarily concerns forms of knowledge that develop from the
preschool period on. As we will see in Chapter 6, some forms of emotion under-
standing make their appearance in infancy.
How might parents affect emotion understanding? Their general style of child
rearing is one possible contributor. As Table 4.1 indicates, emotion understand-
ing was included as an outcome variable in several of the studies discussed in the
first section of this chapter—not, however, with many clear effects. In Ruffman
et al. (2006), parenting style had no effect on any of the outcome measures. In
Guajardo et al. (2009), the lax and overreactive categories derived from mater-
nal interviews showed no relation to emotion understanding. One of the obser-
vational measures did relate: A relatively high level of parental imitation was
associated with relatively poor emotion understanding. Guajardo et al. suggest,
however, that the basis for this correlation was from child to parent rather than
from parent to child—t hat “the presence of more frequent imitation with chil-
dren exhibiting more inadequate emotion understanding may result from paren-
tal attempts to provide appropriate environmental supports to aid their child’s
development” (p. 55).
The Pears and Moses (2003) study also showed a definite, although unex-
pected, link between parenting and emotion understanding: a positive relation
between power assertion and emotion understanding. Their proposed explana-
tion, as we saw, was that children learn aspects of emotion from the emotions their
parents display in the context of power-assertive discipline. The idea that paren-
tal expression of emotions contributes to children’s understanding of emotions
is, in fact, fairly generally held among researchers of the topic. In the review by
Eisenberg et al. (1998) parental expressiveness was one of three general parental
determinants that were discussed, along with talk about emotions and response
to children’s emotions. As its title indicates, parental expressiveness was the sole
topic of Halberstadt and Eaton’s (2002) meta-analysis.
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 93
Component Description
Recognition Recognize and name emotions on the basis of expressive
cues
External cause Understand how external causes affect the emotions of
others
Desire Understand that people’s emotional reactions depend on
their desires
Belief Understand that people’s beliefs, whether true or false,
determine their emotional reactions to a situation
Reminder Understand the relation between memory and emotion—
that emotions fade with time and that elements of a present
situation may reactivate emotions
Regulation Understand that different strategies can be evoked to
control emotions
Hiding Understand that at times there can be a discrepancy
between the outward expression of emotion and the actual
emotion
Mixed Understand that a person may have multiple or even
contradictory emotions about a given situation
Morality Understand that morally praiseworthy actions lead to
positive emotions and that morally reprehensible actions
lead to negative emotions
As both these reviews and more recent studies indicate, parents’ expression
of emotions does relate to children’s understanding of emotion, but not always,
and not usually in the way reported by Pears and Moses (2003). The evidence,
as we will see, is in fact decidedly mixed.
The emotions that parents express can be either positive or negative. I begin
with the latter. The Pears and Moses (2003) study reported an apparently ben-
eficial effect of negative emotions, although with the caveat that the detrimen-
tal effects of exposure to such emotions might outweigh any benefits. The idea
that frequent exposure to negative emotions can teach children about emotions
finds some support in work with physically abused children, who in some stud-
ies have been reported as especially good at recognizing cues for anger (e.g.,
Pollak & Sinha, 2002). In other studies, however, the outcome has been just the
reverse: poorer emotion recognition by children whose mothers are high in anger
(Garner, Jones, & Miner, 1994; Raver & Spagnola, 2002). And more generally, the
94 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Response scale 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 4.3 Continued
Response scale 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Note. From “The Coping with Children’s Negative Emotions Scale: Procedures and Scoring,” by
R. A. Fabes, N. Eisenberg, and J. Bernzweig, 1990. Copyright 1990 by the authors. Reprinted with
permission.
with both theoretical expectations and the findings of the Fabes et al. (2002)
study: greater emotion understanding when parents respond in positive, support-
ive ways to their children’s emotions, and poorer emotion understanding when
parental responses are punitive or dismissive. A further finding, most clearly
illustrated in the Denham and Kochanoff (2002) study, is that mothers’ responses
may play a more important role than those of fathers. The Denham et al. (2010)
article provides a fuller account of mother–father differences and their effects on
other aspects of emotional development.
A study by McElwain, Halberstadt, and Volling (2007) adds an interesting
further point with respect to the mother–father comparison. Most studies that
have included both parents have either considered their contributions separately
or analyzed a single composite parent score. McElwain and colleagues were inter-
ested in whether the effects of positive support from one parent (as measured by
the CCNES) might depend on the level of support provided by the other parent.
We might expect a simple additive relation—i f support from one parent is good,
then support from both parents should be even better. This is not what McElwain
et al. found, however. What they found was an interaction: High support from
one parent was most beneficial when support from the other parent was low. This
outcome had been predicted on the basis of the divergence model: the idea that
children benefit when parents differ in their emotion-related behaviors. In the
words of McElwain et al., “Children who experience varying levels of support
from mothers and fathers may develop a heightened awareness that people differ
in their reactions to emotional events. Such awareness, in turn, may lead to more
complex thinking about and understanding of emotions” (p. 1420). To date, this
idea that parental divergence can be beneficial has been limited to the topic of
emotion understanding; it has not yet been applied to other aspects of theory-of-
mind development.
The discussion to this point has concerned effects of parental practices on
emotion understanding. We saw in the previous section that in some studies the
interest in parenting and theory of mind is not simply in the effects of each on the
other but in how they jointly affect some third outcome. A study by Berzenski
and Yates (2013) provides an example in the emotion understanding literature.
Their parenting measures focused on the use of harsh physical and verbal punish-
ment by parents of preschoolers, and the outcome measures were the children’s
self-concepts and conduct problems in school. As would be expected, emotion
understanding related positively to children’s development— children who
were relatively high in emotion understanding had more positive self-concepts
and fewer conduct problems than did children whose understanding was lower.
More interesting, however, were the interactions of understanding and punish-
ment. Harsh physical punishment was associated with conduct problems—most
strongly, however, for children whose emotion understanding was high. Harsh
verbal punishment was associated with self-concept deficits—again, however,
98 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
most strongly for children whose understanding was high. We have, then, another
instance in which relatively good theory of mind is associated with relatively poor
developmental outcomes. These effects had been predicted. Harsh punishment
can be an ambiguous experience for children, and its effects may depend on how
children interpret their parent’s behavior. Children whose emotion understand-
ing is high are more likely to perceive the anger and the negative evaluation behind
the punishment—and thus more likely to be negatively affected.
I will note one other finding from the Berzenski and Yates (2013) study, and
that is that there was no relation between punishment and emotion understand-
ing. This study, then, is another instance in which general aspects of parenting
proved to be unrelated to children’s understanding of emotion. Nor is it the only
further such example. Bennett, Bendersky, and Lewis (2005) assessed, via both
observation and self-report, a variety of aspects of both positive and negative par-
enting in mothers of preschoolers. Once other factors were controlled, the parent-
ing measures showed no relation to the children’s emotion understanding.
The absence of effects on emotion understanding has been a fairly frequent
conclusion throughout this section of the chapter. Although some predictors
do emerge, much of what has been said has concerned either null effects or lim-
ited and inconsistent effects of parenting on children’s emotion understanding.
This negative picture should be qualified in two ways. First, aspects of parent-
ing, including those aspects considered here, can clearly affect other components
of emotional development, such as the expression of emotions and the ability to
regulate emotions. Second, probably the main way in which parents affect their
children’s understanding of emotions is through how they talk about emotions,
and this material has been deferred until Chapter 7.
Socioeconomic Status
Studies of SES and theory of mind divide into two groups. In some studies (e.g.,
Curenton, 2003; Shatz, Diesendruck, Martinez-Beck, & Akar, 2003), the nature
of the sample is the main focus of the research, and SES is therefore a primary
independent variable. In other studies, including many reviewed earlier in this
chapter, SES is just one of a number of measures of the home environment, and
the main focus is on more proximal determinants of the child’s development. In
either case, the inclusion of SES as a variable leads to two questions: Are there
differences associated with SES? And if so, where do the differences come from?
Of interest for the present purposes, of course, is the extent to which parenting
contributes to any differences that are found.
The answer to the first question is that there are on-t he-average differences
between SES groups, and the differences parallel those that are found across
a number of dependent variables: Namely, children from low-income homes
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 99
perform more poorly than children from middle-i ncome homes. Such was the
case in the two studies cited in the preceding paragraph. It was also the case
in several studies reviewed earlier in the chapter (e.g., Cole & Mitchell, 1998;
Hughes et al., 1999). Differences as a function of SES are found not only for
false belief but also on other measures of theory of mind, including emotion
understanding (Berzenski & Yates, 2013; Cutting & Dunn, 1999; Pears &
Moses, 2003).
A study by Hughes et al. (2005) is an especially informative source in this
regard, both because of its exceptional sample size (1,116 pairs of twins) and
because of its inclusion of an unusually broad battery of theory-of-m ind mea-
sures, including second-order as well as first-order tasks. Hughes et al. reported
average correlations of around .30 between SES and theory-of-m ind performance
across the various groups that were examined—t hus a moderately strong but of
course far from perfect relation. The size of the correlations serves as a reminder
of a basic point about group differences: that they are average effects that do not
apply in every individual case.
Nor do they apply in every study. Although studies with effects outweigh those
with no effects, a number of examinations of the issue have reported no differ-
ences as a function of SES (e.g., Garner, Curenton, & Taylor, 2005; Lucariello,
Durand, & Yarnell, 2007; Murray et al., 1999; Ruffman et al., 1999). There is, at
least on my reading, no obvious factor that divides the studies with and without
effects. Probably the most likely candidate is the nature of the samples, including
the specific way in which SES has been operationalized.
As in most theory-of-m ind research, the individual differences at issue in the
studies just discussed are differences in rate of development. Thus, the general
conclusion is that children from middle-income families develop theory-of-m ind
abilities more quickly than children from low-income families. Whether there
are any more qualitative, beyond-rate-of-development differences is not clear.
Some studies do report SES differences on some but not other theory-of-m ind
measures, which could constitute a difference in kind and not simply in rate; it is
difficult, however, to discern a consistent pattern across studies.
Probably the most explicit claim of a qualitative difference between SES
groups comes in Joan Lucariello’s Functional-Multilinear Socialization (FMS)
model (Lucariello, 2004; Lucariello, Le Donne, Durand, & Yarnell, 2006;
Lucariello et al., 2007). The FMS model posits that theory of mind is divided
into two distinct components: social (reasoning about the mental states of oth-
ers) and intrapersonal (reasoning about one’s own mental states). It posits further
that the socialization experiences of low-income children, including the language
to which they are exposed and the functions for which theory of mind is used,
favor social rather than intrapersonal understanding. In support of this position,
Lucariello reports two studies (Lucariello (2004; Lucariello et al., 2007) in which
low-income children performed better on social measures than on intrapersonal
100 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
measures across a range of carefully matched theory-of-m ind tasks. In the second
study, however, the same social–intrapersonal differences were found for children
from middle-income families, raising the question of whether any advantage of
social reasoning is really specific to low-income populations. In addition, two
studies with Head Start populations (Holmes-Lonergan, 2003; Holmes, Black,
& Miller, 1996) have reported better performance for own belief than for other’s
belief on the unexpected contents task, an outcome that is directly opposed to the
FMS model.
The reference to Head Start populations raises a point about the particular low-
income samples that appear in the literature, which, at least in the United States,
often consist of children enrolled in Head Start. Weimer and Guajardo (2005)
point out one possible effect of this sampling decision. In their study a Head Start
sample performed more poorly than a middle-income sample on false belief—
not, however, on a measure of emotion understanding. Weimer and Guajardo sug-
gest this difference may reflect the greater emphasis on emotions than on beliefs
in the Head Start curriculum. The general point is one made earlier: that what is
concluded about SES differences may depend on the particular populations that
are sampled.
Possible qualitative differences between SES levels are not limited to success
or failure on theory-of-m ind tasks. Differences may also occur in how theory
of mind relates to other aspects of children’s development. In Chapter 2 I men-
tioned the sibling effect: the finding (with some exceptions) of a positive rela-
tion between number of siblings and theory-of-m ind performance. Working
with a Head Start sample, Tompkins et al. (2013) not only did not replicate this
finding; they reported a negative relation between number of siblings and false
belief understanding. This relation, in turn, was mediated by language: Number
of siblings related negatively to the children’s language, and poorer language was
associated with poorer false belief performance. In speculating about the reasons
for the absence of a benefit from sibling interactions, the authors suggest that
such interactions in low-income homes may be less likely than those in middle-
income homes to convey useful information about mental states, a difference
that in turn stems from the relatively impoverished linguistic input that children
receive in such homes. In contrast, for children from middle-income homes, input
from siblings appears to play a protective role, for in this case the sibling effect is
especially marked for children whose own language abilities are low (Jenkins &
Astington, 1996).
Although the sibling findings in Tompkins et al. (2013) clearly require fur-
ther study, their conclusions with respect to the importance of language mir-
ror those of the literature in general. As we saw in Chapter 2, various measures
of language development relate positively to theory-of-m ind understanding.
This relation holds for both low-i ncome and middle-i ncome samples when the
groups are considered separately. When the groups are considered together,
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 101
Maltreatment
I draw much of what is said in this section from a review article by Luke and
Banerjee (2013a; see also Kagan, 2013, and Luke & Banerjee, 2013b). The Luke
and Banarjee review addresses two kinds of maltreatment: physical abuse and
neglect. When possible, they discuss the effects of the two forms of maltreatment
separately. Often, however, this is not possible—many studies include various
types of maltreatment in their samples, many children experience more than one
type of maltreatment, and few studies analyze separately by type. My coverage
follows that of Luke and Banerjee in focusing on maltreatment in general and not
on abuse and neglect separately.
Prior to their review of studies, Luke and Banerjee (2013) offer a rationale
for why disturbed parenting might be expected to hinder the development of
102 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
was worse than that of controls on both the standard false belief task and the
affective false belief task. The more severe the maltreatment, the poorer the
performance.
In summarizing conclusions from their review, Luke and Banerjee (2013a)
acknowledge that the research they discuss, although certainly suggesting that
parenting affects theory of mind, does not definitively establish this conclusion,
let alone specify exactly which aspects of parenting are important. Research on
disturbed parenting, as well as the research discussed under the remaining head-
ings in this section of the chapter, constitutes what are referred to as “natural
experiments”—t hat is, research in which the independent variable is not created
by the experimenter but rather reflects naturally occurring conditions. Natural
experiments allow an examination of variations in experience that, for either
ethical or pragmatic reasons, would be impossible to create experimentally, and
for this reason they have played an important role in the history of developmen-
tal psychology. Because of the lack of experimental control, however, natural
experiments are at best suggestive; they cannot establish causality with certainty.
O’Connor (2003) provides a good discussion of both the benefits and the limita-
tions of natural experiments.
The second conclusion is that aspects of children’s development also often show
impairment when the mother is suffering from depression (Downey & Coyne,
1990; Goodman et al., 2011). Although most research has focused on either social
outcomes or various forms of psychopathology, effects on cognitive development
have also been shown (Grace, Evindar, & Stewart, 2003).
Effects have been shown as well for theory of mind. As with research on mal-
treatment, emotion understanding has been the most often studied outcome.
Some impairment in emotion understanding is a consistent finding across a num-
ber of studies of maternal depression (Greig & Howe, 2001; Joormann, Gilbert,
& Gotlib, 2010; Martin, Williamson, Kurtz-Nelson, & Boekamp, 2013; Raikes
& Thompson, 2006; Szekely et al., 2014). In most studies the children have been
preschoolers; the Joorman et al. (2010) study, however, shows effects in a sample
of 9- to 14-year-olds.
One issue in the general literature concerns the timing of the depression and
whether children are more vulnerable at some time periods than at others. In
most of the emotion understanding studies the assessment of depression has been
contemporaneous with the measure of the child’s understanding, and thus during
the preschool years. Raikes and Thompson (2006), however, found that depres-
sion when the child was 2 years old predicted emotion understanding when the
child was 3, whereas a concurrent measure of depression did not relate. On the
other hand, Szekeley et al. (2014) found no relation between depression assessed
when the child was an infant and later understanding; only a concurrent measure
of depression proved predictive.
A report by Kujawa and colleagues (Kujawa et al., 2014) adds two further points.
First, theirs was a rare study to measure paternal as well as maternal depression.
Paternal depression showed no relation to the children’s emotion understanding.
The second point concerns an interaction of predictive factors. Maternal depres-
sion did relate to children’s understanding, but only in interaction with a measure
of negative parenting. The latter was derived from observation of mother–child
interactions on a series of teaching tasks and was defined as relatively frequent use
of criticism, expressions of anger, and other indices of hostility. Negative parent-
ing was associated with poor emotion understanding—only, however, when there
was also a history of maternal depression.
The literature on false belief is both smaller and less consistent than that on
emotion understanding. Greig and Howe (2001) reported no relation between
false belief understanding and concurrent maternal depression in a sample of
3-year-olds. In Murray et al. (1999) a history of maternal postnatal depression
showed no relation to preschoolers’ false belief performance; concurrent depres-
sion, however, related negatively. Finally, in Rohrer et al. (2011) conclusions
depended on the criterion for false belief mastery. When mean number correct
was the criterion, neither maternal depression when the child was an infant nor
recurrent depression showed any relation to the child’s performance. With the
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 105
Institutional Rearing
Earlier I introduced the concept of natural experiments. Arguably the first natural
experiments to have a major impact on the field of child psychology were studies
of orphanage rearing published in the 1940s (e.g., Goldfarb, 1945; Spitz, 1945).
The orphanages in question were not a random selection of orphanages; rather,
they were among the worst such institutions, settings that provided enough physi-
cal care to keep the children alive (at least usually) but that provided a bare mini-
mum of social and cognitive stimulation. When these settings were discovered
and the children were studied, serious disturbances were evident on a wide range
of social and cognitive outcomes. Reports of the severe effects of such early depri-
vation played an important role in sensitizing the field to the potential importance
of early experience.
Although we would all like to believe that the conditions for such natural
experiments have long ceased to exist, such is not the case. With the fall of
the Nicolae Ceauşescu government in 1989, thousands of Romanian children
who had been placed in orphanages became available for adoption. Many of
the orphanages in which they had been living were no better than those in the
studies of the 1940s. In the words of one of the research teams who studied the
children,
The passage just quoted is from a research team headed by Michal Rutter.
Research by the Rutter group is responsible for much of what we know about both
the effects of the Romanian orphanage experience and the capacity for recov-
ery when the children were moved to a better environment—in the case of the
children studied by Rutter and colleagues, adopted by English families (Colvert
et al., 2008; Rutter et al., 1999; Rutter et al., 2010). The outcomes assessed by the
Rutter group are broad in scope, and most are not related to theory of mind. Two,
however, are.
First, one of the unexpected findings from the research was the identification
of several “deprivation-specific psychological patterns”—t hat is, distinct constel-
lations of behavioral problems that did not fit any established clinical syndrome
but rather seemed specific to the deprivation experience. One of these patterns
was labeled quasi-autism. As the name suggests, the defining characteristic of this
pattern was the appearance of several autism-l ike features—for example, stereo-
typed behaviors, difficulties with communication, difficulties in forming rela-
tions with others. In Chapter 2 we saw that many researchers believe that deficits
in theory of mind underlie many of the characteristic features of autism. No one
believes that theory of mind accounts for everything that is seen in autism; ste-
reotyped behaviors, for example, do not seem explicable on the basis of theory of
mind. But deficits in theory of mind may well account for the social difficulties
shown by the Romanian children.
The second kind of evidence is more direct. At age 11 the children in the study
were given the Happe Strange Stories measure. Their performance was compared
with that of the two control samples used throughout the research: a sample of
adopted children born in the United Kingdom and another sample of Romanian
children growing up in their families of birth. Although the differences among
groups were not large they were significant: The Romanian orphanage sample
performed more poorly than either of the other two samples (although not signifi-
cantly so when compared to the Romanian home-reared sample). The longer the
stay in the orphanage, the poorer the performance. Furthermore, further analy-
ses indicated a strong relation between theory-of-m ind difficulties and the quasi-
autism pattern of behavior.
The Romanian studies are not the only demonstration of theory-of-m ind
deficits in children with a history of institutional rearing. In Dobrova-K rol et al.
(2010), a sample of 3-to 6-year-olds from Ukrainian orphanages performed
more poorly on a standard false belief task than did a home-reared control group.
In Yagmurlu, Berument, and Celimli (2005), a sample of 4-to 7-year-olds living
in a Turkish boarding home performed more poorly on a battery of false belief
tasks than did comparison groups. And in Tarullo, Bruce, and Gunnar (2007),
an adopted sample from nine different home countries showed deficits in false
belief performance compared to a home-reared comparison sample.
G e n e ra l A s p e c t s o f Pa r e n t i n g a n d T h e o r y o f M i n d 107
As with the work on abuse and depression, emotion understanding has been
the other main theory-of-m ind outcome examined in research on institutional-
ization. Deficits have sometimes, but by no means always, been found. In Fries
and Pollak (2004), 4-year-olds adopted from Russian and Romanian orphanages
were worse than controls at identifying emotions. Interestingly, however, there
was one exception: When anger was the emotion, the orphanage sample per-
formed as well as the controls. In Tarullo et al. (2007), the same adopted sample
that had performed more poorly on false belief was equivalent to the control
group in emotion understanding. Two studies based on children from Romanian
orphanages also reported only limited differences: in one case poorer recogni-
tion of happiness but not of other emotions (Moulson et al., 2015); in the other
case, no differences across four different emotions (Jeon, Moulson, Fox, Zeanah,
& Nelson, 2010). Finally, Garvin and colleagues (Garvin, Tarullo, Van Ryzin,
& Gunnar, 2012) reported no differences in emotion understanding between a
sample of 3-year-olds adopted from orphanages and a comparison sample. Their
study, however, was a rare one in this literature to include a measure of post-
adoption parenting, and parenting turned out to be important: Relatively high
scores on a measure labeled Emotional Availability (e.g., high sensitivity, low
intrusiveness) when the child was 18 months old related positively to emotion
understanding at age 3.
The Garvin et al. (2012) study is also unusual in another respect. In most insti-
tutionalization studies the children are at least of preschool age when first stud-
ied, and the measures are correspondingly oriented to developments of that age
period and beyond. Garvin et al. first studied their sample at 18 months, which
meant that they were able to explore possible effects of institutional rearing on
forms of theory of mind that emerge in infancy. The depression literature, with its
emphasis on postpartum depression, also includes some studies of infant theory
of mind. We will therefore return to the topic of adverse rearing conditions in
Chapter 6 on Infancy.
Conclusions
The expectation underlying much of the research discussed throughout this
chapter has been that warmth and reasoning and discussion will be beneficial
for theory-of-m ind development and that harsh control and rigid imposition of
power will be detrimental. The studies reviewed certainly provide some support
for these predictions; in general, warmth and reasoning work out well and harsh-
ness and power assertion work out poorly. The group comparisons discussed in
the latter sections of the chapter (SES contrasts, effects of adverse circumstances)
also support the importance of certain dimensions of parenting.
108 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Attachment
Readers already familiar with the parenting literature will have noticed that one
important entry under that heading received only brief mention in Chapter 3. Ever
since the pioneering work of John Bowlby and Mary Ainsworth (e.g., Ainsworth
et al., 1978; Bowlby, 1969), the attachment relationship between parent and child
has been a major focus of research in social development. And a major question
addressed by such research has been how parenting contributes to the develop-
ment of attachment. Indeed, attachment is easily the most common focus for the
study of parenting in the first year or two of a child’s life.
The reason for reserving the discussion of parenting and attachment for a sepa-
rate chapter is straightforward. Beginning with a report by Fonagy, Redfern, and
Charman (1997), there is now a large literature that documents a positive relation
between attachment and theory of mind: On the average, children with secure
attachments fare better on theory-of-m ind measures than do children whose
attachments are less secure. The goal of the present chapter is to summarize this
literature and to explore explanations that have been offered for links between
attachment and theory of mind.
109
110 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Measurement
As with any topic, a first question is that of measurement: How can we determine
whether an attachment has been formed, and how can we assess individual differ-
ences in the nature of attachment?
The earliest systematic studies of the construct focused mainly on separa-
tion distress—t hat is, the infant’s tendency to be upset when separated from
the attachment object. Does the baby cry, for example, when the mother walks
out of the room or when left alone in the crib at night? Separation distress has
a good deal of intuitive appeal as a measure of attachment; we would expect a
baby who has formed an emotional bond to another person to be more likely
to protest separation than a baby who has not yet formed an attachment.
Furthermore, separation distress shows the developmental course that we
would expect of a measure of attachment: It is absent in the early months of
life but typically emerges, often in quite strong form, some time between 6 and
12 months.
More recent research retains separation distress as one useful measure but
adds a number of other behaviors as well. These additional behaviors include
several more positive ways by which an infant can convey that an attachment to
the parent is being formed. Does the baby smile or babble more readily to the
mother than to other people? Is the baby more secure in the mother’s presence,
better able to venture out and explore new things or to interact with new people?
The ability to use the mother as a secure base was first emphasized in Harlow’s
(1958) work with infant monkeys; it turns out to be important in human infants
also. Does the baby brighten when the mother enters the room and engage in
greeting or contact-eliciting behaviors? In general, does the baby seem to enjoy
the mother’s presence and do various things either to keep her near when she is
already near or to bring her back when she is gone? There are a variety of attach-
ment behaviors, and they vary across situations, developmental levels, and indi-
vidual children; all, however, have this general quality of pleasure and security in
the presence of the attachment object.
Deciding which behaviors to study is one step in the measurement process.
Another step is deciding how to get evidence with respect to these behaviors.
How can we find out whether a baby protests separation from the mother, reacts
more positively to familiar people than to strangers, uses the mother as a secure
base, or does whatever else it is that we have decided is relevant to attachment?
Attachment 111
The answer is that a number of instruments now exist for the measurement of
attachment. Of these, the earliest and still most influential is the Strange Situation
procedure devised by Mary Ainsworth and colleagues (Ainsworth et al., 1978).
As Table 5.1 shows, the Strange Situation is a structured laboratory assessment
in which trained observers record the infant’s response to a series of comings and
goings by both the parent and a female adult stranger. The Strange Situation was
the original basis for the now generally accepted division into various patterns or
categories of attachment, a typology that I discuss shortly.
As Table 5.1 also shows, the Strange Situation procedure was soon joined by
other attachment measures. Various goals motivated the development of further
measures, including the desire for a broader sampling of contexts and behaviors
than those provided by a 20 minute laboratory procedure and the need to exam-
ine attachment in age periods beyond the infancy period for which the Strange
Situation was developed. I should note that the list given in Table 5.1 is not an
exhaustive tabulation of attachment measures; rather, these are the measures that
appear to date in the theory-of-m ind literature. Fuller discussions of measuring
instruments can be found in Kerns, Schlegelmilch, Morgan, and Abraham (2005)
and Solomon and George (2008).
Two general distinctions divide the measures in Table 5.1. The first concerns
the specific conclusions that can be derived from the measure. All have the same
general goal: namely, to assess the security of the attachment relationship. For
some, security is assessed along a continuous dimension ranging from maximally
to minimally secure; the Attachment Q-Set is an example in this category. For
others, the approach is categorical rather than continuous, with a division into
secure attachment and various forms of insecure attachment. The first and best
known example under this heading is the Strange Situation procedure, which, as
I discuss shortly, identifies four different forms of attachment. Both continuous
and categorical approaches have strengths and limitations, and in some instances
it is possible to derive both from the same data set. Fraley and Spieker (2003) and
Solomon and George (2008) provide further discussions of this issue.
The second distinction concerns exactly what is measured by the instrument.
In some measures the focus is on the various behaviors (e.g., crying upon separa-
tion, smiling upon reunion) from which an attachment can be inferred. Such is
the case with the Strange Situation, and it is also the case with what is probably the
other most frequently used measure in the attachment literature, the AQS. Other
measures do not directly tap behaviors; rather, they are directed to the child’s
(or, in some instances, the adult’s) representations of the attachment relationship.
Such is the case, for example, with the Separation Anxiety Test, for which the
child reports possible feelings in response to vignettes that describe being sepa-
rated from the parent. Such is also the case with the main measure of attachment
in adulthood, the Adult Attachment Interview. Such representational measures,
necessarily, are used only with postinfant, verbal participants.
Table 5.1 Instruments for Assessing Individual Differences in Attachment
Individual Differences
The primary goal of each of the instruments listed in Table 5.1 is to identify
individual differences in attachment—in particular, to distinguish between
secure and insecure attachments and, in some approaches, to identify different
forms of insecure attachment. Table 5.2 shows the four patterns of attachment
identified by the Strange Situation. The first three of these patterns came from
the original Ainsworth et al. (1978) research; the fourth was added later. The
descriptions in Table 5.2 are tied to the reunion episodes in the procedure, that
is, how the infant reunites with the mother after being briefly separated from
her. This emphasis is no accident, for the reunion episodes are generally the
most diagnostically informative part of the assessment.
Although the descriptions in Table 5.2 are drawn from behavior in the
Strange Situation, it is important to note that the differences among the attach-
ment groups are by no means limited to that setting. Ainsworth and colleagues
(1978) showed that Strange Situation classifications agreed well with observa-
tions of the same infants in the home setting. Conclusions from the Strange
Situation also correlate well with those from other measures of attachment,
for example, the AQS (van IJzendoorn, Vereijken, Bakermanns-K raneburg, &
Riksen-Walraven, 2004).
Important though it is, the identification of individual differences is really just
a starting point for research. Once we have identified differences on some trait,
there are two further things that we wish to know: Where do the differences come
from, and what implications do they have for future development? I take up the
second of these questions first.
114 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Classification Description
Secure attachment On reunion after brief separation from parent,
child seeks physical contact, proximity,
interaction; often tries to maintain physical
contact. Readily soothed by parent and
returns to exploration and play.
Insecure-avoidant attachment Child actively avoids and ignores parent
on reunion, looking away and remaining
occupied with toys. May move away
from parent and ignore parent’s efforts to
communicate.
Insecure-a mbivalent attachment Although infant seems to want closeness
and contact, parent is not able to effectively
alleviate the child’s distress after brief
separation. Child may show subtle or overt
signs of anger, seeking proximity and then
resisting it.
Insecure-d isorganized Child shows signs of disorganization
attachment (e.g., crying for parent at door and then
running quickly away when the door opens;
approaching parent with head down) or
disorientation (e.g., seeming to “freeze” for a
few seconds).
Note. Adapted from Social Development (p. 120), by R. D. Parke and A. Clarke-Stewart, 2011,
New York, NY: Wiley. Copyright 2011 by John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Adapted with permission.
instances, and they occur in both directions—f rom secure to insecure and from
insecure to secure. Change is most likely when the time span in question is long
rather than short, and it is most likely when the child’s environment changes in
some important way between the two assessments. Both of these conclusions are
general ones from longitudinal research—stability is greater across short time
intervals than across long ones, and one determinant of the stability of the child is
the stability of the environment.
A second question addressed by longitudinal research concerns possible rela-
tions between attachment and later developmental outcomes of interest. The lit-
erature in this case is a large one, for attachment has been shown, in Thompson’s
(2013, p. 205) words, to relate to “a truly dizzying array of later outcomes.”
I mentioned one such outcome in Chapter 3: the quality of the child’s peer rela-
tions. A partial list of the others includes sibling relations, social competence,
self-esteem, problem solving, academic performance, and romantic relations in
adulthood (Berlin, Cassidy, & Appleyard, 2008; Bornstein, 2014). As the last
of these findings indicates, some of the longitudinal follow-ups are quite long-
term, extending to age 34 in one of the major such studies (Sroufe, Coffino, &
Carlson, 2010; Sroufe, Egeland, Carlson, & Collins, 2005). And as some of the
other entries indicate, effects are not limited to the social realm; secure attach-
ment also predicts various aspects of later cognitive development. Theory of mind
is, of course, another entry under the cognitive development heading.
Determinants
The second general issue with respect to individual differences is where they come
from. Why, in the case of attachment, do some children form secure attachments
whereas other children form attachments that place them in one of the insecure
categories? Although biological characteristics (e.g., inborn differences in tem-
perament) may make some contribution (Vaughn, Bost, & van IJzendoorn, 2008),
the consensus among researchers is that the differences are largely experiential
in origin. Ordinarily, as we saw in Chapter 3, such a general conclusion leaves
open a number of more specific possibilities, including the contribution of vari-
ous social agents (parents, siblings, teachers, peers) and environmental settings
(home, neighborhood, school). In the case of attachment, however, the research
lens can be much more focused. What we need to know is what parents do in the
first year or so of life that either promotes or fails to promote a secure attachment.
Chapter 3 gave the generally accepted answer to this question. One of the
childrearing examples presented there was the Ainsworth group’s work on the
childrearing antecedents of secure attachment (Ainsworth et al., 1978). As we
saw, Ainsworth et al. concluded that the key parental contributor was sensitive
responsiveness, that is, the willingness and the ability to respond quickly and
appropriately to the child’s signals across a variety of childrearing contexts. Later
116 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
An Overview of Studies
Table 5.3 provides an overview of the studies to be discussed in this section of the
chapter.
As noted in Chapter 1, some studies examine more than one possible parental
contributor to theory of mind. This point definitely applies to the studies to be
considered now. As Table 5.3 indicates, many attachment studies have embedded
the attachment component within a broader exploration of potential contributors
to theory of mind. Parallel examinations of mental state talk and maternal mind-
mindedness are particularly common. Here, I focus for the most part on attach-
ment, deferring discussion of the other contributors for later chapters. In some
cases, however, the interpretation of the results for attachment depends on what
we decide about other possible contributors, and in those cases I have provided a
fuller picture of the study’s conclusions.
As the Child Participants column in Table 5.3 indicates, the studies divide into
two groups. Some studies examine concurrent relations between attachment and
theory of mind. Others follow their sample longitudinally and are able to trace
relations between the two developments over time (while often looking at con-
current relations as well). I will first discuss what we know about concurrent rela-
tions and then move on to the longitudinal research.
As the Child Measures column in Table 5.3 indicates, a variety of theory-of-
mind outcomes appear in this literature. Of interest, the two most common out-
comes, are the same outcomes that were most common in the research considered
in Chapter 4: false belief and emotion understanding.
Table 5.3 Continued
Table 5.3 Continued
Table 5.3 Continued
Fonagy and Target (1997) suggest another way in which an artifactual link
might arise. As they note, securely attached children tend to be at ease and self-
assured when dealing with others. Responding to a typical theory-of-m ind assess-
ment requires such skills, for the child must answer a series of questions posed
by an unfamiliar adult, often after having been taken to some unfamiliar setting.
Securely attached children may bring greater social confidence to such a task, and
this may be why they outperform their less securely attached peers. As we will see,
however, differences among groups occur even on measures that require no par-
ticular social or test-taking skills—for example, in the use of mental state terms in
conversation with the mother. So the greater social confidence may be helpful, but
it is unlikely to account for much of the difference among groups.
Meins (2012) suggests yet another possible artifact. She ties her argument
to research that uses the Separation Anxiety Test as the measure of attachment,
but the argument may apply to some extent to some of the other representational
assessments as well. As Meins notes, the Separation Anxiety Test requires that
the child impute thoughts and feelings to the story characters—requires, in
short, the use of theory-of-m ind skills. Any attachment–t heory of mind correla-
tion, therefore, may reflect the common grounding of both measures in theory
of mind and not a genuine relation between the two constructs. Even if valid,
however, this argument has limited scope. Most of the evidence for links between
attachment and theory of mind comes from the two leading behavioral measures,
Strange Situation and the Attachment Q-Set, and this evidence is not subject to
the common-g rounding argument.
Although the Meins (2012) argument is directed to a possible artifact, its
emphasis on theory of mind as a causal factor also raises a substantive possibil-
ity. Explanations for the relation between attachment and theory of mind have
focused on ways in which secure attachment might promote theory of mind. But
suppose that the causal direction is the reverse—t hat is, that relatively advanced
theory of mind promotes secure attachment. A one-point-in-time correlation is,
after all, compatible with either causal direction.
Two arguments, both temporal in nature, can be offered against the possibility
of theory of mind as the causal factor. First, not all of the evidence with respect to
attachment and theory of mind takes the form of one-point-in-time correlations.
A number of longitudinal studies have addressed the issue, and many (although
not all) have found what would be expected if attachment is the causal basis for
the correlation: namely, that attachment at time 1 correlates with theory of mind
at time 2. With one limited exception (Meins, 2012), however, no study has
included a measurement of theory of mind at time 1; thus the literature does not
provide a full cross-lagged examination of the issue.
The second argument is related. A glance at the Child Measures section of
Table 5.3 will suggest a reason that no study has included a theory-of-m ind
measure at time 1. Many basic theory-of-m ind achievements are preschool
122 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
achievements, and thus they emerge well after the nature of the child’s attach-
ment has been determined. Attachment and theory of mind develop on different
time schedules, and any causal relation must be from the earlier development to
the later.
Once this point is acknowledged, a further point must be added. Theory of
mind does not get its start at age 3; rather (as Chapter 6 discusses), it gets its start
very early in life, and by 12 months or so a number of basic theory-of-m ind devel-
opments are in place. To date, only a handful of studies have explored possible
links between attachment and these early forms of theory of mind. As we will see
when these studies are discussed, the assumed causal direction has been a social
to cognitive one: that aspects of the attachment relation either hasten or delay the
emergence of early theory-of-m ind skills. Admittedly, it is more difficult to see
how early forms of theory-of-m ind skills could play any direct causal role with
respect to attachment. Nevertheless, it is possible that such skills could play an
indirect role through their effect on the caregiver’s response to the infant—t hat
babies who (for example) maintain eye contact, respond readily to social cues,
and so forth elicit especially responsive caregiving from the parent. Thus theory
of mind might contribute to parental differences in sensitivity, which in turn con-
tribute to differences in attachment. Such possible links remain to be explored.
Assuming that the primary causal direction is from attachment to theory of
mind, how might the relation be explained? Various researchers have tackled this
question (Fonagy & Target, 1997; P. L. Harris, 1999; Meins, 1997, 2012), and
although the terminology and some specifics vary, all offer what seems to be a ver-
sion of the same basic argument. Each identifies two explanations for why a secure
attachment might relate to theory of mind. I sketch these possibilities briefly now
and then return to them following the review of studies.
One possibility is that a secure attachment might heighten the probability of
experiences that nurture the development of theory of mind. Securely attached
infants, for example, are confident in their mother’s responsiveness and availabil-
ity; they can therefore explore and learn more readily than can their less secure
counterparts, who lack a base to support their efforts. It is, of course, people about
whom children must learn for theory of mind, and secure attachment might be
especially helpful in this regard. A positive relation with the mother, for example,
ensures that interaction with her will be something that the child enjoys and seeks
out and that sharing of thoughts and feelings between the two will be common.
Although initially specific to the attachment object, the positive internal working
model that a securely attached child develops would be expected to support posi-
tive interactions with other people as well, and thus further opportunities to learn
about the mental states of others.
The first explanation, then, is that attachment makes development-enhancing
activities more likely, and this is why it relates to theory of mind. The second
possible explanation is that the relation between the two developments reflects
Attachment 123
their common source: that attachment and theory of mind are related because
the same experiences that result in secure attachment also result in good theory
of mind. We have seen, for example, that sensitive responsiveness on the par-
ent’s part is one antecedent of secure attachment. It makes sense to think—a nd
research in fact suggests—that sensitive responsiveness will also nurture the
development of theory of mind. We will see later in this chapter, and more fully
in Chapters 7 and 8, that mental state talk and maternal mind-m indedness both
relate positively to theory of mind. Both, it turns out, also relate positively to
security of attachment. In general, good things tend to go together in develop-
ment, and attachment and theory of mind may be just one more example of this
general principle.
I will add that the two explanations just sketched are not mutually exclusive.
As we will see, the evidence suggests that both probably apply.
Concurrent Relations
It was not long into the theory of mind era before researchers began to speculate
about possible relations between attachment and theory of mind (Bretherton,
Bates, Benigni, Camaioni, & Volterra, 1979; Fonagy, Steele, Steele, Moran, &
Higgitt, 1991; Main, 1991). It was not until 1997, however, that the first study
was reported (although see Fonagy, 1996, for an earlier, partial report). Fonagy
et al. (1997) used the Separation Anxiety Test to assess differences in attach-
ment in a sample of 3-to 6-year-olds. The theory-of-m ind outcome of interest was
the emotion-based form of false belief described in Chapter 2—t hat is, the abil-
ity to judge an inappropriate emotion that followed from a false belief. The two
measures proved to be related: Children with secure attachments outperformed
those whose attachments were less secure, a difference that remained even when
chronological age and language ability were controlled. The effect, moreover, was
a substantial one: 71% correct responses by the former group, as opposed to 20%
for the latter group.
To date, the affective false belief task has appeared in just two other stud-
ies in the attachment literature (it was also employed, but dropped because
of poor performance, by Repacholi & Trapolini, 2004, and employed, but
not analyzed separately, by Ontai & Thompson, 2008). The results are mixed.
Like Fonagy et al. (1997), de Rosnay and Harris (2002) used the Separation
Anxiety Test to assess attachment in a sample of preschoolers. Their measure
of affective false belief understanding included both a typical such story and an
attachment-t heme story, in which a child was separated from his or her mother.
The expectation was that response to the attachment-t heme story would relate
more strongly to attachment than would response to the typical story. This did
not prove to be the case. The basic finding, however, replicated that of Fonagy
124 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
et al.: a positive relation between security of attachment and affective false
belief understanding.
The second study, that of Meins, Fernyhough, Russell, and Clark-Carter
(1998), was longitudinal, and I therefore consider it more fully in the next section.
As we will see there, security of attachment at age 1, as assessed by the Strange
Situation, related to a number of later theory-of-m ind outcomes. The only excep-
tion was the affective false belief task (although there was a nonsignificant trend
toward better performance by the securely attached group).
The affective false belief task taps into both false belief understanding and
emotion understanding. As noted earlier, standard forms of these two develop-
ments account for most of the relevant literature.
The picture is perhaps somewhat clearer for emotion understanding than for
false belief (which, in fact, is the conclusion that Hughes, 2011, reached from the
research available at the time of her review). Of the six concurrent examinations of
attachment and emotion understanding, five have reported significant relations,
that is, better performance by securely attached children (Barone & Lionetti,
2012; Greig & Howe, 2001; Laible & Thompson, 1998; Ontai & Thompson,
2002, Study 2; Repacholi & Trapolini, 2004). The successful demonstrations
span a range of attachment measures, including both behavioral (the Attachment
Q-Set) and representational (Attachment Story Completion, Manchester Child
Attachment Story Task, Separation Anxiety Test) forms. The measures of emo-
tion understanding also span a range of forms, although the most commonly used
are the tests developed by Denham (1986; Denham & Auerbach, 1995).
One of the reports with positive results is also the source for the only failure
to find a relation between attachment and emotion understanding. Ontai and
Thompson’s (2002) Study 1 examined the issue with a sample of 3-year-olds
and reported no relation between the measures. The same children and the same
measures were reexamined 2 years later, and in this case a significant relation
emerged. The link between attachment and understanding of negative emotions
was especially strong, something that had also been true in the earlier study by
Laible and Thompson (1998). In discussing the reason for the age difference in
outcomes, the authors emphasize the child’s developmental level and hence readi-
ness to benefit from potentially helpful experiences. In their words, “the benefits
for socioemotional understanding of the more sensitive maternal responsiveness
to emotional issues documented by attachment theorists await the greater com-
prehension of others’ inner, psychological states that develops most significantly
after age 3” (p. 447).
Findings are a bit less consistent for false belief than they are for emotion under-
standing. Three studies have reported significant concurrent relations between
attachment and false belief understanding (Arranz et al., 2002; Repacholi &
Trapolini, 2004; Symons & Clark, 2000), but two other studies failed to find a
relation (Greig & Howe, 2001; Ontai & Thompson, 2008). A report by Meins
Attachment 125
As noted, the target effects in Clark and Symons’s (2009) study of attributions
did not vary as a function of attachment status. Attributions in general, however,
did relate to attachment: Securely attached children offered more positive attri-
butions than did less securely attached children. Securely attached children also
offered more positive self-evaluations than did less securely attached children.
Two other studies provide evidence about possible effects beyond the pre-
school period. In Humfress et al. (2002), response to the Strange Stories measure
by 12-and 13-year-olds related positively to a concurrent measure of attachment
security. Controlling for verbal IQ reduced but did not eliminate the relation. In
Vanwoerden, Kalpakci, and Sharp (2015), adolescents’ responses to an advanced
measure of theory of mind related positively to attachment status—only, how-
ever, for girls. Girls with disorganized attachments performed more poorly than
did those with other classifications.
As the descriptions in the preceding paragraphs indicate, false belief and emo-
tion understanding are not the only outcomes that are represented in the attach-
ment and theory of mind literature. Two other dependent variables appear in
several studies. One is the child’s use of mental state language in conversation—
either mental state words in general or emotion words in particular. Two stud-
ies under the Concurrent Relations heading provide evidence on this point. In a
study by McQuaid and colleagues (McQuaid, Bigelow, McLaughlin, & MacLean,
2008), attachment security was positively related to preschoolers’ use of both
mental state terms in general and emotion terms in particular. Bost and col-
leagues (Bost et al., 2006) also found a significant relation between attachment
security and use of emotion words (the only aspect of language assessed); when
the mother’s own use of emotion terms was controlled for, however, the relation
to attachment disappeared.
The other dependent variable is joint attention in infancy. Joint attention (as
I discuss more fully in Chapter 6) is the ability to share the attentional focus
of others, an ability that develops gradually across the first year or so of life.
Relations between joint attention and attachment are hardly robust in research
to date, but some relation has emerged in three of the four examinations of the
issue (the exception being a study by Yoon, Kelso, Lock, & Lyons-Ruth, 2014).
In two studies (Claussen, Mundy, Mallik, & Willoughby, 2002; Scholmerich,
Lamb, Leyendecker, & Fracasso, 1997) the disorganized pattern of attachment, as
assessed by the Strange Situation, was associated with relatively poor joint atten-
tion, in one case (Claussen et al.) in interaction with the experimenter and in one
case (Scholmerich et al.) in interaction with the mother. In a third study (Meins
et al., 2011) it was the avoidant pattern that diverged from the other classifications.
Compared to the other attachment groups, infants with avoidant attachment
showed both more joint attention with the experimenter and less joint attention,
especially of higher level forms (i.e., pointing and showing), with the mother.
The lower response to the mother was interpreted as evidence that the avoidant
Attachment 127
response shown under conditions of stress (which is what defines the attachment
relationship) is a more general characteristic of the infant–mother relationship.
The greater response to the experimenter was interpreted as evidence that infants
who tend to avoid the mother compensate by increased responding to other social
partners.
Across-Time Relations
Longitudinal study—of attachment and theory of mind or of any issue—does
not solve the problem of causality. Correlational data remain correlational data.
Nevertheless, the across-time information can heighten the plausibility of a causal
inference, assuming that variations in the hypothesized cause at time 1 relate to
variations in the hypothesized outcome at time 2.
Such, in general, is the case with attachment and theory of mind. Predicted
relations, it is true, emerge less consistently in longitudinal examinations than
they do in concurrent tests. It is also the case, as noted earlier, that the literature
lacks a full cross-lagged test of the issue, given the failure to relate theory of mind
at time 1 to attachment at time 2. Nevertheless, the existing evidence appears
compatible, at least mostly, with a causal role either for attachment or for factors
associated with attachment.
Three research programs provide the evidence with respect to emotion under-
standing. I have already noted that Meins et al. (1998) found no relation between
attachment at age 1 and performance on the affective false belief task at age 5. Two
studies by Thompson and associates provide mixed results, despite the fact that
the two studies used almost identical measures of emotion understanding. In
Ontai and Thompson (2002) attachment as assessed by the Attachment Q-Set
at age 3 showed no relation to emotion understanding at age 5. In Raikes and
Thompson (2006) attachment at age 2, again as assessed by the AQS, related
positively to emotion understanding at age 3. Finally, three articles by Steele and
associates (Steele, Steele, & Croft, 2008; Steele, Steele, Croft, & Fonagy, 1999;
Steele, Steele, & Johansson, 2002) report on a sample assessed with the Strange
Situation as infants, once with the mother and once with the father, and then
tested for understanding of mixed emotions at ages 6 and 11. Performance at age 6
related positively to security with the mother; attachment to the father showed no
relation. When the sample was retested at age 11, the positive relation had disap-
peared. In the final report, however, the data were reanalyzed to focus on emotion
recognition rather than reasoning about emotions, and a significant relation to
attachment again emerged—again, however, only for attachment to the mother.
Studies of false belief also present a mixed picture. Moore and Symons (2005)
reported a positive relation between attachment security as assessed by the AQS
128 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
at age 3 and false belief understanding at age 4. In Symons and Clark (2000) the
AQS at age 2 failed to predict false belief performance at age 5. The AQS data were
subsequently reanalyzed, however, to focus on a subscale composed of secure
base behavior and absence of avoidance, and this subscale did prove predictive of
later false belief success (Symons, 2001).
Several studies have examined Strange Situation assessments in infancy
as possible predictors of eventual false belief success. Both Meins et al. (1998)
and McElwain and Volling (2004) found that security assessed by the Strange
Situation at age 1 related to false belief performance at age 4. In contrast, in Meins
et al. (2002) Strange Situation assessments at age 1 showed no relation either to
later false belief or to success on the appearance-reality task. Further, in Meins
(2012) Strange Situation classifications showed no relation to performance on the
Wellman and Liu theory-of-m ind battery.
As was true under the Concurrent heading, a handful of outcomes in addition to
emotion understanding and false belief appear in the longitudinal literature. Two
studies of the child’s use of mental state language provide conflicting results: a
positive relation to security of attachment in Lemche, Kreppner, Joraschky, and
Klann-Delius (2007), no relation in Meins (2012). In Laranjo et al. (2010) secu-
rity of attachment showed no relation to toddlers’ understanding of discrepant
desires; it did relate to Level 1 perspective taking, but only for boys. In a follow-up
of the same sample at age 4, security of attachment showed no relation to false
belief but did relate to Level 2 perspective taking, again, however, only for boys.
Finally, in Meins et al. (1998) security of attachment related to understanding
of the origins of knowledge at age 5. At an earlier age period, it also related to
toddlers’ ability to incorporate the pretense suggestions of an experimenter when
engaged in symbolic play. The latter finding mirrored an earlier similar result in
Slade (1987).
To this point, the discussion has said almost nothing about possible effects of
attachment to the father. Many representational measures of attachment do not
distinguish between the parents, and when a distinction is made (as is true for
both the Strange Situation and the Attachment Q-Set), most researchers have
focused on the mother. Data about the father come from two studies. We saw in
the Steele et al. research that attachment to the father had no relation to any of
the measures at any time point. In contrast, McElwain and Volling (2004) found
that attachment to either parent was predictive of later false belief performance,
although the relation was somewhat stronger for the mother.
I noted in Chapter 4 that one way in which parents can affect theory of mind
is by nurturing the executive function skills that contribute to theory-of-m ind
competence. The attachment literature contains two examples of this point. One
is a longitudinal demonstration. Von Der Lippe and colleagues (von der Lippe,
Eilertsen, Hartmann, & Killen, 2010) showed that secure attachment in infancy,
as assessed by the Strange Situation at age 1, related positively to measures of
Attachment 129
executive function at age 6. Thorell and colleagues (Thorell, Rydell, & Bohlin,
2012) provide a concurrent demonstration: Disorganized attachment at age 8, as
assessed by Attachment Story Completion, was associated with deficits in execu-
tive function skills.
Other Predictors
In many of the studies just reviewed, attachment was not looked at in isolation;
rather it was examined in conjunction with aspects of parenting that might con-
tribute to theory of mind—and that might account for any apparent effects of
attachment on theory of mind. I consider four such predictors.
One is parental sensitivity. As we have seen, sensitivity is a consistent corre-
late of secure attachment. Sensitivity has been examined less often with respect
to theory of mind, and it is sometimes not clear how closely the uses of the term
in the theory-of-m ind literature map onto its uses in the attachment literature.
The general conclusion, however, is that sensitivity also relates positively to
theory of mind. This was the conclusion from the studies of sensitivity reviewed
in Chapter 4, and it is also the conclusion from the studies in this chapter that
included measures of sensitivity (McElwain & Volling, 2004; Meins et al., 2002;
Symons & Clark, 2000).
A further question, of course, is whether sensitivity can account for the appar-
ent effects of attachment. The answer is not clear based on the limited evidence
to date. The McElwain and Volling (2004) report does not analyze for indepen-
dent effects of each predictor with the other controlled. In Meins et al. (2002)
there was no effect of attachment, and thus the issue does not arise. There was
an effect of sensitivity, but it disappeared in regression analyses, and mothers’
use of mental state comments emerged as the only predictor of theory of mind.
Finally, in Symons and Clark (2000) conclusions varied somewhat depending on
the time period at issue (concurrent vs. longitudinal prediction) and the specific
false belief measure. Only sensitivity, however, showed any across-time relation
to theory of mind, and the conclusion drawn was that “the current data point to
a generalised measure of sensitive parenting as being a better predictor of per-
formance than either antecedent or concurrent attachment security” (Symons &
Clark, 2000, p. 18).
The literature is both larger and more consistent with respect to a second pre-
dictor: the language used by parents (typically mothers) in conversation with
the child. Parental language is the subject of Chapter 7, and I will say more there
about how it is elicited and what is typically analyzed. For now I note simply that
the usual focus is on the use of mental state terms, either mental state terms in
general or emotion terms in particular, although in some cases more general dis-
course variables serve as the target for analysis.
130 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Conclusions
Table 5.4 provides a tally of the results just reviewed as a function of three fac-
tors: theory-of-m ind measure, attachment measure, and design (concurrent
Table 5.4 Tabulation of Results from Studies of Attachment and Theory of Mind
the similarities and the distinctions between the two formulations have been the
subject of surprisingly little discussion. There are exceptions, however, and here
I draw two points from discussions by Paul Harris (1997) and Mary Main (1991)
(see also Palacios & Alvarez, 2006).
First, several features that are intrinsic to working models might profitably
receive more attention in work on theory of mind. One concerns the role of affect.
A working model is not a disinterested processing of characteristics of the self and
others; rather, it is inherently affect-laden, and the beliefs that it embodies about
self and other are of maximal importance to the child. A second feature concerns
the target for the child’s reasoning efforts. A working model is not directed to
the characteristics of people in general; rather, it is directed to the people whom
the child knows best, namely the parents and the self. A final point concerns dif-
ferences among children. Differences in the working models that children form
are not simply a matter of degree or rate of development; rather, there are impor-
tant qualitative differences that reflect the nature of the child’s attachment. All
of these points—t he role of affect in reasoning, reasoning about familiar and not
just generic others, individual differences of a qualitative and not only quanti-
tative nature—a re arguably weaknesses in the theory-of-m ind literature in its
current state.
The second point concerns possible effects of theory of mind on working
models. Both P. Harris (1997) and Main (1991) discuss ways in which an ini-
tial working model would be expected to change as the child’s theory-of-m ind
abilities change. Children come to realize, for example, that the attachment
object has goals of her own that may or may not involve the child and that
these goals underlie both her behavior and her emotional responses. They also
come to realize that what is immediately apparent is not always the same as
what is real, and that self and other may have different and in some cases mis-
taken beliefs about the same situation. Although both Harris and Main focus
on the effects of developmental changes in theory of mind, individual differ-
ences among children in theory-of mind understanding might well lead to dif-
ferences in their working models of attachment. These links, too, remain to be
explored.
6
Developments in Infancy
This chapter is divided into two general sections. The first section provides
an overview of the one aspect of theory of mind omitted from the review in
Chapter 2: development during infancy. The first goal of the chapter is to sum-
marize the main forms of theory-of-m ind understanding that emerge in the first
18 or so months of life.
As noted in Chapter 2, theory of mind in infancy, more so than during any
other age period, is embedded in a social context, developed and expressed in
interaction with others. The second goal of the chapter is to discuss how the social
context contributes to these developments.
A point made in Chapter 5 is relevant here as well. Ordinarily, “social context”
encompasses a variety of settings and a variety of social agents who contribute to
a child’s development, and one challenge for research is to pull apart the contri-
butions of the different agents. In infancy, however, most children’s social worlds
are a good deal more limited, and the research focus is correspondingly also a
good deal more limited. What research has addressed is how parents contribute
to their infants’ development. Indeed, the focus is more limited still, given that in
the great majority of studies “parent” has meant “mother.” I will note some excep-
tions to this point as we go.
The research literatures being reviewed in this chapter run into the hun-
dreds of studies, and even those with a focus on the contribution of parents may
include several dozen entries. My coverage is thus often of the for-example sort.
As always, there are further sources to supplement the discussion here. Legerstee
(2005) and Reddy (2008) offer book length-treatments of infant theory of mind.
Among general books on theory of mind, Moore (2006) provides an especially
helpful discussion of infancy. Finally, a review article by Legerstee (2009) deals
directly with the question of interest here: how parents contribute to their infants’
theory-of-m ind development.
135
136 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
including the way in which different emotional cues fit together. If shown an
angry face, for example, they expect to hear an angry voice should the face start
to speak.
These and other forms of early social sensitivity are precursors to the theory-of-
mind achievements to which I turn now. Before discussing specific developments,
however, I will note a general advance that is reflected in each of the more specific
achievements. Figure 6.1, taken from the Moore (2006) book, provides a picto-
rial depiction. As we have just seen, from birth infants are social creatures who
engage in countless interactions with the important people in their lives. Initially,
though, all such interactions are dyadic, in the sense that each partner’s focus is
on the other, and any environmental element (a toy, a bottle, etc.) is at best an
incidental prop in the interpersonal back-and-forth. Infants do, of course, at times
focus on toys and bottles and other parts of the inanimate environment; when
they do, however, they do not maintain a simultaneous focus on an interactional
partner. The interaction thus remains dyadic, either infant and social partner or
infant and environmental object.
By some time in the second half of the first year the situation changes. The
change is gradual rather than abrupt, and researchers are not agreed with respect
to its timing. Eventually, however, the focus of interaction broadens to include
not just two but three elements: infant, adult, and environment. Now the interac-
tion between infant and adult is about something, and now the infant for the first
time realizes that the adult has a psychological connection to something in the
world—t hat the adult sees, likes, desires, or whatever the object on which both
are focused. Such a realization marks a basic advance in theory of mind: the earli-
est understanding that other people have psychological states.
Joint Attention
What sorts of psychological states must infants come to understand? Arguably
the most basic psychological state is attention: the realization that one’s inter-
actional partner is focused on and processing some aspect of the environment.
Imagine, for example, that a mother and child are playing happily on the floor
and the mother then suddenly turns her head and looks toward the corner of the
room. Does the infant also turn his head in an attempt to follow her gaze? Such
gaze following is unlikely in young infants, but by the last third of the first year it
has become a common response. The establishment of a shared focus of attention
in this way is referred to as joint attention, and from some theoretical perspectives
(a point to which I return) it can be argued to reflect several basic realizations
about the mind on the infant’s part: Mommy is having an interesting visual expe-
rience; I am like Mommy; therefore I can share her visual experience if I look
where she is looking.
Joint attention has been the most thoroughly studied aspect of theory of
mind in infancy, and this brief description glosses over a number of complexi-
ties in its study (for fuller discussions, see Frischen, Bayliss, & Tipper, 2007; and
Seeman, 2012). The probability and the ease of gaze following vary as a func-
tion of a number of factors. Initially, gaze following is dependent on motion by
the interactional partner, either of the head or at the least of the eyes; eventually
eye orientation alone is sufficient for the infant to zero in on the target of inter-
est (Frischen et al., 2007). Initially, gaze following tends to be successful only if
the target is within the infant’s visual field; with development, infants become
able to track further and further targets (Flom & Pick, 2005). With development
they also become more successful at identifying a specific target when several
possibilities are within view (Butterworth, 1995). Initially, infants may follow the
partner’s apparent gaze even when the partner’s eyes are closed; eventually they
realize that the eyes must be open for gaze following to make sense (Brooks &
Meltzoff, 2005). Eventually they also become able to handle obstacles or barriers,
following the partner’s gaze when the partner’s line of sight is unobstructed but
not when an obstacle intervenes, and moving or peering around a barrier them-
selves when necessary to locate a target (Butler, Caron, & Brooks, 2000; Moll &
Tomasello, 2004).
Further complexities arise from the fact that eye movements are not the only
cue to someone else’s attentional focus, and thus not the only cue that infants
must learn to use. Pointing also serves to direct attention; indeed, pointing does
so more explicitly and more exclusively than does gaze. Infants begin to respond
appropriately to points at about the same time that they begin to follow gaze
Developments in Infancy 139
(Carpenter, Nagell, & Tomasello, 1998). By this time or soon after they also begin
to use points themselves. Infants produce two sorts of points (Bates, Camaioni,
& Volterra, 1975). An imperative point is a request for the object pointed at; its
message is “Give me that.” A declarative point, in contrast, is intended to draw
its recipient’s attention to something of interest; its message is “Look at that.” It
has been argued that in some cases declarative points may serve an interrogative
purpose—t hat is, that the child is seeking information about the object in ques-
tion (Kovacs, Tauzin, Teglas, Gergely, & Csibra, 2014). It most instances, how-
ever, their purpose seems to be simply to share experience with another. In this
sense, they constitute a prototypical theory-of-m ind development.
As infants develop, episodes of joint attention begin to extend well beyond sin-
gle instances of gaze following or point following. Infants enter into what some
researchers (e.g., Tomasello, 1999) refer to as joint engagement—t hat is, relatively
extended bouts of social interaction with a partner that are centered on some
object of common interest. They also begin to use joint attention as simply a first
step toward further information gathering and decision making. The next section
describes one way in which this occurs.
Social Referencing
Let me modify the mother–infant example to introduce a further development.
Imagine now that the mother looks not to the corner of the room but to a door,
and that she does so because a stranger (i.e., someone unknown to the baby) has
just appeared in the doorway. How does the baby respond? Again, babies in the
first half year or so are unlikely to respond at all. By late in the first year, how-
ever, the infant may not only follow the mother’s gaze but do something more
as well. Having seen the stranger, the infant now looks back at the mother’s face,
searching in her expression for cues that will help him make sense of this unusual
event. The search of the mother’s face is an example of social referencing: using the
emotional cues provided by others, conveyed via either facial expression or tone
of voice, to guide one’s own response in uncertain situations (Baldwin & Moses,
1996; Walden, 1991). Social referencing is thus the conjunction of two skills
whose development we have seen: the ability to establish joint attention, and the
ability to infer the emotions of others.
The starting point for possible instances of social referencing is some novel or
ambiguous situation, a situation in which the infant is uncertain what is happen-
ing but wants very much to know. Experimental studies of the topic have contrived
various such situations. The vignette used to introduce the concept, response
to strangers, is one common example. Others include response to a novel and
ambiguous toy, response to an unfamiliar animal, and behavior on the visual cliff.
Just as there are various possible elicitors of social referencing, so are there
various possible sources for helpful cues. Parents, of course, are a primary source,
140 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
and I will discuss what we know about parents, including comparisons between
parents and other adults, in the second section of the chapter. We will see that the
source for social referencing does not need to be a familiar one, for children read-
ily look to experimenters in laboratory situations. In more naturalistic situations
a variety of sources may be drawn from, including siblings (Feinman, Roberts, &
Hsieh, 1988), day care workers (Camras & Sachs, 1991), and characters seen on
TV (Mumme & Fernald, 2003).
The messages conveyed in social referencing vary along two dimensions: posi-
tive or negative valence as the content of the message, and facial expression or tone
of voice as the medium of expression. Athough either can affect children’s behav-
ior, negative messages generally carry more weight than positive ones (Vaish,
Grossmann, & Woodward, 2008). And although, again, either can be effective,
tone-of-voice cues generally have more impact than facial expression (Vaish &
Striano, 2004). On the other hand, the separation of cues into auditory or visual
in experimental studies is somewhat artificial, for parents often use both channels
when they are not constrained to the use of just one, and evidence suggests that a
combination of vocal and facial cues is more effective than the use of either alone
(Kim, Walden, & Knieps, 2010).
As with joint attention, the ability to engage in social referencing strength-
ens in various ways as infants develop. A young infant may look at a nearby adult
regardless of the adult’s focus of attention; older infants do so only if the adult
is paying attention to both them and the object of interest (Striano & Rochat,
2000). Whereas initially infants benefit only from messages for which they are the
intended recipient, eventually they can acquire information from what they over-
hear or see in exchanges between others (Repacholi & Meltzoff, 2007). Finally,
whereas the earliest effects of social referencing tend to be immediate ones, with
development infants can retain and use the information across longer and longer
spans of time (Flom & Johnson, 2011; Hertenstein & Campos, 2004).
Understanding of Intention
So far we have considered infants’ ability to understand what others are perceiv-
ing and to understand what others are feeling. A third basic task is to understand
what others are intending—t hat is, to infer the goals that underlie people’s behav-
ior. This achievement (and, indeed, the achievements already discussed) is actu-
ally twofold: first, realizing that other people have intentions, and then accurately
judging what the intentions are in particular situations.
As we saw, both joint attention and social referencing involve overt behav-
iors from which the underlying theory-of-m ind knowledge can be inferred.
Understanding of intention, however, has no obvious behavioral correlate, and its
study therefore presents a challenge. How can we figure out what a baby under-
stands about intentions? Two methods of study have proved informative.
Developments in Infancy 141
One is the method that has been most influential in general in the study of
infant perception and infant cognition: the habituation–d ishabituation tech-
nique. Habituation refers to a decline in interest and attention when the same
stimulus or event is encountered repeatedly; dishabituation refers to a recovery
of interest and attention when the stimulus or event changes in some way. By clev-
erly exploiting infants’ tendency to become bored with repetition and interested
at the occurrence of change, researchers have been able to explore a wide variety
of early perceptual and cognitive achievements.
Amanda Woodward is the researcher who has applied the technique most pro-
ductively to the study of understanding of intentions (Woodward, 2005, 2009).
In one study, for example, the infant watched as an experimenter reached repeat-
edly toward one of two toys (see the top half of Figure 6.2). Once the infant had
habituated to this event, the spatial position of the toys was reversed, and the
experimenter either reached for the same toy as before or reached for the other toy
(see the bottom half of Figure 6.2). One change, therefore, maintained the same
goal but changed the arm movement, whereas the other change maintained the
same arm movement but changed the goal. By 5 months of age infants looked lon-
ger when the reach was toward the other, previously ignored toy, suggesting that
they had encoded the intention behind the reach and that they were surprised
when the intention apparently changed.
Like the other developments discussed, infants’ understanding of inten-
tions improves in various ways throughout infancy. Initially, infants understand
Habituation Event
goal-related action only when it results in a touch of the target object; eventu-
ally a point or a look is sufficient to infer the actor’s intention (Woodward, 2003).
Initially, infants demonstrate an after-the-fact understanding of intentional
action; eventually they are able, given sufficient information, to predict what the
action will be (Cannon & Woodward (2012). Infants also become sensitive to the
sequence of actions, showing more interest when an intended series of actions
is interrupted before its completion than when it is carried through successfully
(Baldwin, Baird, Saylor, & Clark, 2001). They come as well to appreciate the emo-
tional consequences of completing or failing to complete an action, reacting with
more surprise when a negative emotion follows goal fulfillment than when it fol-
lows a failure to achieve the goal (Skerry & Spelke, 2014).
At the same time that they are learning about the behavior of others, infants
are also developing their own set of goal-d irected behaviors. One way in which
they do so is by using the intentions of others to guide their own action. Having
seen an adult reach for a particular toy, they are subsequently more likely to
choose that toy themselves—only, however, if the adult’s reach was an unambigu-
ous attempt to obtain the toy (and not, for example, a back-of-t he-hand contact—
Hamlin, Hallinan, & Woodward, 2008). The self–other relation goes in the other
direction as well. One of the contributors to infants’ understanding of acts such
as reaching and pointing is their own ability to produce such behaviors (Gerson
& Woodward, 2014). Finally, infants also become sensitive to actions directed
toward themselves. One interesting finding here comes from what has been
labeled the unable–unwilling distinction. In this procedure an adult starts but then
fails to hand a toy to an infant, in one case deliberately (she is teasing the baby)
and in the other case accidentally (she drops the toy). For 6-month-olds this dis-
tinction does not matter; 9-month-olds, however, react in the way you or I might,
that is, more annoyance in response to the tease than in response to the accident
(Behne, Carpenter, Call, & Tomasello, 2005).
The second approach to understanding of intention makes use of infants’ ten-
dency to imitate the behaviors of others. Imitation in itself, of course, does not imply
any understanding of the intent behind the action. Some forms of imitation, how-
ever, do. In a study by Meltzoff (1995) 18-month-olds watched an adult attempt to
carry out a series of tasks—for example, to pull apart the sections of a dumbbell or
to drop beads into a cylinder. Half of the children saw a successful performance of
the tasks; the other half saw the same behaviors but a failure to complete the tasks
(for example, the adult’s hand slipped off when attempting to pull apart the dumb-
bell). Imitation of the full, successful action was equivalent in the two conditions,
indicating that the children had encoded the intention behind the actions and that
it was the intention, and not necessarily the actual behavior, that guided their own
behavior. Similarly, in a study by Carpenter, Akhtar, and Tomasello (1998) 14-to
18-month-olds saw an adult perform a series of actions in pursuit of some goal, in
some cases intentionally (the adult said “there!” following the behavior) and in
Developments in Infancy 143
some cases accidentally (the adult said “woops!” following the behavior). Infants
imitated twice as many of the intentional actions as of the accidental actions, indi-
cating again that they had identified which behaviors were goal-directed and which
ones were not.
Recent research adds several further points with respect to understanding
of intention. Bellagamba, Camaioni, and Colonessi (2006) demonstrated that
individual differences in intention understanding were stable over time—t hat is,
infants who were relatively high in such understanding at 12 months remained rel-
atively high at 15 months. Olineck and Poulin-Dubois (2009) also demonstrated
stability over time, in this case between attentional measures at 10 months and
imitation measures at 14 months. They also reported some within-time consis-
tency in performance on different forms of attentional measure. Finally, Dunphy-
Lelii and colleagues (Dunphy-Lelii, LaBounty, Lane, & Wellman, 2014) provide
data on an important question: whether typical laboratory measures of intention
understanding relate to infants’ real-life social interactions. Their answer was a
positive one: Looking-time measures of infants’ ability to parse intentional actions
were positively related to social attentiveness and joint engagement in interaction
with the mother. Such measures also related to the mother’s responsiveness to the
infant, a finding that I return to in the second section of the chapter.
Rich Versus Lean
In introducing joint attention, I noted that the description given for the infant’s
understanding (I am like Mommy. She is having an interesting visual experience.
I can share her visual experience) was specific to some theoretical interpretations
of the phenomenon. Specifically, such a description constitutes what is a called
a rich interpretation of infant behavior (Racine, 2012; Slaughter & McConnell,
2003). A rich interpretation imputes a good deal of underlying, interrelated
knowledge in its attempts to explain overt behavior—i n the present case, either
an adult-l ike or close to adult-l ike understanding of the psychological states that
underlie acts of joint attention. Among the prominent researchers who generally
subscribe to a rich interpretation of infant competencies are Simon Baron-Cohen
(e.g., Baron-Cohen, 1995), Maria Legerstee (e.g., Legerstee, 2005), Andrew
Meltzoff (e.g., Meltzoff, 2007), and Michael Tomasello (e.g., Tomasello, 1999).
The alternative to rich interpretation is lean interpretation. As the label sug-
gests, the lean approach attributes considerably less underlying knowledge than
does the rich approach. The attempt, rather, is to identify simpler, more parsimo-
nious explanations for the behaviors we see, resorting to richer conceptions only
when the child’s behavior unequivocally demonstrates that such understanding
has developed. Successful gaze following, for example, might be explained, at
least initially, as an individually learned response, established because it pays off
in the reinforcement of interesting things to see and without any implications for a
144 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
about mental states without the realization that mental states exist, and this real-
ization is a basic achievement of infancy.
The preceding argument has to do with developments that are achieved by
all typically developing children. Does it matter how quickly or how well they
achieve the early steps in the process? This is the across-time question in the idio-
graphic sense—do early individual differences in theory of mind relate to later
individual differences in theory of mind?
A number of recent studies indicate that they do. Table 6.1 summarizes the
studies that have examined the issue. It can be seen that the sampling of abili-
ties at both time periods, while hardly exhaustive, does span a range of outcomes.
Most commonly studied in infancy are joint attention and understanding of
Table 6.1 Continued
intention. Most commonly studied in later childhood is false belief, although the
fuller Wellman and Liu (2004) battery also appears in a number of studies.
The general conclusion from this research to date is easy to state: Every study of
the issue has reported a relation between infant theory of mind and later theory of
mind. In several cases, moreover, the relations remain when various third-factor
explanations (e.g., language ability) are controlled. To be sure, not all possible
relations work out; some would-be predictors fail to predict, and some later out-
comes turn out to have no significant antecedents. In some instances, however
(although not always), such null outcomes are informative, because they help to
establish the specificity of the relationship. In the study by Kristen and colleagues
(Kristen, Sodian, Thoermer, & Perst, 2011), for example, understanding and
production of imperative points uniquely predicted later talk about desires, an
expectable finding given that the former are really just a nonverbal version of the
latter. In the study by Thoermer and colleagues (Thoermer, Sodian, Vuori, Perst,
& Kristen, 2012), performance on an implicit false belief measure in infancy
related to the procedurally and conceptually similar unexpected locations task in
preschool—not, however, to performance on the unexpected contents task.
The first of the longitudinal reports (Charman et al., 2000) set forth two general
explanations for such cross-time relations, explanations that have generally been
endorsed by later researchers as well. One, which was suggested in the examples
just given, is that early abilities grow into later ones as the initially implicit compe-
tencies of infancy are reworked with experience into the explicit, representational
form that they take in later childhood. The other general explanation, which is by
no means mutually exclusive, is that the social context in which infant abilities
emerge and are expressed provides a rich opportunity to learn about the men-
tal states of others. Engaging in joint attention or social referencing, for example,
requires a continual focus on the mental states of one’s interaction partner, along
with the realization that the partner’s perspective may differ from one’s own. Such
experiences, therefore, serve as building blocks for developments yet to come.
A third possible contributor to the cross-time relations is also not incompatible
with these first two possibilities. Later theory of mind is not the only developmen-
tal outcome for which proficiency in infant theory-of-m ind skills is important.
There is, in fact, a considerably larger research literature that predates the work
just discussed, and that is research directed to relations between infant theory of
mind, especially joint attention, and children’s language development. It makes
sense to think that the ability to achieve a common focus on the object of talk
would be important for language learning, and this turns out clearly to be the
case (Graham, Nilsen, & Nayer, 2007; Meltzoff & Brooks, 2009). As I have noted
at various points, individual differences in language ability are one contributor to
individual differences in theory of mind. Thus the work on joint attention and lan-
guage acquisition suggests another way in which what happens in infant theory of
mind is important for what happens in later theory of mind.
148 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Parents’ Contribution
We turn now to how parents contribute to the various developments just dis-
cussed. In what follows, I divide the coverage into the same four general headings
used in the first part of this chapter: namely, early social interest and responsive-
ness, joint attention, social referencing, and understanding of intention. Most of
the relevant studies have in fact focused on just one of these developments. As we
will see, however, research suggests what we might expect: namely, that the same
parental practices are important across a range of theory-of-m ind outcomes.
still-face episodes (Tarabulsy et al., 2003). We might also expect that a history
of maternal depression would affect still-face responding; research to date, how-
ever, provides a mixed picture, with negative effects in some but not all studies
(Mesman et al., 2009).
The Still-Face Paradigm examines what happens when there is a disruption in
the usual contingency between the infant’s behaviors and those of the mother.
Another way to examine the same question is the replay task, a procedure intro-
duced by Murray and Trevarthen (1985). The replay task contrasts infant behav-
iors under two conditions: a normal face-to-face interaction with the mother,
and a subsequent video replay of the mother’s part of this initial interaction. The
two conditions are therefore identical in maternal behavior (same smiles, same
vocalizations, etc.); the difference is that in one condition the behaviors are tied
to the infant’s ongoing behavior and in the other condition this contingency has
disappeared. As with the Still-Face Paradigm, infants find the lack of contingency
upsetting; they tend both to attend less and to smile less when the mother’s behav-
iors are not in synchrony with their own. And as with the Still-Face Paradigm,
parenting history affects the infant’s response. Infants with a history of warm,
sensitive, and responsive parenting show a clear differentiation between the two
conditions, responding with more smiles, gazes, and vocalizations to the live than
to the replay version of the mother; infants who lack such a parenting history show
little differentiation between conditions (Markova & Legerstee, 2006). A relative
lack of differentiation between live and replay is also characteristic of infants of
depressed mothers (Skotheim et al., 2013).
I turn now to joint attention. Although all typically developing infants mas-
ter joint attention, some do so more quickly than others, and some deploy their
joint attention skills more readily and effectively than others. The question now is
where such differences come from—in particular, of course, how parents contrib-
ute to their infant’s development.
Relevant evidence divides into two general categories. Some studies have
explored how well general approaches to parenting, most of which have already
been discussed in other contexts, can account for the emergence of joint atten-
tion. I begin with work under this heading. Other studies have concentrated on
the joint attention context itself and specific experiences that may nurture infants’
understanding. This work makes up the second part of the coverage.
We saw in Chapters 3 and 4 that parenting that is high in warmth and sensi-
tivity is associated (albeit with some qualifications and exceptions) with positive
outcomes in development, including positive theory-of-m ind outcomes. Such is
also the case for developments in infancy, including joint attention.
Let me say a word first about measurement. A variety of approaches to assess-
ing the quality of early parenting appear in the literature. I will single out two as
examples, both of which have contributed to multiple reports.
One is the Child-Adult Relationship Experimental Index, or CARE-I NDEX,
developed by Patricia Crittenden (1988, 2004). The CARE is an observational
assessment of mother–infant interaction, derived from a videotaped segment
(typically 5 minutes in length) of free play behavior in a laboratory setting. The
mother’s behavior is coded on three scales: sensitivity, control, and unresponsive-
ness. A sensitive mother, for example, is skilled at reading signals from her infant,
adjusts well to the infant’s wishes and needs, and is consistently warm and sup-
portive in her interactions; a controlling or unresponsive mother falls short of this
desirable pattern, although the two categories do so in somewhat different ways.
The second influential measurement comes from the work of Maria Legerstee
and associates (Legerstee, Markova, & Fisher, 2007; Legerstee & Varghese, 2001).
The focus of the Legerstee group is on maternal attunement to the infant, that
is, the mother’s ability to recognize and to respond appropriately to the affective
states of her baby. Attunement is argued to be an essential contributor to infants’
awareness of the fit between their own emotions and those of others, including
the realization that mother knows and shares their emotions. Operationally,
attunement is defined in terms of behaviors along three dimensions: maintain-
ing attention, warm sensitivity, and social responsiveness. Table 6.2 provides a
description of each dimension. The assessment is again an observational one,
based on a sampling of free-play interaction between mother and infant in a labo-
ratory setting.
I have already mentioned one finding from the Legerstee research. A relatively
high degree of maternal attunement early in infancy is associated with a rela-
tively strong differentiation between live and replay conditions in the replay task
(Markova & Legerstee, 2006). Maternal attunement is also positively related to
joint attention later in infancy (Legerstee, 2005). The relation, moreover, is not
only concurrent but also prospective. Before they are capable of joint attention,
infants engage in gaze monitoring, that is, preferential looking toward an inter-
actional partner’s face, especially the region of the eyes. Legerstee et al. (2007)
reported a positive relation between gaze monitoring at 3 months and joint atten-
tion at 10 months—only, however, for infants whose mothers were high in mater-
nal attunement. The relation between early and later developments was seen as
evidence for continuity in social understanding over time, with an early dyadic
form of response developing into the triadic form of understanding represented
by joint attention. Such continuity was found, however, only when a “supportive
Developments in Infancy 151
Category Definition
Maintaining attention Maternal directive, question, or comment that was
related to the activity or object that the infant was
currently visually engaged with, physically engaged
with, or both, just prior to the mother’s request,
or was in direct response to the infant’s attempt to
attract her attention to an object or activity.
Warm sensitivity Degree of sensitivity mothers displayed to infants’
cues, including promptness and appropriateness of
reactions, acceptance of infants’ interests, amount of
positive affect, and tone of voice.
Social responsiveness Mothers’ imitative responses to infants’ smiles and
vocalizations, and as modulation of infants’ negative
affect.
Note. Adapted from “The Role of Affect Mirroring on Social Expectancies in Three-Month-Old
Infants,” by M. Legerstee and J. Varghese, 2001, Child Development, 72, p. 1306. Copyright 2001 by
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Reprinted with permission.
maternal interactive style” (Legerstee et al. 2007, p. 303) helped the infant to
make the dyadic to triadic transition.
Although its operationalization is somewhat different, the concept of attun-
ement also figures importantly in a study by Rollins and Greenwald (2013). Their
specific emphasis was on the intensity of the affect in instances in which the
mother matched her affect to that of her infant. Thus matches between mother
and baby were scored for both valence (positive or negative emotion) and inten-
sity (low, moderate, or high). The attunement measures were taken at 6 and
9 months, and joint attention was measured at 12 months. Intensity turned out to
be important. Low intensity matching at 6 months related positively to later joint
attention; moderate intensity matching at 9 months, however, related negatively.
The relations, moreover, were substantial ones: correlations of .63 and –.65. The
contrasting effects of low and moderate matching were interpreted as a reflection
of the mother’s role in promoting a transition from an early understanding of oth-
ers’ emotions to an eventual understanding of others’ attention. Such understand-
ing is most likely to emerge when the infant’s arousal is not too great, and “some
caregivers are more skilled at supporting their infant’s joint attention in calm
interactions without over-a rousing them” (Rollins & Greenwald, 2013, p. 352).
The CARE-I NDEX has appeared most often in research on understanding of
intention, and that is work that I consider later in the chapter. The one application
to joint attention comes in a study by Raver and Leadbeater (1995). Their sample
152 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
was an at-r isk one: the infants of socially disadvantaged adolescent mothers. The
infants were observed twice, first at 12 months and then again at 20 months. At
both ages relatively high maternal sensitivity related positively to joint attention.
The relation held for both total time spent in joint attention and proportion of
reciprocal bidding sequences. A reciprocal bid is one to which the interactional
partner responds positively, and thus one that results in a successful bout of joint
attention. As such, reciprocal bids are an index of the quality of joint attention
initiatives.
Although they do not use the specific measures of sensitivity just discussed,
a number of other studies have examined maternal sensitivity as a predictor of
joint attention (Bigelow, MacLean, & Proctor, 2004; Flanagan, Coppa, Riggs, &
Alario, 1994; Gaffan, Martins, Healy, & Murray, 2010; Hobson, Patrick, Crandell,
Garcia Perez, & Lee, 2004; Wade, Madigan, Akbari, & Jenkins, 2015). In each
case the relation has proved to be a positive one. In the Hobson et al. (2004) study
the infant assessments included not only joint attention but also measures of non-
social understanding (object permanence and means–end relations). The effects
of maternal sensitivity turned out to be specific to the social measures. In the
Flanagan et al. (1994) study the sample was teen mothers (all less than 17 years
old) and their infants. Although the level of joint attention for these dyads was
lower than that typically found, sensitivity still made a difference within the sam-
ple, with the best performance by infants of relatively sensitive mothers.
Sensitivity is also a component of another parenting construct that appears in
the joint attention literature, the construct of emotional availability. The idea of
emotional availability is perhaps self-explanatory; it refers to the caregiver’s avail-
ability and responsiveness in times of emotional need. Operationally, the best
established measure of the construct, the Emotional Availability Scales (Biringen,
Robinson, & Emde, 2000), is composed of four caregiving subscales: sensitivity,
structuring, nonintrusiveness, and nonhostility. As with the other measures con-
sidered in this section, the assessment is an observational one, based on a sam-
pling (typically at least 10 minutes in length) of caregiver–child interaction.
We saw in Chapter 4 that relatively high emotional availability on the parent’s
part is associated with good emotion understanding in preschoolers (Garvin et al,
2012). The same study reported a positive, although modest, relation between
emotional availability and joint attention at 18 months. In contrast, the only other
study to examine emotional availability as a predictor of joint attention (Osorio,
Martins, Meins, Martins, & Soares, 2011) found no relation at all. The authors of
the latter report suggest that the young age of their sample (9 to 11 months) may
account for the absence of a relation. Conceptually, the construct of emotional
availability is tied to the attachment relationship. Emotional availability may
become important, then, only once the attachment relationship is fully formed.
As we saw in Chapter 5, the attachment relationship itself has been examined
as a possible predictor of joint attention in four studies (Claussen et al., 2002;
Developments in Infancy 153
Meins et al., 2011; Scholmerich et al., 1997; Yoon et al., 2014). Three of the stud-
ies reported a relation. In two instances it was the disorganized pattern of attach-
ment that diverged from the other patterns, resulting in lower levels of joint
attention, in one case in interaction with the mother (Scholmerich et al.) and
in one case in interaction with an experimenter (Claussen et al). The Yoon et al.
study is an exception, for they reported no differences between infants in the
disorganized category and the other attachment groups. They did, however, find
a difference among the mothers: Mothers of disorganized infants initiated fewer
bids for joint attention than did mothers of other infants. Finally, in the Meins
et al. (2011) study it was the avoidant group that proved distinctive, showing
both less initiation of joint attention with the mother and more initiation of joint
attention with the experimenter than did the other attachment groups. As noted,
in Chapter 5, the authors’ interpretation of this finding is straightforward: The
avoidance of the mother shown in the Strange Situation assessment extends
to other interactional contexts, and the infant compensates by an increased
response to other social partners.
The Meins et al. (2011) report adds a further point. The joint attention measures
were taken twice, first at 8 months and then again at 15 months. It was only at the
older age that differences among the attachment groups appeared. The authors’
explanation for this age effect is similar to that offered by Osorio et al. (2011) for
the contrasting effects of emotional availability at different ages: Effects of the
attachment relationship emerge only once the relationship is fully formed.
There are two more entries that fall under the general-approaches heading. One
is work on maternal depression. We have seen that maternal depression can affect
infants’ social responsiveness from very early in life. Maternal depression can
also affect the emergence and the frequency of joint attention. Effects, to be sure,
are not inevitable. Gaffan et al. (2010) found no effects of mothers’ self-reported
depressive symptoms on joint attention in 9-month-olds, and in Henderson and
Jennings (2003) a mean difference favoring the infants of nondepressed mothers
fell short of significance. On the other hand, Henderson and Jennings did find
that nondepressed mothers made more initiations directed to the child’s focus
of attention, a generally positive strategy with respect to joint attention. And sev-
eral other studies (Goldsmith & Rogoff, 1997; Jameson, Gelfand, Kulcsar, & Teti,
1997; Raver & Leadbeater, 1995) have reported lower levels of joint attention in
the infants of depressed mothers.
The second entry under the general heading is a topic not yet considered, for
it is the subject of Chapter 7. Most work on parental talk as a contributor to chil-
dren’s theory of mind has concentrated, understandably, on children who are old
enough to understand the talk and to produce speech themselves. But parents, of
course, do not wait for the postinfant years to begin to talk to their children. And
recent research suggests that early parental talk can contribute to the emergence
of joint attention.
154 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
The clearest effects appear in a study by Roberts et al. (2013). Maternal speech
to the infant was measured when the baby was 6 months old, and joint attention
was measured (in a structured assessment with an experimenter) when the baby
reached 12 months of age. Of special interest in the coding of the speech samples
were references to the infant’s mental states. Most mothers in fact made several
such references; most frequent were references to what the baby was perceiving,
followed by references to desire and emotion. The mother and infant measures
proved to be positively (albeit modestly—a correlation of .25) related: The more
frequent the references to the infant’s mental states at 6 months, the better the
joint attention at 12 months.
One other aspect of maternal speech also proved predictive of joint atten-
tion, and that was variability in pitch. Modulations in pitch are a component of
a style of speech that many adults adopt in talking to young children, a style that
is typically labeled either motherese or infant-directed speech. It has long been clear
that motherese aids the child in the task of language learning. The Roberts et al.
(2013) study suggests that motherese also aids in the emergence of joint attention.
Two reports by Slaughter, Peterson, and Carpenter (2008, 2009) provide fur-
ther data with respect to possible effects of early maternal speech. The source for
both reports is the same: a sample of 24 mother–infant dyads originally studied
by Carpenter et al. (1998). The design was longitudinal, with data collected when
the infants were 9, 12, and 15 months of age. As in the Roberts et al. (2013) study,
maternal references to infant mental states were frequent. Perception was again
the most often labeled mental state, although references to desires (especially the
word “want”) were also common.
Both reports suggest a back-and-forth relation between maternal speech and
child competence, although the specific pattern differs across the two reports. In
Slaughter et al. (2008) there was no overall relation between mothers’ talk about
perception and children’s joint attention. There was, however, an across-time rela-
tion: References to perception dropped significantly in the period following the
child’s mastery of joint attention. This pattern suggests that mothers label their
children’s perceptual experiences as long as they are still trying to help the child
establish joint attention; once joint attention is in place, talk is more likely to shift
to other matters—for example, a focus on the object of mutual interest.
In Slaughter et al. (2009) the interest was in the infant’s production of com-
municative gestures, especially the two forms of pointing identified earlier in
the chapter: declarative points and imperative points. Although maternal speech
showed no relation to declarative points, the mother’s use of volitional (i.e.,
desire) terms did relate to the age at which the infant first produced imperative
points: the more frequent the mother’s use of such terms, the earlier the age of
emergence. There was, then, a relation between the mother’s talk about desires
and the infant’s ability to communicate desires through pointing. This relation
was not evident, however, until the 15 month test period, and thus well after the
Developments in Infancy 155
from the infant, which means both reading signals from the infant accurately and
being willing to let the infant take the lead. Finally, parents must also adjust their
behavior as the child’s abilities and interests change with development. Explicit
bids from the parent become less necessary as the infant begins to take greater
initiative, and extended sequences of turn taking become more possible as the
child’s sensorimotor skills and attentional resources improve.
The microanalyses of mother–infant interaction speak to theoretical issues in
the field, including the rich–lean distinction. In particular, Deak and colleagues
(Deak et al., 2014; de Barbaro et al., 2013; Triesch, Teuscher, Deak, & Carlson,
2006) have argued that their research demonstrates that naturally occurring
experiences and reinforcement contingencies are sufficient to account for the
emergence of joint attention, with no need for a grounding in a broader theory-of-
mind system. Not all researchers agree, however (e.g., Csibra, 2006).
I will add that the question of how to nurture joint attention is not only of theo-
retical interest. As discussed in Chapter 2, children with autism show marked def-
icits in theory-of-m ind understanding, and one of the earliest appearing problems
is difficulty in establishing joint attention. A number of intervention programs
have been developed—and applied with some success—to help such children
acquire joint attention skills (White et al., 2011).
A final variable to be considered is the interaction partner. We have already
seen, of course, that interaction partner can make a difference; the main mes-
sage from the work reviewed so far is that some mothers are better at eliciting and
maintaining joint attention than are others. The question now is whether there
are general, on-t he-average differences in such effectiveness across the different
sorts of partners with whom young children interact. Three contrasts have been
explored.
The clearest conclusion comes from a contrast first examined by Bakeman and
Adamson (1984).The infants in the study were followed longitudinally, and joint
attention was measured on multiple occasions between 6 and 18 months. On each
occasion it was measured with two interaction partners: the infant’s mother and a
familiar peer. The basic finding was a perhaps expectable one: Joint attention was
considerably more common (up to 5 to 10 times more common depending on the
measure and the age period) with the mother than with the peer. Similar mother–
peer differences have appeared in other examinations of the issue (Bakeman &
Adamson, 1986; Legerstee & Fisher, 2008). Bakeman and Adamson (1984) sug-
gest several explanations for the superiority of the mother as an interaction part-
ner, including a helpful shared history that is greater for infant and mother than
for infant and peer, the mother’s greater motivation and willingness to engage
in joint attention with the infant, and the mother’s greater skill at directing and
maintaining the infant’s attention. This last point, of course, ties into the specific
learning experiences just discussed—mothers are more likely to provide such
experiences than are peers.
Developments in Infancy 157
A second contrast, that between mother and father, has received surprisingly
little attention in research to date. To my knowledge, the only systematic exami-
nation of the issue is a recent study by Martins and colleagues (Martins, Mateus,
Osorio, Martins, & Soares, 2014—a lthough see Hsu, 1996, for an interesting case
study approach to the question). Martins et al. measured 10-month-olds’ joint
attention on two occasions, once in interaction with the mother and once in inter-
action with the father. Although the differences were not large, infants responded
more to bids from the mother, and they directed more bids to the father. The
authors suggest that the mother’s greater skill may account for the first difference
and her greater availability may account for the second; their own data, however,
do not provide evidence on these points.
The final contrast is between the parent (the mother in all studies to date) and
a stranger. Although I will limit the discussion to studies that offer a within-study
comparison of these two partners, it is worth noting that the literature in general
includes parents and strangers (i.e., experimenters) in roughly equal frequency.
The selection between the two generally seems to have been made on pragmatic
rather than theoretical grounds, and there is no indication that basic conclusions
about joint attention vary as a function of which interaction partner is involved.
Some specific differences do appear in some of the within-study comparisons.
I have already mentioned one: Meins et al. (2011) reported more initiation of joint
attention with a stranger than with the mother—only, however, among infants
with an avoidant attachment. In other studies the stranger–mother difference has
proved more general. In Striano and Berlin (2005) infants showed developmen-
tal improvements in joint attention between 5 and 9 months when paired with a
stranger but not when paired with the mother, and they showed more joint atten-
tion at 7 and 9 months with a stranger than with the mother. Gredeback, Fikke,
and Melinder (2010) also found earlier developmental improvements when the
pairing was with a stranger, as well as more joint attention with stranger than
with mother. Although no significance tests were included, Gaffan et al. (2010)
also reported higher levels of joint attention with a stranger, as well as a moderate
(r = .32) correlation between joint attention with the mother and joint attention
with the stranger.
Why might a stranger elicit more joint attention than the mother? Gredeback
et al. (2010) suggest that a novelty effect may be involved. The stranger is, by defi-
nition, a more novel object than a parent, and she may elicit heightened attention
for this reason. This same point, it should be noted, applies to the mother–stranger
comparisons to be considered below under the Social Referencing heading.
Social Referencing
Because establishing joint attention is the first step in social referencing, much
that has just been said about joint attention also applies to social referencing.
158 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Perhaps for this reason, there has been limited research that has focused specifi-
cally on the sources for individual differences in social referencing. There is one
exception to this statement, however, and it concerns the variable just discussed.
Examinations of the possible effects of interaction partner appear frequently in
the study of social referencing.
An obvious prediction can be offered with respect to interaction partner, a pre-
diction that follows out of both common sense and psychological theory (e.g.,
Ainsworth, 1992). The prediction is that the mother (or whoever fulfills the pri-
mary caregiver role) will be the most important target for infants’ social refer-
encing efforts. Beyond sheer propinquity as a basis for selection, the mother is
typically the main source of comfort and security for the baby (hence the term
“secure base”). If the purpose of social referencing is to gain emotional reassur-
ance in the face of uncertainty, then the mother is the natural source to turn to.
The last sentence suggests a possible qualifier to the prediction about the
importance of the mother. Although the resolution of uncertainty is presumably
always a component of social referencing, situations vary in the extent to which
the more specific goal is to gain reassurance or simply to acquire information
about some novel event. It is only in the former case that the mother would be
expected to be primary. This, in fact, is a point that Ainsworth (1992) made in her
discussion of social referencing.
The point turns out to be well taken. The most extensive examination of the
question is a program of research by Stenberg and colleagues (Schmitow &
Stenberg, 2013; Stenberg, 2009; Stenberg & Hagekull, 2007). The comparison
in each case is between mother and stranger (i.e., a female experimenter) as the
source for information. The object in question is in each case an unfamiliar toy;
the studies vary in how the toy is presented, in whether both adults are simultane-
ously present, and in the specific outcome variables that are measured (looks at
the adult, facial expression, subsequent behavior). The results, however, do not
vary: In each case the stranger is the preferred source of information. Infants
look more at the stranger than they do at the mother, and their behavior is more
affected by what the stranger does than by what the mother does. Similar con-
clusions from different laboratories were reported by Kim and Kwak (2011) and
Walden and Kim (2005).
Why should the stranger be preferred to the mother? Stenberg offers an exper-
tise explanation. Infants, she argues, perceive the laboratory context (the setting
for all the studies) as the province of the experimenter rather than the mother, and
they therefore expect her to be the knowledgeable one with respect to the new toy.
Support for this hypothesis comes from a further study in which expertise was
experimentally manipulated and infants were found to prefer the more knowl-
edgeable of two experimenters (Stenberg, 2012). Support also comes from a large
body of recent research (which is reviewed in Chapter 9) showing that children,
including in some cases infants, can choose sensibly among would-be informants.
Developments in Infancy 159
The preceding does not mean, of course, that mothers are never a preferred
source. The first wave of social referencing research (reviewed in Feinman,
Roberts, Hsieh, Sawyer, & Swanson, 1992) tended to focus on emotionally arous-
ing situations, and these studies provided numerous demonstrations of the value
of the mother as a source of information and support, including instances in
which the mother was preferred to a stranger (e.g., Feiring, Lewis, & Starr, 1984;
Zarbatany & Lamb, 1985). I will note too that in many social referencing studies
(including all of the Stenberg studies) the adult’s behavior is scripted—t hat is, she
is instructed to pose a particular facial expression and to emit a particular vocal-
ization. Such controls are imposed because the typical focus of such research is
on the infant rather than the adult; also, the comparison of different informants,
such as mothers versus strangers, is simplified if their behavior is held constant.
Still, it could be argued that a full test of the mother’s value as a source for social
referencing is not possible as long as the mother is not allowed to behave as she
normally does.
The other comparison that appears in the social referencing literature is that
between mothers and fathers. Possible mother–father differences were explored
in several early social referencing studies (Dickstein & Parke, 1988; Hirschberg,
1990; Hirschberg & Svejda, 1990), in some instances with both parents present
and sending conflicting signals and in some instances in separate assessments.
Whatever the method, the similarities in response far outweighed the few scat-
tered differences. Most infants apparently viewed both parents as equally good
sources of information.
Recent research suggests some modifications to this conclusion. Moller and
colleagues (Moller, Majdandzic, & Bogels, 2014) tested 12-month-olds’ willing-
ness to cross the deep side of the visual cliff given signals from either the mother
or the father. Although there were no overall mother–father differences either in
infants’ time to cross or in their expressed anxiety on the cliff, differences did
occur with respect to specific parent–child links. The main difference concerned
the relation between the parent’s expressed anxiety and the child’s anxiety and
avoidance: no relation for mothers, a positive relation for fathers. The greater
effect of paternal anxiety had in fact been predicted based on an evolutionarily
oriented theory that posits different roles for mother and father in the care of
children: inner protection for mothers (feeding, soothing, comforting), external
protection for fathers (exploration of novelty, encounter with potential dangers—
Bogels & Perotti, 2011; Moller, Majdandzic, Vriends, & Bogels, 2014). Because of
this difference in parental roles, it is paternal anxiety that sends the more impor-
tant signal to the child, and therefore paternal anxiety that has the stronger effect.
Although mother–father differences in effects of expressed anxiety do appear
in some research with older children (e.g., Bogels, Stevens, & Majdandzic, 2011),
the Moller et al. study (2014) is the only demonstration in the context of social
referencing. Other research, however, makes clear that parental anxiety can
160 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
affect both the social referencing process and what children take away from their
social referencing experiences. Murray et al. (2008) compared the social refer-
encing signals produced by two groups of mothers in response to a stranger: one
group with social phobia and an unaffected comparison group. The mothers with
social phobia expressed more anxiety and less encouragement in the presence of
the stranger, and their infants showed increasing avoidance of the stranger over
time. Similarly, Aktar and colleagues (Aktar, Majdandzic, de Vente, & Bogels,
2014) reported the greatest fear and avoidance in response to social referencing
elicitors among toddlers whose parents had a lifetime social anxiety disorder.
They also found that parental expressed anxiety in the social referencing situa-
tion had its greatest impact when the parent had been diagnosed with an anxiety
disorder.
Having noted such negative effects of social referencing, I will close on a more
positive note. In many situations the function of social referencing is to reduce
anxiety (reassure the child that a stranger is not dangerous, encourage play with
a potentially scary toy, etc.), and there are numerous demonstrations that social
referencing can in fact do so. Although most experimental demonstrations are
of short-term effects, repeated presentations of reassuring experiences have been
shown to result in long-term reductions in children’s anxiety (Egliston & Rapee,
2007). Finally, social referencing, like joint attention, can be taught to children
whose skills are initially lacking—for example, children of depressed mothers
(Pelaez, Virues-Ortega, Field, & Schnerch, 2013).
Understanding of Intention
As Woodward (2005) indicates, all models of the origins of understanding of
intention, even those with a heavy nativist component, assume that understand-
ing depends on some combination of infants’ observations of the actions of others
coupled with their experiences of themselves as intentional agents. Social experi-
ence, then, is a necessary contributor. There has been little discussion, however,
of exactly what sort of social experience, including any special role for parents.
A few studies have addressed the issue of possible differences among par-
ents in their ability to support their infant’s mastery of intention. Two (Hofer,
Hohenberger, Hauf, & Aschersleben, 2008; Hohenberger et al., 2012) made use of
the CARE-I NDEX. We saw earlier in this chapter that a high standing on the sen-
sitivity dimension of the CARE related positively to joint attention. In neither of
the intention studies did sensitivity show any relation to children’s understanding
(as assessed with the habituation procedure when the infants were 6 months old).
The control dimension, however, did: Infants with moderately controlling moth-
ers (defined as above the median for the sample) were most likely to show an early
understanding of intention. In interpreting this finding, the authors are careful
to qualify their conclusions with respect to both sensitivity (limited variability in
Developments in Infancy 161
the sample may have masked effects) and control (moderate, not high and intru-
sive, was beneficial). They suggest that the beneficial effects of moderate control
may stem from the fact that mothers who exert such control, more so than other
mothers, compel the infant to attend to their actions and to attempt to discern
the goals behind the actions. Especially with young infants, such structuring may
provide learning opportunities that are less likely to occur with other forms of
parenting.
Two other parenting measures encountered earlier have been applied to the
study of understanding of intention. The Legerstee (2005) book describes a series
of unpublished studies in which maternal attunement was examined as a predic-
tor of understanding of intention in 9-to 14-month-old infants. At every age and
across several measures of understanding, relatively high attunement related to
relatively good understanding. Licata et al. (2014) examined emotional availabil-
ity (as assessed by the Emotional Availability Scales) as a possible predictor of
understanding of intention. Both the overall score and various subscales proved
predictive, and they remained predictive when various other factors (maternal
education, infant temperament) were controlled statistically.
Because sensitivity is a component of both attunement and availability, these
results indicate, in contrast to those of Hofer et al. (2008) and Hohenberger et al.
(2012), that maternal sensitivity does sometimes relate to understanding of inten-
tion. Further evidence on this point comes from the Dunphy-Lelii et al. (2014)
study touched on earlier in this chapter. These investigators reported a positive
relation between quality of maternal care (as defined by sensitivity, nonintrusive-
ness, and positive affect) and infants’ understanding of intention.
One more finding from Dunphy-Lelii et al. (2014) is worth noting. Their study
was rare in its inclusion of two measures of infant theory of mind: not only the
intention assessment but also a measure of joint attention. The two measures
turned out to be positively related. This finding makes sense. Joint attention maxi-
mizes attention to the actions of one’s interaction partner and thus maximizes the
opportunity to learn about the intentions that underlie the actions.
Conclusions
The abilities discussed in this chapter emerge in every normally developing infant.
They emerge more quickly and more productively, however, in some infants than
in others, and what parents (mainly mothers, in research to date) do contributes
to these differences.
Most of the facilitative parental practices are ones we have seen before. The
value of warm, sensitive, and responsive parenting may be the most firmly estab-
lished conclusion in the childrearing literature. Although the relevant evidence is
still somewhat limited, it seems clear that infant theory of mind is another topic
162 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
for which this general conclusion holds true. It seems likely, moreover—a lthough
the relevant research remains to be done—that the specific teaching practices
that have been shown to nurture joint attention are simply specific manifestations
of a generally sensitive and responsive style of parenting.
Two other general parenting constructs have been shown to bear some rela-
tion to infant theory of mind. Emotional availability (a construct that overlaps
with sensitivity) has been found helpful in some but not all studies. The construct
of control necessarily takes a somewhat different form in infancy than it does in
childhood or adolescence. At any age, however, control in the sense of involve-
ment and structuring is probably helpful, and such seems to be the case with
respect to understanding of intention.
Conclusions are less straightforward with respect to the subject of
Chapter 5: possible effects of the attachment relationship. It seems reasonable to
predict that infants who are securely attached would be more likely to enter into
bouts of joint engagement with the caregiver, as well as more likely to turn to the
caregiver as a source for social referencing. As we have seen, however, there is
only limited support for the former prediction; forms of insecure attachment are
sometimes associated with deficits in joint attention, but there is no evidence for
general differences between securely attached and insecurely attached infants.
Nor is there much evidence for a relation between attachment and social refer-
encing. There is, to be sure, a temporal conjunction between the two develop-
ments: Infants begin to look to others for support and information at the same
time that the attachment relationship is being consolidated. Attempts to relate
individual differences in attachment to social referencing, however, have proved
mostly unsuccessful (Bradshaw, Goldsmith, & Campos, 1987; Dickstein,
Thompson, Estes, Malkin, & Lamb, 1984).
Parental talk is undoubtedly more important for postinfant forms of theory of
mind than it is during infancy. As we saw, however, talk in the first year of life has
been found to show some relation to the emergence of joint attention. Clearly, it is
not the semantic aspect of the input that is important at 6 months, although it may
become so by the second year, as Slaughter and Peterson (2012) suggest. Initially,
however, parental speech is presumably effective because it heightens attention to
the actions of the parent, especially when the speech takes the form of motherese.
It is also possible that a relatively high use of mental state speech is a marker for
another, more directly causal aspect of parenting. The most obvious possibility is
mind-m indedness, or the proclivity to treat one’s infant as a psychological agent.
The application of mental state terms to one’s baby’s actions could be argued to be
a form of mind-m indedness in itself. It should be noted, however, that the limited
attempts to relate independent measures of mind-m indedness to infant theory
of mind have reported no relation (Dunphy-Lelii et al., 2014; Licata et al., 2014).
The emphasis throughout this chapter has been on parents’ contributions
to individual differences among infants. As I have noted at various points,
Developments in Infancy 163
however, differences are not the only aspect of development that we want to
explain. Theory of mind is very much a normative as well as an idiographic
topic. All typically developing infants and children master the theory-of-m ind
developments that are discussed throughout this book, and these common-
alities in development require explanation just as much as do the individual
differences. And parents, at least in the typical case, are undoubtedly impor-
tant contributors to the commonalities among children, especially in infancy.
As we have seen, parents may not always be the preferred interaction partner
for episodes of joint attention or social referencing. For the great majority of
infants, however, parents are the first interaction partners, the ones in interac-
tion with whom these skills first emerge and are first nurtured. For the great
majority of infants, parents are also far and away the most frequent interaction
partners. Without parents or someone to play the parent role, infant theory of
mind could never develop.
7
Parental Talk
165
166 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Methodological Issues
Measuring Parental Talk
Measuring how parents talk to their children requires two methodological deci-
sions. The first concerns the context within which to record parental talk. The
second concerns the aspects of parental talk on which to concentrate.
Table 7.1 provides an overview of the possibilities with respect to the first deci-
sion. The entries in the table reflect a familiar divide that applies to the study of
many topics: whether to carry out the measurements in the natural setting, which
in this case is the home (the first entry in the Table 7.1), or whether to measure the
outcomes of interest in some specially constructed laboratory environment (the
remaining entries).
Observations in the home account for close to a third of the relevant studies.
Among other challenges, such studies face the fact that mental state utterances
do not occur very frequently in most parent–child conversations. One study, for
example (Jenkins, Turrell, Kogushi, Lollis, & Ross, 2003), reported that mental
state terms occurred at a rate of 2.79 per hour in talk with 3-year-olds and 5.13 per
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 167
hour in talk with 4-year-olds. Although such utterances become more common as
children grow older, the base rate remains low.
Researchers have employed various strategies in an attempt to maximize the
yield from home observations. It is common to schedule visits at times when fam-
ily talk is most likely; the time period surrounding and including family meals
is a frequent focus. It is also common to request that family members temporar-
ily forgo activities (e.g., TV, video games) that may cut down on the possibilities
for conversation. Finally, the main strategy is one that is common to naturalistic
observational research in general: namely, to sample as broadly as possible. In one
(admittedly exceptional) example, parents and children were observed across six
90 minute home visits (Jenkins et al., 2003).
168 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Category Examples
Cognition Think, know, believe, remember, understand, recognize, imagine,
forget, explain, expect, find out, mean, guess, idea, learn, wonder
Emotion Happy, cheerful, pleased, excited, proud, enjoy, fun, joy, sad,
angry, frightened, scared, upset, fed up, worried, hate, shame
Desire Want, hope, wish, prefer, fancy, need, miss, would like, would love
Perception See, look, watch, listen, hear, peek
in a handful of studies, although in at least some instances the category label may
be just a different term for a concept typically addressed under another heading
(e.g., “volition” instead of “desire”).
As the examples in the table suggest, assigning terms to particular categories
is generally straightforward. It is not always straightforward, however. Symons
(2004) offers one example. Depending on the context, “dream” or “dreamy”
might refer to a cognitive state, a desire, or an emotion. Similarly, the phrase “was
hurt” might refer to an emotional reaction (and thus would need to be included)
or a physical injury (and thus would need to be ignored). Because of such com-
plexities, all studies report interobserver reliability, and the reliabilities are gener-
ally quite good.
In addition to deciding about particular items, researchers must make two gen-
eral decisions about their coding system. One is whether to apply so-called exclu-
sionary rules. This issue arises most obviously in the coding of cognitive terms.
In some instances a cognitive term seems to function more as a conversational
device than as a genuine mental state reference (e.g., “You know?” “Guess what”).
Some researchers (e.g., Ensor & Hughes, 2008) exclude such conversational uses
from their cognitive tally; others (e.g., Jenkins et al., 2003) do not. This decision
may have some effect on conclusions about children’s mental state understanding,
especially young children (Brown, Donelan-McCall, & Dunn, 1996). There is no
evidence that it affects conclusions about parental talk.
The second decision about coding concerns whether to correct for verbosity.
Some parents talk more than others, and they may produce more mental state
words simply because they are producing more words in general. For this rea-
son, some researchers (e.g., Slaughter et al., 2008) use proportion scores rather
than totals in their analyses. Others (e.g., Ruffman, Slade, & Crowe, 2002) work
with raw totals, the argument being that more exposure means more information
about mental states, even if the exposure comes in the midst of a good deal of less
relevant input. As with exclusionary rules, this decision may affect the descriptive
information from a study, but there is no evidence that it affects conclusions about
the effects of parental talk.
170 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
A final point about coding is a more substantive one. In many studies, tabula-
tion of mental state words is the only goal of the observational system, and the
total number of such words is the only aspect of parental talk examined in the
analyses. Some researchers, however, have gone beyond a simple tally of words in
an attempt to identify variations in the quality of the linguistic input that children
receive. The various ways of defining quality, as well as possible effects of differ-
ences in the quality of parental talk, will be an important theme in the review of
studies.
most often controlled; at the adult level, education is the variable that is most often
controlled. As we will see, the great majority of parent–child relations remain sig-
nificant even when third factor alternatives are ruled out.
The discussion of methods in Chapter 3 identified another way to address both
the directionality and third factor issues: namely, experimental manipulation
of the hypothesized causal variable. A small such literature now exists, for pro-
viding extra experience with mental state terms is one way in which researchers
have attempted to train theory-of-m ind understanding. I consider this research
in Chapter 9.
Mental State Talk
I have already noted two conclusions about parents’ mental state talk. One is that
such talk may begin very early in the child’s life. Chapter 6 noted effects of mental
state talk measured when the child was 6 months old (Roberts et al., 2013), and
many of the parents in that study had no doubt been talking to their infants long
before the six month point. The second conclusion is that talk about mental states
increases as the child grows older. The numbers from the Jenkins et al. (2003)
study cited earlier indicated an 80% increase in parents’ use of mental state terms
between the ages of 3 and 4. Across a broader age span, Ensor et al. (2014) reported
that mental state terms were almost 10 times as frequent in speech to 6-year-olds
as they had been when the children were 2.
Not only the frequency but the nature of parental talk changes as the child
develops. We saw in Chapter 2 that children typically begin to talk about desires
before they talk about beliefs. Almost certainly not coincidentally, parents tend to
talk to their children about desires before they talk to them about beliefs. In the
Ensor et al. (2014) study desire terms were more than twice as frequent as cogni-
tive terms in speech to 2-year-olds. By age 6 cognitive terms were four times as
frequent as desire terms.
Another change with development concerns the target for the mental state.
Speech to infants and toddlers tends to concentrate on the child’s own mental
states. In the Slaughter et al. (2008) study, for example, more than 85% of the
mental state references in speech to 9-to 15-month-olds concerned the children’s
mental states. Such references to the child do not disappear as the child develops,
but their proportion decreases as reference to other targets becomes more likely.
I will add that we might expect that method of assessment would affect conclu-
sions about target. The memory talk approach, with its focus on discussion of an
event from the child’s past, seems likely to maximize talk about the child’s own
thoughts and desires and emotions. Conversely, the storybook approach, with
its emphasis on the story characters, seems skewed in the other direction. On
the other hand, it is easy to imagine parents supplementing talk about the story
172 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
characters with more personal references to their child (e.g., “Do you remember
when you were sad like the little girl?”). And, in fact, several reports make clear
that talk about the child’s mental states does occur with some frequency with
the storybook approach (Adrian, Clemente, & Villanueva, 2007; Taumoepeau &
Ruffman, 2006, 2008).
Possible effects of the target for mental state utterances are just one of the ways
in which method of assessment may affect conclusions about parental talk. I take
up the issue of context effects more generally in the review of studies.
We have seen that parental talk changes in various ways as the child develops.
This fact leaves open another important question, and that has to do with the sta-
bility of individual differences in such talk. If a mother is high in mental state talk
when her child is 2, will she also be high when the child is 4 or 6 or 8? Many stud-
ies have examined this question, and the consistent finding is of moderately good
stability (correlations in the .60s or .70s) across intervals of up to 2 years (e.g.,
Degotardi & Torr, 2007; Moore, Furrow, Chiasson, & Patriquin, 1994; Ruffman
et al., 2002). Like any psychological attribute, mental state talk is not perfectly
stable over time; some parents increase their use and some parents decrease
their use. In addition, the one study to examine stability across a longer interval
reported only minimal relations, at best, between talk when the child was 2 and
talk when the child was 6 (Ensor et al., 2014). Thus the tendency to use mental
state talk appears to be a somewhat consistent parental attribute; how consistent,
however, is still not clear.
Although I have been referring to “parental” talk, most of the conclusions to
this point have concerned mothers, as mothers are the only parent participants
in the great majority of studies. As we will see, however, fathers are beginning to
appear in the literature (e.g., LaBounty, Wellman, Olson, Lagattuta, & Liu, 2008;
Roger, Rinaldi, & Howe, 2012). We will see as well that there is suggestive evi-
dence that in some respects both the nature and the effects of parental talk may
differ for fathers as compared to mothers.
Because most studies are built around parent–child interaction, it is also possi-
ble to examine the child’s use of mental state terms, and many studies have in fact
done so. As we would expect, the use of such terms increases with development,
at least through the preschool and early grade-school years. I have already noted
a developmental change in the content of mental state talk, from an early focus
on desires to an eventual incorporation of thoughts and beliefs as well. Although
most of the research concerns the child’s production of mental state terms, evi-
dence indicates that comprehension also improves as children develop (Grazzani
& Ornaghi, 2012; Howard et al., 2008).
The ability to use mental state terms correctly is itself a form of theory of mind,
and such use is therefore treated as an outcome variable in many of the studies to
be reviewed. It is still interesting to ask, however, whether children’s use of mental
state terms correlates with their performance on standard measures of theory of
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 173
mind such as false belief. The answer is that it usually does (e.g., Babu, 2009; Ensor
et al., 2014; Grazzani & Ornaghi, 2012; Symons, Peterson, Slaughter, Roche, &
Doyle, 2005) but not always (e.g., Charman & Shmueli-Goetz, 1998; Meins,
Fernyhough, Johnson, & Lidstone, 2006). It is worth noting that studies of chil-
dren with autism fall in the first of these categories (Tager-Flusberg, 2003).
Table 7.3 Continued
Table 7.3 Continued
Study Child Child measures Parenting measures
participants
Symons, 5- to 7-year-olds False belief, Mental state terms
Peterson, affective false and story theme
Slaughter, Roche, belief discourse scored
& Doyle (2005) during picture book
reading
Turnbull, 3- to 5-year-olds False belief, Story creation for
Carpendale, & mental state talk wordless picture
Racine (2008) book, scored for
mental state terms
Welch-Ross 3- and False belief, Discussion of three
(1997) 4-year-olds origins of past events with the
knowledge child
effects may shrink some when controls are imposed. It is true as well that no study
can control for every potentially important third factor. It is worth noting, in fact,
that no study to date has controlled for shared genes as an explanation for parent–
child relations, given the absence of adoption studies in this literature. But the
effects are robust in the face of controls for some of the most obvious possible
confounds—in particular, child language ability and parent educational level.
Fundamental though such information is, the existence and the magnitude of
an effect is always just the starting point in the examination of any topic. What
more do we need to know once we know that parental talk can affect children’s
development? The answer, of course, is quite a few things. Here I will discuss
five further questions that research to date has raised but not yet fully answered.
Because the longitudinal studies also speak to these issues, I simply list the ques-
tions here and then return to them in the next section.
One question was touched on earlier, and that is possible effects of context. It
has long been clear that aspects of parents’ speech to their children vary across
different contexts (Haden & Fivush, 1996; Hoff-Ginsberg, 1991). Does the same
hold true for talk about mental states? Although this is most immediately a ques-
tion about methods of study, the methodological contrasts can also tell us some-
thing about the real-l ife contexts in which parental talk occurs.
A second question concerns the interpersonal context. Does it matter who it is
who is producing the talk? Here, of course, the main question is whether talk from
fathers has the same effect as does talk from mothers.
The remaining questions concern aspects of the talk itself. Again, one question
was touched on earlier, and it concerns the target for the mental state reference.
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 177
Does it matter whether the talk is about the child’s own mental states, or do chil-
dren learn equally well or perhaps even better from talk directed to the mental
states of others? We can also ask about the specificity of links between talk and
theory-of-m ind learning. Is any sort of mental state talk helpful for the develop-
ments in question, or do children need to hear talk about desires to learn about
desire and talk about beliefs to learn about belief? Finally, we can ask about the
quality of the speech input. Beyond just the number or variety of mental state
terms, what is it about some parental talk that makes it especially effective in nur-
turing theory-of-m ind understanding?
Before leaving this section, I will note a few points of interest from several of
the studies summarized in Table 7.1. First, one of the measurement options listed
is the presentation of a standardized questionnaire to measure parents’ tendency
to engage in mental state talk. The only entries to date in this category are a pair
of studies reported by Peterson and Slaughter (2003). These investigators devised
an instrument called the Maternal Mental State Input Inventory on which moth-
ers chose among various response options when presented with a series of parent-
ing vignettes. In each case one of the options emphasized discussion of mental
states, and mothers’ preference for this option turned out to be associated with
good theory-of-m ind performance by their children in both studies. Although
this approach clearly does not provide the direct measure of talk found with the
other measurement options, it has some compensating strengths—in particular,
a wider range of relevant situations than is likely to occur in most observational
samples. The Maternal Mental State Input Inventory or similar measures could
certainly serve as a valuable complement to the other ways of measuring parental
talk; to date, however, its initial use remains its only use.
The study by Hutchins and colleagues (Hutchins, Bond, Silliman, & Bryant,
2009) prefigures the work to be discussed in Chapter 8. These researchers mea-
sured mental state talk in both mother and child and showed, as have numerous
other studies, that the two were related. The main goal of their research, however,
was to determine whether mothers’ use of mental state language was a reflection
of their general belief system concerning knowledge and ways to acquire knowl-
edge, a belief system that was measured through an instrument called the Ways of
Knowing Interview. I consider this aspect of the work in Chapter 8.
Finally, Adrian et al. (2005) provide the only storybook study to supplement
the laboratory assessment with a measure of how often the mothers in the study
read storybooks to their children at home. Their data confirmed that storybook
reading is indeed a familiar experience for many children; 32% of the mothers
reported that they read daily to their child, and another 47% read between one
and six times per week. Frequency of reading at home related positively to chil-
dren’s theory-of-m ind understanding, a finding that has emerged in other research
as well (Mar et al., 2010). The mother’s use of mental state terms while reading
the storybook in the laboratory also related to theory-of-m ind performance.
178 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Interestingly, however, there was no relation between the home and laboratory
measures; that is, mothers who were frequent readers were no more likely than
mothers in general to use mental state terms.
I will add that content analyses of storybooks for children make clear that
such books can indeed be rich sources of mental state information. One analy-
sis found that mental state words occurred on average every three sentences in
books intended for 3-to 6-year-olds (Dyer, Shatz, & Wellman, 2000). Although
there are some intriguing variations across countries and languages, mental
state language has been found to be a common feature of storybooks in every
country studied, which to date include the United States, China, Japan, Italy,
Romania, and Turkey (Dyer-Seymour, Shatz, Wellman, & Saito, 2004; Shatz,
Dyer, Marchetti, & Massaro, 2006; Tsai, Louie, Chen, & Uchida, 2007; Vander
Wege et al., 2014). Perhaps not surprisingly, the mental content of storybooks fits
children’s interests. Children prefer stories that focus on people over stories that
focus on objects, and they prefer stories with some mental content over those that
are described solely in terms of action (Barnes & Bloom, 2014).
Table 7.4 Continued
Table 7.4 Continued
Table 7.4 Continued
The value of the longitudinal approach lies, of course, in the fact that it pro-
vides across-time information about the relations among the constructs of inter-
est. Many of the studies in Table 7.4 also provide within-time information, in that
both parental talk and theory of mind were measured at the same time or times.
The within-time analyses confirm the conclusion reported in the previous sec-
tion: significant relations between parental talk and theory of mind in virtually
every case.
What about across-time relations? As we would expect, both the frequency and
the strength of relations tend to be greater when the parent and child measures
come from the same rather than different time points. Nevertheless, across-time
relations are also a characteristic of this literature. Indeed, every study summa-
rized in Table 7.4 reports at least one significant relation between early parental
talk and later child theory of mind. Relations in the other direction do sometimes
occur, that is, a correlation between early theory of mind and later parental talk
(e.g., Ensor et al., 2014). The parent-to-child direction, however, is much more
common than the child-to-parent one.
Third factor explanations are again an issue, and again the great majority
of significant relations remain significant when various third factor alter-
natives are controlled. Note that longitudinal studies offer two possibilities
in this regard that are not found in the one-p oint-i n-t ime studies. It is pos-
sible that an apparent effect of talk at time 1 on development at time 2 is
actually an effect of talk at time 2, given the stability over time in parents’
tendency to use mental state talk. It is also possible that an apparent effect of
talk at time 1 on development at time 2 is actually an effect on development at
time 1, which then carries over and produces superior time 2 performance. Not
all studies include the necessary data to rule out these possibilities; those
that do, however, typically provide evidence for across-time and not just
within-t ime effects.
As Table 7.4 indicates, most studies have followed up their samples over
short time periods (1 or 2 years), and most have not gone beyond the preschool
developments (e.g., false belief) that make up most of the theory-of-m ind lit-
erature. There are exceptions, however. The most extended follow-up comes in
the study by Ensor et al. (2014), a study that provides evidence (as the title of
the article indicates) for effects of talk at age 2 on theory-of-m ind performance
at age 10. The Ensor et al. study is also one of the few attempts (the others being
Adrian et al., 2007; Racine, Carpendale, & Turnbull, 2006; and Richie, Howe,
Ross, & Alexander, 2010) to examine the more advanced forms of theory-of-
mind understanding that emerge only some time after the preschool years. Ten
years ago a review by P. L. Harris, de Rosnay, and Pons (2005) noted the need
for studies of parental talk to begin to take into account more advanced forms
of theory of mind. Most such work remains to be done.
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 183
Context
The fullest exploration of possible effects of context comes in research by Howe
et al. (2010; see also Howe & Rinaldi, 2004). These investigators measured talk
between mothers and preschoolers during home observations in which the pre-
schooler’s younger sibling was also a participant. The observations were subse-
quently divided into three contexts: positive interactions, negative interactions,
and neutral interactions. The data from the home observations were compared
with mother–child talk in response to a series of affective pictures (a measure
called the Parent Child Affect Communication Task, or PACT). On both the
home and laboratory measures four mental states were scored for both parent and
child: cognitions, emotions, goals, and preferences.
Two sets of findings emerged. One concerned the frequency of reference to
the different mental states. As expected given the nature of the task, talk about
emotions was most frequent on the PACT for both mother and child. Within the
home observations it was the positive context that proved most conducive to men-
tal state talk. Mothers talked about all four mental states most often in the posi-
tive context, and children talked most about cognitions and goals during positive
interactions.
The second set of findings concerned relations between maternal talk and
child talk. We have already seen that mother–child correlations in mental state
talk are a common finding, and the Howe et al. (2010) study proved no excep-
tion: Of the 16 correlations (4 mental states times 4 contexts), 14 were significant,
and the average r was .56. There was, nevertheless, an effect of context: Mother–
child relations were strongest for talk that occurred in the neutral context. What
both sets of findings suggest is that some contexts (picture book reading, posi-
tive or neutral interactions) are conducive to parents’ didactic purposes and to
expressing and attending to mental states, whereas others (negative interactions)
minimize the likelihood of a productive sharing of thoughts or emotions.
Two other studies provide evidence about context (we will return to the issue
in the section on emotion talk). One is by the same research team just discussed
and involves the same contrast between positive interactions and negative inter-
actions. Richie et al. (2010) examined verbal irony (generally assumed to require
second-order theory of mind) in family conversations between mothers, fathers,
and their two children. Four forms of irony were recorded: hyperbole, understate-
ment, sarcasm, and rhetorical questions. Apart from rhetorical questions, each
of the forms of irony occurred more often in positive than in negative interac-
tions. Because negative interactions were relatively rare, however (16% of the
total interactions), proportion scores were also analyzed, and in this case both
rhetorical questions and understatement proved more frequent in negative than
in positive interactions. Researchers of adult conversations have argued that irony
184 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
is used more often to criticize than to compliment (Sperber & Wilson, 1981), and
the Recchia et al. findings with respect to negative contexts suggest that this con-
clusion applies, at least for some forms of irony, to parents’ interactions with their
children.
Like Howe et al. (2010), Jenkins et al. (2003) examined parental talk
directed to sibling dyads, first when the sibling pairs were 2 and 4 years old
and later when the children were 4 and 6 years old. The context at issue was
the interpersonal setting: In half the sessions the mother was the only parent
present, and in half both mother and father were present. This difference made
a difference: The mothers produced more mental state talk in the mother-only
sessions, and they differentiated more between the older and younger child in
the mother-only sessions. Both findings are taken as evidence for an important
effect of context, namely that “when parents are on their own with children
they are more involved with the children and consequently provide a higher
level of stimulation” (p. 916).
The Jenkins et al. (2003) study also speaks to the so-c alled sibling effect
that was discussed in Chapter 2. Recall that the sibling effect refers to the
fact that in some (although not all) studies children with more siblings, per-
haps especially older siblings, have been found to outperform other children
on theory-of-m ind tasks. Jenkins et al. reported that the younger children in
their study received more exposure to mental state talk, especially talk about
cognitions, than did their older siblings. Part of this increased exposure came
from the older siblings’ talk and part came from the mothers’ talk—not only
talk to the younger child but also talk to the older sibling that was overheard
by the younger child. This finding suggests that interactions among siblings
may not be the only basis for the sibling effect; rather what parents do may
also contribute. Early support for this possibility had been reported by Dunn,
Brown, Slomkowski, Tesla, and Youngblade (1991), who found that 3-year-
olds’ understanding of false belief was positively related to their mothers’ con-
trolling behavior with the children’s older siblings.
Speaker
The question now is whether it matters who provides the mental state talk. Most
studies offer no information on this question because most studies include just
one speaker: the mother. Fathers do appear in a handful of cases, however, includ-
ing two of the studies just discussed.
Both studies provide limited information about possible mother–father differ-
ences. In Jenkins et al. (2003) fathers were observed only in the mother-father-
child groups, not when they were the only parent interacting with the children. In
addition, the correlational analyses were limited to mother–child relations; thus
there was no information about the possible contribution of fathers to children’s
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 185
mental state understanding. The analyses did reveal one mother–father differ-
ence: Mothers produced more mental state talk than fathers when both parents
were interacting with the children.
Although the Recchia et al. (2010) study provides information about both
mother and father talk, it does not report parent–child correlations, and thus it
does not indicate whether fathers’ contributions are in any way different from
mothers.’ The study does, however, identify some mother–father differences in
the use of irony. Mothers used rhetorical questions more often and hyperbole less
often than did fathers. There was also an interaction of speaker and context, in
that mothers used irony equally often in positive and negative contexts, whereas
both fathers and children used it more often in positive contexts. Fathers, as we
saw in Chapter 3, often take on the role of play partner rather than all-a round
socializing agent, and the authors suggest that fathers’ tendency to use playful
forms of irony (e.g., hyperbole but not sarcasm) in positive contexts fits with this
conclusion.
The most informative mother–father comparison to date comes in the study by
LaBounty and colleagues (LaBounty et al., 2008). These investigators observed
both mothers and fathers as they narrated a wordless picture book with “emotion
eliciting situations” to their 3-year-old children. The parents’ speech was coded
for thought, emotion, and desire words, as well as for causal explanatory state-
ments with respect to the various mental states. The children, in turn, responded
to a battery of false belief and emotion understanding tasks on two occasions: first
at age 3 and then again at age 5.
Differences emerged in both the parents’ speech and the apparent effects of the
speech. Mothers used more thought and emotion words than did fathers. Mothers
also used more causal explanatory language with respect to emotion than did
fathers; fathers, however, used more causal explanatory language with respect to
thoughts than did mothers.
Analyses of parent–child relations suggested that mothers and fathers affected
different aspects of their children’s development. Various aspects of mothers’ talk
about emotions related positively to their children’s understanding of emotions at
time 1. As the authors note, this finding fits well with a large body of research that
indicates that mothers are typically the primary socialization agents with respect
to emotional development. False belief performance, in contrast, related to fathers’
mental state talk; in particular, fathers’ explanatory language with respect to
desires related positively to false belief success at both time 1 and time 2. In inter-
preting this finding, the authors cite work (e.g., Bartsch & Wellman, 1995) sug-
gesting that children’s early mastery of desires serves as a building block as they
work to understand thoughts and beliefs—hence the efficacy of fathers’ talk about
desires. The issue of the fit among different mental states is one I return to shortly.
This section has concentrated on mothers and fathers, as befits the book’s focus
on parents’ contribution to their children’s development. I will note, however, that
186 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
parents are not the only social agents whose mental state talk can affect children’s
development. Teachers have also been shown to be high in the use of mental state
language (Misailidi, Papoudi, & Brouzos, 2013; Ziv, Smadja, & Aram, 2015);
indeed, in one study teachers used more mental state terms and talked more about
mental causality than did mothers (Ziv, Smadja, & Aram, 2014). In addition, work
by Dunn and colleagues makes clear that both sibling and peer interactions are
rich sources for the exchange of mental state information (e.g., Hughes & Dunn,
1997, 1998; Youngblade & Dunn, 1995). This work also identifies another context
in which mental state talk is frequent: namely, pretend play.
Target
The question now is whether it matters whose mental states are being talked
about. The main contrast under this heading is between speech directed to the
child’s mental states and speech directed to the mental states of others.
To the extent that the own–other contrast matters, it is almost certainly most
important for very young children. As we have seen, parental talk about mental
states for the first 2 or so years of children’s lives concentrates almost exclusively
on the child’s own mental states. Initially, then, it is talk about themselves that
children have to work with. That such talk can be beneficial for various aspects of
early theory-of-m ind development is a consistent finding across several studies
(Beeghly et al., 1986; Meins et al., 2002; Slaughter & Peterson, 2008, 2009).
The main comparative treatment of self and other comes in two studies by
Taumoepeau and Ruffman (2006, 2008). The sample was the same for both
reports: mothers and their toddlers, with data collection at 15 and 24 months
in the first report and a further session at 33 months that was the subject of the
second report. At all three time points mothers described a series of pictures to
their child, a subset of which depicted adults and children displaying a range of
emotions. The maternal talk was coded for both mental state content (emotions,
desires, and cognitions) and the possessor of the mental state (child or other). The
children’s own use of mental state language was assessed at all three time points,
and they responded to tests of emotion understanding at times 2 and 3.
Results of the two studies diverged in interesting ways. When the children
were tested at 24 months, it was the mother’s use of desire terms at 15 months
that proved the best predictor both of the child’s own use of mental state language
and of the child’s emotion understanding. References to the child’s own desires
were especially predictive. When the children were tested at 33 months, it was
the mother’s use of cognitive terms that was the best predictor of both mental
state use and emotion understanding, and this held true both within and across
time periods. Furthermore, at 33 months it was reference to the mental states
of others that proved especially helpful. Adrian et al. (2007) and Howard et al.
(2008), both working with slightly older age groups, also found that references
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 187
to the mental states of others were especially helpful, in this case with respect to
understanding of cognitive states.
Taumoepeau and Ruffman explain both of their findings within the frame-
work of Vygotsky’s concept of the zone of proximal development. Mothers are
seen as responding sensitively to their children’s interests and abilities. Because
children’s early mental state talk tends to focus on their own desires, so does
mothers’ early mental state talk. Some mothers adopt this focus more strongly
than do others, however, and this concentration on the child’s concerns is initially
helpful. Eventually, however, the focus must expand, and the child must come
to understand other targets besides the self and other mental states in addition
to desires. Some mothers adjust their speech more successfully to their child’s
shifting interests and needs than do others, and it is in these cases that children
progress relatively quickly to the next level of understanding.
Beyond toddlerhood few studies have distinguished the target for mental state
references, a situation that presumably reflects a consensus among researchers
that target effects are unlikely to be found beyond early childhood. It seems rea-
sonable to assume that in the typical case all children will eventually be exposed
to substantial amounts of talk about both their own mental states and the mental
states of others. Both sorts of input may be necessary for theory-of-m ind develop-
ment, which, after all, involves the ability to reason about both self and other. It
may be other aspects of the talk, however, that are responsible for variations in the
speed or quality of such development.
both false belief understanding and performance on the Strange Stories mea-
sure; talk about desires or emotions showed no relation. In Jenkins et al.
(2003) mothers’ cognitive talk related to their children’s cognitive talk, and
mothers’ emotion talk related to their children’s emotion talk. Symons et al.
(2006) reported a similar pattern: Cognitive talk related to cognitive talk and
desire talk related to desire talk. Although their results were a bit more mixed,
both Adrian et al. (2005) and Moore et al. (1994) reported mostly specific
links between mental state input and children’s eventual understanding.
The picture, then, is not a straightforward one. It seems clear that in some cases
talk about one mental state can help children as they work to master another men-
tal state. In particular, children’s initial forays into the cognitive domain may
build on information about desires, both their own nascent understanding of
desire and their parents’ talk about desire. More generally, the intertwined nature
of mental states makes it quite plausible that talk about one state could often aid
in understanding of another. Beliefs, after all, often follow from perceptions, and
intentional actions often follow from beliefs. Beliefs, however, may not be suffi-
cient to impel a person to action; rather, beliefs may need to work in conjunction
with desires. And desires, in turn, are intimately linked to emotions, given that
fulfilled desires are an important source of positive emotions, whereas unfulfilled
desires have a sadly opposite effect.
Once these points are acknowledged, it is still reasonable to assume that the
most helpful information about a mental state will be talk specifically about that
state. As we have just seen, the bulk of the relevant evidence provides support for
this commonsense assumption. So, as we will see shortly, does the large litera-
ture on the development of emotion understanding. Benefits, to be sure, are not
automatic. The child must be at the right developmental level to make use of the
input. Also, the mental state term alone is unlikely to be sufficient; rather, the
linguistic context in which it appears must be clear enough and engaging enough
to support attention and learning. It is to the quality of the speech input that we
now turn.
Quality
The emphasis to this point has been a quantitative one: How much mental state
talk of various forms are children exposed to? That quantity can make a difference
is a clear conclusion from just about every study reviewed: the more children hear
about mental states, the better their theory-of-m ind development.
Quantity alone, however, is not the full story. This is a point made by every
reviewer who has summarized the talk literature (de Rosnay & Hughes, 2006;
Hughes, 2011; Pavarini et al., 2013; Slaughter & Peterson, 2012). It is also an issue
that a number of contributors to this literature have explicitly addressed.
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 189
Table 7.5 summarizes the major arguments that have been advanced with
respect to the quality of parental talk. The entries presented are not an exhaus-
tive listing of factors that have been proposed as important; rather, they are the
ones that seem to me clearest and best established in research to date. The entries
190 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
are also not necessarily mutually exclusive; various features may typically occur
together, and in some instances the distinctions among entries may be more a
matter of terminology than substance. The latter point applies especially to the
third, fourth, and fifth entries in the table, constructs that, although not identical,
clearly overlap.
I will make just a few points with respect to the entries in Table 7.5. First, in
some studies with a focus on quality the amount of mental state talk has been
found to have no effect; it is only the measure of quality that is predictive of devel-
opment (e.g., Ontai & Thompson, 2008; Slaughter et al., 2007). In most studies,
however, both amount of talk and quality of talk have been reported to make at
least somewhat independent contributions. In some instances, the two measures
prove to be interwoven. Ensor and Hughes (2008), for example, found that mental
state talk was both most frequent and most predictive when it occurred in speech
that was of the connected form.
A second point concerns the within-time versus across-time comparison. Not
all of the constructs listed in the table have been shown to be predictive not only
within time but also across time. The work on explicit discussion of false belief, in
particular, is at present limited to a demonstration of one-point-in-time relations.
It is also limited to discussion of storybooks that have been specifically designed
to encourage talk about false beliefs. It is certainly plausible that parents might
spontaneously discuss false beliefs with their children and that such discussions
might contribute to the understanding not only of false belief but of mental states
in general. At present, however, the evidence for such effects is limited.
The final point is that theory of mind is not the only developmental outcome
for which parental talk might be important. Recent years have seen the emergence
of a rapidly growing literature devoted to what children learn from talk by others
(P. L. Harris, 2012; Robinson & Einav, 2014). A more longstanding literature is
that directed to talk with parents as a source for the emergence of autobiographi-
cal memory in children (Fivush, 2011; Reese, 2010). One finding from the latter
literature resonates with the work on theory of mind: Elaborative discourse by
parents is an especially effective way to promote attention and learning.
We can begin with the same general question that opened the discussion of
mental states in general: Do variations in parental talk relate to variations in
children’s development? Again, the answer is clearly positive. Not all possible
relations between parents’ talk and children’s understanding are found, and
effect sizes are generally modest when relations do occur. Nevertheless, some
positive effects of parental talk are an outcome of almost every study in the
emotion talk literature. As with work on mental states in general, longitudinal
studies are frequent, and effects are found not only contemporaneously but
also across time. Controls for third factor explanations are also again common,
and again such controls sometimes reduce but seldom remove the significant
effects.
A further point is that effects show some generality at both the independent
and dependent variable end. With respect to the latter, children’s own use of
emotion terms has been shown to relate to their parents’ use of those terms, as
has their performance on a range of measures of emotion understanding. With
respect to parental talk, the storybook method has again been a common method
of eliciting talk, but two other approaches also have contributed substantial (and
concordant) data. One is the memory talk paradigm. Many memory talk stud-
ies have focused explicitly on talk about emotions, and even when this is not the
case, emotions are often a main topic of conversation. The other is in-t he-home
observation. Work by Dunn and associates, in particular (e.g., Brown & Dunn,
1992; Dunn, Brown, & Beardsall, 1991), makes clear that talk about emotions is a
frequent focus of family conversations.
Many of the issues discussed in the preceding section apply also to work on
emotion talk. Possible effects of context are again an issue. Several studies have
examined parents’ talk about emotions across some combination of the most
common contexts for measurement: storybook reading, memory talk, and obser-
vations of free play (Kucirkova & Tompkins, 2014; Kuersten-Hogan & McHale,
2000; Laible, 2004; Laible & Song, 2006). The main question examined has been
the consistency of parents’ talk across contexts, and the main finding has been of
modest consistency at best. Thus how much emotion talk parents bring to story-
book reading, for example, does not necessarily tell us what they will do when
discussing past events with their children.
Possible mean differences in emotion talk across contexts have been exam-
ined less often, perhaps because of a realization that any such differences may
depend on the specific form that the measures take (e.g., how emotion-laden
is the storybook content, do the memory talk instructions include a specific
focus on emotions?). In Laible and Song (2006) discussion of positive emotions
was more common during memory talk than during storybook reading, and in
Laible (2004) discussion of both positive and negative emotions was more com-
mon during memory talk. The latter study also found that both the predictors
and the effects of elaborative discourse varied across contexts. The attachment
192 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
of theory-of-m ind research (e.g., Cervantes & Callanan, 1998), whereas others
have been directed to other developmental outcomes (e.g., Roger et al., 2012).
The main conclusion from this research was discussed briefly in Chapter 3.
When differences occur, it is typically daughters who receive more emotion talk
than do sons (Adams et al., 1995; Fivush et al., 2000; Kuebli & Fivush, 1992;
Reese, Haden, & Fivush, 1996). Talk directed to daughters often includes both
a greater number and a greater variety of emotion terms than does talk directed
to sons, it is more likely to focus on the causes of emotions, and it is more likely
to take an elaborative form. Both mothers and fathers differentiate between the
sexes in this way. Differences are especially pronounced with respect to discus-
sion of negative emotions, especially sadness. Furthermore, over time children’s
talk comes to reflect these differences in parental input, for eventually girls come
to talk more about emotions, especially sadness, than do boys.
I should qualify the conclusions just offered. Not all examinations of the issue
have reported the pattern of results just summarized, even studies within the
program of research by Robyn Fivush and colleagues that is the source for most
of the supportive evidence (see, for example, Fivush, Sales, & Bohanek, 2008;
and Fivush & Wang, 2005). A further point (one that applies to the gender dif-
ferences literature in general) is that the summary is based on studies in which
possible gender differences were an explicit focus of the research. Almost every
study, however, includes both boys and girls, and many reports that do not focus
on gender begin the Results section with preliminary analyses indicating that no
gender effects occurred (e.g., Denham & Auerbach, 1995; Doan & Wang, 2010).
These points do not negate the usual conclusion from this literature—t hat girls
often receive more emotion talk and are more affected by emotion talk than are
boys. But they do suggest that such effects may depend on some combination of
samples, methods, and contexts that is not yet totally clear.
The work on gender differences ties into a general issue in the study of emo-
tions, and that is the role of valence. Emotions can be either positive (happy,
pleased, excited) or negative (sad, angry, afraid). Does it matter whether parents
and children talk about positive or negative emotions?
Lagattuta and Wellman (2002) provide what is probably the most informative
examination of this issue. These investigators tracked the use of emotion words
by children and parents who were included in the CHILDES database (Child
Language Data Exchange System) that I discussed in Chapter 2. The tabula-
tions began when the children were 2 years old and extended until they were 5,
and in total they included 2,119 emotion utterances by the children and 2,358
emotion utterances by the parents. A clear picture emerged, and that was that
talk about negative emotions was especially fertile ground for learning not only
about emotions but about mental states in general. Thus discussions of nega-
tive emotions included more talk about past emotions, the causes of emotions,
and connections between emotions and other mental states than did talk about
194 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
positive emotions. Talk about negative emotions also included a larger emotion
vocabulary than did talk about positive emotions, as well as more open-ended
questions and more talk about other people and not only the self. Such differ-
ences had been expected based on the challenges posed by negative emotions. In
the authors’ words, “Because negative emotions are problematic and disruptive
and involve some kind of complication or goal failure, there is a more demanding
impetus to regulate their intensity, direction, and duration. . . . Thus, negative
emotions inspire attempts to understand them and to prevent their reoccur-
rence” (p. 565). (For a fuller discussion of the negative versus positive issue, see
Vaish et al., 2008.)
The work considered to this point—not just under this discussion of emotion
talk but in earlier sections of the chapter as well—has been based on predomi-
nantly Caucasian samples drawn from a small number of Western countries.
As we saw in Chapter 2, theory-of-m ind research in general is no longer limited
to such samples; research in Asia, in particular, has proliferated in recent years
(e.g., Liu, Wellman, Tardif, & Sabbagh, 2008; Naito & Koyama, 2006). Studies of
parental talk are also not limited to Western samples; here, too, there is a substan-
tial body of research with Asian (or in some instances, Asian American) samples
(e.g., Wang, 2013). What is still largely lacking is research directed to the conjunc-
tion of these components—t hat is, the relation between parental talk and theory
of mind examined from a cross-cultural perspective.
The topic of emotion talk and emotion understanding provides one exception
and a few partial exceptions to this statement. The exception is a study by Doan
and Wang (2010). Their sample was 2-and 3-year-old children and their mothers,
roughly half of whom were European American and half of whom were Chinese
immigrants to America. Each mother “read” a wordless picture book to her child,
and all references to mental states (cognitions, desires, and emotions) were tabu-
lated. Also tabulated were behavioral descriptions, that is, references to actions
or potential actions in the story. The children also responded to a test of emotion
understanding on which they were asked to describe situations that could evoke
different emotions (e.g., “What makes people feel sad?”)
Four main findings emerged. First, European American mothers produced
more mental state utterances (means of 29.76 and 10.25) than did Chinese moth-
ers; Chinese mothers, in turn, produced more behavioral descriptions. Second,
European American children outperformed Chinese children on the test of emotion
understanding. Third, within each culture, mental state references by the mother
related positively to children’s performance, and behavioral descriptions related
negatively. Finally, mental state talk partially mediated the cultural difference in
performance—that is, when mental state talk was controlled, the difference between
European American and Chinese children was reduced but did not disappear.
Although they do not include a theory-of-m ind outcome, several studies pro-
vide further information about differences in emotion talk between European
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 195
American and Chinese or Chinese American mothers (Fivush & Wang, 2005;
Wang, Doan, & Song, 2010; Wang & Fivush, 2005). The picture is similar to
that reported for mental state terms in general by Doan and Wang (2010). Thus
European American mothers focus more on the causes of emotions than do
Chinese mothers, they adopt a more interactive approach that encourages partici-
pation by the child, and they employ a more elaborative style of speech. Chinese
mothers, in contrast, take a more directive and didactic approach in which the
emphasis is more on proper behavior than on the child’s feelings. When Chinese
mothers talk about negative emotions the predominant emotion is anger; when
European American mothers talk about negative emotions the predominant
emotion is sadness. Although most of the relevant research remains to be done,
it is not difficult to see how such differences in parental talk could both reflect
and perpetuate differences in how members of different cultures think about
emotions.
Atypical Development
One way to study the contribution of some formative factor to development is
to see what happens when the factor is either absent or limited in its application.
This approach can be applied to the issue of mental state talk. What happens when
children either do not receive or cannot fully utilize the typical mental state lan-
guage from their parents?
When might such a situation arise? The most obvious instance is deafness,
especially deaf children who are born to hearing parents (as is true in the great
majority of cases of deafness). Most hearing parents lack the facility in sign
language that is possessed by deaf parents, and the language that their chil-
dren receive is correspondingly limited. Such is especially the case early in
life, before the children start school and before their parents’ signing prowess
improves.
It has long been clear that deaf children who are late to master sign language
are seriously delayed in theory-of-m ind development (Meristo, Hjelmquist, &
Morgan, 2012). In contrast, native signing children—t hat is, deaf children of deaf
parents—t ypically show no delay at all. These findings are one of several sources
of evidence for a conclusion noted in Chapter 2: namely, that language makes an
important contribution to theory of mind.
Two studies of deaf children have focused explicitly on mental state talk. In
Morgan et al. (2014) the participants were 17-to 35-month-old deaf children and
their mothers, all of whom had normal hearing. The mother’s task was to describe
a series of pictures with mental state content to her child, using any combina-
tion of gestures and spoken language that she preferred (all of the children had
either hearing aids or cochlear implants). A same-aged sample of hearing children
196 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
and their mothers was included for comparison. Two differences emerged. First,
although the mothers of deaf children referred to desires and emotions at the
same rate as did mothers of hearing children, they referred to cognitions only
about one-t hird as often. Their speech, therefore, was typical of that usually used
with infants and young toddlers. Second, conversations with the deaf children
were much less likely to consist of connected turns in the sense defined by Ensor
and Hughes (2008); that is, one partner’s utterance was semantically related to
the preceding utterance of the partner. Both findings suggest that the mental state
language that deaf children typically receive is impoverished in comparison to
that available to hearing children.
The same conclusion emerged in a study by Moeller and Schick (2006), in
this case with an older (5-to 10-year-old) group of deaf children. In comparison
to mothers of hearing children, the mothers of the deaf children produced both
fewer mental state terms and a less diverse array of mental state terms in speech
to their children. Their children, in turn, performed more poorly on a measure
of false belief than did the comparison group, a difference that occurred despite
the younger age (4 to 5 years) of the hearing children. Finally, there was a posi-
tive relation between mothers’ mental state use and children’s false belief perfor-
mance, a relation that remained significant even when age and language ability
were controlled.
Unlike deaf children, blind children do not lack the typical sensory channel
for language input. Nevertheless, blind children, like deaf children, show on-
the-average delays in both language development and theory of mind (Siegal &
Peterson, 2008). Various nonverbal sources of information (e.g., facial expres-
sions, gestures, environmental objects and events) contribute to both lan-
guage acquisition and mastery of theory of mind, and the absence of these cues
complicates both tasks for blind children. It is interesting to note, therefore,
that the one study of mental state use with a blind sample reported that moth-
ers of blind children produced more mentalistic elaborations than did a com-
parison sample with sighted children (Tadic, Pring, & Dale, 2013), a finding
that the authors interpreted as a compensatory strategy on the mothers’ part.
Furthermore, the blind children’s use of mental state language was positively
related to that of their mothers. How general these findings are remains to be
determined.
In contrast to deaf and blind children, children with autism do not lack any of
the sensory channels that support language learning (although aspects of speech
perception may be impaired—Surian, 2012). Children with autism, however,
show varying degrees of language impairment; indeed, difficulties with language
are a defining feature of autism. As we saw in Chapter 2, children with autism also
show impairments in theory of mind, again to varying degrees. Furthermore, the
two developments are related, for language proficiency is a consistent predictor of
theory-of-m ind performance in samples with autism (Happe, 1995).
Pa r e n t a l Ta l k 197
To date, only two studies have examined parents’ use of mental state language
with children with autism. Both suggest that parents attempt to adjust their
speech to the developmental level of the child. Kay-R aining Bird and colleagues
(Kay-R aining Bird, Cleave, Curia, & Dunleavy, 2008) reported a case study of
parental speech to a 3-year-old girl diagnosed with autism, a child who was still
at the one-word stage of language production. The parents’ speech mirrored
that typically used with younger children—t hus a low rate of mental state talk,
more references to desires and emotions than to cognitions, and few attempts
to provide causal explanations for mental states. Working with an older (4-to 9-
year-old) autism group, Slaughter et al. (2007) found that parental clarifications
with regard to cognitive states—an aspect of speech that they had previously
determined to be helpful—occurred less often among parents of children with
autism than was the case for parents of typically developing children. As in earlier
research, cognitive clarifications related positively to performance by the typi-
cally developing group. For the children with autism, however, cognitive clarifica-
tions showed no benefit; it was clarifications with respect to desire and emotion
that proved predictive of performance. This finding suggests that children with
autism can benefit from mental state talk; the talk, however, needs to be at the
appropriate developmental level. Such is always the case, of course, but finding
the right level may pose a greater challenge when the child’s development departs
from the expected course.
Conclusions
As I noted at the outset of this chapter, the literature on mental state talk presents
perhaps the clearest and most consistent set of findings under the heading of par-
enting and theory of mind. Experience with mental state talk relates positively
to a number of aspects of theory-of-m ind development. Although the relations
are correlational, across-time data strongly suggest that the causal direction is
primarily from talk to understanding rather than the reverse. As we will see in
Chapter 9, training studies also provide support for this conclusion.
In most studies it is amount of mental state talk that is measured, and it is
therefore amount of talk that is predictive of children’s development. But sheer
amount is not necessarily the only or the most important aspect of talk about
mental states. What may be more important is how the information about mental
states is conveyed. Parental talk, at least in most instances, is not a monologue;
rather it occurs as part of a conversation, and it must be appropriately directed
to the conversational partner, namely the child. This means that the talk must be
appropriate for the child’s developmental level, a task that may be more difficult
with some children than with others. It must also be responsive to immediate
cues from the child. A basic point in this regard is that what the parent says must
198 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
us Maxi’s belief about the chocolate. If we add “But Mother thinks that it’s in
the blue cupboard,” the utterance tells us not only what Mother’s belief is but
also that her belief differs from Maxi’s. Realizing that people can have different
perspectives on the same situation is fundamental to theory of mind. As Harris
emphasizes, mental state talk is not the only way in which parents can help
children to appreciate such differences in perspective. Still, it is one natural
and effective way to do so.
The third general position emphasizes the semantics or meaning of the talk.
The basic idea is that children could not develop the ability to reason explic-
itly about thoughts and emotions and desires without experience with how
words such as “think” and “feel” and “hope” are used. As Thompson (2006a,
p. 4) puts it, “Words provide semantic referents for elusive psychological or
natural phenomena that otherwise might be inchoate or unclear in the child’s
prelinguistic mental representations.” Researchers disagree with respect
to the extent to which mental state talk builds on and transforms existing
knowledge (as the passage from Thompson suggests) as opposed to creating
that knowledge in the first place—in social constructivist accounts both the
process of learning and the knowledge obtained are seen as inherently social
(see Montgomery, 2002, 2005). Whatever the bases, however, there is general
agreement that mental state talk plays an important role in the emergence of
an explicit, conscious, and accessible theory of mind. The work on parental
talk therefore speaks to one of the major issues in contemporary theory-of-
mind research: how the implicit knowledge possessed by infants becomes the
explicit knowledge demonstrated by older children.
8
Parents’ Beliefs
201
202 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
a summing up and pointing ahead—t hus the promised attempt to convey both
what we know and what we still need to learn.
Topic Example
Academic abilities Yee & Eccles (1988)
Aggression Hastings & Rubin (1999)
Health and illness Pebley, Hurtado, & Goldman (1999)
Heredity-environment Mugny & Carugati (1989)
Homework Cooper, Lindsay, Nye, & Greathouse (1998)
Household tasks Goodnow (2004)
Infant development Keels (2009)
Intelligence Kirkcaldy, Noack, Furnham, & Siefen (2007)
Language development Ball & Lewis (2014)
Learning Ng, Pomerantz, & Lam (2013)
Parental authority Smetana & Daddis (2002)
Parental self-efficacy Schofield, Conger, & Neppi (2014)
Parental teaching Musun-M iller & Blevins-K nabbe (1998)
Preferences Miller, Davis, Wilde, & Brown (1993)
Pretend play Haight, Parke, & Black (1997)
Punishment Reid & Valsiner (1986)
Reading Boomstra, van Dijk, Jorna, & van Geert (2013)
Social skills Rubin & Mills (1992)
TV viewing Vaala (2014)
Pa r e n t s' B e l i e f s 203
Content has to do with what the beliefs are about. It is therefore a necessary
component of any study; whatever else a study does, it must focus on some specific
aspect of parental thinking. Several general divisions are relevant. One is whether
to ask about specific outcomes of development, such as IQ or temperament, or
about more general processes of development, such as how children learn or the
balance of nature and nurture. Whether the focus is on outcomes or processes, a
further decision concerns the topical domain: in particular, whether to ask about
cognitive development (as in the IQ example) or about social development (as in
the temperament example) or about both. Finally, decisions must also be made
with respect to the specific target for the parent’s judgments: whether the ques-
tions will concern the parent’s own child or children in general or, again, both.
As we will see, the own versus other comparison has proved informative in the
general literature, but thus far it has yet to appear in the work on theory of mind.
By quality, Holden (2010, p. 69) refers to “the structure, intensity, and accu-
racy of the beliefs.” Thus the question now, as the term “quality” implies, is how
accurately the parent thinks about children. When specific developmental out-
comes are the target for judgment there may be objective standards for making
this determination, either comparisons with developmental norms in the case of
children in general or comparisons with the child’s performance when the judg-
ments concern the parent’s own child. When developmental processes are at issue
the determination of quality becomes less certain, and the resulting conclusions
may be more descriptive than evaluative. Still, it is possible to assess how well
the parent’s beliefs fit with current scientific thinking about some issue (e.g.,
McGillicuddy-De Lisi 1992), or to rate the overall level or sophistication of the
parent’s thought (e.g., Sameroff & Feil, 1985).
Clearly, there can be no single summary statement with respect to the qual-
ity of parental thinking—fi ndings vary across samples, domains, issues, and
measurements. I will settle here for three very general conclusions. First, there
are marked individual differences among parents in the quality of their think-
ing, whether the focus is on specific developmental achievements or more general
questions such as the nature of the child or explanations for development. Most
samples show appreciable variability, and the differences are even greater when
distinct groups are compared. Second, although the differences are neither large
nor always found, parents are at least sometimes more accurate or more sophisti-
cated in their thinking than are nonparents. Finally, parents are also more posi-
tive in their thinking than are nonparents, especially when judging their own
children. Parents tend to overestimate what their children can do, they tend to
offer positive rather than negative attributions for their children’s behavior (e.g.,
attributing success to ability and failure to bad luck), and they judge that desirable
attributes are more likely to prove stable than are undesirable ones.
The sources issue concerns the question of where parents’ beliefs come from,
both the sorts of individual differences just noted and any commonalities that
204 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
form a justifying belief for the action only later. A parent, for example, may spank
her child in a moment of anger and later reason, “I spanked him, so he must have
known better.”
The other part of the effects question concerns the effects of parents’ beliefs on
children’s development. Here, too, results are mixed, with expected links some-
times but not always appearing. In balance, however, the belief–outcome relation
probably emerges more often in research than does the belief–behavior relation
(Murphey, 1992; Sigel & McGill cuddy-De Lisi, 2002). We saw one example in
Chapter 3 in the finding that children’s beliefs about their academic abilities often
come to mirror the beliefs that their parents hold. More generally, parent–child
concordance in a variety of domains provides one example of belief–outcome
relations. Other research provides evidence of links between the quality of paren-
tal thinking and the quality of child outcomes. In general, parents who are more
accurate in their thinking or more optimistic in their thinking or more sophis-
ticated in their thinking have children who do relatively well in development.
This conclusion holds across a range of outcomes in both the cognitive and social
domains.
A focus on the belief–outcome relation does not mean that beliefs somehow
exert effects on children in the absence of any parental behavior that mediates the
effects. Some influential beliefs, however, may be expressed in ways other than
direct interaction with the child; the parent’s structuring of the child’s physi-
cal and social environment is an example in this category. Other beliefs may be
expressed only through a history of cumulative interaction with the child that
encompasses many discrete and perhaps subtle behaviors. And some beliefs, such
as the importance of doing well in school, may be conveyed to the child directly
and explicitly. In such cases knowing how the parent thinks may be more pre-
dictive of the child’s development than knowing about any specific set of paren-
tal behaviors. Miller (1988) and Murphey (1992) provide further discussions of
this point.
Mind-M indedness
Definition and Measurement
Meins and colleagues define mind-m indedness as “caregivers’ proclivity to treat
their young children as individuals with minds of their own” (Meins, Fernyhough,
Arnott, Leekam, & de Rosnay, 2013, p. 1778). As we will see, the concept applies
more broadly than this definition suggests; still, the caretaker–child context is
certainly its most important manifestation.
Operationally, the most frequent measure of mind-m indedness has come
from mental state comments that mothers direct to their infants while engaged
in free play. The mental states coded are those that we have seen are common in
206 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
time, measures taken during infancy have generally been found to relate to mea-
sures taken during the preschool period, again with correlations of moderate size
(Meins & Fernyhough, 1999; Meins et al., 2003). Only one study has traced stability
of the same measure over time. Meins and colleagues examined mothers’ mentalis-
tic comments directed to their infants at the age of 3 months and 7 months (Meins,
Fernyhough, Arnott, Turner, & Leekam, 2011). Both appropriate and non-attuned
comments proved to be related, with correlations of .53 and .37, respectively.
Table 8.2 Continued
Table 8.2 Continued
number of reports outstrips the number of samples, for in several instances differ-
ent publications are based on the same sample at different ages.
As with the topic of mental state talk in Chapter 7, it is easy to state the general
conclusion from this research: Mind-m indedness relates positively to theory of
mind. Parents who are relatively high in mind-m indedness have children who are
relatively advanced in theory of mind.
There are exceptions. Two were noted in Chapter 6. Both Dunphy-Lelii et al.
(2014) and Licata et al. (2014) examined mind-m indedness as a possible con-
tributor to infants’ understanding of intentionality, and neither study found any
relation between the two measures. At present these are the only attempts to
relate mind-m indedness to developments in infancy. The Meins group has often
assessed mind-m indedness in parents of infants, but they have yet to examine
any contemporaneous theory-of-m ind outcomes (although they have exam-
ined attachment). Recall, however, that Roberts et al. (2013) reported a relation
between speech directed to infants at 6 months and joint attention at 12 months.
210 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Neither their method of eliciting speech nor their scoring system matched those
used in mind-m indedness research; still, their results provide suggestive evidence
for an early effect of mind-m indedness.
The other exception to the pattern of positive outcomes is a study by Ereky-
Stevens (2008) in which mind-m indedness assessed when infants were 10 months
old showed no relation to either false belief or emotion understanding at age 4. As
Ereky-Stevens notes in her Discussion, however, both her procedure and her scor-
ing system differed in some ways from the approach used by the Meins group;
thus further research is necessary to resolve the discrepancy in results.
These exceptions aside, mind-m indedness consistently relates to theory of
mind. Relations have been shown both concurrently, through measures taken
during the preschool period, and prospectively, through links between measures
taken in infancy and later theory of mind. Relations have been shown for both
of the most common methods of measuring mind-m indedness: speech directed
to the baby in infancy and descriptions of the child during the preschool period.
Finally, relations have been shown for a variety of theory-of-m ind outcomes: false
belief, affective false belief, appearance–reality, origins of knowledge, perspective
taking, and understanding of desire.
The data just summarized are correlational, and hence they cannot estab-
lish cause and effect. Most studies, however, include controls for third-factor
alternatives—most obviously, child language—and effects remain even with the
controls in place. In addition, the fact that mind-m indedness assessed as early
as 6 months is predictive of later theory of mind greatly reduces the plausibility
of any child-to-parent effect. Six-month-olds are not producing mental state lan-
guage of their own to which the parent can respond. As suggested in Chapter 5,
they may be doing other things that affect parental response and eventual theory-
of-m ind development, but no such early child-to-parent effects have yet been
demonstrated. The more likely causal direction is from parent to child.
The discussion to this point has addressed one of the issues with respect to
parents’ beliefs: relations between beliefs and child outcomes. I turn now to the
obvious next question: What are the parental behaviors that follow from a mind-
mindedness orientation and that nurture the development of the child’s theory
of mind?
The most obvious possibility is a behavior that is often part of the assessment
of mind-m indedness: talk about mental states. We saw in Chapter 7 that mental
state talk not only shows a clear relation to theory of mind but also almost cer-
tainly makes a causal contribution to theory of mind. In most instances, it is true,
the focus of such research has been on talk that occurs beyond the infancy period
that is the locus for most mind-m indedness assessments. But there is no expecta-
tion in the mind-m indedness work that the effects of talk are limited to the time
period during which talk is typically assessed, namely infancy. Rather, an early
propensity on the parent’s part to engage in such talk is presumably a marker for a
Pa r e n t s' B e l i e f s 211
frequently studied correlate is sensitivity, and the typical finding is that parents
who are high in mind-m indedness are also high in sensitivity (e.g., Demers,
Bernier, Tarabulsy, & Provost, 2010b; Meins et al., 2002). Mind-m indedness also
relates positively to emotional availability (Licata et al., 2014), to sensitivity while
feeding the infant (Farrow & Blissett, 2014), to mirroring of the infant’s behav-
iors during the Still-Face Paradigm (Bigelow, Power, Pulmer, & Gerrior, 2015),
and to lower levels of hostility in parent–child interactions (Lok & McMahon,
2006; McMahon & Meins, 2012). In short, mind-m indedness goes along with,
and almost certainly contributes to, a number of development-enhancing paren-
tal practices. A recent summary by Meins and colleagues expresses some of the
ways in which early mind-m indedness might find later expression beyond its ini-
tial appearance in infancy:
mothers with older mothers (Demers et al, 2010a, 2010b). In this case clear dif-
ferences emerged: The adolescents produced fewer mental state comments than
did the older mothers, as well as lower proportions of both appropriate comments
and positive comments (indeed, almost no positive comments at all in Demers
et al., 2010b). As the authors note, the group differences could reflect either life
experiences or current circumstances or some combination of those two factors.
Several studies have examined mind-m indedness in samples in which either
the mother or the child was diagnosed with a clinical disorder (Pawlby et al.,
2010; Schacht, Hammond, Marks, Wood, & Conroy, 2013; Walker et al., 2012).
The Pawlby et al. study was discussed in Chapter 4. As we saw there, depressed
mothers were marginally less likely than a comparison sample to direct appropri-
ate mental state comments to their infants; mothers with schizophrenia, interest-
ingly, did not differ from the comparison group. In the Schacht et al. (2013) study
the focus was on mothers with borderline personality disorder. These mothers
used fewer mental state attributes in describing their children than did a com-
parison group, and their children performed more poorly on a battery of theory-
of-m ind tasks than did the comparison sample. Finally, the study by Walker et al.
(2012) explored departures from the normative case at both the parent and child
end: A subset of the parents had reported depressive symptoms in the clinical
range, and a subset of the children had been referred for clinical services. Mind-
mindedness was lower in the parents of the children referred for clinical services;
depression showed no effects. As the authors note, the lower mind-m indedness in
the clinical group could reflect either or both of two causal directions: Low mind-
mindedness on the parent’s part contributes to children’s problems, or the chal-
lenge of rearing children with problems contributes to low mind-m indedness.
The Walker et al. (2012) study addresses the question of whether the expe-
riential bases for differences in mind-m indedness lie primarily in the parent (as
indexed in their study by depression) or primarily in the child (as indexed by
clinical status). Two other studies have also taken up this question. In Meins,
Fernyhough, Arnott, Turner, et al. (2011) the parent variables were obstetric his-
tory (whether the conception was planned, perceptions of pregnancy, memories
of first contact with child) and depression; the child variable was temperament.
Obstetric history showed various relations to mind-m indedness; neither depres-
sion nor child temperament had any effects. In Demers et al. (2010a) the paren-
tal variables included parenting stress and coherence on the Adult Attachment
Interview, and the child variable was again temperament. In this case all three
measures showed some relation, in expected directions, to mind-m indedness.
The conclusion from the three studies just summarized seems expectable.
Individual differences in mind-m indedness can have various sources. In some
instances aspects of parental history or current parental status may be impor-
tant, in some instances characteristics of the child may be important, and in some
(probably most) instances both parent and child factors may contribute.
214 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Two further studies are at the moment stand-a lone contributions to the ques-
tion of sources of mind-m indedness. Meins, Fernyhough, and Harris-Waller
(2014) addressed the question of whether mind-m indedness is a trait-l ike quality
or whether it is specific to the relationship in question. Across four studies par-
ticipants offered descriptions for a variety of targets, some of whom were part of a
close relationship (e.g., romantic partners, close friends) and some of whom were
not (e.g., historical figures, works of art). There was some correlation in the mind-
mindedness of the descriptions when close relationships were involved, but there
was no relation across the more distant targets. The conclusion was that mind-
mindedness is not a trait that people apply equally to anyone they consider; rather
it is, at least mostly, specific to the relationship in question.
Finally, Kirk and colleagues (Kirk, Howlen, Pine, & Fletcher, 2013) taught a
subsample of the mothers in their study to supplement their use of spoken lan-
guage with a gestural system of communication (so-called baby sign). In contrast
to some reports, baby sign had no effect on the children’s language development;
it did have effects, however, on the mothers who learned to sign. Although these
mothers did not differ from the comparison sample in overall mind-m indedness,
they did differ in some of the components of the construct—they were more
responsive to nonverbal cues from their infants, and they encouraged more inde-
pendent actions from the infants. Apparently, the opportunity to convey and to
look for meaning in interactions with the infant heightened the probability of
thinking of the infant as a mental agent.
All of the evidence discussed to this point has concerned personal experience
as a basis for mind-m indedness. We saw in the general section on parents’ beliefs
that social or cultural forms of information often outweigh personal experience as
a source for what parents think. Might the same hold true for mind-m indedness?
No one knows. To date, almost all of the published work on the concept has
been limited to Western samples. The only exceptions to my knowledge are two
studies carried out in Japan, only the abstracts of which are available in English
(Shinohara, 2006, 2011). The available information suggests that the mind-
mindedness concept was adaptable to the Japanese culture and that maternal
mind-m indedness related positively to children’s theory of mind, just as is the
case in Western samples. The Western–Japan contrast, however, clearly does
not capture the full range of the world’s cultures, in some of which people are
reported to talk seldom if at all about mental states (Lillard, 1998). It would be
interesting to explore whether some form of mind-m indedness nevertheless plays
a role in such settings.
Other Outcomes
Although the focus here is on theory of mind, I will briefly note several other
developmental outcomes for which mind-m indedness has proved predictive. The
main one, certainly, is attachment. A number of studies in the Meins research
Pa r e n t s' B e l i e f s 215
The findings of the two studies also mirrored those in the more general lit-
erature. Parents showed moderate but above-chance levels of accuracy in judging
their children; they correctly identified the child’s choices on slightly less than
half of the scenarios (one third would be the chance rate), and their assessment
of the child’s overall attributional style correlated significantly with the child’s
actual style. The parents’ accuracy in judging their children in turn related to
developmental outcomes of two sorts. First, it related to the children’s attribu-
tional performance; relatively low parental accuracy was associated with an unre-
alistic and overly positive attributional style, the least adaptive of the attributional
styles. Second, poor parental accuracy related to the children’s psychosocial
adjustment—specifically, to a relatively high level of conduct problems and psy-
chopathological symptoms.
As Sharp et al. (2006) note, their results suggest an intergenerational transmis-
sion of theory of mind: Mothers who are relatively poor at their social-cognitive
task have children who are relatively poor at their social-cognitive task. A simi-
lar pattern emerged in a study by Sabbagh and Seamans (2008): Parents’ perfor-
mance on the Eyes Test (a measure of advanced theory of mind) correlated with
their 3-year-old children’s performance on a battery of theory-of-m ind tasks. As
both sets of authors acknowledge, the parent–child similarity does not necessarily
indicate an effect of parenting; shared genes provide an alternative explanation.
To date, the research necessary to identify the bases for parent–child similarity in
theory of mind remains to be done.
The second example under the accuracy heading has a pragmatic as well as
a theoretical underpinning. In recent years several teams of researchers have
developed parent-report measures whose purpose is to identify individual dif-
ferences in theory of mind (Hutchins, Prelock, & Bonazinga, 2012; Peterson,
Garnett, Kelly, & Attwood, 2009; Tahiroglu et al., 2014). Of course, any child
measure of theory-of-m ind performance yields individual differences, and
such differences, as we have seen, have been shown to relate to both a variety
of antecedents (including parenting) and a variety of developmental outcomes.
Performance measures, however, are necessarily limited in the scope of the
information they can provide—typically only a few and sometimes a single
theory-of-m ind ability, assessed in a single way in a single context. A parent-
report measure could conceivably provide a much broader sampling of chil-
dren’s abilities—a ssuming, of course, that parents can accurately judge what
their children can and cannot do.
As an example of this approach, I take the research by Tahiroglu et al. (2014).
These investigators report four studies designed to determine whether parents
can be accurate judges of their children’s theory of mind. Across studies the
researchers tried out a wide array of theory-of-m ind items with successive sam-
ples of parents, progressively narrowing and refining the instrument to its final
form. The resulting measure (labeled the Children’s Social Understanding Scale,
Pa r e n t s' B e l i e f s 217
or CSUS) includes 42 items, a subset of which is shown in Table 8.3. The parent
rates his or her child’s probable standing on each item on a 4-point scale ranging
from “definitely untrue of my child” to “definitely true of my child.”
Scale Item
Belief Understands that telling lies can mislead other people.
Talks about people’s mistaken beliefs (e.g., “He thought it was a dog,
but it was really a cat”)
Knowledge Realizes that experts are more knowledgeable than others in their
specialty (e.g., doctors know more than others about treating
illness).
Uses words that express uncertainty (e.g., “We might go to the
park.”).
Perception Talks about the difference between the way things look and how
they really are (e.g., “It looks like a snake, but it’s really a lizard”).
Thinks that you can still see an object even if you’re looking in the
opposite direction. (reverse scored)
Desire Talks about the difference between what people want and what they
actually get (e.g., “She wanted a puppy, but she got a kitty”).
Talks about differences in what people like or want (e.g., “You like
coffee, but I like juice”).
Intention Talks about the difference between intentions and outcomes (e.g.,
“He tried to open the door, but it was locked”).
Understands that hurting others on purpose is worse than hurting
others accidentally.
Emotion When given an undesirable gift, pretends to like it so as not to hurt
the other person’s feelings.
Has difficulty figuring out how you feel from your tone of voice or
from your facial expressions of emotions (e.g., has trouble telling
the difference between an angry and a sad voice or face). (reverse
scored)
Note. From “The Children’s Social Understanding Scale: Construction and Validation of a
Parent-R eport Measure for Assessing Individual Differences in Children’s Theories of Mind,”
by D. Tahiroglu, L. J. Moses, S. M. Carlson, C. E. V. Mahy, E. L. Olofson, & M. A. Sabbagh, 2014,
Developmental Psychology, 50, p. 2497. Copyright 2014 by the American Psychological Association.
Reprinted with permission.
218 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Several criteria guided the selection of items. One was breadth of coverage; as
can be seen, the items are not limited to a single sort of understanding but rather
span six different forms of mental state knowledge. A second criterion was reli-
ability, and the test in fact shows satisfactory reliability of both the internal con-
sistency and test–retest forms. A final criterion was validity—that is, evidence
that the test really measures what it is intended to measure, namely an accurate
picture of children’s theory-of-m ind abilities. As a measure of such validity, the
children of a subset of the parents responded to a battery of theory-of-m ind tasks,
and correlations were calculated between their performance and their parents’
CSUS scores. If parents can accurately judge their children, we would expect
positive correlations between the two measures, and such in fact was the case.
Across three studies the correlations were .31, .42, and .43—t hus above-chance
and moderately good accuracy, but also, clearly, far from perfect accuracy.
Because of the recency of its development, the CSUS has yet to be used in the
sort of individual-d ifferences research for which it is intended (for one limited
exception, see Sage & Baldwin, 2015). There are also a number of interesting ques-
tions to be addressed if we consider the test simply as a measure of what parents
know about their children. It would be interesting to know, for example, whether
parents are more accurate with respect to some kinds of knowledge than they
are with respect to other kinds. The sources question is clearly of interest—why
are some parents more accurate in judging their children than are other parents?
And, of course, the effects question is of interest. Do more accurate parents have
more competent children? And if so, what are the parental behaviors that mediate
the relation between parental knowledge and child outcomes?
As we saw, accuracy is not the only aspect of parental thinking that has
emerged as important in the general parents’ beliefs literature. The sophistica-
tion of the parent’s reasoning has also been shown to relate positively to children’s
development. The main example of this point in the theory-of-m ind literature is
the Hutchins et al. (2009) study discussed briefly in Chapter 7. These research-
ers used an instrument called the Ways of Knowing Interview (Belenky, Clinchy,
Goldberger, & Tarule, 1986) to assess epistemological beliefs—that is, beliefs
about the nature of knowledge—in a sample of mothers. Sample items from the
interview include “Can you say that some answers are better than others?” and
“How do you know what’s right or true?” Responses to such questions are coded
into five increasingly complex levels of reasoning, ranging from Silent Knower
(knowledge is independent of human action, and the self is a relatively powerless
thinker) to Constructed Knower (knowledge and truth are human constructions
that are dynamic and evolving). The level of the mother’s reasoning turned out to
relate to her use of mental state language with her child; as epistemological com-
plexity increased, mental state language also increased, and there was a shift from
the use of language primarily to direct child behavior to the use of language to
encourage child reflection. The children’s mental state language, in turn, related
Pa r e n t s' B e l i e f s 219
to both maternal measures, increasing as the mother’s use of mental state language
increased, and increasing as the complexity of the mother’s reasoning increased.
I conclude this section by briefly noting several other approaches to the ques-
tion of what parents think about their children’s mental world. The discussion is
brief because to date there have been no attempts to relate any of these measures
to theory-of-m ind outcomes in the child.
Two approaches are addressed to infancy and what mothers believe about
their infant’s theory of mind. Both approaches overlap with the work on mind-
mindedness but also depart from it in some potentially informative ways.
Degotardi, Torr, and Cross (2008) employed the grounded theory methodology
from qualitative psychology to identify the extent to which mothers’ descriptions
of their infants went beyond overt behaviors to ascribe underlying psychological
states and processes. The results indicated that mothers did attribute psychologi-
cal states and processes of various sorts to their infants, but also that there were
definite individual differences in the tendency to do so. In contrast to the ver-
bal approach employed by Degotardi et al. (and also by Meins and colleagues),
the emphasis in Shai and Belsky’s (2011a, 2011b) parental embodied mentalizing
approach is nonverbal: a focus on bodily movements produced by both infant and
mother and on the ability of each member of the dyad to interpret and respond to
the kinesthetic cues of the other. In the authors’ words, “in the dyadic embodied
interactive process, each participant responds to the kinesthetically manifested
mental state of the other; thus, meeting of parent and infant bodies reflects the
meeting of their minds” (Shai & Belsky, 2011a, p. 176). This approach has the vir-
tue of identifying ways other than language through which a parent can express
beliefs about the infant, as well as identifying parental cues to which the nonver-
bal infant can respond and from which he or she can learn.
Several other approaches to how parents think about their children’s inner
states bear a definite resemblance to the Meins conceptualization of mind-
mindedness (Fonagy et al., 1991; Oppenheim & Koren-K arie, 2002; Rosenblum,
McDonough, Sameroff, & Muzik, 2008). Indeed, the work on reflective function
by Fonagy and colleagues was a forerunner of the mind-m indedness approach.
Theoretically, however, these approaches have a psychodynamic grounding not
found in the mind-m indedness conceptualization, and empirically they have con-
centrated on attachment and other aspects of social development, including in
some instances psychopathological outcomes. Sharp and Fonagy (2008) provide
a helpful overview of similarities and differences among the different approaches.
Scale Item
Negative consequences Too much joy can make it hard for a child to
understand others.
Children who feel emotions strongly are likely to face a
lot of trouble in life.
Value/acceptance It is useful for children to feel angry sometimes.
Being angry can motivate children to change or fix
something in their lives.
Manipulation Children use emotions to manipulate others.
Children often cry just to get attention.
Control Children can control their emotions.
Children can control what they show on their faces.
Parental knowledge Parents don’t have to know about all their children’s
feelings.
Parents should encourage their child to tell them
everything they are feeling.
Autonomy It is usually best to let a child work through being sad
on his or her own.
When children are angry, it is best to just let them work
it through on their own.
Respect Making fun of children’s behavior is never a good idea.
Parents should not show contempt toward their
children.
Stability Children’s emotions tend to be long-lasting.
Children’s emotion styles tend to stay the same over
time.
Note. From “Development and Validation of the Parents’ Beliefs about Children’s Emotions
Questionnaire,” by A. G. Halberstadt, J. C. Dunsmore, A. Bryant, Jr., A. E. Parker, K. S. Beale, &
J. A. Thompson, 2013, Psychological Assessment, 25, pp. 1200–1201. Copyright 2013 by the American
Psychological Association. Reprinted with permission.
to what their children understand about emotions. The answer is yes. For exam-
ple, a belief that parents should guide their children’s emotions is associated with
relatively poor emotion recognition by the child (Castro, Halberstadt, Lozada, &
Craig, 2015; Dunsmore, Her, Halberstadt, & Perez-R ivera, 2009). A belief in the
importance of socializing the use of emotion language is associated with relatively
222 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
good emotion understanding by the child (Dunsmore & Karn, 2001, 2004). In
many instances, moreover, parental behaviors show expected relations to both
parental beliefs and child outcomes. For example, a belief in the importance of
socializing emotion language relates positively to the parent’s expressiveness in
interaction with the child, and relations to child understanding are especially
strong when both the belief in socializing language and parental expressiveness
are high (Dunsmore & Kern, 2001). A belief in guiding the child’s emotions
relates positively to labeling of emotions, and a belief that emotions can be prob-
lematic or dangerous relates negatively to explanations of emotions (Perez-R ivera
& Dunsmore, 2011). The belief that emotions can be problematic or dangerous
also relates positively to parents’ masking of their own emotions in interaction
with the child (Dunsmore et al., 2009).
Once these various findings are noted, a qualifier must be added. A familiar
message throughout this book is that negative outcomes are often mixed in with
positive ones, and this point certainly applies to the present topic—indeed, it
applies more strongly than was the case either for the research considered earlier
in this chapter or for the research on parental talk considered in Chapter 7. Most
studies under the heading of beliefs about emotions employ multiple measures of
both parents’ beliefs and children’s understanding, and a typical finding is that
one or two of the possible relations between beliefs and understanding emerge as
significant but many others do not. A point made in the discussion of the general
parents’ beliefs literature clearly applies here. Both parental behaviors and child
outcomes are multiply determined, and the particular parental beliefs selected
for study may account for only a small proportion of the variance that we wish to
explain.
In the remainder of this section I single out a few specific points from the emo-
tions beliefs literature that seem worthy of note. The first ties back to a finding dis-
cussed earlier in this chapter. We have seen a couple of instances of parent–child
concordance in theory-of-m ind ability. The study by Castro et al. (2015) adds a
third: parents’ skill at recognizing emotions related positively to their children’s
skill at recognizing emotions.
Most studies of beliefs about emotions, like most theory-of-m ind research in
general, have been with samples of White families from Western countries. But
there are exceptions. Parker et al. (2012) compared beliefs about emotions in three
ethnic groups: European American, African American, and Lumbee American
Indian. Although some differences emerged, perhaps more striking were the
similarities in beliefs with regard to such questions as the role of emotion in the
home and appropriate ways to express negative emotions. In a study by Perez-
Rivera and Dunsmore (2011) the participants were Hispanic American mothers
(drawn from several countries of origin), and the variable of interest was degree
of acculturation to Anglo culture. Relatively strong acculturation was associated
with a lower belief that emotions can be dangerous and with heightened emotion
Pa r e n t s' B e l i e f s 223
likely responses. The children in this case were 4-year-olds, and the measure
was the Test of Emotion Comprehension (Pons & Harris, 2000). The results
will not surprise anyone familiar with the older literature on parental accuracy.
Parents were above chance but just barely so in estimating their children’s per-
formance; the correlation between parent estimate and actual score was .14,
and parents were above chance on only three of the nine dimensions included in
the measure. The dominant parental error was overestimation; 91% of parents
overestimated their children’s performance, and the total score estimated by
the parents was almost twice the actual total earned by the children. Finally,
parental accuracy and child performance were significantly, and substantially,
related: a correlation of .68.
What does such a correlation mean? There are at least three possible expla-
nations. The most interesting, certainly, is that parental accuracy is a good
thing: Parents who know their children well can structure the child’s environ-
ment in development-enhancing ways. A second possibility is that the causal
direction is the reverse: Children who are relatively advanced, in this case
advanced in emotion understanding, are easier to judge than are children who
lag behind in development. Finally, a third possibility is that the correlation is
artifactual: When almost all parents overestimate what their children can do, par-
ents whose children do well will necessarily be more accurate than parents whose
children do poorly. Miller (1988) provides a fuller discussion of the interpretation
of parental accuracy.
Conclusions
As the opening section of this chapter indicated, research on parents’ beliefs
about theory of mind falls within a large and longstanding literature directed to
parents’ beliefs about various aspects of their children’s development. That such
a grounding exists is not always evident in the recent work; although there are
exceptions (e.g., Dunsmore & Karn, 2001; Degotardi et al., 2008; Parker et al.,
2012), many theory-of-m ind reports give no indication that their efforts to probe
parents’ thinking had any relevant predecessors. One goal of this chapter has
been to provide some integration of old and new.
That the work on theory of mind adds to the general literature on parents’
beliefs is without question. Simply knowing what parents think about an impor-
tant and previously little studied aspect of children’s development is clearly of
value. Beyond simply the extension in content, however, the research on theory of
mind provides some of the clearest evidence in the literature of relations between
what parents think and how children develop. The studies of mind-m indedness
are especially noteworthy in this regard. The evidence, to be sure, is correlational;
as we saw, however, various arguments support the conclusion that the causal link
Pa r e n t s' B e l i e f s 225
some evidence both for variations in accuracy across parents and relations
between parents’ accuracy and children’s development. Research with the
recently developed parent-report measures, including the CSUS, should add
some valuable information in this regard, for such measures present an excep-
tionally broad sampling of theory-of-m ind abilities for parents to judge. And,
of course, the utility of such measures for their intended purpose depends on
a still to be answered question: Can parents accurately judge their children’s
theory of mind?
9
Experimental Approaches
Chapter 3 made a basic point about parenting research, a point that has recurred
in various contexts in each of the succeeding chapters. The point was that parent-
ing research is, with rare exceptions, correlational research, in the sense that we
measure two things (parental practices, child outcomes) but do not experimen-
tally manipulate either factor. Because of the absence of experimental control,
cause-and-effect conclusions from such research are at best tentative. We may
know that variable A and variable B relate, but we cannot know for certain why
they do.
Experimental research provides the needed complement to the correlational
approach. If we can experimentally manipulate the hypothesized causal factor—
let us say variable A—t hen we know where variations in B come from: They result
because of the variations in A.
Of course, if the experimental approach were always readily applicable, all
studies would be experimental in design. Some topics, however, are very difficult
to study experimentally, and parenting ranks near the top of any such list. It is for
this reason that virtually all of the research considered in the book to this point
has been correlational.
This chapter addresses experimental approaches to the question of where
theory of mind comes from. As will be seen, only a handful of the studies to be
considered include parents and thus provide a direct test of parents’ contribution
to their children’s theory of mind. The reason for discussing these studies, even
in the absence of parental involvement, is that their experimental design makes
possible a demonstration that certain forms of social experience can nurture the
development of theory of mind. Parents, of course, are not the only ones who can
provide such experiences; indeed, in the studies reviewed it is usually research-
ers who do so. But for most children, especially early in life, parents are the most
important social agents, and these studies therefore tell us some of the ways in
which parents may be important.
This chapter is divided into four sections. The first two sections review
attempts to train theory of mind. The first of these sections addresses theory of
mind in general, and the second focuses on emotion understanding.
227
228 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
single route to mastery of Piagetian concepts—at least not when the concepts are
acquired in an experimental setting.
The reference to “an experimental setting” brings up the main reservation with
respect to what training studies tell us, and that is the issue of external validity.
However children naturally master conservation or other Piagetian concepts, it is
not through having an adult explicitly teach the knowledge to them. To varying
degrees, all training manipulations depart from the real-l ife situations of interest.
Such studies, therefore, tell us what can happen. They do not necessarily tell us
what does happen.
As I will argue, external validity is also an important issue in evaluating train-
ing studies of theory of mind. Still, there are two differences between the Piagetian
and theory-of-m ind literatures that suggest that external validity may be a lesser
concern in the latter case. First, unlike conservation and most other Piagetian
concepts, theory of mind is inherently social in nature; it is social knowledge, and
it is necessarily acquired in social settings. A training study is also a social setting,
and it therefore may come closer to the real-l ife situations of interest than does an
attempt to train conservation or class inclusion.
The second difference concerns the rationale for the specific form that train-
ing takes; that is, how do we decide what kinds of experiences to build into the
training? In the Piagetian studies the rationale was largely theoretical—thus
reversibility or cognitive conflict for training from a Piagetian perspective, or
modeling or reinforcement when social learning theory provided the starting
point. Theoretical considerations also play a role in theory-of-m ind training
efforts; the theory theory approach, for example, suggests somewhat different for-
mative experiences than does the sociocultural approach. Much more than in the
Piagetian literature, however, theory-of-m ind training studies also have an empir-
ical grounding—a grounding, in fact, in the various research studies that have
been discussed across the last several chapters. In contrast to the situation during
the Piaget era, we have quite a bit of evidence with respect to possible experiential
bases for theory of mind, including a considerable amount of naturalistic, in-t he-
home evidence. This empirical grounding is doubly valuable: It informs the con-
struction of training procedures, and it provides important converging evidence
when a procedure proves effective in the laboratory setting.
Table 9.1 shows the studies to be considered in this section. My coverage is
limited to published studies; the two reviews by Sprung and colleagues (Sprung,
Munch, et al., 2015; Sprung, Wilson, et al., 2015) include unpublished disser-
tations as well. My coverage is also limited to work with typically developing
samples. There is also a sizable training literature directed to special popula-
tions of various sorts. Children with autism are the most frequently studied such
group (e.g., Begeer et al. 2011; Hadwin, Baron-Cohen, Howlin, & Hill, 1996).
Other populations that have been studied include deaf children (e.g., Wellman
& Peterson (2013), children with learning disabilities (e.g., Ashcroft, Jervis, &
230 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Table 9.1 Continued
Table 9.1 Continued
Table 9.1 Continued
Table 9.1 Continued
Roberts, 1999), children with anxiety disorders (e.g., Fox et al., 2012), children
with pervasive developmental disorder (e.g., Solomon, Goodlin-Jones, & Anders,
2004), and adopted and foster children (e.g., Colonnesi et al., 2013).
and in some instances they have achieved marked success. This conclusion is
demonstrated in either or both of two ways: significant improvements in perfor-
mance from pretest to posttest, or significant differences in performance between
trained participants and control group participants.
That training works is a conclusion also reached in the meta-analysis by Sprung
and colleagues (Sprung, Wilson, et al., 2015). As in any meta-analysis, they go on
to address two further questions. One concerns effect size—g iven that training
works, how great are the effects? The answer varies across studies, but the pooled
effect size across the studies included in the review, based on Hedges’ g statistic,
was .79, a value that is generally considered to reflect a moderately large effect.
The second question concerns factors that influence the probability or the
strength of success—what are referred to as moderator variables in meta-analyses.
Several of the potential moderators that were examined by Sprung, Wilson, et al.
(2015) turned out to have no effect, including age, gender, posttest delay, publica-
tion status, and year of publication (I return to the variable of age shortly). Sprung
and colleagues found that two factors did have an effect. The impact of training
increased with the number of training sessions, and it increased with the length of
each session. These findings make intuitive sense—t he more experience children
have with the training, the greater the effects.
Once this conclusion is noted, a further point must be added. In some
instances what seems to be rather minimal training has resulted in significant
improvement in theory-of-m ind performance (Clements, Rustin, & McCallum,
2000; Slaughter, 1998). In the Clements et al. study, for example, the training
consisted of a single false belief problem followed by feedback and explanation,
and the training in the Slaughter study was limited to a pair of trials followed
by feedback. In such cases the training may function at least in part as a form of
revised diagnosis—t hat is, a technique to draw out knowledge that in some sense
was already “in there.” In any case, success under such circumstances suggests
that the children were probably fairly close to mastering the knowledge naturally.
I return to the notion of readiness shortly.
A further methodological point is relevant here. Simply getting children to give
the correct answer on problems that have been directly trained is hardly compel-
ling evidence for the success of training. To varying degrees, almost all training
studies look for some degree of generalization across tasks and some maintenance
of effects over time. In the Clements et al. (2000) study, for example, the posttest
was administered a week after the training, and different materials and different
scenarios were used for the posttest false belief problems. As Table 9.1 indicates,
other studies have tested for broader generalization—not just different forms of
one concept but different concepts. Some studies have also imposed greater delays
before the final posttest. At present, the longest period is approximately 7 months
in a study by Ornaghi and colleagues (Ornaghi, Gavazzi, Cherubin, Conte, &
Piralli, 2015). In general, results hold up well across the time periods examined.
236 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Recall, in fact, that one conclusion from the Sprung, Wilson, et al. (2015) meta-
analysis was that length of posttest delay had no effect on success of training.
The variable of generalization is more complicated than that of maintenance
over time and therefore requires a bit more discussion. That success needs to
extend beyond tasks that were directly trained is a criterion that is both widely
agreed to and widely met in the training literature. Clearly, if we want to argue that
a child has mastered false belief, we should be able to show that this knowledge is
demonstrated on a range of false belief problems. But what about generalization
to other concepts? Should a child who has mastered false belief be expected to
also show a newfound ability to solve appearance–reality problems or to take the
perspective of another? The problem with imposing such a criterion is that vari-
ous theory-of-m ind accomplishments are far from perfectly correlated in natural
development. It is quite possible, for example, for a child to have a genuine under-
standing of false belief yet fail other basic preschool tasks. And this means that it
is quite possible to have genuine training of one concept without generalization
to other concepts.
Once this point is made, it is still interesting to know how much general-
ization occurs, and still reasonable to argue that the most successful studies
are those that produce broad rather than narrow effects. Studies vary in this
regard. Generalization is by no means guaranteed, for in some instances it is
only the trained concept that shows improvement (e.g., Knoll & Charman,
2000; Rakoczy, Tomasello, & Striano, 2006). In most studies, however, the
effects have proved to be at least somewhat broader. Perhaps the most impres-
sive demonstration of relatively broad effects comes in a study by Slaughter
and Gopnik (1996). These investigators showed that training in false belief
resulted in improvements in false belief. They also showed, however, that
training in perception and desire resulted in equivalent improvements in
false belief—a pattern of results that was subsequently replicated in a study
by Hulsken (2001, as cited by Kloo & Perner, 2008). Slaughter and Gopnik
interpret their results as support for the theory theory: Because different
forms of theory-of-m ind knowledge are interrelated in a coherent theoretical
structure, advances in one form of knowledge lead to advances in other forms
as well. As I have already said, I do not believe that such strong coherence is
a necessary prediction of the theory theory, given the less than perfect cor-
relations among theory-of-m ind concepts that characterize natural develop-
ment. Still, the impressive coherence demonstrated by Slaughter and Gopnik
is probably more easily explained by the theory theory than by any other theo-
retical position.
Although the conclusions to this point reflect important issues in the training
literature, they are really just a prelude to the questions of greatest interest with
respect to training of theory of mind. There are three such questions: who can be
trained, what can be trained, and how can it be trained?
Experimental Approaches 237
Readiness
The Who question is the question of readiness. Do children have to be at a certain
developmental level for training to work? In a general sense the literature suggests
that they must be, for no study to date has succeeded in instilling any theory-
of-m ind accomplishment well in advance of the expected age for its emergence.
On the other hand, no study has really attempted to do so; as the Participants
column in Table 9.1 indicates, samples are invariably drawn from age groups that
are known to be close to mastering the concept to be trained. So we do not really
know, for example, whether it is possible to train false belief in 2-year-olds.
Even with the restrictions in sampling, all studies report individual differ-
ences, in that the training works better for some children than for others. What
factors might contribute to these differences? The most obvious factor is age. We
would expect a 4-year-old to be more ready to master false belief than a 3-year-
old, and we would expect a relatively old 3-year-old to be more trainable than a
child who has just turned 3. As we saw, one conclusion from the Sprung, Wilson,
et al. (2015) meta-analysis was that age had no effect on success of training. This
conclusion, however, was based on across-study comparisons, an approach that
is not optimal for the examination of age differences (as, indeed, these authors
acknowledge in their other meta-analysis—Sprung, Munch, et al., 2015). An
across-study approach is not optimal because it is likely to confound too many
factors. In particular, the trained concept is likely to vary; what we attempt to
train in 8-year-olds will be different from what would have been trained at age 4,
and different still from what would make sense at age 12.
What is needed, then, is a within-study examination in which concept and
method of training are held constant and age varies. Not all studies with a range
of ages provide such an examination, and results from those that do are mixed. In
some instances age has proved unrelated to success of training (Allen & Kinsey,
2013; Gola, 2012; Iao et al., 2011). More commonly, however, age does relate to
success and it does so in the expected direction: namely, older children are more
trainable than are younger ones (Appleton & Reddy, 1996; Lu, Su, & Wang, 2008;
Pillow, Mash, Aloian, & Hill, 2002; Slaughter & Gopnik, 1996). This conclusion
does not mean that the youngest children in these studies show no success—just
that they show less success than their older counterparts.
Apart from age, what other factors might signal readiness for training? I have
noted at various points that both executive function and language relate positively
to theory of mind; hence we might expect that children’s standing on those factors
will be predictive. Results to date are mixed. In two instances measures of execu-
tive function have proved unrelated to the success of training, in one case for basic
preschool developments (Qu, Pen, Chee, & Chen, 2015) and in the other for under-
standing of nonliteral utterances as assessed by the Happe (1994) Strange Stories
measure (Lecce, Bianco, Devine, Hughes, & Banerjee, 2014). In a third study the
238 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
results were more positive. Benson and colleagues showed that children’s perfor-
mance on a battery of executive function tasks related positively and strongly to
their ability to benefit from training in false belief (Benson, Sabbagh, Carlson, &
Zelazo, 2013). Finally, Taumoepeau and Reese (2013) showed that measures of
language ability could also be predictive, although in this case the relation went
in the opposite direction; children whose language skills were relatively low were
the ones who were most likely to benefit from the language-oriented training. The
contrasting findings between the last two studies suggest that the role of these
contributors will vary with the nature of the training—whether the contributor is
a strength to be built on (as in Benson et al.) or a weakness to be overcome (as in
Taumoepeau & Reese).
Perhaps the clearest indication of readiness would come from evidence for
an early, partial grasp of the concept to be trained. Children who possess some
starting-point knowledge should be more trainable than children who lack such
a starting point. We saw in Chapter 2 that research suggests that children may
possess an implicit understanding of false belief well before the full, conscious,
explicit understanding that characterizes the preschool years. Clements et al.
(2000) used the anticipatory looking measure described in Chapter 2 to test for
such implicit knowledge in their sample of 3-year-olds, none of whom had yet
mastered the standard false belief test. A subset of the children did indeed look
toward the original location of the displaced object, even though they could not
yet predict that the protagonist would search there. Subsequently, it was these
children who benefited most from the training. This finding is exactly what
would be expected if early implicit knowledge paves the way for eventual explicit
understanding.
Trained Concept
As Table 9.1 shows, false belief has been by far the most popular topic in the train-
ing study literature, just as false belief has been the most popular topic in the
theory-of-m ind literature in general. Almost two dozen studies have attempted to
train false belief, and the great majority have succeeded. As we have just seen, the
degree of success can depend on a number of factors; still, there is no doubt that
false belief can be trained. As we will see shortly, the same conclusion applies to
emotion understanding.
The situation is less clear for another often studied development, the
appearance–reality distinction. Some of the earliest training studies were directed
to appearance–reality, and none reported any success in budging children from
their perceptually oriented responses (Flavell et al., 1986; Melot & Houde, 1998;
Taylor & Hort, 1990). These failures occurred despite the use of training proce-
dures that seem similar to procedures that have worked for false belief—t hat is,
practice with the task accompanied by feedback and explanations. Perhaps the
Experimental Approaches 239
fact that the appearance–reality distinction can take on so many forms poses a
challenge not found with false belief. In any case, the distinction turns out to be
by no means unteachable, for a number of successful training attempts eventu-
ally appeared (Allen & Kinsey, 2013; Dockett, 1998; Melot & Angeard, 2003).
Training in other concepts has also been shown to produce some gains in
appearance–reality as well (Melot & Angeard, 2003; Slaughter & Gopnik, 1996).
Most training studies, like most theory-of-m ind research in general, have been
directed to the preschool period. Table 9.1 shows the handful of exceptions. Both
Pillow et al. (2002) and Lecce, Bianco, Devine, et al. (2014) reported some suc-
cess in training the more advanced forms of theory of mind that follow out of
the accomplishments of the preschool years. In the other direction, Meltzoff and
Brooks (2008) were successful in teaching aspects of gaze following to 12-and
18-month-old infants. At present, theirs is the only study (to my knowledge) to
apply a training method to typically developing infants. As noted in Chapter 6,
however, intervention programs for infants and toddlers with autism constitute a
fairly large literature (White et al., 2011).
Training Method
Two general approaches to training theory of mind, each with a number of vari-
ants, account for most of the training study literature. One is built around experi-
ence with the task itself, which in most instances has meant experience with false
belief. Typically, the starting point is a standard assessment trial, either one to
which the child responds or one for which the child sees someone else’s response.
Exactly what follows varies across studies, but the essence of the approach is some
mixture of explicit feedback, discussion, and explanation. Thus children have a
chance to learn that their original response was incorrect, to learn what the cor-
rect response is, and to learn why the correct response is what it is.
The second general approach emphasizes language. Of course, language is
necessarily involved in the approach just described—feedback, discussion, and
explanation all occur via language. In the second approach, however, it is the
form of the language to which children are exposed that is assumed to be critical.
All three of the possible linguistic contributors to theory of mind discussed in
Chapter 7 have been explored: the semantic aspect as represented in the use of
mental state terms, the pragmatic aspect as represented by discourse about differ-
ent perspectives, and the syntactic aspect as represented by the use of sentential
complements. In everyday speech these aspects often co-occur, making it difficult
to pull apart the contributions of each. Although it is not easy to do so, training
studies offer some opportunity to isolate factors that are typically confounded in
the natural setting.
The language-based forms of training have a basis in the well-established cor-
relation between linguistic ability and theory of mind. The other well-established
240 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
cannot also accommodate such findings. The theory theory, for example, argues
that children revise their early, imperfect theories as they encounter evidence that
contradicts those theories, and almost any successful training procedure could
be argued to provide such disconfirming evidence. Similarly, despite its biologi-
cal emphasis, any modular account includes a role for experience as a trigger for
change, and training can be argued to provide such a trigger. Hale and Tager-
Flusberg (2003) in fact conclude that the successful training results in their study
might be best explained by Leslie’s (2000) modular theory.
A final question concerns external validity—how plausibly do different train-
ing procedures map onto what might actually happen in the real-world settings
in which development takes place? Of special interest for present purposes, of
course, is how plausibly they relate to ways in which parents might contribute to
their children’s development.
The language-based forms of training clearly rank high on this dimension. Not
only is it plausible that parents, among others, might provide the kinds of linguis-
tic input examined in the training literature; Chapter 7 makes it clear that they
very often do—and that such input relates positively to their children’s theory of
mind. It is true that the experimental demonstrations depart in various ways from
what is likely in the home setting: in the concentration of the input, in the separa-
tion of different aspects of language, in the explicit focus on false belief or other
theory-of-m ind outcomes. As is almost always the case, experimental control is
bought at the price of some artificiality. Still, the experimental studies build on
a complementary naturalistic literature, and the experimental approach and the
naturalistic/correlational approach provide a clear convergence of evidence: Both
indicate the importance of language.
Less clear is the external validity of training approaches that focus directly
on experience with the task to be mastered. Talk about beliefs and other epis-
temic states certainly occurs in the home, as we saw in Chapter 7. So, no doubt,
do various instances in which children encounter evidence that challenges their
beliefs, perhaps sometimes accompanied by further evidence that points them
in a new direction. Still, extended discussions of various forms of false belief or
appearance–reality, accompanied by explicit correction and instruction, are not
a likely occurrence. The training literature would benefit from more discussion of
whether demonstrations of what can occur really tell us what does occur.
I conclude this section by singling out several studies whose results provide
some further suggestions about how experience in general and parents in particu-
lar may contribute to theory of mind.
We saw evidence in Chapter 7 that children may learn about the mental world
not only from talk directed to themselves but also from talk directed to others
that they overhear. A study by Gola (2012) offers experimental support for this
possibility. The 3-and 4-year-olds in her study watched videos in which a charac-
ter experienced a false belief, followed by mental state comments of various sorts.
In some instances the comments were directed to another story character, and in
242 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
some instances they were directed to the child. Although the child-d irected com-
ments had some effect, the greatest gains occurred when the talk was from one
character to another, and thus from conversation that the child overheard rather
than participated in.
Like several other researchers, Peskin and Astington (2004) used storybooks to
present a concentrated dose of mental state input to their participants. Two condi-
tions were contrasted. In one condition the mental state content was made explicit
through frequent use of mental state terms; in the other condition the content
remained implicit—thus clearly present in the story, but without accompanying
mental state language. We might expect that spelling out the mental state infor-
mation would be helpful for children. In fact, the two conditions led to equivalent
improvement in the prediction phase of the false belief posttest, and the implicit
condition resulted in a greater ability to provide explanations for the correct false
belief predictions. Apparently, having to infer the relevant mental states them-
selves, as opposed to having the information provided to them, helped children to
consolidate the knowledge and make it their own. This finding serves as a helpful
reminder that children play an active role in theory-of-mind development, a point
that may be easy to forget when the focus is on adults teaching things to children.
Finally, the research by Taumoepeau and Reese (2013) is a unique entry among
the studies considered in this section: a study in which the target of the interven-
tion was not the child but the child’s mother. When the child participants were
toddlers, the mothers in the study were trained in the use of elaborative speech
while engaged in memory talk with their children. Subsequently, the children who
had been exposed to such talk outperformed a control group on a theory-of-m ind
battery, although the effect, as we saw earlier in the discussion of Readiness, held
only for children who were relatively low in language ability. In a sense, of course,
this finding simply replicates what is found in the naturalistic-correlational litera-
ture, in which elaborative speech by mothers has been shown to relate positively
to children’s theory of mind. The experimental design, however, allows us to be
more certain about causality. In the naturalistic case, mothers may be responding
to rather than creating differences in their children. Or there may be some third
factor that accounts for the mother–child relation. In the Taumoepeau and Reese
study the experimental control makes the causality clear: The mother’s speech
causes theory-of-m ind advances in the child.
Table 9.2 Continued
Study Participants Measures Training method
Havighurst et al. 4- and Subtests of the Parent-d irected, six-
(2010) 5-year-olds Emotions Skills week, group-format
Task program designed
to teach appropriate
response to emotions.
Izard, 3- and Emotion Classroom-based
Trentacosta, 4-year-olds labeling, emotion lessons directed to
King, & Mostow recognition, understanding and
(2004) receptive emotion regulation of emotions
vocabulary
Ornaghi, Italian 6-and Test of Emotion Scenarios with
Brockmeier, & 7- year-olds Comprehension, emotional situations
Gavazzi (2014) Emotional followed by
Lexicon Test, discussions concerning
second-order false the nature, causes, and
belief regulation of emotions
Ornaghi, Italian 4-and Test of Emotion Same as Ornaghi et al.
Gavazzi, 5-year olds Comprehension, (2014)
Cherubin, false belief
Conte, & Piralli
(2015)
Peng, Johnson, 4- to Understanding of Generation and
Pollack, 7-year-olds mixed emotions discussion of examples
Glasspool, & of emotionally charged
Harris (1992) conflictual situations
Pons, Harris, & 9-year-olds Emotion School Matters In
Doudin (2002) understanding Lifeskills Education
(Test of Emotion (SMILE): classroom-
Comprehension) wide intervention,
one of whose goals is
to promote emotion
understanding
Salmon et al. New Zealand Emotion Reading of storybooks
(2013) 3- and recognition, with emphasis on
4-year-olds production of emotions and emotion
emotion terms, terms
understanding
of causes of
emotions
Experimental Approaches 245
Table 9.2 Continued
Study Participants Measures Training method
Tenenbaum, 5- to Test of Emotion Vignettes with mixed
Alfieri, Brooks, 8-year-olds Comprehension or hidden emotions,
& Dunne (2008) followed by either
self-generated
or experimenter
explanations
Van Bergen, Australian 3- Emotion Mothers trained in
Salmon, Dadds, to 5-year-olds recognition, elaborative memory
& Allen (2009) emotion talk and also talk about
perspective emotions
taking,
understanding
of causes of
emotions
What do the emotion training studies show? Again, the first and most general
conclusion is that training works—each of the studies in Table 9.2 reports posi-
tive effects on at least some of its outcome measures. Often the positive results
are mixed with negative ones, for most studies assess multiple forms of emotion
understanding, and not every form always proves responsive to training. But the
general trainability of emotion understanding is clear. Furthermore, the durabil-
ity of effects is also clear, for in several instances effects are still evident months
after the conclusion of the training.
That training works is also a conclusion in the Sprung, Munch, et al. (2015)
meta-analysis. Their estimates of effect size vary some across different aspects of
emotion understanding; the modal value, however, is around .60, which indicates
a moderately strong effect. Conclusions about moderator variables also vary some
across different outcome measures. In some instances lengthier sessions lead to
stronger results, which, as we saw, is the case in the general theory-of-m ind train-
ing literature. The effects of the setting for training (individual vs. group) vary
with the outcome in question: greater effects for reflective aspects of emotion
(understanding of mixed emotions, of moral emotions, and of emotion regula-
tion) from training in individual settings, greater effects for expressive aspects of
emotions (emotion recognition, understanding of the causes of emotions) from
training in group settings.
Abstracting the critical elements of training is difficult with the large interven-
tion studies, given their extended, multipart nature. The training methods in the
smaller-scale studies include two of the general approaches discussed in the previ-
ous section: linguistic input rich in mental state terms, in this case emotion terms;
and concentrated discussion, often with feedback and explanation, of situations
that require the target knowledge, which in this case is some form of emotion
understanding. As in the general training literature, both approaches have proved
successful, and there is no indication to date that one works better than the other.
The variable of readiness for training has received limited attention in this
literature. Age has been examined in a handful of studies, although not with
consistent results. Peng and colleagues reported a strong age effect, with more
successful training at ages 6 and 7 than at ages 4 and 5 (Peng, Johnson, Pollock,
Glasspool, & Harris, 1992). Grazzani and Ornaghi (2011) reported a mixed effect
of age: greater effects of training for older than for younger children on the mea-
sure of metacognitive verb comprehension, but more gains by younger than older
on the Test of Emotion Comprehension. Finally, Tenenbaum and colleagues
reported no effects of age in their sample of 5-to 8-year-olds (Tenenbaum, Alfieri,
Brooks, & Dunne, 2008).
Three studies have made parents (mostly or exclusively mothers) part of
the intervention, in one case as a supplement to a classroom-based program
(Bierman et al., 2008) and in two cases as the focus of training (Havighurst
et al., 2010; Van Bergen et al., 2009). In the Havighurst et al. (2010) study
Experimental Approaches 247
Microgenetic Studies
Microgenetic research is a form of longitudinal research. As proponents of the
approach emphasize, however, a microgenetic study differs in important ways
from a typical longitudinal study. A strength of longitudinal research is that it
provides a direct measure of change. Most longitudinal studies, however, are lim-
ited to documenting the results or products of change. That is, they tell us what the
individual is like at time 1 and time 2 and time 3. But they do not tell us how the
changes from 1 to 2 to 3 come about, and they do not tell us about any intermedi-
ate states between 1 and 3 that are not represented in the times of measurement.
Microgenetic studies are intended to address these limitations. The essence of
the microgenetic approach is repeated, high-density observations of the behaviors
being studied across a period when change is occurring. In contrast to a standard
longitudinal study, the observations are more frequent and therefore more closely
spaced, and there is an emphasis on capturing not just levels of performance but
processes of change. In the words of Amsterlaw and Wellman (2006), “an optimal
microgenetic environment is one that both regularly assesses children’s chang-
ing competence on a given task and also provides experiences likely to foster the
changes of interest” (p. 141).
Robert Siegler (2006), one of the leading advocates of the microgenetic
approach, identifies five issues related to cognitive change for which microgenetic
techniques can be informative. Such techniques can inform us about the path of
cognitive change: the sequences and levels through which children move in acquir-
ing new knowledge. They can provide information about the rate of change: how
quickly or slowly children master different forms of knowledge. They speak to the
issue of breadth of change: when children acquire a new competency, how nar-
rowly or broadly they apply it. They are relevant to the question of possible vari-
ability in the pattern of change: Do all children follow the same route in mastering
a new concept? Finally—and most relevant to current interests—m icrogenetic
248 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
methods can provide information about the sources of change: the experiences
and processes through which children acquire new knowledge.
As I noted at the start of the chapter, microgenetic studies of theory of mind
constitute a small literature, consisting at present of six studies (Amsterlaw
& Wellman, 2006; Flynn, 2006; Flynn, O’Malley, & Wood, 2004; Guajardo,
Peterson, & Marshall, 2013; Rhodes & Wellman, 2013; Wahl, 2001). All have
concentrated on the preschool period and the development of false belief.
I take the Amsterlaw and Wellman (2006) study as an example. Their partici-
pants were 3-and 4-year-olds, all of whom had failed pretest measures of false
belief. Each child took part in 12 microgenetic sessions, two sessions per week
spread across 6 weeks. During each session the child responded to two false
belief problems, with different problems used across sessions. All of the problems
involved judging the belief of a story character in a typical false belief scenario—
thus where the character would look for a displaced object or what he or she
would think was in a misleading container. Following the child’s answer (which,
at the start, was almost always wrong), the experimenter demonstrated how the
character would in fact respond, a response that always reflected the behavior of
someone with a false belief (for example, a search in the original location rather
than the new location for the displaced object). The children thus received what
the researchers refer to as “implicit feedback”—not a direct contradiction of
their answers but evidence nevertheless that the answers were wrong. In the final
phase of the procedure the child was asked to explain why the story character had
thought or behaved in the way described.
The microgenetic experience resulted in a marked improvement in false belief
understanding, a move from 21% correct on the pretest to 71% correct by the end
of the study. A control group that was simply pretested and posttested showed
no change from pre-to posttest. Improvement for the microgenetic group was
evident not only on the kinds of problems presented during the sessions but also
on a form of false belief (the self question on the contests task) that had never
been presented. The improvement across sessions was gradual rather than abrupt,
and fluctuations and temporary regressions in performance were common. Thus
there was often a transitional period between when children were first correct on a
particular kind of problem and when they were consistently correct. Other micro-
genetic studies of false belief have reported the same pattern (Flynn et al., 2004).
In explaining their results, Amsterlaw and Wellman (2006) stress the impor-
tance of the explanations that the children provided in response to the implicit
feedback. As the authors note, a good deal of evidence is compatible with a for-
mative role for explanations in cognitive development (see also Siegler & Lin,
2010, and Wellman, 2011). We saw in Chapter 7 that mental state talk that is
high in explanations can be especially helpful for theory-of-m ind development,
and we saw earlier in this chapter that explanations can be a helpful component
of attempts to train children. Although most such explanations are provided by
Experimental Approaches 249
adults, the Amsterlaw and Wellman results indicate that children may be able to
generate helpful explanations themselves. Support for this conclusion is found in
another microgenetic study. Indeed, Guajardo et al. (2013) reported that a condi-
tion in which children provided explanations themselves led to more change than
one in which they received explanations from the experimenter.
Not all of the children in Amsterlaw and Wellman’s (2006) microgenetic con-
dition improved, and none of the pretest or demographic information in the study
predicted which children would be the ones to show improvement. A subsequent
study by Rhodes and Wellman (2013) provides more information on these issues.
In addition to a microgenetic component, their study administered the Wellman
and Liu (2004) theory-of-m ind battery as a pretest (see Table 2.3). Although all
of the children failed the false belief component of the battery, some were able to
succeed on the developmentally simpler knowledge access task. Understanding
of knowledge access proved to be a strong predictor of progress in response to
the microgenetic experience: Children who passed the access task had more
than twice as many correct responses on the false belief posttest as did those
who failed. I will add that a similar finding emerged in a theory-of-m ind train-
ing study with deaf children; again, response to the Wellman and Liu battery was
a strong predictor of developmental advance (Wellman & Peterson, 2013). The
general conclusion here applies to both training studies and microgenetic stud-
ies: For new experiences to be beneficial, children must be developmentally ready
to profit from the experiences.
In general, the results from other microgenetic studies appear compatible with
Amsterlaw and Wellman’s (2006) emphasis on implicit feedback accompanied
by self-generated explanations. Although experience with the task alone some-
times results in improvement, effects are not as strong or as consistent as those
that occur when explanations are generated (Flynn, 2006; Flynn et al., 2004).
Feedback alone in the absence of explanations also produces limited progress at
best (Guajardo et al., 2013; Wahl, 2001).
How do the conclusions from microgenetic research compare with those from
training studies? There clearly are similarities. Most generally, both research lit-
eratures demonstrate that theory-of-m ind development is affected by experience,
and more specifically, both literatures indicate that feedback and explanations are
among the kinds of experience that can nurture development. The microgenetic
studies, however, possess two related strengths in comparison to training stud-
ies. First, their emphasis on the child’s active role in learning provides a valuable
corrective to the focus on adult teaching that is built into to the training study
approach. Second, microgenetic studies could be argued to be higher in exter-
nal validity, given that we know, contra the training approach, that children do
not master theory-of-m ind concepts by having adults deliberately and repeatedly
teach the knowledge to them. This, in fact, is an argument that Amsterlaw and
Wellman (2006) make in support of the microgenetic approach.
250 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
However strongly we may emphasize the child’s active role, theory of mind
cannot develop in a social vacuum—t here must be a social environment within
which other people furnish the child with information about mental states. What
do microgenetic studies tell us about how parents might contribute? Clearly,
the message is not that parents contribute by repeatedly presenting false belief
problems to their children—m icrogenetic studies have their own issues of exter-
nal validity. Still, it is possible to argue—as Henry Wellman has in fact argued
in various places (Amsterlaw & Wellman, 2006; Wellman, 2011, 2014)—that
the processes identified in such studies have plausible links to experiences that
parents make available to their children. Parents (to varying degrees) provide
feedback, both explicit and implicit, with respect to their child’s reasoning
about mental states, in some instances in conversations with the child, in some
instances through overheard conversations with the child’s siblings or others, and
in some instances through behaviors that the child observes. Parents also furnish
explanations concerning the nature, causes, and effects of mental states, in some
instances spontaneously and in some instances in response to questions from
the child, and they pose questions that offer children an opportunity to generate
their own explanations. Parents are not the only source for such experiences—
siblings, peers, teachers, and storybooks also contribute. But in the early years,
when so much of theory-of-m ind development occurs, parents may be especially
important.
Learning from Others
As I noted at the start of this chapter, the literature under this heading is a large
and rapidly growing one. Fuller discussions than I provide can be found in several
sources, including P. L. Harris (2012); Robinson and Einav (2014); and Stephens,
Suarez, and Koenig (2015). A chapter by Gelman (2009) provides a more general
overview of social contributors to cognitive development.
Paul Harris is the progenitor of this line of research, and he has presented the
rationale for such study in a number of places (e.g., P. L. Harris, 2007, 2012). The
rationale is, at least in retrospect, a seemingly obvious and presumably uncon-
troversial one. It is that children learn not only through their own independent
experiences and actions on the world, the emphasis during the Piagetian era of
developmental study; they learn also from what other people tell or show them.
Indeed, there are many things that can be learned only from information that
other people provide, because they involve knowledge for which direct, first-
hand experience is simply not available. This point applies to any historical fact
that predates the individual’s lifetime, it applies to many of the conclusions of
science (e.g., that germs exist, that the world is round), and it applies to religious
and other supernatural beliefs. In the words of Paul Harris (2007), we need
Experimental Approaches 251
others “to understand the historical past, the microscopic, or the metaphysical”
(p. 135).
An emphasis on learning from others does not mean that children passively
absorb whatever information comes their way. The Piagetian belief in the active
child remains very much a part of this research literature. Children must be
ready to assimilate any new information that they encounter, and they are active
and selective in what they attend to and what they retain (Sobel & Kushnir,
2013). Indeed, this emphasis is captured in the common label for this body of
research: “Trust and Skepticism.” Children do not blindly accept whatever they
are told; rather, they are selective in what information they trust and what they
reject. A basic question underlying this research is what governs this selectivity.
given a chance to imitate a novel action performed by the adult, infants showed
much more imitation of the reliable informant.
What factors govern children’s selectivity? Koenig and Stephens (2014) indi-
cate that two are primary. One is the factor already discussed: the accuracy or
expertise of the informant. The other is what they label benevolence: the warmth
or friendliness exhibited by the informant. Children place more trust in benevo-
lent informants than in those whose behavior is less positive. Even infants show a
preference for the more benevolent of two potential informants (Hamlin, Wynn,
& Bloom, 2007).
Although accuracy and benevolence may be the most important determinants
of trust, they are hardly the only factors that have been studied, or that have been
shown to affect how children respond to would-be informants. Table 9.3 lists
some of the other determinants that have been explored, each of which has been
shown to have some effect on children’s response.
What sorts of learning are demonstrated in these studies? By far the most com-
mon outcome measure is the outcome examined in the Koenig and Harris (2005)
study: learning of object labels. This emphasis is understandable, given the clear
dependence of language learning on input from others. Table 9.4 lists some of the
other outcomes that appear in the literature.
As Koenig and Stephens (2014) note, the entries in Table 9.4 divide into two
categories. Most are forms of semantic knowledge, which is the label for generally
held, conventional forms of knowledge about the world. The names for objects fall
in this category; so too (to take two other examples from Table 9.4) does knowl-
edge of object functions or body parts. In contrast, episodic knowledge refers to spe-
cific facts that are tied to a particular time and place. Object identity and object
location, at least as examined in these studies, are forms of episodic knowledge.
The semantic–episodic distinction has implications for how expertise is stud-
ied. In the case of semantic knowledge, expertise is a general characteristic of the
informant, a characteristic that is conveyed to the child either through the infor-
mant’s behavior (as in the object labeling studies) or through a description pro-
vided by the experimenter (e.g., a person “who works with many different kinds of
animals, who knows a lot about animals that we don’t know about”—Boseovski &
Thurman, 2014, p. 828). In the case of episodic knowledge, expertise is not a gen-
eral characteristic but rather is situation-specific; one informant has been shown
to have information not available to the other. If, for example, one informant looks
inside a box and the other does not, then it makes sense to believe what the first
one says about the contents of the box. These studies make clear that children as
young as preschool age can make use of either kind of information. Furthermore,
if the situation requires, they can differentiate between the two types, using either
general-characteristic or situation-specific information as appropriate (Brosseau-
Liard & Birch, (2011).
Table 9.3 Examples of Contrasts between Informants Included in the
Learning-f rom-Others Literature
Contrast Source
Accuracy/expertise Landrum & Mills (2015)
Benevolence Lane, Wellman, & Gelman (2013)
Confidence Birch, Akmal, & Frampton (2010)
Consensus Corriveau & Harris (2010)
Honesty Li, Heyman, Xu, & Lee (2014)
Age VanderBorght & Jaswal (2009)
Gender Taylor (2013)
Familiarity Corriveau & Harris (2009)
Group membership Chen, Corriveau, & Harris (2013)
Accent Kinzler, Corriveau, & Harris (2010)
Attractiveness Bascandziev & Harris (2014)
Strength Fusaro, Corriveau, & Harris (2011)
Physical disability, obesity Jeffer & Ma (2015)
Topic Source
Object labels Koenig & Harris (2005)
Object functions Birch, Vauthier, & Bloom (2008)
Object identity Robinson, Haigh, & Nurmsoo (2008)
Object location Jaswal, Croft, Setia, & Cole (2010)
Causal actions Birch, Akmal, & Frampton (2010)
Tool use DiYanni, Nini, Rheel, & Livelli (2012)
Problem solving Cluver, Heyman, & Carver (2013)
Perceptual estimation Corriveau & Harris (2010)
Body parts Luu, de Rosnay, & Harris (2013)
Toys VanderBorght & Jaswal (2009)
Strangers Boseovski (2012)
Strange animals Boseovski & Thurman (2014)
254 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Theory of Mind
How does this work relate to theory of mind? Basically, selection among infor-
mants is theory of mind—t he child is using knowledge or beliefs about people
to make decisions about how to respond to them. In Wellman’s (2014) words,
learning from others “is saturated with theory-of-m ind features and understand-
ing” (p. 260). Of course, this point leaves open the question of whether the beliefs
being used are appropriate or not. Investing trust in the more attractive or less
obese of two informants does not suggest much understanding of the characteris-
tics that underlie the behaviors of interest. In most instances, however, children’s
selectivity shows a more impressive use of their theory-of-m ind knowledge. Such
is certainly the case in the most consistent finding from this literature: placement
of greater trust in the more knowledgeable or expert of two sources.
If selection among informants reflects theory of mind, we would expect to find
relations between selectivity and standard theory-of-m ind measures. Although
such is not always the case (e.g., Pasquini, Corriveau, Koenig, & Harris, 2007;
Robinson & Nurmsoo, 2009), it usually is (e.g., Brosseau-Liard, Penney, &
Poulin-Dubois, 2015; DiYanni, Nini, Rheel, & Livelli, 2012; Lucas, Lewis, Pala,
Wong, & Berridge, 2013). In particular, children with the requisite theory-of-
mind knowledge may be able to go beyond simply noting an informant’s accuracy
or inaccuracy to infer the reasons for being right or wrong. They may, for example,
place more credence in an informant whose correct responses are self-generated
rather than in one who needs help, and they may forgive inaccuracy in an infor-
mant who had insufficient information to work with but not one whose errors are
internal rather than external in origin (Robinson, Nurmsoo, & Einav, 2014).
The contrast just noted between the two erring informants brings up another
way in which the learning-from-other studies relate to—and also add to—the
general theory-of-m ind literature. It concerns the distinction between situational
and individual bases for mental state attributions, a distinction first proposed for
the perspective-taking literature by Higgins (1981). In some instances the attri-
butes of a target that must be judged, as well as differences between targets, are
situational in origin. Such is the case, for example, if one target has received ade-
quate information for some judgment whereas the other has received inadequate
or misleading information. In other instances the attributes of a target that must
be judged, as well as differences between targets, are individual in origin. Such is
the case, for example, if one target consistently provides correct labels for objects
whereas a second target, placed in the identical situation, is consistently incor-
rect. Here the differences between targets are brought to the situation rather than
created by it.
Theory-of-m ind research has been heavily skewed toward the situational
determinants of mental states (Miller, 2000). The false belief task is the clearest
but far from the only example of this point. In a standard false belief task it makes
Experimental Approaches 255
Parents
This literature is also largely silent on the role of parents. To my knowledge, only
a single study has included a parent as one of the possible informants. Corriveau
et al. (2009) began by assessing attachment in a sample of 15-month-olds, an
assessment that identified three typical attachment types: secure attachment,
avoidant attachment, and ambivalent attachment. When the children reached
the age of 4 they participated in a selective learning study, with object labels
and object functions as the content, in which the mother of each child served
as one informant and a stranger served as the other. Children from all three
attachment groups placed more trust in their mother’s claims than in those
256 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
of the stranger; the difference for the avoidant group, however, fell short of
significance, and the difference for the ambivalent group was actually greater
than that for securely attached children. A year later the children participated
in another selective learning study with mother and stranger; in this case, how-
ever, the mother systematically provided less plausible object labels than did
the stranger. When plausibility was pitted against familiarity, children with
both secure attachments and avoidant attachments opted for plausibility and
thus the stranger; the ambivalently attached children, however, still placed
more trust in the mother. What these findings suggest is that children tend
to trust their mothers more than other female adults; this trust is not abso-
lute, however, and it varies to some extent with attachment status. Children
with ambivalent attachments may be overly dependent on the mother and thus
overly ready to believe whatever she says.
Serving as informants is not the only way in which parents might contribute to
what their children learn from others. Children vary in how often they seek help
from others and in how appropriately selective they are when they do seek help,
and aspects of parenting can contribute to these differences (Luce, Callanan, &
Smilovic, 2013; Puustinen, Lyyra, Metsapelto, & Pulkkinen, 2008). Luce et al.
(2013), for example, found that children whose parents stressed evidence when
reasoning about scientific problems were themselves more sensitive to the impor-
tance of evidence when encountering and evaluating new information.
Although they do not figure importantly in the work being reviewed now,
parents do appear in three other related literatures. One is the social referenc-
ing literature discussed in Chapter 6. As we saw there, conclusions about the
mother as a preferred source for social referencing vary with the context. When
emotional reassurance is one of the goals of the referencing attempt, then moth-
ers are usually the preferred source. When simply learning about something
novel is the goal, then infants, just like older children, apparently prefer the more
expert of two sources. Recall that this was the conclusion from the studies by
Stenberg and associates (Schmitow & Stenberg, 2013; Stenberg, 2009; Stenberg
& Hagekull, 2007).
A second set of studies in which parents appear is an older literature that,
despite its clear relevance, has gone largely unmentioned in the work on trust and
skepticism. As the label suggests, research on information seeking is directed to
children’s ability to seek out appropriate sources of information when faced with
some task to solve. The most comprehensive program of such research, by Bar-
Tal and associates (Bar-Tal, Raviv, Raviv, & Brosh, 1991; Raviv, Bar-Tal, Raviv,
& Houminer, 1990; Raviv, Bar-Tal, Raviv, & Peleg, 1990), has examined both
different domains in which children seek information (e.g., school work, science,
social relations, personal feelings, values) and different informants among whom
Experimental Approaches 257
they choose (e.g., parents, teachers, siblings, friends). The most general conclu-
sion from the research is that children as young as age 5 make differentiated judg-
ments in the sense that their preference for different sources varies sensibly with
the content area in question. Furthermore, for most children parents are gener-
ally valued sources across all content areas, including the intellectual domains.
Although children offer a variety of explanations in support of selection of a par-
ticular source, the most commonly offered explanation is knowledge: The source
has expertise for the topic in question.
A final literature is that directed to children’s questions. As any parent of a
young child knows, children ask many questions—in one study of in-t he-home
observations, children between the ages of 2 and 5 asked an average of one to
three questions per minute (Chouinard, 2007). Although such questions can have
many goals, a high proportion are requests for some sort of information (and not,
for example, attention seeking or requests for objects), and a high proportion of
the information-seeking attempts are requests for explanations. Although expla-
nations of various sorts may be sought, by preschool age the most commonly
sought explanations are those for human actions, which, of course, is a prototypi-
cal theory-of-m ind topic (Hickling & Wellman, 2001). Children, moreover, are
persistent in their questioning, for if a satisfactory response is not forthcoming
the “why’s” often continue until one is produced. Finally, although questions can
be directed to various recipients, by far the most common targets, especially in
the early years, are the child’s parents. As both Chapter 7 and the present chap-
ter have shown, parent–child discussions about mental states, especially discus-
sions that focus on explanations, are fertile ground for developmental advance.
The work on questions makes clear that children are often the instigators of such
discussions.
How might the three research literatures just discussed add to the conclusions
from the work on learning from others? Clearly, the experimental control that
characterizes the learning-from-others studies, coupled with the ingenuity of
many talented researchers, has made possible a number of interesting discoveries
about what and whom children believe or disbelieve. These discoveries, however,
have been tied to a narrow range of distinctly artificial laboratory procedures.
At this point in the research endeavor it may be time to begin to focus more on
how the various conclusions play out in real life (a point made by others who have
assessed this work—Dore, Lillard, & Jaswal, 2014; Lucas & Lewis, 2010). One
way to do so would be more research that includes the informants from whom
children actually learn—t hus not experimenters but parents, teachers, siblings,
peers. Another way to do so would be more attempts to identify real-l ife analogues
to what has been shown in the laboratory. The work on children’s questions is a
promising start in this direction.
258 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Conclusions
This section begins with a bit more about a theme that has run throughout this
chapter, the construct of external validity. It then moves on to suggest several
directions for future research.
The question of external validity is the question of the movement from can to
does. The strength of the experimental approach is the establishment of cause-and-
effect relations—in the present case, the identification of a number of kinds of
experience that can promote theory of mind. The weakness of the approach is the
artificiality that laboratory control often entails and the consequent uncertainty
about whether any of these experiences actually does promote theory of mind.
This trade-off is, of course, a familiar one of which any researcher is well aware.
Nevertheless, familiar though the issue may be, it would be helpful to see more
explicit discussion of the question of external validity in the literatures reviewed
here. Two arguments can be offered in response to the artificiality criticism.
One is the converging-evidence argument: a demonstration that experimental
evidence and naturalistic-correlational evidence converge on the same conclu-
sion. As we have seen, such an argument can be made to some extent for each of
the literatures reviewed here, although more persuasively in some cases than in
others. The other is the use of laboratory procedures that map plausibly onto the
real-l ife situations of interest—procedures that, in short, are not artificial. Again,
studies vary in how close they come to this goal. Storybook reading as a way to
teach theory of mind certainly ranks high; repeated false belief trials followed by
explicit feedback, probably less so. Most of the learning-f rom-others studies also
fall in the less-so category.
The point just made about minimizing artificiality constitutes one suggestion
for future research. I will add three others.
The first suggestion is for more microgenetic study. Whereas two of the litera-
tures considered here are large and growing ones, the microgenetic literature is
still limited to a handful of studies. The microgenetic studies to date, moreover,
could be argued to be differentially successful with respect to the five goals identi-
fied by Siegler (2006). On the one hand, such studies have certainly informed us
about the path that children follow when mastering false belief, about variability
as they move along that path, and about the breadth of the resulting achievement.
On the other hand, they arguably have told us less about the sources of change,
including the role of social agents such as parents.
A second suggestion is one that I will return to in Chapter 10, for it applies
to many of the topics considered throughout this book—indeed, applies to
the theory-of-m ind literature in general. It concerns the need for more study
of developments beyond those that are essentially complete by age 5. Earlier
I singled out the few training studies that have focused on older children and
Experimental Approaches 259
Conclusions
This chapter addresses two general questions. The first section of the chapter
offers a summary of what we know about parenting and theory of mind. The sec-
ond section addresses what we still need to know.
261
262 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
indicates that other family members, teachers, and mass media also contribute.
It is good to remember as well that research has concentrated on the early child-
hood years, the time during which the influence of parents is likely to be greatest.
As children grow older, other social agents may well assume a more important
role. At present, however, this possibility remains speculative, given the dearth of
research with older children (a point to which I will return).
Once these various qualifiers are acknowledged, the general conclusion
about parenting and theory of mind is clear: Parents are important. Hundreds
of studies have reported positive relations between parental practices and chil-
dren’s theory of mind. The relations, moreover, are in the great majority of cases
expectable ones—t hat is, practices that we would expect, on either conceptual
or empirical grounds, to be favorable turn out in fact to be favorable. Although
most of the research is correlational, several further forms of evidence strongly
suggest that at least part of the causal basis is from parental practices to child
outcomes. Thus relations typically remain when various third-factor alternatives
are statistically controlled. Longitudinal studies (which are a frequent part of
the literature) consistently find that parenting earlier in development relates to
child outcomes later in development. Finally, in many instances experimental
studies provide converging evidence, in that potentially causal factors identified
in correlational study prove in fact to be causal when they are experimentally
manipulated.
Evidence also suggests that theory of mind is among the aspects of cognitive
development for which authoritative parenting is optimal. This was the conclu-
sion reached in the review of the relevant evidence in Chapter 4. As we saw there,
however, at present the support for such a conclusion is limited in two respects.
The first concerns measurement. A full, Baumrind-style assessment is rare in this
literature; rather, most studies have settled for abbreviated versions of the origi-
nal approach (thus the “definitional drift” referred to in Chapter 4). The second
limitation (which may well be related to the first) is that positive results are often
accompanied by numerous exceptions and qualifications.
More clearly established than the importance of overall style of parenting
is the importance of some of the dimensions or aspects of parenting that are
components of each of the styles. Results for the control dimension, to be sure,
are not totally consistent. The benefits of certain forms of firm control that are
found when behavioral compliance is the issue are at present less clear for theory
of mind. The detrimental effects of other forms of control, however, do appear
in at least most studies that have looked for them. In particular, strong control
in the absence of warmth and reasoning—which, of course, is the definition
of the authoritarian style—is associated with relatively poor theory-of-m ind
development.
More positively, three aspects of parenting are associated with relatively good
theory-of-m ind development. One is parental warmth. The value of a warm, sup-
portive relationship may be the most clearly established finding in the general
parenting literature; thus the work on theory of mind simply adds to the breadth
of this conclusion. The benefits of warmth are almost certainly multiply deter-
mined. Among other bases, a warm relationship increases the likelihood that par-
ent and child will spend time together, it makes it more likely that the child will be
attentive to messages from the parent, it enhances the parent’s effectiveness as a
model from whom the child can take on behaviors, and it increases the likelihood
that the child will be motivated to comply with and learn from the parent.
A second aspect of parenting that relates positively to theory of mind is rea-
soning. Again, the findings from theory-of-m ind research mirror those from the
more general parenting literature, in which reasoning of a variety of forms has
been shown to enhance the effectiveness of parenting with respect to a variety of
developmental outcomes. In the case of theory of mind, some of the effects of a
relatively high use of reasoning may be direct, in that parents who favor reason-
ing with the child may be especially likely to offer explanations for the causes and
effects of mental states. Some of the effects may be indirect, in that children who
have become accustomed to receiving reasons may be especially likely to seek
out explanations when faced with something they do not understand. As we saw
in Chapter 9, theory of mind is a common context for young children’s question
asking. And if the child’s parents value reasoning, then helpful answers are likely
to be forthcoming.
264 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Talk
Not all theory-of-m ind development is dependent on language. As Chapter 6
made clear, learning about the mental world begins very early in life, well before
infants either understand language or produce language themselves. It is a task for
which they are clearly biologically prepared, although how strongly prepared is, as
we have seen, a matter of debate. Whatever the biological starting point, infants
also need information about the social world in order to learn about people, and
initially this information takes various nonverbal forms. Parental speech may
heighten the probability of attention to the relevant information, especially when
the speech is in the form of motherese. And by the second year of life the semantic
content of the speech may begin to play a role. Initially, however, theory of mind
is a nonverbal development.
It does not remain nonverbal for very long. Once we move beyond infancy,
language is clearly necessary for theory of mind. Part of the argument for this
conclusion is logical: It is difficult to see how children could ever come to reason
explicitly about invisible mental states, let alone talk about such states, without
language to represent those states. Part of the argument is empirical. Language
and theory of mind are closely entwined across the years when both are develop-
ing. Children’s ability to reason about mental states develops in close conjunc-
tion with their ability to talk about mental states. Individual differences among
children in linguistic ability relate to and often precede individual differences in
theory of mind. When language is absent or impaired (as is the case, for exam-
ple, in deaf children of hearing parents), theory of mind is also impaired. Finally,
experimentally induced improvements in relevant aspects of language—a com-
mon element in many training studies—lead to improvements in theory of mind.
Conclusions 265
It is under the heading of Talk that we find the clearest evidence for parents’
contribution to their children’s development of theory of mind. Parents vary in
both how often they talk about mental states and the ways in which they talk
about them, and such variations relate to a variety of aspects of their children’s
theory of mind. In general, the more talk children hear about mental states, the
more they talk about mental states themselves and the more quickly they master
various theory-of-m ind milestones. Not surprisingly, it is talk about a particular
mental state that is often most helpful for learning about that state—thus talk
about desires for coming to understand desires, talk about beliefs for coming to
understand beliefs, and so forth. In some instances, however, mental state talk of
any form can be helpful, a result that presumably reflects the interrelated nature
of mental states. A child with a nascent understanding of desire, for example,
may be helped by mother’s indication that brother “wants his toy” to realize that
brother believes that the toy is where he is now searching.
Not only the amount but the nature of mental state talk is important. In gen-
eral, talk is most helpful when it is appropriately directed to the child’s current
interests and understanding. It is most helpful, therefore, when the parent has
accurately judged what the child knows or wants to know. Talk is also most helpful
when it takes a connected form, that is, the utterances of each speaker are seman-
tically related to what the other speaker has just said. One form of connectedness
comes in response to child questions, a frequent occurrence, for children play an
active role in the learning process. In such cases it is obviously important not only
to be responsive but to be appropriately responsive, that is, to provide an answer
that speaks to what the child wants to know. Not all questions take an explicit
form, and it is therefore also important to be sensitive to questions that are only
implicit or to teaching opportunities more generally. Finally, talk is most helpful
when it does not simply mention mental states but elaborates in an informative
way with respect to the mental content being discussed. A focus on the causes and
effects of mental states is likely to be especially valuable.
Parents’ Beliefs
Each of the preceding sections prefigured the points to be discussed next. Parental
sensitivity is a positive aspect of parenting, but sensitivity can be achieved only
if the parent can accurately judge the child’s needs and interests. Parental talk
can help children learn about the mental world, but talk is most helpful when the
parent has accurately judged what the child understands and what the child still
needs to know. In short, knowledge of the child is an important component of
parenting and therefore an important contributor to theory of mind.
It is the work on mind-m indedness that provides the clearest evidence to date
for the importance of parents’ thinking about children. Relatively high mind-
mindedness—t hat is, a tendency to think about the child in mentalistic terms—is
266 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Indirect Contributors
Not all parental contributors involve the direct effects of parenting practices on
the development of theory of mind. Parents can also affect theory of mind by the
contribution they make to other aspects of their children’s development, aspects
that in turn feed into either the development or the expression of theory-of-m ind
abilities.
The most obvious example is language. The emphasis in both Chapter 7 and in
this chapter’s section on Talk has been on mental state terms. Mental state terms,
however, are by no means the only aspect of language that is relevant to theory of
mind. Individual differences in a variety of aspects of language relate to individual
differences in theory of mind. Recall that the Milligan et al. meta-analysis (2007)
discussed in Chapter 2 found that all five aspects of language that they examined
were significant predictors of theory of mind. Parents, of course, are not the only
contributors to such differences in language ability. They typically are major con-
tributors, however, and hence one way in which parents affect theory of mind is
through their effects on the child’s language.
Conclusions 267
Implications for Theories
To the extent that choice among theories of theory of mind proves to be empiri-
cally resolvable, it seems doubtful that research on parenting will play a deciding
role. Every theoretical position allows a role for social experience, and every posi-
tion is general enough to accommodate findings about the importance of experi-
ence, including the findings from studies of parenting. Once this point is made,
my own evaluation is that two positions fit most comfortably with the evidence
reviewed throughout this book. Indeed, with a handful of exceptions, only two
theoretical positions even receive mention in the parenting literature.
One, certainly, is the sociocultural approach. The central tenet of this approach
is the inherent embedding of theory of mind within the social world; thus the
importance of social experience, including parenting, is a clear prediction of the
approach. Beyond this general expectation, many of the more specific conclu-
sions from parenting research are clearly compatible with at least some versions
of sociocultural theorizing—t he importance of close relationships, for example,
or the effectiveness of certain kinds of linguistic input, or the value of working
within the child’s zone of proximal development.
The other position that seems to me to fit most comfortably with existing evi-
dence is the theory theory. Although the specific findings from parenting research
are not (I would say) clearly predicted by the theory theory, most are certainly
compatible with the theory’s emphasis on disconfirming or incongruent evidence
268 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
Implications for Parenting
Despite its two-part title, this is a book more about theory of mind than about par-
enting. The emphasis throughout has been on what the studies of parenting tell us
about the nature and development of theory of mind. This, not coincidentally, is
also the emphasis in most of the research reviewed. And this research, again not
coincidentally, has been carried out mainly by researchers whose primary back-
ground and primary interests are in theory of mind rather than in parenting.
Still, the increments in existing knowledge have not all been in one direction.
How does research on parenting and theory of mind add to what we know about
parenting? The most obvious way is by the addition of an important cognitive
outcome to a literature that has always been heavily skewed to aspects of chil-
dren’s social development. The addition, moreover, is a substantial one, consisting
of several hundred studies directed to various aspects of parenting and various
aspects of theory of mind. Indeed, with the possible exception of IQ , theory of
mind may be by now the most thoroughly explored cognitive outcome in the
parenting literature. This work has made possible an examination of the extent
to which factors known to be important for children’s social development (e.g.,
styles of childrearing, the attachment relationship) also contribute to theory of
mind. It has revealed the importance of factors (in particular, various aspects of
parental talk) that had previously received limited attention in the general par-
enting literature. And it has provided some of the clearest evidence in the parent-
ing literature for relations between what parents believe and how their children
develop.
Despite their cognitive focus, the studies of parenting and theory of
mind also add to what we know about the traditional target for childrearing
research: namely, the contributions of parenting to children’s social devel-
opment. They do so because children’s theory-of-m ind skills are one deter-
minant of how they fare in their social endeavors. Recall the partial list of
such cognitive-social links provided by the Astington (2003) quotation in
Chapter 2: communicative abilities, imaginative abilities, ability to resolve
Conclusions 269
More About Fathers
The first suggestion is an obvious one. Conclusions about parenting will be lim-
ited as long as only one of the parents appears in the research literature.
The addition of fathers is a sensible suggestion for almost any sort of study
directed to parenting and theory of mind. Here I single out several ways in which
prior work suggests that the inclusion of fathers might be especially informative.
One concerns the consideration of mothers and fathers together. An emphasis
on the family as a system, and not simply each member in isolation, is, as we have
seen, a characteristic of modern parenting research. Such research has shown that
development generally proceeds best when the relationship between mother and
father is a positive one. It has also shown that development proceeds best when
the parents engage in cooperative coparenting, and thus have neither a hostile nor
an unbalanced division of labor. Both findings are expectable ones that presum-
ably extend to theory of mind; the relevant research, however, remains to be done.
We might also expect that development will proceed best when parents are
concordant in their approach to parenting. A prior question, of course, is how great
the spouse concordance is for various aspects of parenting. We saw that there is
evidence for moderate concordance with respect to both mind-m indedness and
general parenting style; for other aspects of parenting the situation is less clear.
The typical focus in research that includes both parents is on mean differences;
consistency between spouses is a less often reported statistic.
That spouse concordance is not necessarily always beneficial is shown by some
of the work on how parents’ response to children’s emotions relates to their chil-
dren’s emotion understanding. McElwain et al. (2007) reported that positive sup-
port by one parent was most beneficial when support from the other parent was
low. This finding was interpreted in terms of the divergence model: the idea that
exposure to different responses to emotion helps children to learn that a diversity
of perspectives exists. Whether the same point applies to other mental states is at
present unresolved, and thus an obvious possibility for future research.
270 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
More Longitudinal Study
The second suggestion is also an obvious one. More longitudinal research is a tra-
ditional (although often hard to implement) suggested future direction for almost
any topic in developmental psychology.
In offering the suggestion here, I should note that the literature on parenting
and theory of mind hardly lacks for longitudinal study—it is, in fact, a strength of
this literature that so many studies have traced parent–child relations over time.
Some across-time links of interest, however, have received limited attention in
research to date. I identify three here.
One was first noted in Chapter 5. Research on attachment and theory of mind
includes a high proportion of longitudinal studies, but to date all of this work has
been in one direction: studies of the relations between attachment in infancy and
theory of mind later in development. What the literature lacks is work directed
to possible transactional relations between the two developments as both change
across the toddler and preschool years. Identifying such relations will require
longitudinal study in which both attachment and theory of mind are assessed at
multiple time points. Such studies could add to what we know about exactly when
and how the attachment relationship contributes to the development of theory
of mind. They could also provide evidence with respect to an as yet unexplored
possibility: namely, that theory of mind is not only affected by but also affects the
development of attachment.
The second proposed form of longitudinal study seems likely to appear with
increasing frequency in the coming years. As of this writing, only one study
Conclusions 271
More Cross-Cultural Study
Both the parenting and the theory-of-m ind literatures began as the study of devel-
opment in Western cultures. Both have now expanded well beyond this starting
point, although the expansion has been greater for parenting than it has been for
theory of mind. The theory-of-m ind literature, to be sure, does now include con-
siderable work in both Asian and Spanish-speaking cultures. Most of the world’s
cultures, however, remain unexplored, especially traditional, nonindustrialized
cultures (for exceptions to this point, see Slaughter & Perez-Zapata, 2014). And
the scope is even more limited if our focus is on parenting and theory of mind.
Earlier chapters touched on several possibilities for cross-cultural study. One
concerns the work on sequences of development discussed in Chapter 2. As we
saw, this work has revealed an intriguing cultural difference in response to the
Wellman and Liu (2004) theory-of-m ind battery. Children from Western societies
succeed on the diverse-beliefs task before they succeed on knowledge/ignorance,
272 Pa r enting a n d th eory of m in d
whereas for children from China and Iran the sequence is the reverse. This differ-
ence has been hypothesized to result from differences in parenting between the
two cultural settings, differences that in turn are assumed to reflect differences
in general cultural orientation: an emphasis on autonomy and independence and
self in Western cultures, an emphasis on relations and interdependence and fam-
ily in Eastern cultures (Markus & Kitayama, 1991). To date, however, the hypoth-
esized links between parental practices and developmental sequences have yet to
be empirically verified. More generally, the interdependent–independent distinc-
tion suggests that there may be a number of on-t he-average differences in both
parenting practices and related child outcomes between Eastern and Western
societies. Some work directed to possible differences in theory of mind has begun
to appear—for example, the Vinden (2001) study of parenting styles discussed in
Chapter 4, or the studies of emotion talk reviewed in Chapter 7. Much, however,
remains to be done.
Another suggestion for cross-cultural study concerns the mind-m indedness
concept discussed in Chapter 8. As noted there, with two exceptions research on
mind-m indedness has been limited to families in Western cultures, and thus to
settings in which all parents can be assumed to possess at least some degree of
mind-m indedness. Whether this assumption holds for all the world’s cultures is
by no means clear (Lillard, 1998). At the least, sampling of a wider range of cul-
tures would almost certainly yield increased variation in the degree and perhaps
the nature of mind-m indedness, and thus an increased opportunity to determine
whatever effects mind-m indedness may have. Such an expansion in the range of
an independent variable has always been one of the primary rationales for cross-
cultural research. Note that the same point applies to a close correlate of mind-
mindedness: parental talk about mental states. Here, too, a wider sampling of
cultures would almost certainly result in greater variation in the parental practice
of interest.
One more point about such research is important to make. It is a point that fol-
lows from Bronfenbrenner’s ecological systems theory, a theoretical perspective
introduced in Chapter 3 (Bronfenbrenner, 1979). One possible outcome of the
kind of cultural comparison just sketched would be a main effect—for example,
more use of mental state talk in Culture A than in Culture B. A further possi-
ble outcome, however, would be an interaction—for example, a greater effect of
mental state talk in Culture A than in Culture B. In Bronfenbrenner’s terms, we
would have an interaction between the microsystem (a particular parental prac-
tice) and the macrosystem (the culture within which the practice is embedded).
Such an interaction would suggest that the effective aspects of parenting may take
somewhat different forms and development may take somewhat different routes
in some settings than in others. Mizokawa and Komiya (2014) provide a fuller
discussion of possible applications of the ecological systems approach to research
on theory of mind.
Conclusions 273
measures of theory of mind that are discussed in Chapter 8. Again, I will use the
Children’s Social Understanding Scale (Tahiroglu et al., 2014) as an example, for
it provides an exceptionally broad sampling of theory-of-m ind developments to
which parents can respond. At the least, research is needed to validate the scale for
its intended use: namely, as a parent-based rather than a child-based assessment
of theory of mind. The validation correlations reported in the original publication
were, at least in my opinion, only borderline adequate in this regard. But the scale
could also be used as an instrument to study not children but rather parents—
specifically, what parents believe about their children’s theory of mind. It could
be used, in fact, to address most of the questions of interest that were identified
in the Parents’ Beliefs chapter: how accurately can parents judge their children’s
development, where do individual differences among parents come from, how do
parents’ beliefs relate to their behavior, and how do parents’ beliefs relate to their
children’s development?
when the child was 4 years old and theory of mind when the child is 8 years old is
a true across-time relation or is carried by similar parenting practices at the older
age. Similarly, we need to know whether parent–child correlations at age 8 reflect
the importance of parenting at that age or are simply a carryover from what the
parent did when the child was 4.
In part, the study of older children would address the question of whether
parenting practices that have been shown to be important early in development
remain important later in development. But such research also has the potential
to reveal parent–child links not evident at younger ages. At the least, particular
practices almost certainly will take somewhat different forms as children grow
older, given the increase in complexity of both the child and the situations for
which theory of mind is required. A parent reasoning with her 12-year-old about
the child’s difficulties with a friend will face challenges—including use of her
own advanced theory-of-m ind skills—beyond those necessary to talk to a tod-
dler about the difference between “want” and “need.”
The extension of the parenting literature to older children also has the poten-
tial to add to what we know about the relative contributions of different social
agents to the development of theory of mind, including, of course, the relative
influence of parents. At present, most of the within-study examinations of the
different people in children’s lives have been confined to the first 3 or 4 years of
life—comparisons of different sources for social referencing or joint attention, for
example, or the studies by Dunn and associates of children’s interactions with
parents, siblings, and peers (e.g., Dunn, Brown, & Beardsall, 1991). Informative
though such research has been, it is limited to a period during which most chil-
dren’s social worlds are a good deal smaller than they will eventually be. Such
research does not tell us how the emergence of advanced theory-of-m ind abili-
ties is affected by parents, siblings, friends, teachers, coaches, pastors, or any of
the other figures in older children’s lives. Recall that a basic question in the older
literature on information seeking concerned the relative influence of different
informants. Studies of theory of mind would benefit from a similar commitment
to within-study examinations of different potential contributors.
with the infancy studies, research makes clear that parents are major contributors
to what children do.
The preceding are not the only possible examples of individual differences
in theory of mind other than differences in rate of development. In Chapter 2
I briefly sketched a few other (as yet mostly unexplored) possibilities, such as
differences in the certainty with which knowledge is held, or in the ease with
which it can be accessed, or in the breadth with which it can be applied. The
identification of such differences, of course, does not tell us where the differ-
ences come from, including whether parents play any role. But knowing what
needs to be explained is always the first step in coming up with explanations
for development. For present purposes, it is also a necessary step toward the
goal of obtaining a full picture of how parents contribute to their children’s
theory of mind.
R EFER ENCES
Abidin, R. R. (1995). Parenting Stress Index (3rd ed.). Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessments
Resources, Inc.
Adams, S., Kuebli, J., Boyle, P. A., & Fivush, R. (1995). Gender differences in parent-child
conversations about past emotions: A longitudinal investigation. Sex Roles, 33, 309–323.
doi: 10.1007/BF01954572
Adrian, J. E., Clemente, R. A., & Villanueva, L. (2007). Mothers’ use of cognitive state verbs in
picture-book reading and the development of children’s understanding of mind: A longi-
tudinal study. Child Development, 78, 1052–1067. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2007.01052.x
Adrian, J. E., Clemente, R. A., Villanueva, L., & Rieffe, C. (2005). Parent-child picture-book
reading, mothers’ mental state language and children’s theory of mind. Journal of Child
Language, 32, 673–686. doi: 10.1017/S0305000905006963
Ainsworth, M. D. S. (1992). A consideration of social referencing in the context of attachment
theory and research. In S. Feinman (Ed.), Social referencing and the social construction of reality
in infancy (pp. 349–367). New York, NY: Plenum Press.
Ainsworth, M. D. S., Blehar, M. C., Waters, E., & Wall, S. (1978). Patterns of attachment: A psycho-
logical study of the Strange Situation. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Aktar, E., Majdandzic, M., de Vente, W., & Bogels, S. M. (2014). Parental social anxiety disorder
prospectively predicts toddlers’ fear/avoidance in a social referencing paradigm. Journal of
Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 55, 77–87. doi: 10.1111/jcpp.12121
Allen, J. R., & Kinsey, K. (2013). Teaching theory of mind. Early Education and Development, 24,
865–876. doi: 10.1080/10409289.2013.745182
Amsterlaw, J., & Wellman, H. M. (2006). Theories of mind in transition: A microgenetic study
of the development of false belief understanding. Journal of Cognition and Development, 7,
139–172. doi: 10.1207/s15327647jcd0702_1
Apperly, I. A., & Butterfill, S. A. (2009). Do humans have two systems to track beliefs and belief-
like states? Psychological Review, 116, 953–9 70. doi: 10.1037/a0016923
Appleton, M., & Reddy, V. (1996). Teaching 3-year-olds to pass false-belief tests: A conversa-
tional approach. Social Development, 5, 275–291. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.1996.tb00086.x
Arnott, B., & Meins, E. (2007). Links among antenatal attachment representations, postnatal
mind-m indedness, and infant attachment security: A preliminary study of mothers and
fathers. Bulletin of the Menninger Clinic, 71, 132–149.
Arranz, E., Artamendi, J., Olabarrieta, F., & Martin, J. (2002). Family contact and theory of mind
development. Early Child Development and Care, 172, 9–22. doi: 10.1080/03004430210880
Aschersleben, G., Hofer, T., & Jovanovic, B. (2008). The link between infant attention to goal-
directed action and later theory of mind abilities. Developmental Science, 11, 862–868.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2008.00736.x
279
280 R eferences
Ashcroft, A., Jervis, N., & Roberts, C. (1999). A theory of mind (TOM) and people with learn-
ing disabilities: The effects of a training package. Journal of Applied Research in Intellectual
Disabilities, 12, 58–68. doi: 10.1111/j.1468-3148.1999.tb00050.x
Astington, J. W. (1999). What is theoretical about the child’s theory of mind? A Vygotskian
view of its development. In P. Lloyd & C. Fernyhough (Eds.), Lev Vygotsky: Critical assess-
ments: Future directions (pp. 401–418). Philadelphia, PA: Taylor & Francis.
Astington, J. W. (2003). Sometimes necessary, never sufficient: False belief-u nderstanding and
social competence. In B. Repacholi & V. Slaughter (Eds.), Individual differences in theory of
mind (pp. 13–38). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Astington, J. W., & Baird, J. (Eds.). (2005). Why language matters for theory of mind. New York,
NY: Oxford University Press.
Astington, J. W., & Pelletier, J. (2005). Theory of mind, language, and learning in the early
years: Developmental origins of school readiness. In B. D. Homer & C. S. Tamil-L emonda
(Eds.), The development of social cognition and communication (pp. 205–230). Mahwah,
NJ: Erlbaum.
Aznar, A., & Tenenbaum, H. R. (2013). Spanish parents’ emotion talk and their children’s under-
standing of emotion. Frontiers in Psychology, 4, article 670. doi: 10.3389/f psyg.2013.00670
Aznar, A., & Tenenbaum, H. R. (2015). Gender and age differences in parent-child emotion talk.
British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 33, 148–155. doi: 10.1111/bjdp.12069
Babu, N. (2009). Development of theory of mind and mental state language in children. New Delhi,
India: Concept Publishing Company.
Baillargeon, R. (2004). Infants’ reasoning about hidden objects: Evidence for event-general
and event- specific expectations. Developmental Science, 7, 391– 424. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2004.00357.x
Baillargeon, R., Scott, R. M., & He, Z. (2010). False-belief understanding in infants. Trends in
Cognitive Science, 14, 110–118. doi: 10.1016/j.tics.2009.12.006
Bakeman, R., & Adamson, L. (1984). Coordinating attention to people and objects in mother-
infant and peer-infant interaction. Child Development, 55, 1278–1289. doi: 10.2307/
1129997
Bakeman, R., & Adamson, L. (1986). Infants’ conventionalized acts: Gestures and words
with mothers and peers. Infant Behavior and Development, 9, 215–230. doi: 10.1016/
0163- 6383(86)90030-5
Bakermans-K ranenburg, M., van IJzendoorn, M., & Juffer, S. (2003). Less is more: Meta-
analyses of sensitivity and attachment interventions in early childhood. Psychological
Bulletin, 129, 195–215. doi: 10.1037/0 033-2909.129.2.195
Baldwin, A., Baldwin, C., & Cole, R. E. (1990). Stress-resistant families and stress-resistant chil-
dren. In J. E. Rolf, A. S. Masten, D. Cicchetti, K. N. Wechterlein, & S. Weintraub (Eds.),
Risk and protective factors in the development of psychopathology (pp. 257–2 80). New York,
NY: Cambridge University Press.
Baldwin, D. A., Baird, J. A., Saylor, M. M., & Clark, M. A. (2001). Infants parse dynamic action.
Child Development, 72, 708–717. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00310
Baldwin, D. A., & Moses, L. J. (1996). The ontogeny of social information gathering. Child
Development, 67, 1915–1939. doi: 10.2307/1131601
Ball, J., & Lewis, M. (2014). First Nation elders’ and parents’ views on supporting their chil-
dren’s language development. Canadian Journal of Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology,
38, 224–237.
Bandura, A. (1986). Social foundations of thought and action: A social cognitive theory. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Barnes, J. L., & Bloom, P. (2014). Children’s preference for social stories. Developmental
Psychology, 50, 498–503. doi: 10.1037/a0033613
Baron-Cohen, S. (1994). How to build a baby that can read minds: Cognitive mechanisms in
mindreading. Cahiers de Psychologie Cognitive/Current Psychology of Cognition, 13, 513–552.
R eferences 281
Beeghly, M., Bretherton, I., & Mervis, C. (1986). Mothers’ internal state language to tod-
dlers: The socialization of psychological understanding. British Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 4, 247–2 60. doi: 10.1111/j.2044-835X.1986.tb01016.x
Begeer, S., Gevers, C., Clifford, P., Vehhoeve, M., Kat, K., Hoddenbach, E., & Boer., F. (2011).
Theory of mind training in children with autism: A randomized control trial. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 41, 997–1006. doi: 10.1007/s10803-010-1121-9
Behne, T., Carpenter, M., Call, J., & Tomasello, M. (2005). Unwilling versus unable: Infants’
understanding of intentional action. Developmental Psychology, 41, 328–337. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.41.2.328
Belenky, M. F., Clinchy, B. M., Goldberger, N. R., & Tarule, J. M. (1986). Women’s ways of know-
ing: The development of self, voice and mind. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Bell, R. Q. (1968). A reinterpretation of the direction of effects in studies of socialization.
Psychological Review, 75, 81–95. doi: 10.1037/h0025583
Bellagamba, R., Camaioni, L., & Colonnesi, C. (2006). Change in children’s understand-
ing of others’ intentional actions. Developmental Science 9, 182– 188. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2006.00478.x
Belsky, J., & Barends, N. (2002). Personality and parenting. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of
parenting: Vol. 3. Being and becoming a parent (2nd ed., pp. 415–438). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Belsky, J., & Pasco Fearon, R. M. (2008). Precursors of attachment security. In J. Cassidy
& P. R. Shaver (Eds.), Handbook of attachment (2nd ed., pp. 295– 316). New York,
NY: Guilford Press.
Bennett, D. S., Bendersky, M., & Lewis, M. (2005). Antecedents of emotion knowl-
edge: Predictors of individual differences in young children. Cognition and Emotion, 19,
375–396. doi: 10.1080/02699930441000201
Bennett, M., & Hiscock, J. (1993). Children’s understanding of conflicting emotions: A training
study. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 154, 515–524. doi: 10.1080/0 0221325.1993.9914749
Benson, J. E., Sabbagh, M. A., Carlson, S. M., & Zelazo, P. D. (2013). Individual differences in
executive functioning predict preschoolers’ improvement from theory-of-m ind training.
Developmental Psychology, 49, 1615–1627. doi: 10.1037/a0031056
Berlin, L. J., Cassidy, J., & Appleyard, K. (2008). The influence of early attachment on other
relationships. In J. Cassidy & P. R. Shaver (Eds.), Handbook of attachment (2nd ed., pp. 333–
347). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Berndt, T. J., Miller, K. E., & Park, K. (1989). Adolescents’ perceptions of friends’ and parents’
influence on aspects of their school adjustment. Journal of Early Adolescence, 9, 419–435.
doi: 10.1177/0272431689094004
Bernier, A., Carlson, S. M., & Whipple, N. (2010). From external regulation to self-
regulation: Early parenting precursors of young children’s executive functioning. Child
Development, 81, 326–339. doi: 10.1080/02699930441000201
Berzenski, S. R., & Yates, T. M. (2013). Preschoolers’ emotion knowledge and the differential
effects of harsh parenting. Journal of Family Psychology, 27, 463–472. doi: 10.1037/a0032910
Bibok, M. B., Carpendale, J. I. M., & Muller, U. (2009). Parental scaffolding and the develop-
ment of executive function. New Directions for Child and Adolescent Development, 123, 17–3 4.
doi: 10.1002/cd.233
Bierman, K. L., Domitrovich, C. E., Nix, R. L., Gest, S. D., Welsh, J. A., Greenberg,
M. T., … Gill, S. (2008). Promoting academic and social-emotional school readi-
ness: The Head Start REDI Program. Child Development, 79, 1802–1817. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8 624.2008.01227.x
Bigelow, A. E., MacLean, K., & Proctor, J. (2004). The role of joint attention in the develop-
ment of infants’ play with objects. Developmental Science, 7, 518–526. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2004.00375.x
R eferences 283
Bigelow, A. E., Power, M., Pulmer, M., & Gerrior, K. (2015). The relation between mothers’
mirroring of infants’ behavior and maternal mind-m indedness. Infancy, 20, 263–2 82.
doi: 10.1111/i nfa.12079 10.1111/i nfa.12079
Birch, S. A. J., Akmal, N., & Frampton, K. L. (2010). Two-year-olds are vigilant of oth-
ers’ non-verbal cues to credibility. Developmental Science, 13, 363–369. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2009.00906.x
Birch, S. A. J., Vauthier, S. A., & Bloom, P. (2008). Three-and four-year-olds spontaneously use
others’ past performance to guide their learning. Cognition, 107, 1018–1034. doi: 10.1016/
j.cognition.2007.12.008
Bird, J. E., & Berman, L. S. (1985). Differing perceptions of mothers, fathers, and children con-
cerning children’s academic performance. Journal of Psychology, 119, 113–124.
Biringen, Z., Robinson, J. L., & Emde, R. N. (2000). Appendix B: The Emotional Availability
Scales (3rd.ed; an abridged Infancy/Early Childhood Version). Attachment and Human
Development, 2, 256–270.
Block, J. H. (1981). The Child-Rearing Practices Report (CRPR). A set of Q items for the description
of parent socialization, attitudes, and values. Unpublished manuscript. Institute of Human
Development, University of California, Berkeley.
Bogels, S. M., & Perotti, E. C. (2011). Does father know best? A formal model of the paternal
influence on childhood social anxiety. Journal of Child and Family Studies, 20, 171–181.
doi: 10.1007/s10826-010-9441-0
Bogels, S. M., Stevens, J., & Majdasdzic, M. (2011). Parenting and social anxiety: Fathers’ ver-
sus mothers’ influence on their children’s anxiety in ambiguous social situations. Journal of
Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 52, 599–6 06. doi: 10.1111/j.1469-7610.2010.02345.x
Boomstra, N., van Dijk, M., Jorna, R., & van Geert, P. (2013). Parent reading beliefs and par-
enting goals of Netherlands Antillean and Dutch mothers in the Netherlands. Early Child
Development and Care, 183, 1605–1624. doi: 10.1080/03004430.2012.744005
Booth-L aForce, C., & Kerns, K. A. (2009). Child-parent attachment relationships, peer rela-
tionships, and peer-g roup functioning. In K. H. Rubin, W. M. Bukowski, & B. Laursen
(Eds.), Handbook of peer interactions, relationships, and groups (pp. 490–507). New York,
NY: Guilford Press.
Bornstein, M. H. (2014). Human infancy . . . and the rest of the lifespan. Annual Review of
Psychology, 65, 121–158. doi: 10.1146/a nnurev-psych-120710-100359
Bornstein, M. H., Arterberry, M. E., Mash, C., & Manian, N. (2011). Discrimination of facial
expression by 5-month-old infants of nondepressed and clinically depressed mothers.
Infant Behavior and Development, 34, 100–106. doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2010.10.002
Bosacki, S. L., & Astington, J. W. (1999). Theory of mind in preadolescence: Relations between
social understanding and social competence. Social Development, 8, 237–255. doi: 10.1111/
1467-9507.00093
Boseovski, J. J. (2012). Trust in testimony about strangers: Young children prefer reliable
informants who make positive attributions. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 111,
543–551. doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2011.10.008
Boseovski, J. J., & Thurman, S. L. (2014). Evaluating and approaching a strange animal: Children’s
trust in informant testimony. Child Development, 85, 824–834. doi: 10.1111/cdev.12156
Bost, K. K., Shin, N., McBride, B. A., Brown, G. L., Vaughn, B. E., Coppola G., et al. (2006).
Maternal secure base scripts, children’s attachment security, and mother-child narrative
styles. Attachment and Human Development, 8, 241–2 60. doi: 10.1080/14616730600856131
Bowlby, J. (1969). Attachment and loss: Vol. 1. Attachment. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Bowlby, J. (1980). Attachment and loss: Vol. 3. Loss. New York, NY: Basic Books.
Bradley, R. H. (2010). The HOME environment. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of cultural
developmental science (pp. 505–530). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
284 R eferences
Bradmetz, J., & Schneider, R. (2004). The role of counterfactually satisfied desire in the lag
between false-belief and false-emotion attributions in children aged 4-7. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 22, 185–196. doi: 10.1348/026151004323044564
Bradshaw, D. L., Goldsmith, H. H., & Campos, J. J. (1987). Attachment, temperament, and
social referencing: Interrelationships among three domains of infant affective behavior.
Infant Behavior and Development, 10, 223–231. doi: 0.1016/0163-6383(87)90036-1
Braungart-R ieker, J.M., Zentall, S., Lickenbrock, D. M., Ekas, N. V., Oshio, T., & Planalp, E.
(2014). Attachment in the making: Mother and father sensitivity and infants’ responses
during the Still-Face Paradigm. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 125, 63–8 4.
doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2014.02.007
Bretherton, I. (1985). Attachment theory: Retrospect and prospect. Monographs of the Society for
Research in Child Development, 50(1/2 , Serial No. 209). 3–35. doi: 10.2307/3333824
Bretherton, I., Bates, E., Benigni, L., Camaioni, L., & Volterra, V. (1979). Relationships between
cognition, communication, and quality of attachment. In E. Bates (Ed.), The emergence of
symbols (pp. 223–2 69). New York, NY: Academic Press.
Bretherton, I., & Beeghly, M. (1982). Talking about internal states: The acquisition of an explicit
theory of mind. Developmental Psychology, 18, 906-921. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.18.6.906
Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The ecology of human development. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press.
Brooks, R., & Meltzoff, A. N. (2005). The development of gaze following and its relation to lan-
guage. Developmental Science, 8, 535–5 43. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2005.00445.x
Brooks, R., & Meltzoff, A. N. (2015). Connecting the dots from infancy to childhood: A longi-
tudinal study connecting gaze following, language, and explicit theory of mind. Journal of
Experimental Child Psychology, 130, 67–78. doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2014.09.010
Brosseau-Liard, P. E., & Birch, S. A. J. (2011). Epistemic states and traits: Preschoolers appreci-
ate the differential informativeness of situation-specific and person-specific cues to knowl-
edge. Child Development, 82, 1788–1796. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2011.01662.x
Brosseau-Liard, P. E., Penney, D., & Poulin-Dubois, D. (2015). Theory of mind selectively pre-
dicts preschoolers’ knowledge-based selective word learning. British Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 33, 464-475. doi: 10.1111/bjdp.12107
Brown, J. R., Donelan-McCall, N., & Dunn, J. (1996). Why talk about mental states? The signifi-
cance of children’s conversations with friends, siblings, and mothers. Child Development, 67,
836–8 49. doi: 10.2307/1131864
Brown, J. R., & Dunn, J. (1992). Talk with your mother or your sibling? Developmental changes
in early family conversations about feelings. Child Development, 63, 336–3 49. doi: 10.2307/
1131483
Bruner, J. S. (1990). Acts of meaning. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Bugental, D. B. (2000). Acquisition of the algorithms of social life: A domain-based approach.
Psychological Bulletin, 126, 187–2 09. doi: 10.1037/0 033-2909.126.2.187
Bugental, D. B., & Goodnow, J. G. (1998). Socialization processes. In W. Damon (Series Ed.) &
N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and personality
development (5th ed., pp. 389–4 62). New York, NY: Wiley.
Bugental, D. B., & Grusec, J. E. (2006). Socialization processes. In W. Damon & R. M. Lerner
(Series Eds.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional,
and personality development (6th ed., pp. 366–428). New York, NY: Wiley.
Butler, S. C., Caron, A. J., & Brooks, R. (2000). Infant understanding of the referential
nature of looking. Journal of Cognition and Development, 1, 359– 377. doi: 10.1207/
S15327647JCD0104_01
Buttelmann, D., Carpenter, M., & Tomasello, M. (2009). Eighteen-month-old infants show false
belief understanding in an active helping paradigm. Cognition, 112, 337–3 42. doi: 10.1016/
j.cognition.2009.05.006
R eferences 285
Butterworth, G. E. (1995). Origins of mind in perception and action. In C. Moore & P. Dunham
(Eds.), Joint attention: Its origins and role in development (pp. 29–4 0). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Cahill, K. R., Deater-Deckard, K., Pike, A., & Hughes, C. (2007). Theory of mind, self-
worth, and the mother- child relationship. Social Development, 16, 45– 56. 10.1111/
j.1467-9507.2007.00371.x
Caldwell, B. M., & Bradley, R. H. (1984). Manual for the Home Observation for Measurement of the
Environment. Little Rock, AR: University of Arkansas Press.
Camras, L. A., & Sachs, V. B. (1991). Social referencing and caretaker expressive behav-
ior in a day care setting. Infant Behavior and Development, 14, 27–36. doi: 10.1016/
0163- 6383(91)90052-T
Cannon, E. N., & Woodward, A. L. (2012). Infants generate goal-based action predictions.
Developmental Science, 15, 292–298. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2011.01127.x
Carmiol, A. M., & Vinden, P. G. (2013). Enhancing preschoolers’ understanding of ambiguity in
communication: A training study on misunderstandings. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 59, 79–105.
Caron, A. J. (2009). Comprehension of the representational mind in infancy. Developmental
Review, 29, 69–95. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2009.04.002
Carpendale, J., & Chandler, M. J. (1996). On the distinction between false belief understand-
ing and subscribing to an interpretive theory of mind. Child Development, 67, 1686–1706.
doi: 10.2307/1131725
Carpendale, J., & Lewis, C. (2004). Constructing and understanding of mind: The development
of children’s social understanding within social interaction. Behavioral and Brain Sciences,
27, 79–151. doi: 10.1017/S0140525X04000032
Carpendale, J., & Lewis, C. (2010). The development of social understanding: A relational per-
spective. In W. F. Overton (Ed.), The handbook of life-span development: Vol. 1. Cognition, biol-
ogy, and methods (pp. 584–627). New York: Wiley.
Carpenter, M., Akhtar, N., & Tomasello, M. (1998). Fourteen-through 18-month-old infants
differentially imitate intentional and accidental actions. Infant Behavior and Development,
21, 315–330. doi: 10.1016/S0163-6383(98)90009-1
Carpenter, M., Nagell, K., & Tomasello, M. (1998). Social cognition, joint attention and com-
municative competence from 9 to 15 months of age. Monographs of the Society for Research in
Child Development, 63 (4, Serial No. 255). doi: 10.2307/1166214
Carruthers, P. (2013). Mindreading in infancy. Mind and Language, 28, 141–172. doi: 10.1111/
mila.12014
Cassidy, J., Parke, R. D., Butkovsky, L., & Braungart, J. M. (1992). Family-peer connections: The
roles of emotional expressiveness within the family and children’s understanding of emo-
tions. Child Development, 63, 603–618. doi: 10.2307/1131349
Castro, V. L., Halberstadt, A. G., Lozada, F. T., & Craig, A. B. (2015). Parents’ emotion-related
beliefs, behaviours, and skills predict children’s recognition of emotion. Infant and Child
Development, 24, 1–22. doi: 10.1002/icd.1868
Cervantes, C. A., & Callanan, M. A. (1998). Labels and explanations in mother-child emotion
talk: Age and gender differentiation. Developmental Psychology, 34, 88–98. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.34.1.88
Chandler, M. J., & Sokol, B. W. (1999). Representation once removed: Children’s developing
conceptions of representational life. In I. E. Sigel (Ed.), Development of mental representation
(pp. 201–230). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Chao, R. K., & Tseng, V. (2002). Asian-A merican parents. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook
of parenting: Vol. 4. Social conditions and applied parenting (2nd ed., pp. 59–93). Mahwah,
NJ: Erlbaum.
Charman, T., Baron-Cohen, S., Swettenham, J., Baird, G., Cox, A., & Drew, A. (2000). Testing
joint attention, imitation, and play as infancy precursors to language and theory of mind.
Cognitive Development, 15, 481–498. doi: 10.1016/S0885-2 014(01)00037-5
286 R eferences
Charman, T., & Shmueli-Goetz, &. (1998). The relationship between theory of mind, language
and narrative discourse: An experimental study. Cahiers de Psychologie, 17, 245–271.
Chen, E. E., Corriveau, K., & Harris, P. L. (2013). Children trust a consensus composed of out-
group members—but do not retain that trust. Child Development, 84, 269–2 82. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2012.01850.x
Chouinard, M. M. (2007). Children’s questions: A mechanism for cognitive development.
Monographs of the Society for Child Development, 72(1). doi: 10.1111/j.1540-5834.2007.00412.x
Cicchetti, D., Rogosch, F. A., Maughan, A., Toth, S. L., & Bruce, J. (2003). False belief under-
standing in maltreated children. Development and Psychopathology, 15, 1067–1091.
doi: 10.1017/S0954579403000440
Clark, S. E., & Symons, D. K. (2009). Representations of attachment relationships, the self,
and significant others in middle childhood. Journal of the Canadian Academy of Child and
Adolescent Psychiatry, 18, 318–321.
Claussen, A. H., Mundy, P. C., Mallik, S. A., & Willoughby, J. C. (2002). Joint attention and
disorganized attachment in infants at risk. Development and Psychopathology, 14, 279–291.
doi: 10.1017/S0954579402002055
Clements, W. A., & Perner, J. (1994). Implicit understanding of belief. Cognitive Development, 9,
377–395. doi: 10.1016/0885-2 014(94)90012-4
Clements, W. A., Rustin, C. L., & McCallum, S. (2000). Promoting the transition from implicit
to explicit understanding: A training study of false belief. Developmental Science, 3, 81–92.
doi: 10.1111/1467-7687.0010
Cluver, A., Heyman, G., & Carver, L. J. (2013). Young children selectively seek help when
solving problems. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 115, 570–578. doi: 10.1016/
j.jecp.2012.12.011
Cole, K., & Mitchell, P. (1998). Family background in relation to deceptive ability and under-
standing of the mind. Social Development, 7, 181–197. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00061
Cole, K., & Mitchell, P. (2000). Siblings in the development of executive control and a the-
ory of mind. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 18, 279–295. doi: 10.1348/
026151000165698
Collins, W. A., Maccoby, E. E., Steinberg, L., Hetherington, E. M., & Bornstein, M. H. (2000).
Contemporary research on parenting: The case for nature and nurture. American Psychologist,
55, 218–232. doi: 10.1037/0 003-0 66X.55.2.218
Colonnesi, C., Rieff, C., Koops, W., & Perucchini, P. (2008). Precursors of a theory of
mind: A longitudinal study. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 26, 561–577.
doi: 10.1348/026151008X285660
Colonnesi, C., Wissink, I. B., Noom, M. J., Asscher, J. J., Hoeve, M. Stams, G. J. J. M. . . . Kellaert-
Knol, M. G. (2013). Basic trust: An attachment-oriented intervention based on mind-
mindedness in adoptive families. Research on Social Work Practice, 23, 179–188. doi: 10.1177/
1049731512469301
Colvert, E., Rutter, M., Kreppner, J., Beckett, C., Castle, J., Groothues, C., . . . Sonuga-Barke, E.
(2008). Do theory of mind and executive function deficits underlie the adverse outcomes
associated with profound early deprivation? Findings from the English and Romanian
adoptees study. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 36, 1057– 1068. doi: 10.1007/
s10802-0 08-9232-x
Cooper, H., Lindsay, J. J., Nye, B., & Greathouse, S. (1998). Relationships among attitudes about
homework, amount of homework assigned and completed, and student achievement.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 90, 70–83. doi: 10.1037/0 022-0 663.90.1.70
Corriveau, K., & Harris, P. L. (2009). Choosing your informant: Weighing familiarity and recent
accuracy. Developmental Science, 12, 426–437. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2008.00792.x
Corriveau, K., & Harris, P. L. (2010). Preschoolers (sometimes) defer to the majority in making
simple perceptual judgments. Developmental Psychology, 46, 437–4 45. doi: 10.1037/a0017553
R eferences 287
Corriveau, K., Harris, P. L., Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Arnott, B., Elliott, L., . . . de Rosnay, M.
(2009). Young children’s trust in their mothers’ claims: Longitudinal links with attachment
security in infancy. Child Development, 80, 750–761. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2009.01295.x
Crittenden, P. M. (1988). Relationships at risk. In J. Belsky & T. Nezworski (Eds.), Clinical impli-
cations of attachment (pp. 136–174). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Crittenden, P. M. (2004). CARE-Index: From birth to 15 months. Coding manual. Unpublished
manuscript.
Crouter, A. C., & Head, M. R. (2002). Parental knowledge and monitoring of children. In M.
H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting: Vol. 3. Being and becoming a parent (2nd ed., pp.
461–4 83). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Csibra, G. (2006). Blind infants in random environments: Further predictions. Developmental
Science, 9, 148–149. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2006.00471.x
Cummings, E. M., & Merrilees, C. E. (2010). Identifying the dynamic process underlying links
between marital conflict and child adjustment. In M. Schultz, M. K. Pruett, P. Kerig, & R.
D. Parke (Eds.), Strengthening couple relationships for optimal child development (pp. 27–4 0).
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Curenton, S. M. (2003). Low-income preschoolers’ false-belief performance. Journal of Genetic
Psychology, 164, 411–424. doi: 10.1080/0 0221320309597887
Cutting, A. L., & Dunn, J. (1999). Theory of mind, emotion understanding, language, and fam-
ily background: Individual differences and interrelations. Child Development, 70, 853–865.
doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.0006
Darling, N., & Steinberg, L. (1993). Parenting style as context: An integrative model. Psychological
Bulletin, 113, 487–496. doi: 10.1037/0 033-2909.113.3.487
Deak, G. O., Krasno, A. M., Triesch, J., Lewis, J., & Sepeta, L. (2014). Watch the hands: Infants
can learn to follow gaze by seeing adults manipulate objects. Developmental Science, 17, 270–
281. doi: 10.1111/desc.12122
de Barbaro, K., Johnson, C. M., & Deak, G. O. (2013). Twelve-month “social revolution” emerges
from mother-infant sensorimotor coordination: A longitudinal investigation. Human
Development, 56, 223–2 48. doi: 10.1159/0 00351313
Degotardi, S., & Torr, J. (2007). A longitudinal investigation of mothers’ mind-related talk
to their 12-to 24-month-old infants. Early Child Development and Care, 177, 767–780.
doi: 10.1080/03004430701379280
Degotardi, S., Torr, J., & Cross, T. (2008). “He’s got a mind of his own”: The development of
a framework for determining mothers’ beliefs about their infants’ minds. Early Childhood
Research Quarterly, 23, 259–271. doi: 10.1016/j.ecresq.2007.05.003
Demers, I., Bernier, A., Tarabulsy, G. M., & Provost, M. A. (2010a). Maternal and child char-
acteristics as antecedents of maternal mind-m indedness. Infant Mental Health Journal, 31,
94–112. doi: 10.1002/i mhj.20244
Demers, I., Bernier, A., Tarabulsy, G. M., & Provost, M. A. (2010b). Mind-m indedness in adult and
adolescent mothers: Relations to maternal sensitivity and infant attachment. International
Journal of Behavioral Development, 34, 529–537. doi: 10.1177/0165025410365802
Denham, S. A. (1986). Social cognition, prosocial behavior, and emotion in preschool-
ers: Contextual validation. Child Development, 57, 194–2 01. doi: 10.2307/1130651
Denham, S. A. (1998). Emotional development in young children. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Denham, S. A., & Auerbach, S. (1995). Mother-child dialogue about emotions and preschoolers’
emotional competence. Genetic, Social and Psychology Monographs, 121, 313–337.
Denham, S. A., Bassett, H. H., & Wyatt, T. M. (2015). The socialization of emotional compe-
tence. In J. E. Grusec & P. D. Hastings (Eds.), Handbook of socialization (2nd ed., pp. 590–
613). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Denham, S. A., Bassett, H. H., & Wyatt, T. M. (2010). Gender differences in the socialization of
preschoolers’ emotional competence. In A. Kennedy Root & S. Denham (Eds.), The role of
288 R eferences
gender in the socialization of emotion: Key concepts and critical issues. New Directions for
Child and Adolescent Development, 128, 29–49. doi: 10.1002/cd.267
Denham, S. A., & Kochanoff, A. (2002). Parents’ contribution to preschoolers’ understanding of
emotion. Marriage and Family Review, 34, 311–3 43. doi: 10.1300/J002v34n03_0 6
Denham, S. A., Mitchell-Copeland, J., Strandberg, K., Auerbach, S., & Blair, K. (1997). Parental
contributions to preschoolers’ emotional competence: Direct and indirect effects.
Motivation and Emotion, 21, 65–86. doi: 10.1023/A :1024426431247
Denham, S. A., Zoller, D., & Couchoud, E. A. (1994). Socialization of preschoolers’ emotion
understanding. Developmental Psychology, 30, 928–936. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.30.6.928
de Rosnay, M., & Harris, P. L. (2002). Individual differences in children’s understanding of emo-
tion: The roles of attachment and language. Attachment and Human Development, 4, 39–5 4.
doi: 10.1080/14616730210123139
de Rosnay, M., & Hughes, C. (2006). Conversation and theory of mind: Do children talk their
way to socio-cognitive understanding? British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 24, 7–37.
doi: 10.1348/026151005X82901
de Rosnay, M., Pons, F., Harris, P. L., & Morrell, J. M. B. (2004). A lag between understanding
false belief and emotion attribution in young children: Relationships with linguistic ability
and mothers’ mental-state language. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 22, 197–218.
doi: 10.1348/026151004323044573
de Villiers, J., & de Villiers, P. (2000). Linguistic determination and the understanding of false
beliefs. In P. Mitchell & K. Riggs (Eds.), Children’s reasoning and the mind (pp. 191–228).
Hove, UK: Psychology Press.
Devine, R. T., & Hughes, C. (2013). Silent Films and Strange Stories: Theory of mind, gender,
and social experiences in middle childhood. Child Development, 84, 989–1003. doi: 10.1111/
cdev.12017
Devine, R. T., & Hughes, C. (2014). Relations between false belief understanding and execu-
tive function in early childhood: A meta-analysis. Child Development, 85, 1777–1794.
doi: 10.1111/cdev.12237
De Wolff, M., & van IJzendoorn, M. H. (1997). Sensitivity and attachment: A meta-a nalysis on
parental antecedents of infant attachment. Child Development, 68, 571–591. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.1997.tb04218.x
Diamond, A. (2012). Activities and programs that improve children’s executive functions.
Current Directions in Psychological Science, 21, 335–3 41. doi: 10.1177/0 963721412453722
Dickstein, S., & Parke, R. D. (1988). Social referencing in infancy: A glance at fathers and mar-
riage. Child Development, 59, 506–511. doi: 10.2307/1130328
Dickstein, S., Thompson, R. A., Estes, D., Malkin, C., & Lamb, M. E. (1984). Social referencing
and the security of attachment. Infant Behavior and Development, 7, 507–516. doi: 10.1016/
S0163- 6383(84)80009- 0
Dishion, T. J., & McMahon, R. J. (1998). Parental monitoring and the prevention of child and
adolescent problem behavior: A conceptual and empirical formulation. Clinical Child and
Family Psychology Review, 1, 61–75. doi: 10.1023/A :1021800432380
Dishion, T. J., & Tipsord, J. M. (2011). Peer contagion in child and adolescent social and emo-
tional development. Annual Review of Psychology, 62, 189–214. doi: 10.1146/a nnurev.
psych.093008.100412
Dix, T., & Meunier, L. (2009). Depressive symptoms and parenting competence: An analysis of
13 regulatory processes. Developmental Review, 29, 45–68. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2008.11.002
DiYanni, C., Nini, D., Rheel, W., & Livelli, A. (2012). ‘I won’t trust you if I think you’re try-
ing to deceive me’: Relations between selective trust, theory of mind, and imitation
in early childhood. Journal of Cognition and Development, 13, 354–371. doi: 10.1080/
15248372.2011.590462
R eferences 289
Doan, S. N., & Wang, Q. (2010). Maternal discussions of mental states and behaviors: Relations
to emotion situation knowledge in European American and immigrant Chinese children.
Child Development, 81, 1490–1503. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2010.01487.
Dobrova-K rol, N. A., van IJzendoorn, M. H., Bakersman-K ranenburg, M. J., & Juffer, F. (2010).
Effects of perinatal HIV infection and early institutional rearing on physical and cogni-
tive development of children in Ukraine. Child Development, 81, 237–251. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2009.01392.x
Dockett, S. (1998). Constructing understandings through play in the early years. International
Journal of Early Years Education, 6, 105–116.
Domitrovich, C. E., Cortes, R. C., & Greenberg, M. T. (2007). Improving young children’s
social and emotional competence: A randomized trial of the preschool “PATHS” curricu-
lum. Journal of Primary Prevention, 28, 67–91. doi: 10.1007/s10935-0 07-0 081-0
Dore, R. A., Lillard, A. S., & Jaswal, V. K. (2014). Anthropologist in the crib? A review of
Trusting What You’re Told. Journal of Cognition and Development, 15, 520–523. doi: 10.1080/
15248372.2014.936789
Downey, G., & Coyne, J. C. (1990). Children of depressed parents: An integrative review.
Psychological Bulletin, 108, 50–76. doi: 10.1037/0 033-2909.108.1.50
Dunn, J. (1999). Mindreading and social relationships. In M. Bennett (Ed.), Developmental psy-
chology: Achievements and prospects (pp. 55–71). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Dunn, J., Bretheron, I., & Munn, P. (1987). Conversations about feeling states between
mothers and their young children. Developmental Psychology, 23, 132-139. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.23.1.132
Dunn, J., Brown, J., & Beardsall, L. (1991). Family talk about feeling states and children’s later
understanding of others’ emotions. Developmental Psychology, 27, 448–455. doi: 10.2307/
1130811
Dunn, J., Brown, J., Slomkowski, C., Tesla, C. & Youngblade, L. (1991). Young children’s under-
standing of other people’s feelings and beliefs: Individual differences and their anteced-
ents. Child Development, 62, 1352–1366. doi: 10.2307/1130811
Dunn, J. & Hughes, C. (1998). Young children’s understanding of emotions within close rela-
tionships. Cognition and Emotion, 12, 171–190. doi: 10.1080/026999398379709
Dunphy-L elii, S., LaBounty, J., Lane, J. D., & Wellman, H. M. (2014). The social context of infant
intention understanding. Journal of Cognition and Development, 15, 60–77. doi: 10.1080/
15248372.2012.710863
Dunsmore, J. C., Her, P., Halberstadt, A. G., & Perez-R ivera, M. B. (2009). Parents’ beliefs about
emotions and children’s recognition of parents’ emotions. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior, 33,
121–140. doi: 10.1007/s10919-0 08-0 066-6
Dunsmore, J. C., & Karn, M. A. (2001). Mothers’ beliefs about feelings and children’s emo-
tional understanding. Early Education and Development, 12, 117– 138. doi: 10.1207/
s15566935eed1201_7
Dunsmore, J. C., & Karn, M. A. (2004). The influence of peer relationships and maternal social-
ization on kindergartners’ developing emotion knowledge. Early Education and Development,
15, 39–56. doi: 10.1207/s15566935eed1501_3
Dunsmore, J. C., & Smallen, L. S. (2001). Parents’ expressiveness and young children’s emotion
encoding with parents and unknown adults. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 162, 478–494.
doi: 10.1080/0 0221320109597497
Durrant, J. E., Broberg, A. G., & Rose-K rasnor, L. (1999). Predicting mother’s use of physical
punishment during mother-child conflicts in Sweden and Canada. New Directions for Child
and Adolescent Development, 86, 25–41. doi: 10.1002/cd.23219998604
Dyer, J. R., Shatz, M., & Wellman, H. M. (2000). Young children’s storybooks as a source of mental
state information. Cognitive Development, 15, 17–37. doi: 10.1016/S0885-2 014(00)00017-4
290 R eferences
Dyer-Seymour, J. R., Shatz, M., Wellman, H. M., & Saito, M. (2004). Mental state expressions
in U.S. and Japanese children’s books. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 28,
546–552. doi: 10.1080/01650250444000261
Eagly, A. H., & Wood, W. (2013). The nature-nurture debates: 25 years of challenges in
understanding the psychology of gender. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 8, 340–357.
doi: 10.1177/1745691613484767
Eccles, J., Freedman-Doan, C., Frome, P., Jacobs, J., & Yoon, K. S. (2000). Gender socialization
in the family: A longitudinal approach. In T. Ecker & H. Trautner (Eds.), The developmental
social psychology of gender (pp. 333–365). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Eder, R. A. (1990). Uncovering young children’s psychological selves: Individual and develop-
mental differences. Child Development, 61, 849–863. doi: 10.2307/1130969
Egliston, K., & Rapee, R. M. (2007). Inhibition of fear acquisition in toddlers following positive
modelling by their mothers. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 45, 1871–1882. doi: 10.1016/
j.brat.2007.02.007
Eisenberg, N., Cumberland, A, & Spinrad, T. L. (1998). Parental socialization of emotion.
Psychological Inquiry, 9, 241–273. doi: 10.1207/s15327965pli0904_1
Eisenberg, N., Fabes, R. A., & Spinrad, T. L. (2006). Prosocial development. In W. Damon &
R. M. Lerner (Series Eds.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3.
Social, emotional, and personality development (6th ed., pp. 646–718). New York, NY: Wiley.
Ensor, R., Devine, R. T., Marks, A., & Hughes, C. (2014). Mothers’ cognitive references to 2-
year-olds predict theory of mind at ages 6 and 10. Child Development, 85, 1222–1235.
doi: 10.1111/cdev.12186
Ensor, R., & Hughes, C. (2008). Content or connectedness? Mother-child talk and early social
understanding. Child Development, 79, 201–216. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2007.01120.x
Ereky-Stevens, K. (2008). Associations between mothers’ sensitivity to infants’ internal states
and children’s later understanding of mind and emotion. Infant and Child Development, 17,
527–5 43. doi: 10.1002/icd.572
Fabes, R. A., Poulin, R. E., Eisenberg, N., & Madden-Derdich, D. A. (2002). The Coping with
Children’s Negative Emotions Scale (CCNES): Psychometric properties and relations with
children’s emotional competence. Marriage & Family Review, 34, 285–310. doi: 10.1300/
J002v34n03_05
Farrant, B. M., Devine, T. A., Maybery, M. T., & Fletcher, J. (2012). Empathy, perspective
taking and prosocial behaviour: The importance of parenting practices. Infant and Child
Development, 21, 175–188. doi: 10.1002/icd.740
Farrow, C., & Blissett, J. (2014). Maternal mind-m indedness during infancy, general parent-
ing sensitivity and observed child feeding behavior: A longitudinal study. Attachment and
Human Development, 16, 230–2 41. doi: 10.1080/14616734.2014.898158
Fay-Stammbach, T., Hawes, D. J., & Meredith, P. (2014). Parenting influences on executive func-
tion in early childhood: A review. Child Development Perspectives, 8, 258–2 64. doi: 10.1111/
cdep.12095
Feinman, S., Roberts, D., & Hsieh, K. (1988, April). Social referencing within the context of the
infant-sibling-mother triad. Paper presented at the Sixth International Conference on Infant
Studies, Washington, DC.
Feinman, S., Roberts, D., Hsieh, K., Sawyer, D., & Swanson, D. (1992). A critical review of social
referencing in infancy. In S. Feinman (Ed.), Social referencing and the social construction of real-
ity in infancy (pp. 15–5 4). New York, NY: Plenum Press.
Feiring, C., Lewis, M., & Starr, M. D. (1984). Indirect effects and infants’ reactions to strangers.
Developmental Psychology, 20, 485–491. doi 0.1037/0 012-1649.20.3.485
Fernyhough, C. (2008). Getting Vygotskian about theory of mind: Mediation, dialogue, and
the development of social understanding. Developmental Review, 28, 225–2 62. doi: 10.1016/
j.dr.2007.03.001
R eferences 291
Fernyhough, C., & Meins, E. (2009). Private speech and theory of mind: Evidence for develop-
ing interfunctional relations. In A. Winsler, C. Fernyhough, & I. Montero (Eds.), Private
speech, executive function, and the development of verbal self-regulation (pp. 95-104). New York,
NY: Cambridge University Press.
Field, D. (1987). A review of preschool conservation training: An analysis of analyses.
Developmental Review, 7, 210–251.doi: 10.1016/0273-2297(87)90013-X
Field, T. (2010). Postpartum depression effects on early interactions, parenting, and safety prac-
tices: A review. Infant Behavior and Development, 33, 1–6 . doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2009.10.005
Field, T., Diego, M., & Hernandez-R eif, M. (2009). Depressed mothers’ infants are less respon-
sive to faces and voices. Infant Behavior and Development, 32, 239–2 44. doi: 10.1016/
j.infbeh.2009.03.005
Field, T., Hernandez-R eif, M., & Diego, M. (2011). Depressed mothers’ newborns are less
responsive to animate and inanimate stimuli. Infant and Child Development, 20, 94–105.
doi: 10.1002/icd.687
Field, T., Hernandez-R eif, M., Diego, M., Feijo, L. Vera, Y., Gil, K., & Sanders, C. (2007).
Responses to animate and inanimate faces by infants of depressed mothers. Early Child
Development and Care, 177, 533–539. doi: 10.1080/03004430600577950
Fivush, R. (2011). The development of autobiographical memory. Annual Review of Psychology,
62, 559–582. doi: 10.1146/a nnurev.psych.121208.131702
Fivush, R., Brotman, M. A., Buckner, J. P., & Goodman, S. H. (2000). Gender differences in
parent-child emotion narratives. Sex Roles, 42, 233–254. doi: 10.1023/A :1007091207068
Fivush, R., & Buckner, J. P. (2000). Gender, sadness, and depression: The development of emo-
tional focus through gendered discourse. In A. H. Fischer (Ed.), Gender and emotion: Social
psychological perspectives (pp. 232–253). New York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
doi: 10.1017/CBO9780511628191.012
Fivush, R., Sales, J. M., & Bohanek, J. G. (2008). Meaning making in mothers’ and children’s
narratives of emotional events. Memory, 16, 579–594. doi: 0.1080/0 9658210802150681
Fivush, R., & Wang, Q. (2005). Emotion talk in mother-child conversations of the shared
past: The effects of culture, gender, and event valence. Journal of Cognition and Development,
6, 489–506. doi: 10.1207/s15327647jcd0604_3
Flanagan, P. J., Coppa, D. F., Riggs, S. G., & Alario, A. J. (1994). Communication behaviors of
infants of teen mothers: An exploratory study. Journal of Adolescent Health, 15, 169–175.
doi: 10.1016/1054-139X(94)90545-2
Flavell, J. H. (2000). Development of children’s knowledge about the mental world. International
Journal of Behavioral Development, 24, 15–23. doi: 10.1080/016502500383421
Flavell, J. H., Everett, B. A., Croft, K., & Flavell, E. R. (1981). Young children’s knowledge about
visual perception: Further evidence for the Level 1-L evel 2 distinction. Developmental
Psychology, 17, 99–103. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.17.1.99
Flavell, J. H., Flavell, E. R., & Green, F. L. (1983). Development of the appearance-reality dis-
tinction. Cognitive Psychology, 15, 95–120. doi: 10.1016/0 010-0285(83)90005-1
Flavell, J. H., Green, F. L., & Flavell, E. R. (1986). Development of knowledge about the
appearance-reality distinction. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development,
51(1, Serial No. 212). doi: 10.2307/1165866
Flavell, J. H., Miller, P. H., & Miller, S. A. (2002). Cognitive development (4th ed.). Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Flom, R., & Johnson, S. (2011). The effects of adults’ affective expression and direction of
visual gaze on 12-month-olds’ visual preferences for an object following a 5-m inute, 1-
day, or 1-month-delay. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 29, 64–85. doi: 10.1348/
026151010X512088
Flom, R., & Pick, A. D. (2005). Experimenter affective expression and gaze following in 7-
month-olds. Infancy, 7, 207–218. doi: 10.1207/s15327078in702 5
292 R eferences
ToM capacity in five-year-old children. Social Development, 20, 845–861. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-9507.2011.00625.x
Galende, N., de Miguel, M. S., & Arranz, E. (2012). The role of parents’ distancing strategies in
the development of 5-year-old children’s theory of mind. Early Child Development and Care,
182, 207–220. doi: 10.1080/03004430.2011.553676
Garner, P., Curenton, S., & Taylor, K. (2005). Predictors of mental state understanding in
preschoolers of varying socioeconomic backgrounds. International Journal of Behavioral
Development, 29, 271–2 81. doi: 10.1080/01650250544000053
Garner, P. W., Jones, D. C., & Miner, J. L. (1994). Social competence among low-income
preschoolers: Emotion socialization practices and social cognitive correlates. Child
Development, 65, 622–637. doi: 10.2307/1131405
Garnham, W. A., & Perner, J. (2001). Actions really do speak louder than words—but only
implicitly: Young children’s understanding of false belief in action. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 19, 413–432. doi: 10.1348/026151001166182
Garvin, M. C., Tarullo, A. R., Van Ryzin, M., & Gunnar, M. G. (2012). Postadoption parent-
ing and socioemotional development in postinstitutionalized children. Development and
Psychopathology, 24, 35–4 8. doi: 10.1017/S0954579411000642
Gauvain, M., Perez, S. M., & Beebe, H. (2013). Authoritative parenting and parental support for
children’s cognitive development. In R. E. Larzelere, A. S. Morris, & A. W. Harrist (Eds.),
Authoritative parenting; Synthesizing nurturance and discipline for optimal child development
(pp. 211–233). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Geary, D. C., & Bjorklund, D. F. (2000). Evolutionary developmental psychology. Child
Development, 71, 57–65. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00118
Gelman, S. (2009). Learning from others: Children’s construction of concepts. Annual Review of
Psychology, 60, 115–140. doi: 10.1146/a nnurev.psych.59.103006.093659
Gershoff, E. T. (2002). Corporal punishment by parents and associated child behaviors and
experiences: A meta-a nalysis and theoretical review. Psychological Bulletin, 128, 539–579.
doi: 10.1037/0 033-2909.128.4.539
Gershoff, E. T. (2010). More harm than good: A summary of scientific research on the intended
and unintended effects of corporal punishment on children. Law and Contemporary
Problems, 73 (2), 31–56.
Gershoff, E. T. (2013). Spanking and child development: We know enough now to stop hitting
our children. Child Development Perspectives, 7, 133–137. doi: 10.1111/cdep.120
Gerson, S. A., & Woodward, A. L. (2014). The joint role of trained, untrained, and observed
actions at the origins of goal recognition. Infant Behavior and Development, 37, 94–104.
doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2013.12.013
Gola, A. A. H. (2012). Mental verb input for promoting children’s theory of mind: A training
study. Cognitive Development 27, 64–76. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2011.10.003
Goldfarb, W. (1945). Psychological privation in infancy and subsequent adjustment. American
Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 15, 247–255.
Goldsmith, D. F., & Rogoff, B. (1997). Mothers’ and toddlers’ coordinated joint focus of atten-
tion: Variations with maternal dysphoric symptoms. Developmental Psychology, 33, 113–119.
doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.33.1.113
Goodman, S. H., Rouse, M. H., Connell, A. M., Broth, M. R., Hall, C. M., & Heyward, D. (2011).
Maternal depression and child psychopathology: A meta-a nalytic review. Clinical Child and
Family Psychology Review, 14, 1–27. doi: 10.1007/s10567-010-0 080-1
Goodnow, J. J. (1988). Parents’ ideas, actions, and feelings: Models and methods from develop-
mental and social psychology. Child Development, 59, 286–320. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.
ep8588523
Goodnow, J. J. (2002). Parents’ knowledge and expectations: Using what we know. In
M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting: Vol. 3. Being and becoming a parent (2nd
ed., pp. 439–4 60). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
294 R eferences
Goodnow, J. J. (2004). The domain of work in households: A relational models approach. In
N. Haslam (Ed.), Relational models theory: A contemporary overview (pp. 167–196). Mahwah,
NJ: Erlbaum.
Goodnow, J. J., & Collins, W. A. (1990). Development according to parents. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Gopnik, A., & Astington, J. W. (1988). Children’s understanding of representational change and
its relation to the understanding of false belief and the appearance-reality distinction. Child
Development, 59, 26–37. doi: 10.2307/1130386
Gopnik, A., & Rosati, A. (2001). Duck or rabbit? Reversing ambiguous figures and under-
standing ambiguous representations. Developmental Science, 4, 175–183. doi: 10.1111/
1467-7687.00163
Gopnik, A., & Wellman, H. M. (2012). Reconstructing constructivism: Causal models,
Bayesian learning mechanisms, and the theory theory. Psychological Bulletin, 138, 1085–
1108. doi: 10.1037/a0028044
Gottman, J. M., Katz, L. F., & Hooven, C. (1996). Parental meta-emotion philosophy and the
emotional life of families: Theoretical models and preliminary data. Journal of Family
Psychology, 10, 243–2 68. doi: 10.1037/0893-3200.10.3.243
Gottman, J. M., Katz, L. F., & Hooven, C. (1997). Meta-emotion: How families communicate emo-
tionally. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Grace, S. L., Evindar, A., & Stewart, D. E. (2003). The effect of postpartum depression on
child cognitive development and behavior: A review and critical analysis of the literature.
Archives of Women’s Mental Health, 6, 263–274. doi: 10.1007/s 00737-0 03-0 024-6
Graham, S. A., Nilsen, E. S., & Nayer, S. L. (2007). Following the intentional eye: The role of
gaze cues in early word learning. In R. Flom, K. Lee, & D. Muir (Eds.), Gaze following: Its
development and significance (pp.193–216). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Grazzani, I. G., & Ornaghi, V. (2011). Emotional state talk and emotion understanding: A train-
ing study with preschool children. Journal of Child Language, 38, 1124–1139. doi: 10.1017/
S0305000910000772
Grazzani, I., & Ornaghi, V. (2012). How do use and comprehension of mental-state lan-
guage relate to theory of mind in middle childhood? Cognitive Development, 27, 99–111.
doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2012.03.002
Gredeback, G., Fikke, L., & Melinder, A. (2010). The development of joint visual atten-
tion: A longitudinal study of gaze following during interactions with mothers and strang-
ers. Developmental Science, 13, 839–8 48. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2009.00945.x
Greenberg, M. T., Kusche, C. A., Cook, E. T., & Quamma, J. P. (1995). Promoting emotional
competence in school-aged children: The effects of the PATHS curriculum. Development
and Psychopathology, 7, 117–136. doi: 10.1017/S0954579400006374
Greig, A., & Howe, D. (2001). Social understanding, attachment security of preschool chil-
dren and maternal mental health. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 19, 381–393.
doi: 10.1348/026151001166164
Grolnick, W. S., Benjet, C. Kurowski, C. O., & Apostoleris, N. H. (1997). Predictors of paren-
tal involvement in children’s schooling. Journal of Educational Psychology, 89, 538–5 48.
doi: 10.1037/0 022-0 663.89.3.538
Grusec, J. E. (2011). Socialization processes in the family: Social and emotional development.
Annual Review of Psychology, 62, 243–2 69. doi: 10.1146/a nnurev.psych.121208.131650
Grusec, J. E., & Davidov, M. (2010). Integrating different perspectives on socialization theory
and research: A domain-specific approach. Child Development, 81, 687–709. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2010.01426.x
Grusec, J. E., & Davidov, M. (2015). Analyzing socialization from a domain-specific perspective.
In J. E. Grusec & P. D. Hastings (Eds.), Handbook of socialization: Theory and research (2nd
ed., pp. 158–181). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Grusec, J. E., & Goodnow, J. J. (1994). Impact of parental discipline methods on the child’s
internalization of values: A reconceptualization of current points of view. Developmental
Psychology, 30, 4–19. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.30.1.4
R eferences 295
Guajardo, N. R., Peterson, R., & Marshall, T. R. (2013). The roles of explanations and feedback
in false belief understanding: A microgenetic analysis. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 174,
225–252. doi: 10.1080/0 0221325.2012.682101
Guajardo, N. R., Snyder, G., & Petersen, R. (2009). Relationships among parenting practices,
parental stress, child behaviour, and children’s social-cognitive development. Infant and
Child Development, 18, 37–6 0. doi: 10.1002/icd.578
Guajardo, N. R., & Watson, A. C. (2002). Narrative discourse and theory of mind development.
Journal of Genetic Psychology, 163, 305–325. doi: 10.1080/0 0221320209598686
Ha, C., Sharp, C., & Goodyer, I. (2011). The role of child and parent mentalizing for the develop-
ment of conduct problems over time. European Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 20, 291–300.
doi: 10.1007/s 00787-011-0174-4
Haden, C. A., & Fivush, R. (1996). Contextual variation in maternal conversational styles.
Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 42, 200–227.
Hadwin, J., Baron-Cohen, S., Howlin, P., & Hill, K. (1996). Can we teach children with autism
to understand emotions, belief, or pretence? Development and Psychopathology, 8, 345–365.
doi: org/10.1017/S0954579400007136
Haight, W. L., Parke, R. D., & Black, J. E. (1997). Mothers’ and fathers’ beliefs about and spon-
taneous participation in their toddlers’ pretend play. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 43, 271–290.
Hakim-L arson, J., Parker, A., Lee, C., Goodwin, J., & Voelker, S. (2006). Measuring parental
meta-emotion: Psychometric properties of the Emotion-R elated Styles Self-Test. Early
Education and Development, 17, 229–251. doi: 10.1207/s15566935eed1702_2
Halberstadt, A. G., Dunsmore, J. C., Bryant, A. Jr., Parker, A. E., Beale, K. S., & Thompson, J. A.
(2013). Development and validation of the Parents’ Beliefs About Children’s Emotions
Questionnaire. Psychological Assessment, 25, 1195–1210. doi: 10.1037/a0033695
Halberstadt, A. G., Dunsmore, J. C., McElwain, N., Eaton, K. L., & McCool, A. (2001). Parents’
beliefs about negative emotions. Unpublished manuscript, North Carolina State University.
Halberstadt, A. G., & Eaton, K. L. (2002). A meta-a nalysis of family expressiveness and chil-
dren’s emotion expressiveness and understanding. Marriage and Family Review, 34, 35–62.
doi: 10.1300/J002v34n01_03
Hale, C. M., & Tager-F lusberg, H. (2003). The influence of language on theory of mind: A train-
ing study. Developmental Science, 6, 346–359. doi: 10.1111/1467-7687.00289
Hamlin, J. K., Hallinan, E. V., & Woodward, A. L. (2008). Do as I do: 7-month-old infants
selectively reproduce others’ goals. Developmental Science, 11, 487–494. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2008.00694.x
Hamlin, J. K., Wynn, K., & Bloom, P. (2007). Social evaluation by preverbal infants. Nature, 450,
557–560. doi: 10.1038/nature06288
Hammond, S. I., Muller, U., Carpendale, J. I. M., Bibok, M. B., & Liebermann-Finestone,
D. P. (2012). The effects of parental scaffolding on preschoolers’ executive function.
Developmental Psychology, 48, 271–2 81. doi: 10.1037/a0025519
Happe, F. (1994). An advanced test of theory of mind: Understanding of story characters’
thoughts and feelings by able autistic, mentally handicapped and normal children and
adults. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 24, 129–154. doi: 10.1007/BF02172093
Happe, F. (1995). The role of age and verbal ability in the theory of mind task performance of sub-
jects with autism. Child Development, 66, 843–855. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.ep9506152729
Harlow, H. F. (1958). The nature of love. American Psychologist, 13, 673–685. doi: 10.1037/
0022-3514.47.2.312
Harris, J. R. (1995). Where is the child’s environment? A group socialization theory of develop-
ment. Psychological Review, 102, 458–4 89. doi: 10.1037/0 033-295X.102.3.458
Harris, J. R. (1998). The nurture assumption. New York, NY: Free Press.
Harris, P. L. (1992). From simulation to folk psychology: The case for development. Mind and
Language, 7, 120–144. doi: 10.1111/j.1468-0 017.1992.tb00201.x
Harris, P. L. (1997). Between strange situations and false beliefs: Working models and theories of
mind. In W. Koops, J. B. Hoeksma, & D. C. van den Boom (Eds.), Development of interaction
296 R eferences
and attachment: Traditional and non-traditional approaches (pp. 187–199). Amsterdam, the
Netherlands: Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences.
Harris, P. L. (1999). Individual differences in understanding emotion: The role of attachment
status and psychological discourse. Attachment and Human Development, 1, 307–324.
doi: 10.1080/14616739900134171
Harris, P. L. (2006). It’s probably good to talk. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 52, 158–169. doi: 10.1353/
mpq.2006.0004
Harris, P. L. (2007). Trust. Developmental Science, 10, 135– 138. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2007.00575.x
Harris, P. L. (2009). Simulation (mostly) rules: A commentary. British Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 27, 555–559. doi: 10.1348/026151009X415484
Harris, P. L. (2012). Trusting what you’re told: How children learn from others. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press.
Harris, P. L., de Rosnay, M., & Pons, F. (2005). Language and children’s understand-
ing of mental states. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 14, 69–73. doi: 10.1111/
j.0963-7214.2005.00337.x
Harris, P. L., Johnson, C., Hutton, D., Andrews, G., & Cooke, T. (1989). Young chil-
dren’s theory of mind and emotion. Cognition and Emotion, 3, 379–4 00. doi: 10.1080/
02699938908412713
Hasselhorn, M., Mahler, C., & Grube, D. (2005). Theory of mind, working memory, and ver-
bal ability in preschool children: The proposal of a relay race model of the developmental
dependencies. In W. Schneider, R. Schumann-Hengsteler, & B. Sodian (Eds.), Young chil-
dren’s cognitive development: Interrelations among executive functioning, working memory, verbal
ability, and theory of mind (pp. 219–237). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Hastings, P. D., & Rubin, K. H. (1999). Predicting mothers’ beliefs about preschool-aged chil-
dren’s social behavior: Evidence for maternal attitudes moderating child effects. Child
Development, 70, 722–741. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00052
Havighurst, S. S., Wilson, K. R., Harley, A. E., Prior, M. R., & Kehoe, C. (2010). Tuning into
Kids: Improving emotion socialization practices in parents of preschool children—fi ndings
from a community trial. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 51, 1342–1350. doi: 1111/
j.1469-7610.2010.02303.x
Henderson, E. N., & Jennings, K. D. (2003). Maternal depression and the ability to facilitate
joint attention with 18-month-olds. Infancy 4, 27–4 6. doi: 10.1207/S15327078IN0401_2
Hertenstein, M. J., & Campos, J. J. (2004). The retention effects of an adult’s emotional displays on
infant behavior. Child Development, 75, 595–613. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2004.00695.x
Heyes, C. (2014). False belief in infancy: A fresh look. Developmental Science, 17, 647–659.
doi: 10.1111/desc.12148
Hickley, A. K., & Wellman, H. M. (2001). The emergence of children’s causal explanations and
theories: Evidence from everyday conversation. Developmental Psychology, 37, 668–683.
doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.37.5.668
Higgins, E. T. (1981). Role taking and social judgment: Alternative developmental perspectives
and processes. In J. H. Flavell & L. Ross (Eds.), Social cognitive development (pp. 119–153).
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Himelstein, S. U., Graham, S., & Weiner, B. (1991). An attributional analysis of maternal
beliefs about the importance of child-rearing practices. Child Development, 62, 301–310.
doi: 10.2307/1131004
Hirschberg, L. (1990). When infants look to their parents: II. Twelve-month-olds’ response to
conflicting parental emotional signals. Child Development, 61, 1187–1191. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.1990.tb02852.x
Hirschberg, L. M., & Svejda, M. (1990). When infants look to their parents: I. Infants’ social ref-
erencing to mothers compared to fathers. Child Development, 61, 1175–1186. doi: 10.2307/
1130885
R eferences 297
Hirsjarvi, S., & Perala-Littunen, S. (2001). Parental beliefs and their role in child-rearing.
European Journal of Psychology of Education, 16, 87–116. doi: 10.1007/BF03172996
Hobson, R. P., Patrick, M. P. H., Crandell, L. E., Garcia Perez, R. M. G., & Lee, A. (2004).
Maternal sensitivity and infant triadic communication. Journal of Child Psychology and
Psychiatry, 45, 470–4 80. doi: 10.1111/j.1469-7610.2004.00238.x
Hofer, T., Hohenberger, A., Hauf, P., & Aschersleben, G. (2008). The link between maternal
interaction style and infant action understanding. Infant Behavior and Development, 31, 115–
126. doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2007.07.003
Hoff, E., Laursen, B., & Tardif, T. (2002). Socioeconomic status and parenting. In M.
H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting: Vol. 2. Biology and ecology of parenting (2nd ed.,
pp. 231–252). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Hoff-Ginsberg, E. (1991). Mother-child conversation in different social classes and communica-
tive settings. Child Development, 62, 782–796. doi: 10.2307/1131177
Hoffman, M. L. (1970). Moral development. In P. H. Mussen (Ed.), Carmichael’s manual of child
psychology (3rd ed., Vol. 2, pp. 261–359). New York, NY: Wiley.
Hoffman, M. L. (2000). Empathy and moral development. New York, NY: Cambridge
University Press.
Hogrefe, G. J., Wimmer, H., & Perner, J. (1986). Ignorance versus false belief: A developmental
lag in attribution of epistemic states. Child Development, 57, 567–582. doi: 10.1111/1467-
8624.ep7248787
Hohenberger, A., Elsabbagh, M., Serres, J., de Schoenen, S., Karmiloff-Smith, A., & Aschersleben,
G. (2012). Understanding goal-d irected human actions and physical causality: The role
of mother-infant interaction. Infant Behavior and Development, 35, 898–911. doi: 10.1016/
j.infbeh.2012.09.005
Holden, G. W. (2010). Parenting: A dynamic perspective. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publishing.
Holmes, H. A., Black, C., & Miller, S. A. (1996). A cross-task comparison of false belief under-
standing in a Head Start population. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 63, 263–2 85.
doi: 10.1006/jecp.1996.0050
Holmes-L onergan, H. A. (2003). Understanding of affective false beliefs, perceptions of paren-
tal discipline, and classroom behavior in children from Head Start. Early Education and
Development, 14, 29–4 6. doi: 10.1207/s15566935eed1401_3
Howard, A. A., Mayeux, L., & Naigles, L. R. (2008). Conversational correlates of children’s
acquisition of mental verbs and a theory of mind. First Language, 28, 375–4 02. doi: 10.1177/
0142723708091044
Howe, N., & Rinaldi, C. M. (2004). ‘You be the big sister’: Maternal-preschooler internal state
discourse, perspective-taking, and sibling caretaking. Infant and Child Development, 13,
217–234. doi: 10.1002/icd.350
Howe, N., Rinaldi, C. M., & Recchia, H. E. (2010). Patterns in mother-child internal state dis-
course across four contexts. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 56, 1–2 0. doi: 10.1353/mpq.0.0042
Hsu, K. (1996). Joint attention in a father-child-mother triad: A Chinese-A merican case study.
Issues in Applied Linguistics, 7, 77–9 0.
Hughes, C. (1998). Executive function in preschoolers: Links with theory of mind and ver-
bal ability. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 16, 233–253. doi: 10.1111/j.2044-
835X.1998.tb00921.x
Hughes, C. (2011). Social understanding and social lives. Clifton, NJ: Psychology Press.
Hughes, C., & Cutting, A. L. (1999). Nature, nurture, and individual differences in early under-
standing of mind. Psychological Science, 10, 429–432. doi: 10.1111/1467-9280.00181
Hughes, C., Deater-Deckard, K., & Cutting, A. L. (1999). ‘Speak roughly to your little boy’? Sex
differences in the relations between parenting and preschoolers’ understanding of mind.
Social Development, 8, 143–160. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00088
Hughes, C., & Dunn, J. (1997). “Pretend you didn’t know”: Preschoolers’ talk about mental states
in pretend play. Cognitive Development, 12, 477–499. doi: 10.1016/S0885-2 014(97)90019-8
298 R eferences
Hughes, C., & Dunn, J. (1998). Understanding mind and emotion: Longitudinal associations
with mental state talk between young friends. Developmental Psychology, 34, 1026–1037.
doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.34.5.1026
Hughes, C., & Ensor, R. (2006). Behavioral problems in 2-year-olds: Links with individual
differences in theory of mind, executive function and negative parenting. Journal of Child
Psychology and Psychiatry, 47, 488–497. doi: 10.1111/j.1469-7610.2005.01519.x
Hughes, C., & Ensor, R. (2009). How do families help or hinder the emergence of early executive
function? New Directions for Child and Adolescent Development, 123, 35–50. doi: 10.1002/cd.234
Hughes, C., Jaffe, S. R., Happe, F., Taylor, A., Caspi, A., & Moffitt, T. E. (2005). Origins of indi-
vidual differences in theory of mind: From nature to nurture? Child Development, 76, 356–
370. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2005.00850_a .x
Hughes, C., & Leekam, S. (2004). What are the links between theory of mind and social rela-
tions? Review, reflections and new directions for studies of typical and atypical develop-
ment. Social Development, 13, 590–619. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2004.00285
Hughes, C., Roman, G., Hart, M. J., & Ensor, R. (2013). Does maternal depression predict young
children’s executive function—a 4-year longitudinal study. Journal of Child Psychology and
Psychiatry, 54, 169–177. doi: 10.1111/jcpp.12014
Humfress, H., O’Connor, T. G., Slaughter, J. U., Target, M. U., & Fonagy, P. (2002). General
and relationship-specific models of social cognition: Explaining the overlap and dis-
crepancies. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 43, 873–883. doi: 10.1111/1469-
7610.0013_7
Hutchins, T. L., Bond, L. A., Silliman, E. R., & Bryant, J. B. (2009). Maternal epistemologi-
cal perspectives and variations in mental state talk. Journal of Speech, Language, and Hearing
Research, 52, 61–80.
Hutchins, T. L., Prelock, P. A., & Bonazinga, L. (2012). Psychometric evaluation of the Theory
of Mind Inventory (ToMI): A study of typically developing children and children with
autism spectrum disorder. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 42, 327–3 42. doi:
10.1007/s10803-011-1244-7
Hutto, D. D. (2008). Folk psychological narratives: The sociocultural basis of understanding reasons.
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Iao, L., Leekam, S., Perner, J., & McConachie, H. (2011). Further evidence for nonspecificity
of theory of mind in preschoolers: Trainability and transferability in the understanding of
false beliefs and false signs. Journal of Cognition and Development, 12, 56–79. doi: 10.1080/
15248372.2011.539523
Izard, C. E., Trentacosta, C. J., King, K. A., & Mostow, A. J. (2004). An emotion-based pre-
vention program for Head Start children. Early Education and Development, 15, 407–422.
doi: 10.1207/s15566935eed1504_4
Jameson, P. B., Gelfand, D. M., Kulcsar, E., & Teti, D. M. (1997). Mother-toddler interaction
patterns associated with maternal depression. Development and Psychopathology, 9, 537–550.
doi: 10.1017/S0954579497001296
Jaswal, V. K., Croft, A. C., Setia, A. R., & Cole, C. A. (2010). Young children have a specific,
highly robust bias to trust testimony. Psychological Science, 21, 1541–1547. doi: 10.1177/
0956797610383438
Jeffer, S., & Ma, L. (2015). Preschoolers show less trust in physically disabled or obese infor-
mants. Frontiers in Psychology, 5, article 1524. doi: 10.3389/f psyg.2014.01524
Jenkins, J. M., & Astington, J. W. (1996). Cognitive factors and family structure associated
with theory of mind development in young children. Developmental Psychology, 32, 70–78.
doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.32.1.70
Jenkins, J. M., Turrell, S. L., Kogushi, Y., Lollis, S., & Ross, H. S. (2003). A longitudinal inves-
tigation of the dynamics of mental state talk in families. Child Development, 74, 905–920.
doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00575
R eferences 299
Jeon, H., Moulson, M. C., Fox, N., Zeanah, C., & Nelson, C. (2010). The effects of early insti-
tutionalization on the discrimination of facial expressions of emotion in young children.
Infancy, 15, 209–221. doi: 10.1111/j.1532-7078.2009.00007.x
Joormann, J., Gilbert, K., & Gotlib, I. H. (2010). Emotion identification in girls at high risk
for depression. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 51, 575–582. doi: 10.1111/
j.1469-7610.2009.02175.x
Kagan, J. (2013). Contextualizing experience. Developmental Review, 33, 273–278. doi: 10.1016/
j.dr.2013.07.003
Karstad, S. B., Kvello, O., Wichstom, L., & Berg-Nielsen, T. S. (2014). What do parents know
about their children’s comprehension of emotions? Accuracy of parental estimates in a
community sample of pre-schoolers. Child: Care, Health and Development, 40, 346–353.
doi: 0.1111/cch.12071
Katz, L. F., Maliken, A. C., & Stettler, N. M. (2012). Parental meta-emotion philosophy: A review
of research and theoretical framework. Child Development Perspectives, 6, 417–422. doi: 1111/
j.1750-8606.2012.00244.x
Kay-R aining Bird, E., Cleave, P. L., Curia, J., & Dunleavy, M. (2008). Parental talk about inter-
nal states to their child with autism. Focus on Autism and Other Developmental Disabilities, 23,
166–175. doi: 10.1177/1088357608319530
Keels, M. (2009). Ethnic group differences in Early Head Start parents’ beliefs and practices
and links to children’s early cognitive development. Early Childhood Research Quarterly, 24,
381–397. doi: 10.1016/j.ecresq.2009.08.002
Kerns, K. A., Schlegelmich, A., Morgan, T. A., & Abraham, M. M. (2005). Assessing attachment
in middle childhood. In K. A. Kerns & R. A. Richardson (Eds.), Attachment in middle child-
hood (pp. 46–70). New York: Guilford Press.
Kerr, M., Stattin, H., & Ozdemir, M. (2012). Perceived parenting style and adolescent adjust-
ment: Revisiting directions of effects and the role of parental knowledge. Developmental
Psychology, 48, 1540–1553. doi: 0.1037/a0027720
Kim, S., & Harris, P. L. (2014). Selection among extraordinary informants. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 32, 394–396. doi: 10.1111/bjdp.12044
Kim, G., & Kwak, K. (2011). Uncertainty matters: Impact of stimulus ambiguity on infant social
referencing. Infant and Child Development, 20, 449–4 63. doi: 10.1002/icd.708
Kim, G., Walden, T. A., & Knieps, L. J. (2010). Impact and characteristics of positive and fearful
emotional messages during infant social referencing. Infant Behavior and Development, 33,
189–195. doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2009.12.009
Kinzler, K. D., Corriveau, K. H ., & Harris, P. L . (2010). Children’s selective trust in native-accented
speakers. Developmental Science, 14, 106–111. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2010.00965x
Kirk, E., Howlen, N., Pine, K. J., & Fletcher, B. (2013). To sign or not to sign? The impact of
encouraging infants to gesture on infant language and maternal mind-m indedness. Child
Development, 84, 574–590. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2012.01874.x
Kirkcaldy, B., Noack, P., Furnham, A., & Siefen, G. (2007). Parental estimates of their own
and their children’s intelligence. European Psychologist, 12, 173– 180. doi: 10.1027/
1016-9 040.12.3.173
Klahr, A. M., & Burt, S. A. (2014). Elucidating the etiology of individual differences in parent-
ing: A meta-a nalysis of behavioral genetic research. Psychological Bulletin, 140, 544–586.
doi: 10.1037/a0034205
Kloo, D., & Perner, J. (2003). Training transfer between card sorting and false belief understand-
ing: Helping children apply conflicting descriptions. Child Development, 74, 1823–1839.
doi: 10.1046/j.1467-8624.2003.00640.x
Kloo, D., & Perner, J. (2008). Training theory of mind and executive control: A tool for
improving school achievement? Mind, Brain, and Education, 2, 122–127. doi: 10.1111/
j.1751-228X.2008.00042.x
300 R eferences
Knoll, M., & Charman, T. (2000). Teaching false belief and visual perspective taking skills in
young children: Can a theory of mind be trained? Child Study Journal, 30, 273–304.
Kochanska, G. (1995). Children’s temperament, mother’s discipline, and security of attach-
ment: Multiple pathways to emerging internalization. Child Development, 66, 597–615.
doi: 10.2307/1131937
Kochanska, G., Coy, K. C., & Murray, K. T. (2001). The development of self-regulation in the
first four years of life. Child Development, 72, 1091–1111. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00336
Kochanska, G., Kuczynski, L., & Radke-Yarrow, M. (1989). Correspondence between moth-
ers’ self-reported and observed child-rearing practices. Child Development, 60, 56–63.
doi: 10.2307/1131070
Koenig, M. A., & Harris, P. L. (2005). Preschoolers mistrust ignorant and inaccurate speakers.
Child Development, 76, 1261–1277. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2005.00849.x
Koenig, M. A., & Sabbagh, M. A. (2013). Selective social learning: New perspectives on learn-
ing from others. Developmental Psychology, 49, 399–4 03. (introduction to special section)
doi: 10.1037/a0031619
Koenig, M. A., & Stephens, E. (2014). Characterizing children’s responsiveness to cues of
speaker trustworthiness. In E. J. Robinson & S. Einav (Eds.), Trust and skepticism: Children’s
selective learning from testimony (pp. 13–27). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Kovacs, A. M., Tauzin, T., Teglas, E., Gergely, G., & Csibra, G. (2014). Pointing as epis-
temic request: 12-month-olds point to receive new information. Infancy, 19, 543–557.
doi: 10.1111/i nfa.12060
Kristen, S., Sodian, B., Thoermer, C., & Perst, H. (2011). Infants’ joint attention skills pre-
dict toddlers’ emerging mental state language. Developmental Psychology, 47, 1207–1219.
doi: 10.1037/a0024808
Kristen, S., Thoermer, C., Hofer, T., Aschersleben, G., & Sodian, B. (2006). Skalierung
von “Theory of Mind”-Aufgaben [Validation of the “Theory of Mind” scale] Zeitschrift
für Entwicklungspsychologie und Pädagogische Psychologie, 38, 186– 195. doi:10.1026/
0049-8637.38.4.186
Kucirkova, N., & Tompkins, V. (2014). Personalization in mother-child emotion talk across
three contexts. Infant and Child Development, 23, 153–169. doi: 10.1002/icd.1814
Kuebli, J., & Fivush, R. (1992). Gender differences in parent-child conversations about past emo-
tions. Sex Roles, 27, 683–698. doi: 10.1007/BF02651097
Kuersten-Hogan, R., & McHale, J. P. (2000). Stability of emotion talk in families from the
toddler to the preschool years. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 161, 115–121. doi: 10.1080/
00221320009596698
Kujawa, A., Dougherty, L., Durbin, C. E., Laptook, R., Torpey, D., & Klein, D. N. (2014). Emotion
regulation in preschool children: Associations with maternal depression and early parent-
ing. Development and Psychopathology, 26, 159–170. doi: 10.1017/S0954579413000928
Kurdek, L. A., Fine, M. A., & Sinclair, R. J. (1995). School adjustment in sixth graders: Parenting
transitions, family climate, and peer norm effects. Child Development, 66, 430–4 45. doi: /
10.2307/1131588
LaBounty, J., Wellman, H. M., Olson, S., Lagattuta, & Liu, D. (2008). Mothers’ and fathers’ use of
internal state talk with their young children. Social Development, 17, 757–775. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-9507.2007.00450.x
Ladd, G. W. (1992). Themes and theories: Perspectives on processes in family-peer relation-
ships. In R. D. Parke & G. W. Ladd (Eds.), Family-peer relationships: Modes of linkage (pp.
3–3 4). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Ladd, G. W., & Pettit, G. (2002). Parents’ and children’s peer relationships. In M. H. Bornstein
(Ed.), Handbook of parenting (2nd ed., Vol. 5, pp. 269–309). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Lagace-Seguin, D. G., & Coplan, R. J. (2005). Maternal emotional styles and child social adjust-
ment: Assessment, correlates, outcomes and goodness of fit in early childhood. Social
Development, 14, 613–636. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2005.00320.x
R eferences 301
Lagattuta, K. H., & Wellman, H. M. (2002). Differences in early parent-c hild conversa-
tions about negative versus positive emotions: Implications for the development of
psychological understanding. Developmental Psychology, 38, 564–580. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.38.4.564
Laible, D. (2004). Mother-child discourse in two contexts: Links with child temperament,
attachment security, and socioemotional competence. Developmental Psychology, 40, 979–
992. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.40.6.979
Laible, D., & Song, J. (2006). Constructing emotional and relational understanding: The role
of affect and mother-child discourse. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 52, 44–69. doi: 10.1353/
mpq.2006.0006
Laible, D. J., & Thompson, R. A. (1998). Attachment and emotional understanding in preschool
children. Developmental Psychology, 34, 1038–1045. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.34.5.1038
Lalonde, C. E., & Chandler, M. J. (2002). Children’s understanding of interpretation. New Ideas
in Psychology, 20, 163–198. 10.1016/S0732-118X(02)00007-7
Lamb, M. E. (Ed.). (2010). The role of the father in child development (5th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Lamborn, S. D., Dornbusch, S. M., & Steinberg, L. (1996). Ethnicity and community context
as moderators of the relation between family decision making and adolescent adjustment.
Child Development, 67, 283–301. doi: 10.2307/1131814
Lamborn, S. D., Mounts, N. S., Steinberg, L., & Dornbusch, S. M. (1991). Patterns of compe-
tence and adjustment among adolescents from authoritative, authoritarian, indulgent, and
neglectful families. Child Development, 62, 1049–1065. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1991.
tb01588.x
Landrum, A. R., & Mills, C. M. (2015). Developing expectations regarding the boundaries of
expertise. Cognition, 134, 215–231. doi: 0.1016/j.cog1nition.2014.10.013
Lane, J. D., Wellman, H. M., & Gelman, S. A. (2013). Informants’ traits weigh heavily in young
children’s trust in testimony and in their epistemic inferences. Child Development, 84,
1253–1268. doi: 10.1111/cdev.12029
Lane, J. D., Wellman, H. M., Olson, S., Miller, A. L., Wang, L., & Tardif, T. (2013). Relations
between temperament and theory of mind development in the United States and
China: Biological and behavioral correlates of preschoolers’ false-belief understanding.
Developmental Psychology, 49, 825–836. doi: 10.1037/a0028825
Laranjo, J., & Bernier, A. (2013). Children’s expressive language in early toddlerhood: Links
to prior maternal mind-m indedness. Early Child Development and Care, 183, 951–962.
doi: 10.1080/03004430.2012.699964
Laranjo, J., Bernier, A., Meins, E., & Carlson, S. M. (2010). Early manifestations of children’s
theory of mind: The roles of maternal mind-m indedness and infant security of attachment.
Infancy, 15, 300–323. doi: 10.1111/j.1532-7078.2009.00014.x
Laranjo, J., Bernier, A., Meins, E., & Carlson, S. M. (2014). The role of maternal mind-
mindedness and infant security of attachment in predicting preschoolers’ understanding
of visual perspective taking and false belief. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 125,
48–62. doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2014.02.005
Larzelere, R. E., & Kuhn, B. R. (2005). Comparing child outcomes of physical punishment and
alternative disciplinary tactics: A meta-a nalysis. Clinical Child and Family Psychology Review,
8, 1–37. doi: 10.1007/s10567-0 05-2340-z
Leaper, C. (2002). Parenting girls and boys. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting:
Vol. 1. Children and parenting (2nd ed., pp. 189–226). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Leaper, C., Anderson, K., & Sanders, P. (1998). Moderators of gender effects on parents’ talk
to their children: A meta-analysis. Developmental Psychology, 34, 3–27. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.34.1.3
Lecce, S., Bianco, F., Demicheli, P., & Cavallini, E. (2014). Training preschoolers on first-order
false belief understanding: Transfer on advanced ToM skills and metamemory. Child
Development, 85, 2404–2 418. doi: 10.1111/cdev.12267
302 R eferences
Lecce, S., Bianco, F., Devine, R. T., Hughes, C., & Banerjee, R. (2014). Promoting theory of mind
during middle childhood: A training program. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 126,
52–67. doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2014.03.002
Legerstee, M. (2005). Infants’ sense of people: Precursors to a theory of mind. New York, NY:
Cambridge University Press.
Legerstee, M. (2009). The role of dyadic communication in social cognitive development. In
P. J. Bauer (Ed.), Advances in child development and behavior (Vol. 37, pp. 1–53). New York,
NY: Academic Press.
Legerstee, M., & Fisher, T. (2008). Coordinated attention, imperative and declarative pointing
in infants with and without Down syndrome: Sharing experiences with adults and peers.
First Language, 28, 281–311. doi: 10.1177/0142723708091045
Legerstee, M., Markova, G., & Fisher, T. (2007). The role of maternal affect attunement in dyadic
and triadic communication. Infant Behavior and Development, 30, 296–306.doi: 10.1016/
j.infbeh.2006.10.003
Legerstee, M., & Varghese, J. (2001). The role of affect mirroring on social expectancies in three-
month-old infants. Child Development, 72, 1301–1313. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00349
Lemche, E., Kreppner, J. M., Joraschky, P., & Klann-D elius, G. (2007). Attachment orga-
nization and the early development of internal state language: A longitudinal per-
spective. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 31, 252–2 62. doi: 10.1177/
0165025407076438
Lerner, R. M., Rothbaum, F., Boulos, S., & Castellino, D. R. (2002). Developmental systems
perspective on parenting. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting: Vol. 2. Biology
and ecology of parenting (2nd ed., pp. 315–3 44). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Leslie, A. M. (1987). Pretense and representation: The origins of “theory of mind.” Psychological
Review, 94, 412–426. doi: 10.1037/0 033-295X.94.4.412
Leslie, A. M. (1994). Pretending and believing: Issues in the theory of ToMM. Cognition, 50,
211–238. doi: 10.1016/0 010-0277(94)90029-9
Leslie, A. M. (2000). How to acquire a “representational theory of mind.” In D. Sperber (Ed.),
Metarepresentations: A multidisciplinary perspective (pp. 197–223). Oxford, UK: Oxford
University Press.
Leslie, A. M. (2005). Developmental parallels in understanding minds and bodies. Trends in
Cognitive Science, 9, 459–4 62. doi: 10.1016/j.tics.2005.08.002
Lewis, C., Freeman, N. H., Kriakidou, C., Maridaki-K assotaki, K., & Berridge, D. M. (1996).
Social influences on false belief access: Specific sibling influences or general apprentice-
ship? Child Development, 67, 2930–2947. doi: 10.2307/1131760
Lewis, C., Huang, Z., & Rooksby, M. (2006). Chinese preschoolers’ false belief understand-
ing: Is social knowledge underpinned by parental styles, social interactions, or executive
functions? Psychologia: An International Journal of Psychology in the Orient, 49, 252–2 66.
doi: 10.2117/psysoc.2006.252
Li, Q., Heyman, G. D., Xu, F., & Lee, K. (2014). Young children’s use of honesty as a basis
for selective trust. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 117, 59–72. doi: 10.1016/
j.jecp.2013.09.002
Licata, M., Paulus, M., Thoermer, C., Kristen, S., Woodward, A. L., & Sodian, B. (2014). Mother-
infant interaction quality and infants’ ability to encode actions as goal-d irected. Social
Development, 23, 340–356. doi: 10.1111/sode.12057
Lillard, A. (1998). Ethnopsychologies: Cultural variation in theories of mind. Psychological
Bulletin, 123, 3–32. doi: 10.1037/0 033-2909.123.1.3
Lillard, A. S., Lerner, M. D., Hopkins, E. J., Dore, R. A., Smith, E. D., & Palmquist, C. M.
(2013). The impact of pretend play on children’s development: A review of the evidence.
Psychological Bulletin, 139, 1–3 4. doi: 10.1037/a0029321
R eferences 303
Liu, D., Wellman, H. M., Tardif, T., & Sabbagh, M. A. (2008). Theory of mind development in
Chinese children: A meta-a nalysis of false belief understanding across cultures and lan-
guages. Developmental Psychology, 44, 523–531. doi/10.1037/0 012-1649.44.2.523
Lohmann, H., & Tomasello, M. (2003). The role of language in the development of false
belief understanding: A training study. Child Development, 74, 1130–1144. doi: 10.1111/
1467-8624.00597
Lok, S. M., & McMahon, C. A. (2006). Mothers’ thoughts about their children: Links between
mind-m indedness and emotional availability. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 24,
477–4 88. doi: 10.1348/026151005X49854
Lovejoy, M. C., Graczyk, P. A., O’Hare, E., & Neuman, G. (2000). Maternal depression and
parenting behavior: A meta-analytic review. Clinical Psychology Review, 20, 561–592.
doi: 10.1016/S0272-7358(98)00100-7
Low, J. (2010). Preschoolers’ implicit and explicit false- belief understanding: Relations
with complex syntactical mastery. Child Development, 81, 597– 615. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2009.01418.x
Low, J., & Perner, J. (Eds.). (2012a). Implicit and explicit theory of mind [Special Issue]. British
Journal of Developmental Psychology, 30. doi: 10.1111/j.2044-835X.2011.02074.x
Low, J., & Perner, J. (2012b). Implicit and explicit theory of mind: State of the art. British Journal
of Developmental Psychology, 30, 1–13. doi: 10.1111/j.2044-835X.2011.02074.x
Lu, H., Su, Y., & Wang, Q. (2008). Talking about others facilitates theory of mind in Chinese
preschoolers. Developmental Psychology, 44, 1726–1736. doi: 10.1037/a0013074
Lucariello, J. M. (2004). New insights into the functions, development, and origins of theory
of mind: The “Functional-Multilinear Socialization” (FMS) Model. In J. Lucariello, J.
Hudson, R. Fivush, & P. J. Bauer (Eds.) The development of the mediated mind: Sociocultural
context and cognitive development (pp. 33–57). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Lucariello, J. M., Durand, T. M., & Yarnell, L. (2007). Social versus intrapersonal ToM: Social
ToM is a cognitive strength for low-and middle- SES children. Journal of Applied
Developmental Psychology, 28, 285–297. doi: 10.1016/j.appdev.2007.04.001
Lucariello, J. M., Le Donne, M., Durand, T., & Yarnell, L. (2006). Social and intrapersonal
theories of mind: “I interact therefore I am.” In: A. Antonietti, O. Liverta-Sempio, & A.
Marchetti, (Eds.), Theory of mind and language in developmental contexts (pp. 149–171).
New York, NY: Springer.
Lucas, A. J., & Lewis, C. (2010). Should we trust experiments on trust? Human Development, 53,
167–172. doi: 10.1159/0 00320044
Lucas, A. J., Lewis, C., Pala, F. C., Wong, K., & Berridge, D. (2013). Social-cognitive processes in
preschoolers’ selective trust: Three cultures compared. Developmental Science, 49, 579–590.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2008.00728.x
Luce, M. R., Callanan, M. A., & Smilovic, S. (2013). Links between parents’ epistemological stance
and children’s evidence talk. Developmental Psychology, 49, 454–4 61. doi: 10.1037/a0031249
Luke, N., & Banerjee, R. (2013a). Differentiated associations between childhood maltreat-
ment experiences and social understanding: A meta-analysis and systematic review.
Developmental Review, 33, 1–2 8. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2012.10.001
Luke, N., & Banerjee, R. (2013b). Situating maltreatment in the social context: Challenges for
research. Developmental Review, 33, 279–2 84. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2013.07.001
Lundy, B. L. (2003). Father-and mother-infant face-to-face interactions: Differences in mind-
related comments and infant attachment? Infant Behavior and Development, 26, 200–212.
doi: 10.1016/S0163-6383(03)00017-1
Lundy, B. L. (2013). Paternal and maternal mind-m indedness and preschoolers’ theory of
mind: The mediating role of interactional attunement. Social Development, 22, 58–74.
doi: 10.1111/sode.12009
304 R eferences
Luu, B., de Rosnay, M., & Harris, P. L. (2013). Five-year-olds are willing, but 4-year-olds refuse,
to trust informants who offer new and unfamiliar labels for parts of the body. Journal of
Experimental Child Psychology, 116, 234–2 46. doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2013.06.003
Lytton, H., & Romney, D. M. (1991). Parents’ sex- related differential socialization of
boys and girls: A meta- a nalysis. Psychological Bulletin, 109, 267– 296. doi: 10.1037/
0033-2909.109.2.267
Ma, L., & Xu, F. (2011). Young children’s use of statistical sampling evidence to infer the subjec-
tivity of preferences. Cognition, 120, 403–411. doi: org/10.1016/j.cognition.2011.02.003
Maccoby, E. E. (2015). Historical overview of socialization theory and research. In J. E. Grusec
& P. D. Hastings (Eds.), Handbook of socialization: Theory and research (2nd ed., pp. 3–32).
New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Maccoby, E. E., & Jacklin, C. N. (1974). The psychology of sex differences. Stanford, CA: Stanford
University Press.
Maccoby, E. E., & Martin, J. A. (1983). Socialization in the context of the family: Parent-child
interaction. In P. H. Mussen (Series Ed.) & E. M. Hetherington (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of
child psychology: Vol. 4. Socialization, personality, and social development (4th ed., pp. 1–102).
New York, NY: Wiley.
MacWhinney, B. (2000a). The CHILDES project: Tools for analyzing talk: Vol 1. The format and
programs (3rd ed.). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
MacWhinney, B. (2000b). The CHILDES project: Tools for analyzing talk: Vol 2. The database (3rd
ed.). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Main, M. (1991). Metacognitive knowledge, metacognitive monitoring, and singular (coherent)
versus multiple (inconsistent) model of attachment: Findings and directions for future
research. In C. M. Parkes, J. Stevenson-Hyde, & P. Marris (Eds.), Attachment across the life
cycle (pp. 127–159). London, UK: Routledge.
Mar, R. A., Tackett, J. L., & Moore, C. (2010). Exposure to media and theory-of-m ind develop-
ment in preschoolers. Cognitive Development, 25, 69–78. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2009.11.002
Markova, G., & Legerstee, M. (2006). Contingency, imitation, and affect sharing: Foundations
of infants’ social awareness. Developmental Psychology, 42, 132– 141. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.42.1.132
Markus, H. R., & Kitayama, S. (1991). Culture and the self: Implications for cognition, emotion,
and motivation. Psychological Review, 98, 224–253. doi: 10.1037/0 033-295X.98.2.224
Marsiglio, W., Amato, P., Day, R. D., & Lamb, M. E . (2000). Scholarship on fatherhood in the 1990s.
Journal of Marriage and the Family, 62, 1173–1191. doi: 10.1111/j.1741-3737.2000.01173.x
Marsiglio, W., & Roy, K. (2012). Nurturing dads: Social initiatives for contemporary fatherhood.
New York, NY: Russell Sage Foundation.
Martin, S. E., Williamson, L. R., Kurtz-Nelson, E. C., & Boekamp, J. R. (2013). Emotion under-
standing (and misunderstanding) in clinically referred preschoolers: The role of child lan-
guage and maternal depressive symptoms. Journal of Child and Family Studies, 24, 24–37.
Martins, C., Mateus, V., Osorio, A., Martins, E. C., & Soares, I. (2014). Joint attention with the
mother and father at 10 months of age. European Journal of Developmental Psychology, 11,
319–330. doi: 10.1007/s10826-013-9810-6
McAlister, A., & Peterson, C. C. (2007). A longitudinal study of child siblings and theory of
mind development. Cognitive Development, 22, 258–270. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2006.10.009
McAlister, A., & Peterson, C. C. (2013). Siblings, theory of mind, and executive functioning
in children aged 3-6 years: New longitudinal evidence. Child Development, 84, 1442–1458.
doi: 10.1111/cdev.12043
McElwain, N. L., Halberstadt, A., & Volling, B. L. (2007). Mother-and father-reported reac-
tions to children’s negative emotions: Relations to young children’s emotional under-
standing and friendship quality. Child Development, 78, 1407– 1425. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2007.01074.x
R eferences 305
McElwain, N. L., & Volling, B. L. (2004). Attachment security and parental sensitivity dur-
ing infancy: Associations with friendship quality and false-belief understanding at age 4.
Journal of Social and Personal Relationships, 21, 639–6 67. doi: 10.1177/0265407504045892
McGillicuddy-De Lisi, A. V. (1992). Parents’ beliefs and children’s personal-social development.
In I. E. Sigel, A.V. McGillicuddy-De Lisi, & J. J. Goodnow (Eds.), Parental belief systems (2nd
ed., pp. 115–142). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
McHale, J. P. (2010). The construct of co-parenting: Evolution of a key family paradigm. In
M. S. Schultz, M. K. Pruett, P. Kerig, & R. D Parke (Eds.), Strengthening couple relation-
ships for optimal child development (pp. 77–94). Washington, DC: American Psychological
Association.
McMahon. C. A., & Meins, E. (2012). Mind-m indedness, parenting stress, and emotional
availability in mothers of preschoolers. Early Childhood Research Quarterly, 27, 245–252.
doi: 10.1016/j.ecresq.2011.08.002
McQuaid, N, Bigelow, A. E., McLaughlin, J., & MacLean, K. (2008). Maternal mental state
language and preschool children’s attachment security: Relation to children’s mental
state language and expressions of emotional understanding. Social Development, 17, 61–83.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2007.00415
Meins, E. (1997). Security of attachment and the social development of cognition. New York,
NY: Psychology Press.
Meins, E. (2012). Social relationships and children’s understanding of mind: Attachment, inter-
nal states, and mind-m indedness. In M. Siegal & L. Surian (Eds.). Access to language and
cognitive development (pp. 23–43). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Meins, E. (2013). Sensitive attunement to infants’ internal states: Operationalizing the construct
of mind-m indedness. Attachment and Human Development, 15, 524–5 44. doi: 10.1080/
14616734.2013.830388.
Meins, E., Centifanti, L. C. M., Fernyhough, C., & Fishburn, S. (2013). Maternal mind-
mindedness and children’s behavioral difficulties: Mitigating the impact of low socio-
economic status. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 41, 543– 553. doi: 10.1007/
s10802-012-9699-3
Meins, E., & Fernyhough, C. (1999). Linguistic acquisitional style and mentalising devel-
opment: The role of maternal mind-m indedness. Cognitive Development, 14, 363–380.
doi: 10.1016/S0885-2 014(99)00010-6
Meins, E., & Fernyhough, C. (2010). Mind-mindedness coding manual, Version 2.0. Unpublished
manuscript. Durham University, Durham, UK.
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Arnott, B., Leekam, S. R., & de Rosnay, M. (2013). Mind-m indedness
and theory of mind: Mediating roles of language and perspectival symbolic play. Child
Development, 84, 1777–1790. doi: 10.1111/cdev.12061
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Arnott, B., Turner, M., & Leekam, S. R. (2011). Mother-versus
infant-centered correlates of maternal mind-m indedness in the first year of life. Infancy, 16,
137–165. doi: 10.1111/j.1532-7078.2010.00039.x
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Arnott, B., Vittorini, L., Turner, M., Leekam, S. R., & Parkinson, K.
(2011). Individual differences in infants’ joint attention behaviors with mother and a new
social partner. Infancy, 16, 587–610. doi: 10.1111/j.1532-7078.2010.00065.x
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., de Rosnay, M., Arnott, B., Leekam, S. R., & Turner, M. (2012). Mind-
mindedness as a multidimensional construct: Appropriate and nonattuned mind-related
comments independently predict infant-mother attachment in a socially diverse sample.
Infancy, 17, 393-415. doi: 10.1111/j.1532-7078.2011.00087.x
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Fradley, E., & Tuckey, M. (2001). Rethinking maternal sensi-
tivity: Mothers’ comments on infants’ mental processes predict security of attach-
ment at 12 months. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 42, 637–6 48. doi: 10.1111/
1469-7610.00759
306 R eferences
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., & Harris-Waller, J. (2014). Is mind-m indedness trait-l ike or a quality
of close relationships? Evidence from descriptions of significant others, famous people, and
works of art. Cognition, 130, 417–427. doi: 10.1016/j.cognition.2013.11.009
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Johnson, F., & Lidstone, J. (2006). Mind-m indedness in chil-
dren: Individual differences in internal-state talk in middle childhood. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 24, 181–196. doi: 10.1348/026151005X80174
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Russell, J., & Clark-Carter, D. (1998). Security of attachment as a
predictor of symbolic and mentalising abilities: A longitudinal study. Social Development, 7,
1–2 4. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00047
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Wainwright, R., Clark-Carter, D., Gupta, M. D., Fradley, E., &
Tuckey, M. (2003). Pathways to understanding mind: Construct validity and predictive
validity of maternal mind-m indedness. Child Development, 74, 1194–1211. doi: 10.1111/
1467-8624.00601
Meins, E., Fernyhough, C., Wainwright, R., Gupta, M. D., Fradley, E., & Tuckey, M. (2002).
Maternal mind-m indedness and attachment security as predictors of theory of mind
understanding. Child Development, 73, 1715–1726. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00501
Melot, A., & Angeard, N. (2003). Theory of mind: Is training contagious? Developmental Science,
6, 178–184. doi: 10.1111/1467-7687.00269
Melot, A., & Houde, O. (1998). Categorization and theories of mind: The case of the appear-
ance/reality distinction. Cahiers de Psychologie Cognitive, 17, 71–93.
Meltzoff, A. N. (1995). Understanding the intentions of others: Re-enactment of intended
acts by 18-month-old children. Developmental Psychology, 31, 838–850. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.31.5.838
Meltzoff, A. N. (2007). “Like me”: A foundation for social cognition. Developmental Science, 10,
126–134. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2007.00574.x
Meltzoff, A. N., & Brooks, R. (2008). Self-experience as a mechanism for learning about oth-
ers: A training study in social cognition. Developmental Psychology, 44, 1257–1265.
doi: 10.1037/a0012888
Meltzoff, A. N., & Brooks, R. (2009). Social cognition and language: The role of gaze fol-
lowing in early word learning. In J. Colombo, P., McCardle, & L. Freund (Eds.), Infant
pathways to language: Methods, models, and research directions (pp. 169–194). New York,
NY: Psychology Press.
Mendive, S., Bornstein, M. H., & Sebastian, C. (2013). The role of maternal attention-
directing strategies in 9-month-old infants attaining joint engagement. Infant Behavior and
Development, 36, 115–123. doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2012.10.002
Meristo, M., Hjelmquist, E., & Morgan, G. (2012). How access to language affects theory of
mind in deaf children. In M. Siegal & L. Surian (Eds.). Access to language and cognitive devel-
opment (pp. 44–61). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Mesman, J., van IJzendoorn, M. H., & Bakermans-K ranenburg, M. J. (2009). The many faces of
the Still-Face Paradigm: A review and meta-a nalysis. Developmental Review, 29, 120–162.
doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2009.02.001
Miller, S. A. (1988). Parents’ beliefs about children’s cognitive development. Child Development,
59, 259–2 85. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.ep8588509
Miller, S. A. (1998). Developmental research methods (2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River,
NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Miller, S. A. (2000). Children’s understanding of preexisting differences in knowledge and
belief. Developmental Review, 20, 227–2 82. doi: 10.1006/d rev.1999.0501
Miller, S. A. (2009). Children’s understanding of second-order mental states. Psychological
Bulletin, 135, 749–773. doi: 10.1037/a0016854
Miller, S. A. (2012a). Developmental research methods (4th ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Miller, S. A. (2012b). Theory of mind: Beyond the preschool years. New York, NY: Psychology Press.
R eferences 307
Miller, S. A., Davis, T. L., Wilde, C. A., & Brown, J. (1993). Parents’ knowledge of their chil-
dren’s preferences. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 16, 35–6 0.doi: 10.1177/
016502549301600103
Miller, S. A., Hardin, C. A., & Montgomery, D. E. (2003). Young children’s understanding of
the conditions for knowledge acquisition. Journal of Cognition and Development, 4, 325–356.
doi: 10.1207/S15327647JCD0403_05
Miller, S. A., Manhal, M., & Mee, L. (1991). Parental beliefs, parental accurary, and children’s
cognitive performance: A search for causal relations. Developmental Psychology, 27, 267–
276. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.27.2.267
Milligan, K., Astington, J. W., & Dack, L. A. (2007). Language and theory of mind: A meta-
analysis of the relation between language ability and false-belief understanding. Child
Development, 78, 622–6 46. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2007.01018.x
Mills, C. M. (2013). Knowing when to doubt: Developing a critical stance when learning from
others. Developmental Psychology, 49, 404–418. doi: doi/10.1037/a0029500
Misailidi, P., Papoudi, D., & Brouzos, A. (2013). Mind what teachers say: Kindergarten teachers’
use of mental state language during picture story narration. Early Education and Development,
24, 1161–1174. doi: 10.1080/10409289.2013.765787
Mizokawa, A., & Komiya, A. (2014). Social ecology and theory of mind. Psychologia: An
International Journal of Psychological Sciences, 5, 133–151. doi: 10.2117/psysoc.2014.133
Mo, S., Su, Y., Sabbagh, M. A., & Jiaming, X. (2014). Sentential complements and false belief
understanding in Chinese Mandarin-speaking preschoolers: A training study. Cognitive
Development, 29, 50–61. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2013.11.001
Moeller, M. P., & Schick, B. (2006). Relations between maternal input and theory of
mind understanding in deaf children. Child Development, 77, 751–766. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2006.00901.x
Moll, H., & Tomasello, M. (2004). 12-and 18-month-old infants follow gaze to space behind
barriers. Developmental Science, 7, F1–F9. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2004.00315.x
Moller, E. L., Majdandzic, M., & Bogels, S. M. (2014). Fathers’ versus mothers’ social referencing
signals in relation to infant anxiety and avoidance: A visual cliff experiment. Developmental
Science, 17, 1012–1028. doi: 10.1111/desc.12194
Moller, E. L., Majdandzic, M., Vriends, N., & Bogels, S. M. (2014). Social referencing and child
anxiety: The evolutionary based role of fathers’ versus mothers’ signals. Journal of Child and
Family Studies, 23, 1268–1277. doi: 10.1007/s10826-013-9 787-1
Montgomery, D. E. (2002). Mental verbs and semantic development. Journal of Cognition and
Development, 3, 357–384. doi: 10.1207/S15327647JCD3,4-01
Montgomery, D. E. (2005). The developmental origins of meaning for mental terms. In
J. W. Astington & J. A. Baird (Eds.), Why language matters for theory of mind (pp. 106–122).
New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Moore, C. (2006). The development of commonsense psychology. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Moore, C., Furrow, D., Chiasson, L., & Patriquin, M. (1994). Developmental relations between
production and comprehension of mental terms. First Language, 14, 1–17. doi: 10.1177/
014272379401404001
Moore, C., Pure, K., & Furrow, D. (1990). Children’s understanding of the modal expression of
speaker certainty and uncertainty and its relation to the development of a representational
theory of mind. Child Development, 61, 722–730. doi: 10.2307/1130957
Moore, C., & Symons, D. K. (2005). Attachment, theory of mind, and delay of gratification. In
B. D. Homer & C. S. Tamis-L emonda (Eds.), The development of social cognition and commu-
nication (pp. 181–199). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Morgan, G., Meristo, M., Mann, W., Hjelmquist, E., Surian, L., & Siegal, M. (2014). Mental state
language and quality of conversational experience in deaf and hearing children. Cognitive
Development, 29, 41–49. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2013.10.002
308 R eferences
Morris, A. S., Cui, L., & Steinberg, L. (2013). Parenting research and themes: What we have
learned and where we go next. In R. E. Larzelere, A. S. Morris, & A. W. Harrist (Eds.),
Authoritative parenting; Synthesizing nurturance and discipline for optimal child development
(pp. 35–58). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Moses, L. J., Carlson, S. M., & Sabbagh, M. A. (2005). On the specificity of the relation between
executive function and children’s theories of mind. In W. Schneider, R. Schumann-
Hengesteler, & B. Sodian (Eds.), Young children’s cognitive development: Interrelations among
executive functioning, working memory, verbal ability, and theory of mind (pp. 131–145). Mahwah,
NJ: Erlbaum.
Moulson, M. C., Shutts, K., Fox, N. A., Zeanah, C. H., Spelke, E. S., & Nelson, C. A. (2015).
Effects of early institutionalization on emotion processing: A case for relative sparing?
Developmental Science, 18, 298–313. doi: 10.1111/desc.12217
Mugny, G., & Carugati, F. (1989). Social representations of intelligence. New York, NY: Cambridge
University Press.
Mumme, D. L., & Fernald, A. (2003). The infant as onlooker: Learning from emotional reac-
tions observed in a television scenario. Child Development, 74, 231–237. doi: 10.1111/
1467-8624.00532
Murphey, D. A. (1992). Constructing the child: Relations between parents’ beliefs and child
outcomes. Developmental Review, 12, 199–232. doi: 10.1016/0273-2297(92)90009-Q
Murray, L., de Rosnay, M., Pearson, J., Bergeron, C., Schofield, E., Royal-L awson, M., &
Cooper, P. J. (2008). Intergenerational transmission of social anxiety: The role of social
referencing processes in infancy. Child Development, 79, 1049- 1064. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2008.01175.x
Murray, L., & Trevarthen, C. (1985). Emotional regulation of interactions between two-month-
olds and their mothers. In T. M. Field & N. A. Fox (Eds.), Social perception in infants (pp.
177–197). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Murray, L., Woolgar, M., Briers, S., & Hipwell, A. (1999). Children’s social representations in
dolls’ house play and theory of mind tasks, and their relation to family adversity and child
disturbance. Social Development, 8, 179–2 00. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00090
Musun-M iller, L., & Blevins-K nabbe, B. (1998). Adults’ beliefs about children and mathe-
matics: How important is it and how do children learn about it? Early Development and
Parenting, 7, 191–2 02. doi: 10.1002/(SICI)1099-0 917(199812)7:4%3C191::AID-
EDP181%3E3.0.CO;2-I
Naito, M., & Koyama, K. (2006). The development of false-belief understanding in Japanese
children: Delay and difference? International Journal of Behavioral Development, 30, 290–304.
doi: 10.1177/0165025406063622
Nelson, J A., Leerkes, E. M., O’Brien, M., Calkins, S. D., & Marcovitch, S. (2012). African
American and European American mothers beliefs about negative emotions and emotion
socialization practices. Parenting, 12, 22–41. doi: 10.1080/15295192.2012.638871
Nelson, J. A., O’Brien, M., Calkins, S. D., Leerkes, E. M., Marcovitch, S., & Blankson, A. N.
(2011). Maternal expressive style and children’s emotional development. Infant and Child
Development, 21, 267–2 86. doi: 10.1002/icd.748
Nelson, K., Skwerer, D. P., Goldman, S., Henseler, S., Presler, N., & Walkenfield, F. F. (2003).
Entering a community of minds: An experiential approach to “theory of mind.” Human
Development, 46, 24–4 6. doi: 10.1159/0 00067779
Nelson, P. B., Adamson, L. B., & Bakeman, R. (2008). Toddlers’ joint engagement experience
facilitates preschoolers’ acquisition of theory of mind. Developmental Science, 11, 847–852.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2008.00733.x
Ng, F. F., Pomerantz, E. M., & Lam, S. (2013). Mothers’ beliefs about children’s learn-
ing in Hong Kong and the United States: Implications for mothers’ child-based
worth. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 37, 387– 394. doi: 10.1177/
0165025413483393
R eferences 309
Nixon, C. L., & Watson, A. C. (2001). Family experiences and early emotion understanding.
Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 47, 300–322. doi: 10.1353/mpq.2001.0011
O’Connor, T. G. (2003). Natural experiments to study the effects of early experience:
Progress and limitations. Development and Psychopathology, 15, 837–852. doi: 10.1017/
S0954579403000403
O’Connor, T. G., & Hirsch, N. (1999). Intraindividual differences and relationship-specificity
of mentalizing in early adolescence. Social Development, 8, 256– 274. doi: 10.1111/
1467-9507.00094
Olineck, K. M., & Poulin-Dubois, D. (2005). Infants’ ability to distinguish between inten-
tional and accidental actions and its relation to internal state language. Infancy, 8, 91–100.
doi: 10.1207/s15327078in0801_6
Olineck, K. M., & Poulin-Dubois, D. (2007). Imitation of intentional actions and internal state
language in infancy predict preschool theory of mind. European Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 4, 14–30. doi: 10.1080/17405620601046931
Olineck, K. M., & Poulin-Dubois, D. (2009). Infants’ understanding of intention from 10 to
14 months: Interrelations among violation of expectancy and imitation tasks. Infant
Behavior and Development, 32, 404–415. doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2009.06.005
Olson, S. L. Lopez-Duran, N., Lunkenheimer, E. S., Chang, H., & Sameroff, A. J. (2011).
Individual differences in the development of early peer aggression: Integrating contribu-
tions of self-regulation, theory of mind, and parenting. Development and Psychopathology, 23,
253–2 66. doi: 10.1017/S0954579410000775
O’Neill, D. K., & Chong, S. C. F. (2001). Preschool children’s difficulty understanding the
types of information obtained through the five senses. Child Development, 72, 803–815.
doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00316
Onishi, K. H., & Baillargeon, R. (2005). Do 15-month-old infants understand false beliefs?
Science, 308, 255–258. doi: 10.1126/science.1107621
Ontai, L. L., & Thompson, R. A. (2002). Patterns of attachment and maternal discourse effects
on children’s emotion understanding from 3-to 5-years of age. Social Development, 11, 433–
450. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00209
Ontai, L. L., & Thompson, R. A. (2008). Attachment, parent-child discourse, and theory-of-
mind development. Social Development, 17, 47–6 0. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2007.00414.x
Oppenheim, D., & Koren-K arie, N. (2002). Mothers’ insightfulness regarding their children’s
internal world: The capacity underlying secure child-mother relationships. Infant Mental
Health Journal, 23, 593–6 05.doi: 10.1002/i mhj.10035
O’Reilly, J., & Peterson, C. C. (2014). Theory of mind at home: Linking authoritative and
authoritarian parenting styles to children’s social understanding. Early Child Development
and Care, 184, 1934–1947. doi: 10.1080/03004430.2014.894034
O’Reilly, J., & Peterson, C. C. (2015). Maltreatment and advanced theory of mind devel-
opment in school-aged children. Journal of Family Violence, 30, 93–102. doi: 10.1007/
s10896-014-9647-9
Ornaghi, V., Brockmeier, J., & Gavazzi, I. G. (2011). The role of language games in children’s
understanding of mental states: A training study. Journal of Cognition and Development, 12,
239–259. doi: 10.1080/15248372.2011.563487
Ornaghi, V., Brockmeier, J., & Gavazzi, I. (2014). Enhancing social cognition by training chil-
dren in emotion understanding: A primary school study. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 119, 26–39. doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2013.10.005
Ornaghi, V., Gavazzi, I., Cherubin, E., Conte, E., & Piralli, F. (2015). ‘Let’s talk about emotions!’
The effect of conversational training on preschoolers’ emotion comprehension and proso-
cial orientation. Social Development, 24, 166–183. doi: 10.1111/sode.12091
Osorio, A., Martins, C., Meins, E., Martins, E. C., & Soares, I. (2011). Individual and relational
contributions to parallel and joint attention in infancy. Infant Behavior and Development, 34,
515–524. doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2011.07.005
310 R eferences
Palacios, J. R. P., & Alvarez, M. P. S. (2006). Apego adulto: Los modelos operantes internes y la
teoria de la mente. Terapia psicologica, 24, 201–210.
Parke, R. D. (1978). Parent-infant interaction: Progress, paradigms, and problems. In G. P
Sackett (Ed.), Observing behavior: Vol. 1. Theory and application in mental retardation (pp. 69–
94). Baltimore, MD: University Park Press.
Parke, R. D. (2002). Fathers and families. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting: Vol.
3. Being and becoming a parent (2nd ed., pp. 27–73). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Parke, R. D., & Buriel, R. (2006). Socialization in the family: Ethnic and ecological perspec-
tives. In W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Series Eds.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of
child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and personality development (6th ed., pp. 429–504).
New York, NY: Wiley.
Parke, R. D., & Clarke-Stewart, A. (2011). Social development. New York, NY: Wiley.
Parker, A. E., Halberstadt, A. G., Dunsmore, J. C., Townley, G., Bryant, A., Thompson, J. A.,
& Beale, K. S. (2012). “Emotions are a window into one’s heart”: A qualitative analysis of
parental beliefs about children’s emotions across three ethnic groups. Monographs of the
Society for Research in Child Development, 77, 1–136. doi: 10.1111/j.1540-5834.2012.00676.x
Pasquini, E. S., Corriveau, K. H., Koenig, M., & Harris, P. L. (2007). Preschoolers monitor the
relative accuracy of informants. Developmental Psychology, 43, 1216–1226. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.43.5.1216
Paterson, A. D., Babb, K. A., Camodeca, A., Goodwin, J., Hakim-L arson, J., Voelker, S., & Gragg,
M. (2012). Emotion-R elated Parenting Styles (ERPS): A short form for measuring paren-
tal meta-emotion philosophy. Early Education and Development, 23, 583–6 02. doi: 10.1080/
10409289.2011.569316
Pavarini, G., de Holland Souza, D., & Hawk, C. K. (2013). Parental practices and theory
of mind development. Journal of Child and Family Studies, 22, 844–853. doi: 10.1007/
s10826-012-9643-8
Pawlby, S., Fernyhough, C., Meins, E., Pariante, C. M., Seneviratne, G., & Bentall, R. P.
(2010). Mind-m indedness and maternal responsiveness in infant-mother interactions in
mothers with severe mental illness. Psychological Medicine, 40, 1861–1869. doi: 10.1017/
S0033291709992340
Pears, K. C., & Fisher, P. A. (2005). Emotion understanding and theory of mind among mal-
treated children in foster care: Evidence of deficits. Development and Psychopathology, 17,
47–65. doi: 10.1017/S0954579405050030
Pears, K. C., Fisher, P. A., Bruce, J., Kim, H. K., & Yoerger, K. (2010). Early elementary school
adjustment of maltreated children in foster care: The roles of inhibitory control and caregiver
involvement. Child Development, 81, 1550–1564. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2010.01491.x
Pears, K. C., & Moses, L. J. (2003). Demographics, parenting, and theory of mind in preschool
children. Social Development, 12, 1–19. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00219
Pebley, A., Hurtado, E., & Goldman, N. (1999). Beliefs about children’s illness. Journal of Biosocial
Science, 31, 195–219. doi: org.lp.hscl.ufl.edu/
Pelaez, M., Virues-Ortega, J., Field, T. M., & Schnerch, G. (2013). Social referencing in infants
of mothers with symptoms of depression. Infant Behavior and Development, 36, 548–556.
doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2013.05.003
Peng, M., Johnson, C., Pollock, J., Glasspool, R., & Harris, P. (1992). Training young chil-
dren to acknowledge mixed emotions. Cognition and Emotion, 6, 387–4 01. doi: 10.1080/
02699939208409693
Perez Rivera, M. B., & Dunsmore, J. C. (2011). Mothers’ acculturation and beliefs about emo-
tions, mother-child emotion discourse, and children’s emotion understanding in Latino
families. Early Education and Development, 22, 324–354. doi: 10.1080/10409281003702000
Perner, J. (1991). Understanding the representational mind. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Perner, J. (1995). The many faces of belief: Reflections on Fodor’s and the child’s theory of mind.
Cognition, 57, 241–2 69. doi: 10.1016/0 010-0277(95)00673-1
R eferences 311
Perner, J. (2010). Who took the cog out of cognitive science? Mentalism in an era of anticogni-
tivism. In P. A. Frensch & R. Schwarzer (Eds.), Cognition and neuropsychology: International
perspectives on psychological science (Vol. 1, pp. 241–2 61). Hove, UK: Psychology Press.
Perner, J., Lang, B., & Kloo, D. (2002). Theory of mind and self-control: More than a common
problem of inhibition. Child Development, 73, 752–767. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00436
Perner, J., & Roessler, J. (2012). From infants’ to children’s appreciation of belief. Trends in
Cognitive Science, 16, 519–525. doi: 10.1016/j.tics.2012.08.004
Perner, J., Ruffman, T., & Leekam, S. R. (1994). Theory of mind is contagious: You catch it from
your sibs. Child Development, 65, 1228–1238. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1994.tb00814.x
Perner, J., & Wimmer, H. (1985). “John thinks that Mary thinks that. … Attribution of second-
order beliefs by 5-to 10-year-old children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 39, 437–
471. doi: 10.1016/0 022-0 965(85)90051-7
Peskin, J., & Astington, J. W. (2004). The effects of adding metacognitive language to story texts.
Cognitive Development, 19, 253–273. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2004.01.003
Peterson, C. C., Garnett, M., Kelly, A., & Attwood, T. (2009). Everyday social and conversation
applications of theory-of-m ind understanding by children with autism-spectrum disorders
or typical development. European Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 18, 105–115.
Peterson, C. C., & Slaughter, V. P. (2003). Opening windows into the mind: Mothers’ prefer-
ences for mental state explanations and children’s theory of mind. Cognitive Development,
18, 399–429. doi: 10.1016/S0885-2 014(03)00041-
Peterson, C. C., Wellman, H. M., & Liu, D. (2005). Steps in theory-of-m ind development
for children with deafness or autism. Child Development, 76, 502–517. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2005.00859.x
Piaget, J. (1926). The language and thought of the child. New York, NY: Harcourt Brace.
Piaget, J. (1928). Judgment and reasoning in the child. London, UK: Routledge and Kegan Paul.
Piaget, J., & Inhelder, B. (1956). The child’s conception of space. London, UK: Routledge and
Kegan Paul.
Pillow, B. (2012). Children’s discovery of the active mind: Phenomenological awareness, social experience
and knowledge about cognition. New York, NY: Springer.
Pillow, B. H., Mash, C., Aloian, S., & Hill, V. (2002). Facilitating children’s understanding of
misinterpretation: Explanatory effects and improvements in perspective-taking. Journal of
Genetic Psychology, 163, 133–148. doi: 10.1080/0 0221320209598673
Pinquart, M., Feufner, C., & Ahnert, L. (2013). Meta-a nalytic evidence for stability in attach-
ments from infancy to early childhood. Attachment and Human Development, 15, 189–218.
doi: 10.1080/14616734.2013.746257
Pleck, J. H. (2010). Paternal involvement: Revised conceptualization and theoretical linkages
with child outcomes. In M. H. Lamb (Ed.), The role of the father in child development (5th ed.,
pp. 58–93). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Pleck, J. H., & Masciadrelli, B. (2004). Paternal involvement in U.S. residential fathers: Levels,
sources, and consequences. In M. H. Lamb (Ed.), The role of the father in child development
(4th ed., pp. 222–271). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Pollak, S. D. (2008). Mechanisms linking early experience and the emergence of emo-
tions: Illustrations from the study of maltreated children. Current Directions in Psychological
Science, 17, 370–375. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8721.2008.00608.x
Pollak, S. D., & Sinha, P. (2002). Effects of early experience on children’s recognition of facial dis-
plays of emotion. Developmental Psychology, 38, 784–791. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.38.5.784
Pons, F., de Rosnay, M., Bender, P. K., Doudin, P., Harris, P. L., & Gimenez-Dasi, M. (2014).
The impact of abuse and learning difficulties on emotion understanding in late child-
hood and early adolescence. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 175, 301–317. doi: 10.1080/
00221325.2014.903224
Pons, F., & Harris, P. L. (2000). TEC (Test of Emotion Comprehension). Oxford, UK: Oxford
University Press.
312 R eferences
Pons, F., Harris, P. L., & de Rosnay, M. (2004). Emotion comprehension between 3 and
11 years: Developmental periods and hierarchical organization. European Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 1, 127–152. doi: 10.1080/17405620344000022
Pons, F., Harris, P. L., & Doudin, P.-A . (2002). Teaching emotion understanding. European
Journal of Psychology of Education, 17, 293–304. doi: 10.1007/BF03173538
Poulin-Dubois, D., Brooker, I., & Polonia, A. (2011). Infants prefer to imitate a reliable person.
Infant Behavior and Development, 34, 303–309. doi: 10.1016/j.infbeh.2011.01.006
Pratt, C., & Bryant, P. (1990). Young children understand that looking leads to knowing (as
long as they are looking in a single barrel). Child Development, 61, 973–982. doi: 10.2307/
1130869
Pratt, M. W., Kerig, P., Cowan, P. A., & Cowan, C. P. (1988). Mothers and fathers teaching
3-year-olds: Authoritative parenting and adult scaffolding of young children’s learning.
Developmental Psychology, 24, 832– 839. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.24.6.832
Premack, D., & Woodruff, G. (1978). Does the chimpanzee have a theory of mind? Behavioral and
Brain Sciences, 1, 515–526. doi: 10.1017/S0140525X00076512
Putnam, S. P., Sanson, A. V., & Rothbart, M. K. (2002). Child temperament and parenting.
In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting: Vol. 1. Children and parenting (2nd ed.,
pp. 255–277). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Puustinen, M., Lyyra, A., Metsapelto, R., & Pulkkinen, L. (2008). Children’s help seeking: The role
of parenting. Learning and Instruction, 18, 160–171. doi: 10.1016/j.learninstruc.2007.02.001
Qu, L., Pen, P., Chee, Y. Y., & Chen, L. (2015). Teachers’ theory-of-m ind coaching and children’s
executive function predict the training effect of sociodramatic play on children’s theory of
mind. Social Development, 24, 716-733. doi: 10.1111/sode.12116
Racine, T. P. (2012). Getting beyond rich and lean views of joint attention. In A. Seeman (Ed.),
Joint attention (pp. 21–42). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Racine, T. P., Carpendale, J. I. M., & Turnbull, W. (2006). Cross-sectional and longitudinal rela-
tions between mother-child talk about conflict and children’s social understanding. British
Journal of Psychology, 97, 521–536. doi: 10.1348/0 00712606X105714
Raikes, H. A., & Thompson, R. A. (2006). Family emotional climate, attachment security and
young children’s emotion knowledge in a high risk sample. British Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 24, 89–104. doi: 10.1348/026151005X70427
Rajendran, G., & Mitchell, P. (2007). Cognitive theories of autism. Developmental Review, 27,
224–2 60. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2007.02.001
Rakoczy, H., Tomasello, M., & Striano, T. (2006). The role of experience and discourse in chil-
dren’s developing understanding of pretend play actions. British Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 24, 305–335. doi: 10.1348/026151005X36001
Rakoczy, H., Warneken, F., & Tomasello, M. (2007). “This way!” “No! That way!”—3 -year-olds
know that two people can have mutually incompatible desires. Cognitive Development, 22,
47–68. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2006.08.002
Randell, A. C., & Peterson, C. C. (2009). Affective qualities of sibling disputes, mothers’ con-
flict attitudes, and children’s theory of mind development. Social Development, 18, 857–874.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2008.00513.x
Raver, C. C., & Leadbeater, B. J. (1993). The problem of the other in research on theory
of mind and social development. Human Development, 36, 350–3 62. doi: 0.1159/
000278223
Raver, C. C., & Leadbeater, B. J. (1995). Factors influencing joint attention between socio-
economically disadvantaged adolescent mothers and their infants. In C. Moore &
P. J. Dunham (Eds.), Joint attention: Its origins and role in development (pp. 251–271). Hillsdale,
NJ: Erlbaum.
Raver, C. C., & Spagnola, M. (2002). “When my mommy was angry, I was speechless”: Children’s
perceptions of maternal emotional expressiveness within the context of economic hard-
ship. Marriage and Family Review, 34, 63–88. doi: 10.1300/J002v34n01_0 4
R eferences 313
Raviv, A., Bar-Tal, D., Raviv, A., & Houminer, D. (1990). Development in children’s perceptions
of epistemic authorities. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 8, 157–169. doi: 10.1111/
j.2044-835X.1990.tb00830.x
Raviv, A., Bar-Tal, D., Raviv, A., & Peleg, D. (1990). Perception of epistemic authorities by
children and adolescents. Journal of Youth and Adolescence, 19, 495–510. doi: 10.1007/
BF01537477
Recchia, H. E., Howe, N., Ross, H. S., & Alexander, S. (2010). Children’s understanding and pro-
duction of verbal irony in family conversations. British Journal of Developmental Psychology,
28, 255–274. doi: 10.1348/026151008X401903
Reddy, V. (2008). How infants know minds. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Reese, E. (2010). The development of autobiographical memory: Origins and consequences. In
P. J. Bauer (Ed.), Advances in child development and behavior (Vol. 37, pp. 145–2 00). London,
UK: Elsevier. doi: 10.1016/S0885-2 014(05)80002-4
Reese, E., & Cleveland, E. S. (2006). Mother-child reminiscing and children’s understanding of
mind. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 52, 17–43. doi: 10.1353/mpq.2006.0007
Reese, E., Haden, C. A., & Fivush, R. (1996). Mothers, fathers, daughters, sons: Gender differ-
ences in autobiographical reminiscing. Research on Language and Social Interaction, 29, 27–
56. doi: 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2901_3
Reid, B. V., & Valsiner, J. (1986). Consistency, praise, and love: Folk theories of American par-
ents. Ethos, 14, 282–304. doi: 10.1525/eth.1986.14.3.02a00030
Repacholi, B. M., & Gopnik, A. (1997). Early reasoning about desires: Evidence from 14-and
18-month-olds. Developmental Psychology, 33, 12–21. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.33.1.12
Repacholi, B. M., & Meltzoff, A. N. (2007). Emotional eavesdropping: Infants selectively
respond to indirect emotional signals. Child Development, 78, 503–521. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2007.01012.x
Repacholi, B., & Trapolini, T. (2004). Attachment and preschool children’s understanding
of maternal versus non-maternal psychological states. British Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 22, 395–415. doi: 10.1348/0261510041552693
Rhodes, M., & Wellman, H. M. (2013). Constructing a new theory from old ideas and new evi-
dence. Cognitive Science, 37, 592–6 04. doi: 10.1111/cogs.12031
Roberts, S., Fyfield, R., Baibazarova, E., van Goozen, S., Culling, J. F., & Hay, D. F. (2013).
Parental speech at 6 months predicts joint attention at 12 months. Infancy, 18, E1–E15.
doi: 10.1111/i nfa.12018
Robinson, E. J., & Einav, S. (Eds.). (2014). Trust and skepticism: Children’s selective learning from
testimony. New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Robinson, E. J., Haigh, S. N., & Nurmsoo, E. (2008). Children’s working understanding of knowl-
edge sources: Confidence in knowledge gained from testimony. Cognitive Development, 23,
105–118. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2007.05.001
Robinson, E. J., & Mitchell, P. (1995). Masking of children’s early understanding of the repre-
sentational mind: Backwards explanation versus prediction. Child Development, 66, 1022–
1039. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1995.tb00920.x
Robinson, E. J., & Nurmsoo, E. (2009). When do children learn from unreliable speakers?
Cognitive Development, 24, 16–22. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2008.08.001
Robinson, E. J., Nurmsoo, E, & Einav, S. (2014). Does understanding about knowledge and belief
influence children’s trust in testimony? In E. J. Robinson & S. Einav (Eds.), Trust and skepti-
cism: Children’s selective learning from testimony (pp. 42–5 4). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Roger, K. M., Rinaldi, C. M., & Howe, N. (2012). Mothers’ and fathers’ internal state language
with their young children: An examination of gender differences during an emotions task.
Infant and Child Development, 21, 646–6 66. doi: 10.1002/icd.1762
Rohrer, L. M., Cicchetti, D., Rogosch, F. A., Toth, S. L., & Maughan, A. (2011). Effects of mater-
nal negativity and or early and recent recurrent depressive disorder on children’s false
belief understanding. Developmental Psychology, 47, 170–181. doi: 10.1037/a0021305
314 R eferences
Rollins, P. R., & Greenwald, L. C. (2013). Affect attunement during mother-infant interac-
tion: How specific intensities predict the stability of infants’ coordinated joint attention
skills. Imagination, Cognition, and Personality, 32, 339–366. doi: 10.2190/IC.32.4.c
Rosenblum, K. L., McDonough, S. C., Sameroff, A., & Muzik, M. (2008). Reflection in thought
and action: Maternal parenting reflectivity predicts mind-m inded comments and interac-
tive behavior. Infant Mental Health Journal, 29, 362–376. doi: 10.1002/i mhj.20184
Rostan, C., Sidera, F., Serrano, J., Amado, A. Valles-Majori, E., Esteban, M., & Serrat, E. (2014).
Fostering theory of mind development: Short-and medium-term effects of training false
belief understanding. Journal for the Study of Education and Development, 37, 498–529.
doi: 10.1080/02103702.2014.965464
Rowe, D. (1994). The limits of family influence: Genes, experience, and behavior. New York,
NY: Guilford Press.
Rubin, K. H., Bukowski, W. M., & Parker, J. G. (2006). Peer interactions, relationships, and
groups. In W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Series Eds.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of
child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and personality development (6th ed., pp. 571–6 45).
New York, NY: Wiley.
Rubin, K. H., & Chung, O. B. (Eds.). (2006). Parenting beliefs, behavior, and parent-child rela-
tions: A cross-cultural perspective. New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Rubin, K. H., & Mills, R. S. L. (1992). Parents’ thoughts about children’s socially adaptive and
maladaptive behaviors: Stability, change, and individual differences. In I. E. Sigel, A.V.
McGillicuddy-De Lisi, & J. J. Goodnow (Eds.), Parental belief systems (2nd ed., pp. 41–69).
Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Ruffman, T. (2014). To belief or not belief: Children’s theory of mind. Developmental Review, 34,
265–293. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2014.04.001
Ruffman, T., Perner, J., Naito, M., Parkin, L., & Clements, W. A. (1998). Older (but not younger)
siblings facilitate false belief understanding. Developmental Psychology, 34, 161–174.
doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.34.1.161
Ruffman, T., Perner, J., & Parkin, L. (1999). How parenting style affects false belief understand-
ing. Social Development, 8, 395–411. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00103
Ruffman, T., Slade, L., & Crowe, E. (2002). The relation between children’s and mothers’ men-
tal state language and theory-of-m ind understanding. Child Development, 73, 734–751.
doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.0043
Ruffman, T., Slade, L., Devitt, K., & Crowe, E. (2006). What mothers say and what they do: The
relation between parenting, theory of mind, language, and conflict/cooperation. British
Journal of Developmental Psychology, 24, 105–124. doi: 10.1348/026151005X82848
Russell, J. (1992). The theory theory: So good they named it twice? Cognitive Development, 7,
485–519. doi: 10.1016/0885-2 014(92)80005-Z
Rutter, M., Andersen-Wood, L., Beckett, C., Bredenkamp, D., Castle, J., Groothues, C., … the
English and Romanian Adoptees (ERA) Study Team. (1999). Quasi-autistic patterns fol-
lowing severe early global privation. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 40, 537–5 49.
doi: 10.1111/1469-7610.00472
Rutter, M., Sonuga-Barke, E. J., Beckett, C., Castle, J., Kreppner, J., Kumsta, R., … Bell, C. A.
(2010). Deprivation- specific psychological patterns: Effects of institutional depriva-
tion. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 75, 1–252. doi: 10.1111/
j.1540-5834.2010.00547.x
Saarni, C., Campos, J. J., Camras, L. A., & Witherington, D. (2006). Emotional develop-
ment: Action, communication, and understanding. In W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Series
Eds.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and
personality development (6th ed., pp. 226–299). New York, NY: Wiley.
Sabbagh, M. A., & Seamans, E. L. (2008). Intergenerational transmission of theory-of-m ind.
Developmental Science, 11, 354–360. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2008.00680.x
R eferences 315
Saffran, J. R., Aslin, R. N., & Newport, E. L. (1996). Statistical learning by 8-month-old infants.
Science, 274, 1926–1928. doi: 10.1126/science.274.5294.1926
Sage, K. D., & Baldwin, D. (2015). Children’s use of self-paced slideshows: An extension of the
video deficit effect? Journal of Research in Childhood Education, 29, 90–114. doi: 10.1080/
02568543.2014.978919
Salmon, K., Evans, I. M., Moskowitz, S., Grouden, M., Parkes, F., & Miller, E. (2013). The com-
ponents of young children’s emotion knowledge: Which are enhanced by adult emotion
talk? Social Development, 22, 94–110. doi: 10.1111/sode.12004
Sameroff, A. (Ed.). (2009). The transactional model of development: How children and contexts shape
each other. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Sameroff, A. J., & Feil L. A. (1985). Parental concepts of development. In I. E. Sigel (Ed.), Parental
belief systems (pp. 83–105). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
San Juan, V., & Astington, J. W. (2012). Bridging the gap between implicit and explicit
understanding: How language development promotes the processing and representa-
tion of false belief. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 30, 105–122. doi: 10.1111/
j.2044-835X.2011.02051.x
Schacht, R., Hammond, L., Marks, M., Wood, B., & Conroy, S. (2013). The relation between
mind-m indedness in mothers with borderline personality disorder and mental state
understanding in their children. Infant and Child Development, 22, 68–8 4. doi: 10.1002/
icd.1766
Schmitow, C., & Stenberg, G. (2013). Social referencing in 10-month-old infants. European
Journal of Developmental Psychology, 10, 533–5 45. doi: 10.1080/17405629.2013.763473
Schneider, B. H., Atkinson, L., & Tardif, C. (2001). Child-parent attachment and children’s
peer relations: A quantitative review. Developmental Psychology, 37, 86–100. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.37.1.86
Schofield, T. J., Conger, R. D., & Neppi, T. K. (2014). Positive parenting, beliefs about parental
efficacy, and active coping: Three sources of intergenerational resilience. Journal of Family
Psychology, 28, 973–9 78. doi: 10.1037/fam0000024.
Scholl, B. J., & Leslie, A. M. (1999). Modularity, development, and “theory of mind.” Mind and
Language, 14, 131–153. doi: 10.1111/1468-0 017.00106
Scholmerich, A., Lamb, M. E., Leyendecker, B., & Fracasso, M. P. (1997). Mother-infant
teaching interactions and attachment security in Euro-A merican and Central-A merican
immigrant families. Infant Behavior and Development, 20, 165– 174. doi: 10.1016/
S0163- 6383(97)90019-9
Sears, R. R. (1975). Your ancients revisited: A history of child development. In E. M. Hetherington
(Ed.), Review of child development research (Vol. 5, pp. 1–73). Chicago, IL: University of
Chicago Press.
Sebald, H. (1989). Adolescent peer orientation: Changes in the support system during the last
three decades. Adolescence, 24, 937–945.
Seeman, A. (Ed.). (2012). Joint attention. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Sellabona, E. S., Sanchez, C. R., Majoral, E. V., Guitart, M. E., Caballero, F. S., & Ortiz, J. S.
(2013). Labelling improves false belief understanding: A training study. Spanish Journal of
Psychology, 16, 1–14. doi: org/10.1017/sjp.2013.8
Sessa, F. M., Avenevoli, S., Steinberg, L., & Morris, A. S. (2001). Correspondence among
informants on parenting: Preschool children, mothers, and observers. Journal of Family
Psychology, 15, 53–68. doi: 0.1037//0893-3200.I5.1.53
Shackman, J. A., & Pollak, S. D. (2005). Experiential influences on multimodal perception of
emotion. Child Development, 76, 1116–1126. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2005.00901.x
Shahaeian, A., Nielsen, M., Peterson, C. C., & Slaughter, V. (2014). Iranian mothers’ disciplinary
strategies and theory of mind in children: A focus on belief understanding. Journal of Cross-
Cultural Psychology, 45, 1110–1123. doi: 10.1177/0 022022114534772
316 R eferences
Shahaeian, A., Peterson, C. C., Slaughter, V., & Wellman, H. M. (2011). Culture and the
sequence of steps in theory of mind development. Developmental Psychology, 47, 1239–1247.
doi: 10.1037/a0023899
Shai, D., & Belsky, J. (2011a). Parental embodied mentalizing: Let’s be explicit about
what we mean by implicit. Child Development Perspectives, 5, 187–188. doi: 10.1111/
j.1750-8606.2011.00195.x
Shai, D., & Belsky, J. (2011b). When words just won’t do: Introducing parental embodied men-
talizing. Child Development Perspectives, 5, 173–180. doi: 10.1111/j.1750-8606.2011.00181.x
Sharp, C., & Fonagy, P. (2008). The parent’s capacity to treat the child as a psychological
agent: Constructs, measures, and implications for developmental psychopathology. Social
Development, 17, 737–754. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2007.00457.x
Sharp, C., Fonagy, P., & Goodyer, I. N. (2006). Imagining your child’s mind: Psychosocial
adjustment and mothers’ ability to predict their children’s attributional response styles.
British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 24, 197–214. doi: 10.1348/026151005X82569
10.1348/026151005X82569
Sharp, C., Fonagy, P., & Goodyer, I. (Eds.). (2008). Social cognition and developmental psychopa-
thology. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Shatz, M., Diesendruck, G., Martinez-Beck, I., & Akar, D. (2003). The influence of language and
socioeconomic status on children’s understanding of false belief. Developmental Psychology,
39, 717–729. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.39.4.717
Shatz, M., Dyer, J., Marchetti, A., & Massaro, D. (2006). Culture and mental states: A compari-
son of English and Italian versions of children’s books. In A. Antonetti, O. Liverta-Sempio,
& A. Marchetti (Eds.), Theory of mind and language in developmental contexts (pp. 93–106).
New York: Springer.
Shinohara, I. (2006). The measurement of maternal mind-mindedness: Its relation to mother-
infant interaction in natural settings. Japanese Journal of Psychology, 77, 244–252. doi: 10.4992/
jjpsy.77.244
Shinohara, I. (2011). Longitudinal relations among maternal mind-m indedness and children’s
understanding of other people’s beliefs and emotions. Japanese Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 22, 240–250.
Siegal, M., & Peterson, C. C. (2008). Language and theory of mind in atypically developing chil-
dren: Evidence from studies of deafness, blindness, and autism. In C. Sharp, P. Fonagy, &
I. Goodyer (Eds.), Social cognition and developmental psychopathology (pp. 81–112). New York,
NY: Oxford University Press.
Siegler, R. S. (2006). Microgenetic analyses of learning. In W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Series
Eds.) & D. Kuhn & R. S. Siegler (Vol. Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 2. Cognition,
perception, and language (6th ed., pp. 464–510). New York, NY: Wiley. doi: 10.1002/
9780470147658.chpsy0211
Siegler, R. S., & Lin, X. (2010). Self-explanations promote children’s learning. In H. S. Waters
& W. Schneider (Eds.), Metacognition, strategy use, and instruction (pp. 85–112). New York,
NY: Guilford Press.
Sigel, I. E. (1992). The belief-behavior connection: A resolvable dilemma? In I. E. Sigel, A.V.
McGillicuddy-De Lisi, & J. J. Goodnow (Eds.), Parental belief systems (2nd ed., pp. 433–
456). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Sigel, I. E., & McGillicuddy-De Lisi, A. V. (2002). Parent beliefs are cognitions: The dynamic
belief systems model. In M. H. Bornstein (Ed.), Handbook of parenting: Vol. 3. Being and
becoming a parent (2nd ed., pp. 485–508). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Skerry, A. E., & Spelke, E. S. (2014). Preverbal infants identify emotional reactions that are incon-
gruent with goal outcomes. Cognition, 130, 204–216. doi: 10.1016/j.cognition.2013.11.002
Skotheim, S., Braarud, H. C., Hoie, K., Markhus, M. W., Malde, M. K., Graff, I. E., …
Stormark, K. M. (2013). Subclinical levels of maternal depression and infant sensitivity
R eferences 317
to social contingency. Infant Behavior and Development, 36, 419–426. doi: 10.1016/
j.infbeh.2013.03.009
Slade, A. (1987). Quality of attachment and early symbolic play. Developmental Psychology, 23,
78–85. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.23.1.78
Slaughter, V. (1998). Children’s understanding of pictorial and mental representations. Child
Development, 69, 321–332. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1998.tb06191.x
Slaughter, V., & Gopnik, A. (1996). Conceptual coherence in the child’s theory of mind: Training
children to understand belief. Child Development, 67, 2967–2988. doi: 10.2307/1131762
Slaughter, V., & McConnell, D. (2003). Emergence of joint attention: Relationships between
gaze following, social referencing, imitation, and naming in infancy. Journal of Genetic
Psychology, 164, 54–71. doi: 10.1080/0 0221320309597503
Slaughter, V., & Perez-Zapata, D. (2014). Cultural variations in the development of mind read-
ing. Child Development Perspectives, 8, 237–2 41. doi: 10.1111/cdep.12091
Slaughter, V., & Peterson, C. C. (2012). How conversational input shapes theory of mind devel-
opment in infancy and early childhood. In M. Siegal & L. Surian (Eds.). Access to language
and cognitive development (pp. 3–22). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Slaughter, V., Peterson, C. C., & Carpenter, M. (2008). Maternal talk about mental states
and the emergence of joint visual attention. Infancy, 13, 640– 659. doi: 10.1080/
15250000802458807
Slaughter, V., Peterson, C. C., & Carpenter, M. (2009). Maternal mental state talk and infants’
early gestural communication. Journal of Child Language, 36, 1053–1074. doi: 10.1017/
S0305000908009306
Slaughter, V., Peterson, C. C., & Mackintosh, E. (2007). Mind what mother says: Narrative
input and theory of mind in typical children and those on the autism spectrum. Child
Development, 78, 839-858. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2007.01036.x
Smetana, J. G. (1997). Parenting and the development of social knowledge reconceptual-
ized: A social domain analysis. In J. E. Grusec & L. Kuczynski (Eds.), Parenting and children’s
internalization of values (pp. 162–192). New York, NY: Wiley.
Smetana, J. G., & Daddis, C. (2002). Domain-specific antecedents of parental psychological
control and monitoring: The role of parental beliefs and practices. Child Development, 73,
563–580. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00424
Smetana, J. G., Jambon, M., Conry-Murray, C., & Sturge-A pple, M. L. (2012). Reciprocal
associations between young children’s developing moral judgments and theory of mind.
Developmental Psychology, 48, 1144–1155. doi: 10.1037/a0025891
Sobel, D. M., & Kushnir, T. (2013). Knowledge matters: How children evaluate the reliability
of testimony as a process of rational inference. Psychological Review, 120, 779–797. doi: doi/
10.1037/a0034191
Solomon, J., & George, C. (2008). The measurement of attachment security and related con-
structs in infancy and early childhood. In J. Cassidy & P. R. Shaver (Eds.), Handbook of
attachment (2nd ed., pp. 383–416). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Solomon, M., Goodlin-Jones, B. L., & Anders, T. F. (2004). A social adjustment enhancement
intervention for high functioning autism, Asperger’s syndrome, and pervasive devel-
opmental disorders NOS. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 34, 649–6 68.
doi: 10.1007/s10803-0 04-5286-y
Sorkhabi, N., & Mandara, J. (2013). Are the effects of Baumrind’s styles culturally specific or
culturally equivalent? In R. E. Larzelere, A. S. Morris, & A. W. Harrist (Eds.), Authoritative
parenting: Synthesizing nurturance and discipline for optimal child development (pp. 113–135).
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Southgate, V., Chevallier, C., & Csibra, G. (2010). Seventeen-month-olds appeal to false
beliefs to interpret others’ referential communication. Developmental Science, 13, 907–912.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2009.00946.x
318 R eferences
Sperber, D., & Wilson, D. (1981). Relevance: Communication and cognition. Cambridge, MA,
Harvard University Press.
Spitz, R. (1945). Hospitalism—a n inquiry into the genesis of psychiatric conditions in early
childhood. Psychoanalytic Study of the Child, 1, 53–74.
Sprung, M. (2010). Clinically relevant measures of children’s theory of mind and knowledge
about thinking: Non-standard and advanced measures. Child and Adolescent Mental Health,
15, 204–216. doi: 10.1111/j.1475-3588.2010.00568.x
Sprung, M., Munch, H. M., Harris, P. L., Ebesutani, C., & Hofmann, S. G. (2015). Children’s
emotion understanding: A meta-a nalysis of training studies. Developmental Review, 37, 41-
65. doi: 10.1111/sode.12116
Sprung, M., Wilson, A., Harris, P. L., Ebesutani, C., & Hofmann, S. G. (2015). Training chil-
dren’s theory-of-m ind: A meta-a nalysis of controlled studies. Manuscript submitted for
publication.
Sroufe, L. A., Coffino, B., & Carlson, E. A. (2010). Conceptualizing the role of early experi-
ence: Lessons learned from the Minnesota longitudinal study. Developmental Review, 30,
36–51. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2009.12.002
Sroufe, L. A., Egeland, B., Carlson, E. A., & Collins, W. A. (2005). The development of the person: The
Minnesota Study of Risk and Adaptation From Birth to Adulthood. New York, NY: Guilford
Press. doi: 10.1111/j.1469-7610.2007.01794.x
Stattin, H., & Kerr, M. (2000). Parental monitoring: A reinterpretation. Child Development, 71,
1072–1085. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00210
Steele, H., Steele, M., & Croft, C. (2008). Early attachment predicts emotion recognition
at 6 and 11 years old. Attachment and Human Development, 10, 379–393.doi: 10.1080/
14616730802461409
Steele, H., Steele, M., Croft, C., & Fonagy, P. (1999). Infant-mother attachment at one year pre-
dicts children’s understanding of mixed emotions at six years. Social Development, 8, 161–
178. doi: 10.1111/1467-9507.00089
Steele, M., Steele, H., & Johansson, M. (2002). Maternal predictors of children’s social cogni-
tion: An attachment perspective. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 43, 861–872.
doi: 10.1111/1469-7610.00096
Steinberg, L. (2001). We know some things: Parent-adolescent relationships in retrospect and
prospect. Journal of Research on Adolescence, 11, 1–19. doi: 10.1111/1532-7795.00001
Steinberg, L., & Morris, A. S. (2001). Adolescent development. Annual Review of Psychology, 52,
83–110. doi: 10.1146/a nnurev.psych.52.1.83
Stenberg, G. (2009). Selectivity in infant social referencing. Infancy, 14, 457–473. doi: 10.1080/
15250000902994115
Stenberg, G. (2012). Why do infants look at and use positive information from some infor-
mants rather than others in ambiguous situations? Infancy, 17, 642–671. doi: 10.1111/
j.1532-7078.2011.00108.x
Stenberg, G., & Hagekull, B. (2007). Infant looking behavior in ambiguous situations: Social
referencing or attachment behavior? Infancy, 11, 111–129. doi: 10.1111/j.1532-7078.2007.
tb00218.x
Stephens, E., Suarez, S., & Koenig, M. (2015). Early testimonial learning: Monitoring speech
acts and speakers. In J. B. Benson (Ed.), Advances in child development and behavior (Vol. 48,
pp. 151–183). Amsterdam, The Netherlands: Elsevier.
Stevens, J. H., Jr. (1984). Black grandmothers’ and black adolescent mothers’ knowledge about
parenting. Developmental Psychology, 20, 1017–1025. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.20.6.1017
Striano, T., & Berlin, E. (2005). Coordinated affect with mothers and strangers: A longitudinal
analysis of joint engagement between 5 and 9 month of age. Cognition and Emotion, 19, 781–
790. doi: 10.1080/02699930541000002
Striano, T., & Rochat, P. (2000). Emergence of selective social referencing in infancy. Infancy, 1,
253–2 64. doi: 10.1207/S15327078IN0102_7
R eferences 319
Sullivan, K., Zaitchik, D., & Tager-F lusberg, H. (1994). Preschoolers can attribute second-order
beliefs. Developmental Psychology, 30, 395–4 02.doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.30.3.395
Sung, J., & Hsu, H. (2014). Collaborative mother-toddler communication and theory of mind
development at age 4. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology, 35, 381–391. doi: 10.1016/
j.appdev.2014.06.001
Surian, L. (2012). Access to language, social cognition, and lexical development in autism. In
M. Siegal & L. Surian (Eds.). Access to language and cognitive development (pp. 135–160).
New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Symons, D. K. (2001, August). Mother-infant relationship harmony and theory of mind develop-
ment: The roles of sensitive parenting and attachment security. Paper presented at the Xth
European Conference on Developmental Psychology, Stockholm, Sweden.
Symons, D. K. (2004). Mental state discourse, theory of mind, and the internalization of self-
other understanding. Developmental Review, 24, 159–188. doi: 10.1016/j.dr.2004.03.00
Symons, D. K., & Clark, S. E. (2000). A longitudinal study of mother-child relationships
and theory of mind in the preschool period. Social Development, 9, 3–23. doi: 10.1111/
1467-9507.00108
Symons, D. K., Fossum, K. M., & Collins, T. B. K. (2006). A longitudinal study of belief and
desire state discourse during mother-child play and later false belief understanding. Social
Development, 15, 676–692. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2006.00364.x
Symons, D. K., Peterson, C. C., Slaughter, V., Roche, J., & Doyle, E. (2005). Theory of mind
and mental state discourse during book reading and story-telling tasks. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 23, 81–102. doi: 10.1348/026151004X21080
Szekely, E., Lucassen, N., Tiemeier, H., Bakermans-K ranenburg, M. J., Van IJzendoorn, M. H.,
Kok, R., . . . Herba, C. M. (2014). Maternal depressive symptoms and sensitivity are related
to young children’s facial expressive recognition: The Generation R Study. Development and
Psychopathology, 26, 333-3 45. doi: org/10.1017/S0954579413001028
Tadic, V., Pring, L., & Dale, N. (2013). Story discourse and use of mental state language
between mothers and school- aged children with and without visual impairment.
International Journal of Language and Communication Disorders, 48, 679–688. doi: 10.1111/
1460-6984.12040
Tager-F lusberg, H. (2003). Exploring the relationship between theory of mind and social-
communicative functioning in children with autism. In B. Repacholi & V. Slaughter (Eds.),
Individual differences in theory of mind (pp. 197–212). New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Tahiroglu, D., Moses, L. J., Carlson, S. M., Mahy, C. E. V., Olofson, E. L., & Sabbagh, M. A.
(2014). The Children’s Social Understanding Scale: Construction and validation of a
parent-report measure for assessing individual differences in children’s theories of mind.
Developmental Psychology, 50, 2485–2 497. doi: org/10.1037/a0037914
Tarabulsy, G. M., Provost, M. A., Deslandes, J., St- L aurent, D., Moss, E., Lemelin,
J. P., . . . Dassylva, J. (2003). Individual differences in infant still-face response at 6 months.
Infant Behavior and Development, 26, 421– 438. doi: 10.1016/S0163- 6383(03)00039- 0
Tarullo, A. R., Bruce, J., & Gunnar, M. R. (2007). False belief and emotion understand-
ing in post- i nstitutionalized children. Social Development, 16, 57– 78. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-9507.2007.00372.x
Taumoepeau, M., & Reese, E. (2013). Maternal reminiscing, elaborative talk, and chil-
dren’s theory of mind: An intervention study. First Language, 33, 388–410. doi: 10.1177/
0142723713493347
Taumoepeau, M., & Ruffman, T. (2006). Mother and infant talk about mental states relates to
desire language and emotion understanding. Child Development, 77, 465–4 81. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2006.00882.x
Taumoepeau, M., & Ruffman, T. (2008). Stepping stones to others’ minds: Maternal talk relates
to child mental state language and emotion understanding at 15, 24, and 33 months. Child
Development, 79, 284–302. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2007.01126.
320 R eferences
Taylor, M., Esbsenen, B. M., & Bennett, B. T. (1994). Children’s understanding of knowledge
acquisition: The tendency for children to report that they have always known what they just
learned. Child Development, 65, 1581–1604. doi: 10.2307/1131282
Taylor, M., & Hort, B. (1990). Can children be trained in making the distinction
between appearance and reality? Cognitive Development, 5, 89– 9 9. doi: 10.1016/
0885-2 014(90)90014-K
Taylor, M. G. (2013). Gender influences on children’s trust of adult testimony. Journal of
Experimental Child Psychology, 115, 672–680. doi: 10.1016/j.jecp.2013.04.003
Tenenbaum, H. R., Alfieri, L., Brooks, P. J., & Dunne, G. (2008). The effects of explanatory con-
versations on children’s emotion understanding. British Journal of Developmental Psychology,
26, 249–2 63. doi: 10.1348/026151007X231057
Tenenbaum, H. R., & Leaper, C. (2003). Parent- child conversations about gender: The
socialization of gender inequities? Developmental Psychology, 39, 34–47. doi: 10.1037/
0012-1649.39.1.34
Thoermer, C., Sodian, B., Vuori, M., Perst, H., & Kristen, S. (2012). Continuity from an implicit
to an explicit understanding of false belief from infancy to preschool age. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 30, 172–187. doi: 10.1111/j.2044-835X.2011.02067
Thomas, A., Chess, S., & Birch, H. (1968). Temperament and behavior disorders in children.
New York, NY: New York University Press.
Thompson, R. A. (2006a). Conversation and developing understanding: Introduction to the
special issue. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 52, 1–16. doi: /10.1353/mpq.2006.0008
Thompson, R. A. (2006b). The development of the person: Social understanding, relationships,
conscience, self. In W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Series Eds.) & N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.),
Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3. Social, emotional, and personality development (6th ed., pp.
23–98). New York, NY: Wiley.
Thompson, R. (2013). Attachment theory and research: Precis and prospect. In P. Zelazo
(Ed.), The Oxford handbook of developmental psychology: Vol 2. Self and other (pp. 191–216).
New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Thorell, L. B., Lindquist, S., Nutley, S. B., Bohlin, G., & Klingberg, T. (2009). Training and trans-
fer effects of executive functions in preschool children. Developmental Science, 12, 106–113.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2008.00745.x
Thorell, L. B., Rydell, A., & Bohlin, G. (2012). Parent-child attachment and executive functioning
in relation to ADHD symptoms in middle childhood. Attachment and Human Development,
14, 517–532. doi: 10.1080/14616734.2012.706396
Tomasello, M. (1999). The cultural origins of human cognition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press.
Tompkins, V., Farrar, M. J., & Guo, Y. (2013). Siblings, language, and false belief in low-i ncome
children. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 174, 457–4 63. doi: 10.1080/0 0221325.2012.694918
Triesch, J., Teuscher, C., Deak, G. O., & Carlson, E. (2006). Gaze following: Why (not) learn it?
Developmental Science, 9, 125–157. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2006.00470.x
Tronick, E., Als, H., Adamson, L., Wise, S., & Brazelton, T. B. (1978). Infants’ response to entrap-
ment between contradictory messages in face-to-face interaction. Journal of the American
Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 17, 1–13.
Tsai, J. L., Louie, J. Y., Chen, E. E., & Uchida, Y. (2007). Learning what feelings to
desire: Socialization of ideal affect through children’s storybooks. Personality and Social
Psychology Bulletin, 33, 17–30. doi: 1177/0146167206292749
Turnbull, W., & Carpendale, J. I. M. (2009). Talk and children’s understanding of mind. Journal
of Consciousness Studies, 16 (6-8), 140–166.
Turnbull, W., Carpendale, J. I. M., & Racine, T. P. (2008). Relations between mother-child talk
and 3-to 5-year-old children’s understanding of belief beyond mental state terms to talk
about the mind. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 54, 367-385. doi: 10.1353/mpq.0.0004
R eferences 321
Vaala, S. E. (2014). The nature and predictive value of mothers’ beliefs regarding infants’ and
toddlers’ TV/v ideo viewing: Applying the integrative model of behavioral prediction.
Media Psychology, 17, 282–310. doi: 10.1080/15213269.2013.872995
Vaish, A., Grossmann, T., & Woodward, A. (2008). Not all emotions are created equal: The
negativity bias in social-emotional development. Psychological Bulletin, 134, 383–4 03.
doi: 10.1037/0 033-2909.134.3.383
Vaish, A., & Striano, T. (2004). Is visual reference necessary? Contributions of facial versus
vocal cues in 12-month-olds social referencing behavior. Developmental Science, 7, 261–2 69.
doi: 10.1111/j.1467-7687.2004.00344.x
Van Bergen, P., Salmon, K., Dadds, M. R., & Allen, J. (2009). The effects of mother training in
emotion-r ich, elaborative reminiscing on children’s shared recall and emotion knowledge.
Journal of Cognition and Development, 10, 162–187. doi: 10.1080/15248370903155825
VanderBorgtht, M., & Jaswal, V. K. (2009). Who knows best? Preschoolers sometimes pre-
fer child informants over adult informants. Infant and Child Development, 18, 61–71.
doi: 10.1002/icd.591
Vander Wege, B., Sanchez Gonzalez, M. L. S., Friedlmeier W., Mihalca, L. M., Goodrich, E.,
& Corapci, F. (2014). Emotion displays in media: A comparison between American,
Romanian, and Turkish children’s storybooks. Frontiers in Psychology, 5, article 600.
doi: 10.3389/f psyg.2014.00600
van IJzendoorn, M. H., Vereijken, C. M. J. L., Bakermanns-K raneburg, J., & Riksen-Walraven,
J. M. (2004). Assessing attachment security with the Attachment Q-Set: Meta-a nalytic evi-
dence for the validity of the observer AQS. Child Development, 75, 1188–1213. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2004.00733.x
Vanwoerden, S., Kalpakci, A. H., & Sharp, C. (2015). Experiential avoidance mediates the link
between maternal attachment style and theory of mind. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 57, 117–
124. doi: org/10.1016/j.comppsych.2014.11.015
Vaughan, A., Mundy, P., Block, J., Burnette, C., Delgado, C., Gomez, Y., … Pomares, Y. (2003).
Child, caregiver, and temperament contributions to infant joint attention. Infancy, 4, 603–
616. doi: 10.1207/S15327078IN0404_11
Vaughn, B. E., Bost, K. K., & van IJzendoorn, M. H. (2008). Attachment and tempera-
ment: Additive and interactive influences on behavior, affect, and cognition during infancy
and childhood. In J. Cassidy & P. R. Shaver (Eds.), Handbook of attachment (2nd ed., pp.
192–216). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Vinden, P. G. (2001). Parenting attitudes and children’s understanding of mind: A comparison
of Korean and Anglo-A merican families. Cognitive Development, 16, 793–809. doi: 10.1016/
S0885-2 014(01)00059-4
von der Lippe, A., Eilertsen, D. E., Hartmann, E., & Killen, K. (2010). The role of maternal attach-
ment in children’s attachment and cognitive executive functioning: A preliminary study.
Attachment and Human Development, 12, 429–4 44. doi: 10.1080/14616734.2010.501967
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wade, M., Madigan, S., Akbari, E., & Jenkins, J. M. (2015). Cumulative biomedical risk and
social cognition in the second year of life: Prediction and moderation by responsive parent-
ing. Frontiers in Psychology, 6, article 354. doi: 10.3389/f psyg.2015.00354
Wahl, S. (2001, August). Three-year-olds’ development in theory of mind: A microgenetic study. Paper
presented at the 10th European Conference on Developmental Psychology, Uppsala,
Sweden.
Walden, T. A. (1991). Infant social referencing. In J. Garber & K. A. Dodge (Eds.), The devel-
opment of emotion regulation and dysregulation (pp. 69–88). New York, NY: Cambridge
University Press.
Walden, T. A ., & Kim, G. (2005). Infants’ social looking toward mothers and strangers. International
Journal of Behavioral Development, 29, 356–360. doi: 10.1080/01650250500166824
322 R eferences
Walker, T. M., Wheatcroft, R., & Camic, P. M. (2012). Mind-m indedness in parents of pre-
schoolers: A comparison between clinical and community samples. Clinical Child Psychology
and Psychiatry, 17, 318–335. doi: 10.1177/1359104511409142
Walker-A ndrews, A., Krogh-Jespersen, S., Mayhew, E., & Coffield, C. (2013). The situated
infant: Learning in context. In M. Legerstee, D. W. Haley, & M. H. Bornstein (Eds.), The
infant mind: Origins of the social brain (pp. 200–219). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Wang, B., Low, J., Jing, Z., & Qinghua, Q. (2012). Chinese preschoolers’ implicit and explicit
false-belief understanding. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 30, 123–140.
doi: 10.1111/j.2044-835X.2011.02052.x
Wang, Q. (2013). The autobiographical self in time and culture. New York, NY: Oxford University
Press.
Wang, Q., Doan, S. N., & Song, Q. (2010). Talking about internal states in mother-child
reminiscing influences children’s self-representations: A cross-c ultural study. Cognitive
Development, 25, 380–393. doi: 10.1016/j.cogdev.2010.08.007
Wang, Q., & Fivush, R. (2005). Mother- child conversations of emotionally salient
events: Exploring the functions of emotional reminiscing in European-A merican and
Chinese families. Social Development, 14, 473–495. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-9507.2005.00312.x
Wang, Y., & Su, Y. (2009). False belief understanding: Children catch it from classmates of
different ages. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 33, 331–336. doi: 10.1177/
0165025409104525
Waters, G. M., & Beck, S. R. (2012). How should we question young children’s understand-
ing of aspectuality? British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 30, 376–392. doi: 10.1111/
j.2044-835X.2011.02044.x
Weimer, A. A., & Guajardo, N. R. (2005). False belief, emotion understanding, and social skills
among Head Start and non-Head Start children. Early Education and Development, 16, 341–
366. doi: 10.1207/s15566935eed1603_3
Welch-R oss, M. K. (1997). Mother– child participation in conversation about the
past: Relationships to preschoolers’ theory of mind. Developmental Psychology, 33, 618–629.
doi:10.1037/0 012-1649.33.4.618
Wellman, H. M. (2011). Reinvigorating explanations for the study of early cognitive develop-
ment. Child Development Perspectives, 5, 33–38. doi: 10.1111/j.1750-8606.2010.00154.x
Wellman, H. M. (2014). Making minds: How theory of mind develops. New York, NY: Oxford
University Press.
Wellman, H. M., & Cross, D. (2001). Theory of mind and conceptual change. Child Development,
72, 702-707. doi: 10.1111/1467-8624.00309
Wellman, H. M., Cross, D., & Watson, J. (2001). Meta-analysis of theory-of-m ind devel-
opment: The truth about false belief. Child Development, 72, 655–684. doi: 10.1111/
1467-8624.00304
Wellman, H. M., Fang, F., Liu, D., Zhu, L., & Liu, G. (2006). Scaling of theory-of-m ind
understandings in Chinese children. Psychological Science, 17, 1075–1081. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-9280.2006.01830.x
Wellman, H. M., Fang, F., & Peterson, C. C. (2011). Sequential progressions in a theory-of-
mind scale: Longitudinal perspectives. Child Development, 82, 780–792. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-8624.2011.01583.x
Wellman, H. M., Lopez-Duran, S., LaBounty, J., & Hamilton, B. (2008). Infant attention to
intentional action predicts preschool theory of mind. Developmental Psychology, 44, 618–
623. doi: 10.1037/0 012-1649.44.2.618
Wellman, H. M., & Liu, D. (2004). Scaling of theory-of-m ind tasks. Child Development, 75, 523–
541. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8624.2004.00691.x
R eferences 323
Wellman, H. M., & Peterson, C. C. (2013). Deafness, thought bubbles, and theory-of-m ind
development. Developmental Psychology, 49, 2357–2367. doi: 10.1037/a0032419
Wellman, H. M., Phillips, A. T., Dunphy-L elii, S., & LaLonde, N. (2004). Infant social atten-
tion predicts preschool social cognition. Developmental Science, 7, 283–2 88. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2004.00347.x
Wellman, H. M., & Woolley, J. D. (1990). From simple desires to ordinary beliefs: The
early development of everyday psychology. Cognition, 35, 245– 275. doi: 10.1016/
0010-0277(90)90024-E
White, P. J., O’Reilly, M., Streusand, W., Levine, A., Sigafoos, J., Lancioni, G. … Aguilar, J.
(2011). Best practices for teaching joint attention: A systematic review of the inter-
vention literature. Research in Autism Spectrum Disorders, 5, 1283–1295. doi: 10.1016/
j.rasd.2011.02.003
Wimmer, H., & Mayringer, H. (1998). False belief understanding in young children: Explanations
do not develop before predictions. International Journal of Behavioral Development, 22, 403–
422. doi: 10.1080/016502598384441
Wimmer, H., & Perner, J. (1983). Beliefs about beliefs: Representation and constraining func-
tion of wrong beliefs in young children’s understanding of deception. Cognition, 13, 103–
128. doi: 10.1016/0 010-0277(83)90004-5
Woodward, A. L. (2003). Infants’ developing understanding of the link between looker and
object. Developmental Science, 6, 297–311. doi: 10.1111/1467-7687.00286
Woodward, A. L. (2005). The infant origins of intentional understanding. In R.V. Kail (Ed.),
Advances in child development and behavior (Vol. 33, pp. 229–2 62). Oxford, UK: Elsevier.
Woodward, A. L. (2009). Infants’ grasp of others’ intentions. Current Directions in Psychological
Science, 18, 53–57. doi: 10.1111/j.1467-8721.2009.01605.x
Yagmurlu, B., Berument, S. K., & Celimli, S. (2005). The role of institution and home contexts
in theory of mind development. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology, 26, 521–537.
doi: 10.1016/j.appdev.2005.06.004
Yamaguchi, M., Kuhlmeier, V. A., Wynn, K., & vanMarle, K. (2009). Continuity in social
cognition from infancy to childhood. Developmental Science, 12, 746–752. doi: 10.1111/
j.1467-7687.2008.00813.x
Yarrow, M. R., Campbell, J. D., & Burton, R. V. (1970). Recollections of childhood: A study of
the retrospective method. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 35(5,
Serial No. 138). doi: 10.2307/1165649
Yee, D. K., & Eccles, J. S. (1988). Parent perceptions and attributions for children’s math achieve-
ment. Sex Roles, 19, 317–333. doi: 10.1007/BF00289840
Yirmaya, N., Erel, O., Shaked, M., & Solomonica, D. (1998). Meta-a nalyses comparing the-
ory of mind abilities of individuals with autism, individuals with mental retardation,
and normally developing individuals. Psychological Bulletin, 124, 283–307. doi: 10.1037/
0033-2909.124.3.283
Yoon, S. A., Kelso, G. A., Lock, A., & Lyons-R uth, K. (2014). Mother-i nfant joint attention and
sharing: Relations to disorganized attachment and maternal disrupted communication.
Journal of Genetic Psychology, 175, 494-510. doi: 10.1080/0 0221325.2014.964170
Youngblade, L. M., & Dunn, J. (1995). Individual differences in young children’s pretend play
with mother and sibling: Links to relationships and understanding of other people’s feel-
ings and beliefs. Child Development, 66, 1472–1492. doi: 10.2307/1131658
Zahn-Waxler, C., Radke-Yarrow, M., & King. R. A. (1979). Child rearing and children’s proso-
cial initiations toward victims of distress. Child Development, 50, 319–330. doi: 10.2307/
1129406
324 R eferences
Zarbatany, L., & Lamb, M. E. (1985). Social referencing as a function of information
source: Mothers versus strangers. Infant Behavior and Development, 8, 25–33. doi: 10.1016/
S0163- 6383(85)80014-X
Ziv, M., Smadja, M., & Aram, D. (2013). Mothers’ mental-state discourse with preschoolers dur-
ing storybook reading and wordless storybook telling. Early Childhood Research Quarterly,
28, 177–186. doi: 10.1016/j.ecresq.2012.05.005
Ziv, M., Smadja, M., & Aram, D. (2014). Mothers’ and teachers’ mental-state discourse with pre-
schoolers during storybook reading. Journal of Cognitive Education and Psychology, 13, 103–
119. doi: 10.1891/1945-8959.13.1.103
Ziv, M., Smadja, M., & Aram, D. (2015). Preschool teachers’ reference to theory of mind top-
ics in three storybook contexts: Reading, reconstruction and telling. Teaching and Teacher
Education, 45, 14–2 4. doi: 10.1016/j.tate.2014.08.009
AU T HOR I N DE X
Abidin, R. R., 88 Astington, J. W., 9, 15, 24, 31, 34, 35, 36,
Abraham, M. M., 111 39, 100, 166, 233, 242, 268
Adams, S., 192, 193 Atkinson, L., 67
Adamson, L. B., 136, 146, 156 Attwood, T., 216
Adrian, J. E., 168, 172, 174, 177, 178, 182, Auerbach, S., 94, 124, 193
186, 188, 274 Avenevoli, S., 48
Ahnert, L., 114 Aznar, A., 192
Ainsworth, M. D. S., 44, 109, 111, 113, 115,
158, 215, 264 Babu, N., 173
Akar, D., 98 Baillargeon, R., 14–╉15
Akbari, E., 152 Baird, J. A., 142, 166
Akhtar, N., 142 Bakeman, R., 146, 156
Akmal, N., 253 Bakersman-Kranenburg, M. J., 89, 113,
Aktar, E., 160 116, 148
Alario, A. J., 152 Baldwin, A., 62
Alexander, S., 175, 182 Baldwin, C., 62
Alfieri, L., 245, 246 Baldwin, D. A., 139, 142, 218
Allen, J. R., 230, 237, 239, 240, 245 Ball, J., 202
Aloian, S., 233, 237 Bandura, A., 54
Als, H., 136 Banerjee, R., 101, 102, 103, 237
Alvarez, M. P. S., 134 Barends, N., 42
Amato, P., 64 Barnes, J. L., 178
Amsterlaw, J., 247, 248, 249, 250 Baron-Cohen, S., 31, 32, 38, 143, 229
Anders, T. F., 234 Barone, L., 117, 124
Anderson, K., 66 Bar-Tal, D., 256
Andrews, G., 22 Bartsch, K., 12, 13, 19–╉20, 185
Angeard, N., 232, 239 Bascandziev, I., 253
Apostoleris, N. H., 204 Bassett, H. H., 94, 96
Apperly, I. A., 15 Bates, E., 123, 139
Appleton, M., 230, 237 Bates, J. E., 69, 70
Appleyard, K., 115 Baumrind, D., 3, 43, 47, 59, 60, 61, 64, 70, 76,
Aram, D., 42, 186 81, 87, 108, 149, 262–╉63
Arnott, B., 205, 207, 208, 212, 213 Bayliss, A. P., 138
Arranz, E., 89–╉91, 117, 124 Beardsall, L., 21, 191–╉92, 275
Artamendi, J., 89, 117 Beck, S. R., 16
Arterberry, M. E., 148 Beebe, H., 46
Aschersleben, G., 23, 145, 160 Beeghly, M., 21, 167, 168, 178, 186
Ashcroft, A., 229 Begeer, S., 229
Aslin, R., 21 Behne, T., 142
325
326 A u t h o r I n d e x
Doyle, E., 173, 176 Flavell, J. H., 17, 18, 22, 136, 230, 234, 238
Dunleavy, M., 197 Fletcher, B., 214
Dunn, J., 21, 22, 34, 99, 169, 179, 184, 186, 187, Fletcher, J., 85
191, 192, 275 Flom, R., 138, 140
Dunne, G., 245, 246 Flynn, E., 12, 248, 249
Dunphy-Lelii, S., 143, 146, 161, 162, 207, 209 Fonagy, P., 32, 87, 109, 117, 121, 122, 123,
Dunsmore, J. C., 94, 220, 221–22, 224 127, 132, 215, 219
Durand, L., 99 Foote, R. C., 12
Durand, T., 99 Fossum, K. M., 167, 187
Durrant, J. E., 204 Fox, J. K., 234
Dyer, J., 178 Fox, N, 107
Dyer-Seymour, J. R., 178 Fracasso, M. P., 126
Fradley, E., 130, 180
Eagly, A. H., 65 Fraley, R. C., 111, 114
Eaton, K. L., 92, 94, 220 Frampton, K. L., 253
Ebesutani, C., 228 Freedman-Doan, C., 65
Eccles, J., 65, 202 Freedman-Doan, K. S., 65
Eder, R. A., 86 Freeman, N. H., 34
Egeland, E. A., 115 Friedman, N. P., 35, 267
Egliston, K., 160 Fries, A. B., 107
Eilertsen, D. E., 128 Frischen, A., 138
Einav, S., 190, 250, 254 Frith, U., 31
Eisenberg, N., 74, 92, 96 Furnham, A., 202
Emde, R. N., 152 Furrow, D., 24, 168, 172, 179, 180
Ensor, R., 35, 79, 81, 84, 86, 105, 167, 168, Furstenberg, F. F., 62
169, 171, 172, 173, 179, 182, 187, 189, Fusaro, M., 253
190, 196
Ereky-Stevens, K., 207, 210 Gaffan, E. A., 152, 153, 155, 157
Erel, O., 31 Galende, N., 89–91, 101
Esbsensen, B. M., 16 Garcia Perez, R. M. G., 152
Estes, D., 162 Garner, P., 93, 99
Everett, B. A., 17 Garnett, M., 216
Evindar, A., 104 Garnham, W. A., 11
Garvin, M. C., 107, 152
Fabes, R. A., 74, 96, 97 Gauvain, M., 46, 61, 82
Fang, F., 23 Gavazzi, I., 233, 235, 244
Farrant, B. M., 79, 85 Geary, D. C., 71
Farrar, M. J., 33 Gelfand, D. M., 153
Farrow, C., 212 Gelman, S., 250, 253
Fay-Stammbach, T., 35 George, C., 111
Feil L. A., 203 Gergely, G., 139
Feinman, S., 140, 159 Gerrior, K., 212
Feiring, C., 159 Gershoff, E. T., 75–76
Fernald, A., 140 Gerson, S. A., 142
Fernyhough, C., 39, 124, 130, 173, 180, 205, Gilbert, K., 104
206, 207, 208, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215 Glasspool, R., 244, 246
Feufner, C., 114 Gola, A. A. H., 230, 237, 241
Field, D., 228 Goldberger, N. R., 218
Field, T. M., 148, 160 Goldfarb, W., 105
Fikke, L., 157 Goldman, N., 202
Fine, M. A., 75 Goldsmith, D. F., 153
Fishburn, S., 215 Goldsmith, H. H., 162
Fisher, P. A., 102, 105 Goodlin-Jones, B. L., 234
Fisher, T., 150, 156 Goodman, S. H., 104, 192
Fivush, R., 66, 167, 176, 190, 192, 193, 195 Goodnow, J. J., 54, 55, 71, 202, 204
Flanagan, P. J., 152 Goodwin, J., 220
Flavell, E. R., 17, 230, 234, 238 Goodyer, I., 32, 215
A u t h o r I n d e x 329
Gopnik, A., 9, 21, 24, 28, 37, 234, 236, 237, 239 Healy, S., 152
Gotlib, I. H., 104 Henderson, E. N., 153
Gottman, J. M., 220 Her, P., 221
Grace, S. L., 104 Hernandez-Reif, M., 148
Graczyk, P. A., 103 Hertenstein, M. J., 140
Graham, S., 204 Hetherington, E. M., 49
Graham, S. A., 147 Heyes, C., 15
Grazzani, I. G., 172, 173, 243, 245, 246 Heyman, G. D., 253
Greathouse, S., 202 Hickley, A. K., 257
Gredeback, G., 157 Higgins, E. T., 254
Green, F. L., 17, 230, 234 Higgitt, A. C., 123
Greenberg, M. T., 243, 245 Hill, J., 31
Greenwald, L. C., 151 Hill, K., 229
Greig, A., 104, 117, 124 Hill, V., 233, 237
Grolnick, W. S., 204 Himelstein, S. U., 204
Grossmann, T., 140 Hipwell, A., 81
Grube, D., 34 Hirsch, N., 22
Grusec, J. E., 41, 55, 66, 71, 76, 82 Hirschberg, L., 159
Guajardo, N. R., 78, 79, 81, 86, 88, 92, 100, 231, Hirsjarvi, S., 202
248, 249 Hiscock, J., 243
Gunnar, M. R., 106, 107 Hjelmquist, E., 195
Guo, Y., 33 Hobson, R. P., 152
Gupta, M. D., 180 Hofer, T., 23, 145, 160, 161
Hoff, E., 42, 63
Ha, C., 215 Hoff-Ginsberg, E., 176
Haden, C. A., 176, 193 Hoffman, M. L., 74
Hadwin, J., 228 Hofmann, S. G., 228
Hagekull, B., 158, 256 Hogrefe, G. J., 9
Haigh, S. N., 253 Hohenberger, A., 160, 161
Haight, W. L., 202 Holden, G. W., 41, 202, 203, 204
Hakim-Larson, J., 220 Holmes, H. A., 100
Halberstadt, A. G., 92, 94, 97, 220, 221 Holmes-Lonergan, H. A., 12, 79, 84, 87, 100
Hale, C. M., 231, 241 Hooven, C., 220
Hallinan, E. V., 142 Hort, B., 234, 238
Hamilton, B., 146 Houde, O., 232, 234, 238
Hamlin, J. K., 142, 252 Houminer, D., 256
Hammond, L., 213 Howard, A. A., 168, 172, 174, 186
Hammond, S. I., 91 Howe, D., 104, 117, 124
Happe, F., 29, 31, 32, 87, 106, 196, 237 Howe, N., 168, 172, 174, 175, 182, 183, 184
Hardin, C. A., 16 Howlen, N., 214
Harley, A. E., 223 Howlin, P., 229
Harlow, H. F., 110 Hsieh, K., 140, 159
Harris, J. R., 41, 50, 56, 57, 58, 67, 68–69 Hsu, H., 181
Harris, P. L., 17, 22, 37, 38, 92, 117, 122, 123, 134, Hsu, K., 157
166, 167, 170, 182, 190, 198, 199, 207, 224, Huang, Z., 84
228, 244, 246, 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255 Hughes, C., 2, 12, 22, 31, 34, 35, 79, 81, 84, 85,
Harris-Waller, J., 214 86, 99, 101, 105, 124, 166, 167, 168, 169,
Hart, M. J., 105 179, 186, 188, 189, 190, 196, 237, 261
Hartmann, E., 128 Humfress, H., 80, 87, 117, 126, 274
Hasselhorn, M., 34 Hurtado, E., 202
Hastings, P. D., 202 Hutchins, T. L., 174, 177, 216, 218, 274
Hauf, P., 160 Hutto, D. D., 39
Havighurst, S. S., 223, 244, 245, 246 Hutton, D., 22
Hawes, D. J., 35
Hawk, C. K., 2 Iao, L., 231, 237
He, Z., 15 Inhelder, B., 18
Head, M. R., 75 Izard, C. E, 244, 245
330 A u t h o r I n d e x
Kalpakci, A. H., 126 LaBounty, J., 143, 146, 167, 172, 179, 185, 187,
Karn, M. A., 220, 222, 224 189, 192, 207, 270
Karstad, S. B., 223 Ladd, G. W., 68
Katz, L. F., 220 Lagace-Seguin, D. G., 220
Kay-Raining Bird, E., 197 Lagattuta, K. H., 167, 172, 193
Keels, M., 202 Laible, D., 117, 124, 168, 191
Kehoe, C., 223 Lalonde, C. E., 29
Kelly, A., 216 LaLonde, N., 146
Kelso, G. A., 126 Lam, S., 202
Kerig, P., 45 Lamb, M. E., 63, 64, 126, 159, 162
Kerns, K. A., 67, 111 Lamborn, S. D., 47, 48, 62
Kerr, M., 70, 75 Landrum, A. R., 253
Killen, K., 128 Lane, J. D., 143, 207, 253, 267
Kim, G., 140, 158 Lang, B., 12
Kim, H. K., 105 Laranjo, J., 118, 125, 128, 130, 207, 211, 215
Kim, P. L., 255 Larzelere, R. E., 76
King, K. A., 244, 245 Laursen, B., 42
King, R. A., 74 Leadbeater, B. J., 39, 151, 153
Kinsey, K., 230, 237, 239, 240 Leaper, C., 65, 66
Kirk, E., 214 Lecce, S., 231, 237, 239
Kirkcaldy, B., 202 Le Donne, M., 99
Kitayama, S., 272 Lee, A., 152
Klahr, A. M., 42 Lee, C., 220
Klann-Delius, G., 128 Lee, K., 253
Klingberg, T., 240 Leekam, S. R., 2, 33, 205, 207, 208, 231
Kloo, D., 12, 231, 236, 240 Leerkes, E. M., 220
Knieps, L. J., 140 Legerstee, M., 135, 136, 143, 144, 149, 150–51,
Knoll, M., 231, 236 156, 161
Kochanoff, A., 94, 96–9 7 Lemche, E., 118, 128
Kochanska, G., 46, 48, 69, 70 Lerner, R. M., 54
Koenig, M. A., 17, 250, 251, 252, 253, 254 Leslie, A. M., 15, 31, 38, 240, 241
Kogushi, Y., 166, 167 Lewis, C., 34, 39, 40, 80, 84, 144, 254, 257
Komiya, A., 272 Lewis, J., 155
A u t h o r I n d e x 331
337
338 S u b j e c t I n d e x
fathers, 104. See also mothers and fathers joint attention in, 138–39, 149–57
in attachment across-t ime relations, 128 later development relations, 144–45,
differential treatment by, 66 145t–146t, 147
parenting styles of, 64 mind-m indedness in, 207t–2 09t, 209–10
in parents’ importance, 269–70 normative development in, 163
as socialization agents, 56 parental talk in, 162, 264
Faux Pas, 31 parenting style in, 161–62
feedback, 248–49. See also explanations parents’ contribution to, 148–61, 151t
first-order false belief, 23–25, 31–32 rich-lean in, 143–4 4
FMS. See Functional-Multilinear Socialization social referencing in, 139–4 0, 157–6 0
focus groups, 222, 273 theory of mind and, 136–45, 145t–146t, 147
Freudian theory, 53–5 4 infant-d irected speech, 154
Functional-Multilinear Socialization infant mental states, 154
(FMS), 99–100 infants
abilities of, 276
gaze monitoring, 150–51, 232t in attachment across-t ime relations, 128
gender, 85, 192–93. See also boys and girls; in attachment conclusions, 133
mothers and fathers in attachment-t heory of mind correlation, 122
generalization of training, 235–36 early social interest and, 148–49
gestures, communicative, 154–55 gaze monitoring of, 150–51
girls. See boys and girls in institutional rearing, 107
group participation domain, 72t mind-m indedness in, 207t–2 09t, 209–10
group variations parental talk for, 264
ecological systems theory in, 62–63, 62f infants’ false belief
economics in, 61–62 measurement of, 14
race and ethnicity in, 61–62 parenting in, 15–16
SES in, 63 understanding in, 15
guided learning domain, 72–73, 72t validity of, 14–15
informants, 275
harsh parenting, 86 in learning from others, 251–52, 253t,
harsh punishment, 97–98 254–55
Head Start, 100 in origins of knowledge, 17
Hispanic Americans, 222–2 3 in verbal report, 46, 48
HOME. See Home Observation for information seeking, 256–57
Measurement of the Environment initiation of joint attention, 155–57
home observation, 166–67, 167t, 183 insecure attachment, 114t
Home Observation for Measurement of the institutional rearing
Environment (HOME), 89–9 0, 117t deprivation in, 105–6
hostile pattern of parenting, 64 emotion understanding from, 107
How Feel responses, 80t–81t, 83, 85 false belief and, 106
infants in, 107
imaginative pretense, 37 quasi-autism from, 106
imitation, 92 intention understanding, 29, 30b, 31, 217t
imperative points, 154–55 infancy development and, 140–43, 141f
implicit feedback, 248–49 joint attention and, 161
indirect contributors to theory of mind, 266–67 mind-m indedness and, 207t–2 08t
individual differences, 33, 55, 99–101, 113, sensitivity and, 160–61
114t, 275–77 interaction partner, 156–57
individual dimension, 254 intergenerational transmission, 216
infancy development, 3, 25 internalization, 39
attachment in, 109–3 4, 162 internal working models, 113
early social interest in, 136–38, 137f, 148–49 interpretive diversity, 27b, 233t
emotional availability in, 162 ambiguity and, 29
gaze monitoring in, 150–51 definition of, 26
institutional rearing in, 107 false belief and, 26–2 8
intention understanding in, 140–43, reversible figures in, 28, 28f
141f, 160–61 invariant sequence, 23–2 4, 24t
342 S u b j e c t I n d e x
race, 61–62, 214. See also African Americans; SES. See socioeconomic status
culture sex-t yped activities, 65
readiness, 228, 235, 246 short-term across-t ime, 51t
executive function and, 237–38 sibling effect, 33–3 4, 100, 184
language and, 237–38 simulation theory, 37–38
reasoning, 19–22, 263, 275 situational dimension, 254
in authoritarian-authoritative pattern, social-cognitive theory, 54
82–83 social development, 60, 60t, 268–69
effectiveness of, 73–74 socialization agents other than mother, 56–57
reciprocity domain, 72t, 73 socialization domains
reflective function, 219 context of, 71–73
relations among developments control, 72–73, 72t, 82
concurrence in, 24–25 essence of, 71–72
invariant sequence in, 23–2 4, 24t group participation, 72t
relationship, 39, 67–68 guided learning, 72–73, 72t
between mothers and fathers, 64–65 protection, 72–73, 72t
relation-specific reasoning, 22 reciprocity, 72t, 73
replay task, 149 social referencing
representation, 17–18 anxiety in, 159–6 0
research directions, 18–19, 19f controls in, 159
responsiveness. See early social interest in infancy development, 139–4 0, 157–6 0
restriction-of-range problem, 84 interaction partners in, 158
reversible figures, 28, 28f measurement of, 139–4 0
rich-lean, 143–4 4, 156 mother in, 157–58
Romanian orphans, 105–7 novelty effect in, 157–58
Russian orphans, 107 parents in, 159–6 0
paternal anxiety in, 159
SAT. See Separation Anxiety Test reassurance in, 160
scaffolding, 35, 45–4 6, 90–91, 211 strangers in, 159–6 0
schizophrenia, 103, 213 social relationships, 39
second-order false belief, 25–2 6, 27b social responsiveness, 151t
first-order false belief compared to, 25–2 6 social understanding, 216–18, 217t
secure attachment, 114t sociocultural approaches, 39–4 0, 267–68
in attachment conclusions, 132–33 socioeconomic status (SES), 63, 77
in attachment-t heory of mind development rate and, 99–101
correlation, 122–2 3 FMS and, 99–100
selectivity, 251–52, 254 Head Start and, 100
self-concept, 97–98 language and, 100–101
self-worth, 79t, 86 parenting and, 101
semantic knowledge, 252 siblings and, 100
semantics of parental talk, 199 variable of, 98
sensitive responsiveness Spanish children
attachment and, 115–16 attachment in, 90
in attachment-t heory of mind parental talk and, 174t, 178t
correlation, 122–2 3 speaker, 184–86
in naturalistic observation, 44 special populations, 166, 195–9 7, 229, 234.
sensitivity, 151t, 152 See also autism; deaf children
attachment and, 129 SS. See Strange Situation
early social interest and, 148–49 stability, 221t
intention understanding and, 160–61 in attachment development, 114–15
mind-m indedness and, 211–12 in mental state talk, 172
of mothers, 187 statistical controls, 51t
sentential complements, 231t–2 34t Still-Face Paradigm, 148–49
Separation Anxiety Test (SAT), 112t, 117t, 119t stories
separation distress, 110 Attachment Story Completion, 112t, 117t
sequential development, 23–2 4, 24t, 276 Strange Stories, 29, 30b, 31–32, 106, 117t
S u b j e c t I n d e x 347